2011 CTS-V Owner Manual

Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)
2011 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-26
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-46 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-54 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-38
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-43
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-59
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
2011 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-15
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Recommended Fluids, Vehicle Data Recording and
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-11 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . 10-113 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Introduction iii
owner manual. Please refer to the

purchase documentation relating
to your specific vehicle to confirm
each of the features found on your
vehicle. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” Manufactured under license
The names, logos, emblems, for Cadillac Motor Car Division
slogans, vehicle model names, and under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
wherever it appears in this manual. 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
vehicle body designs appearing in
this manual including, but not limited 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
to, GM, the GM logo, CADILLAC, worldwide patents issued &
the CADILLAC Crest and Wreath, pending. DTS and the Symbol
CTS, and CTS-V are trademarks are registered trademarks and
and/or service marks of General DTS Digital Surround and the DTS
Motors LLC, its subsidiaries, logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
affiliates, or licensors. Product includes software.
Music recognition technology All Rights Reserved.
This manual describes features
that may or may not be on your and related data are provided
specific vehicle either because by Gracenote®. Gracenote is
they are options that you did not the industry standard in music
purchase or due to changes recognition technology and
subsequent to the printing of this related content delivery.
For more information, visit
www.gracenote.com.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 25974555 B Second Printing 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and Using this Manual

iPod touch are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other To quickly locate information
countries. about the vehicle, use the Index
in the back of the manual. It is an
Canadian Vehicle Owners alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
Manufactured under license from Propriétaires Canadiens it can be found.
Dolby® Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are registered A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your Danger, Warnings, and
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
dealer or from: Cautions
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de Warning messages found on vehicle
ce guide en français auprès du labels and in this manual describe
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse hazards and what to do to avoid or
suivante: reduce them.
Helm, Incorporated Danger indicates a hazard with a
P.O. Box 07130 high level of risk which will result in
“Made for iPod,” means that Detroit, MI 48207 serious injury or death.
an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically 1-800-551-4123 Warning or Caution indicates a
to iPod and has been certified Numéro de poste 6438 de hazard that could result in injury or
by the developer to meet Apple langue française death.
performance standards. Apple is www.helminc.com
not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards.
Introduction v
Symbols Vehicle Symbol Chart

{ WARNING Here are some additional symbols
The vehicle has components and
These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of that may be found on the vehicle
that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with and what they mean. For more
people. the text describing the operation or information on the symbol, refer to
information relating to a specific the Index.
Notice: This means there is
component, control, message, 9 : Airbag Readiness Light
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in # : Air Conditioning
property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or g : Audio®Steering Wheel Controls
information. or OnStar
*: This symbol is shown when $ : Brake System Warning Light
you need to see a service manual " : Charging System
for additional instructions or
information. I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
A circle with a slash through it is a O : Exterior Lamps
safety symbol which means “Do # : Fog Lamps
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.” . : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
vi Introduction
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
(: Heated Steering Wheel
j: LATCH System Child
Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
In Brief 1-1
Sensing System for

In Brief Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-20
Steering Wheel Storage Compartments . . . . . . 1-21
Instrument Panel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Universal Remote System . . . 1-21
Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Performance and Maintenance
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Traction Control
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Vehicle Features StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-23
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Tire Sealant and
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-24
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Steering Wheel Controls Driving for Better Fuel
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 (Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Heated and Ventilated Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Driver Information
Head Restraint Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
CTS Shown, CTS‐V Similar

In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑6. I. Clock on page 5‑8. P. Cruise Control on page 9‑41.
B. Driver Information Center (DIC) J. Passenger Sensing System on Heated Steering Wheel on
on page 5‑27. page 3‑37. page 5‑4 (If Equipped).
C. Instrument Panel Illumination K. Hazard Warning Flashers on Traction Control System (TCS)
Control on page 6‑5. page 6‑4. Disable Button (CTS-V Model
D. Turn and Lane-Change Signals L. Navigation Display Brightness Only). See Traction Control
on page 6‑4. Control (If Equipped). See System (TCS) on page 9‑38.
E. Instrument Cluster on Navigation System Manual. Q. Tap Shift Controls (If Equipped).
page 5‑11. M. Infotainment on page 7‑1. Located on the rear of the
steering wheel. See Manual
F. Windshield Wiper/Washer on Navigation/Radio System Mode on page 9‑29.
page 5‑4. (If Equipped). See Navigation
System Manual. R. Data Link Connector (DLC)
Rear Window Wiper/Washer on (Out of View). See Malfunction
page 5‑6 (If Equipped). N. Parking Brake Release Lever. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑19.
G. Navigation Button (If Equipped). See Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake S. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
See Navigation System Manual. page 5‑2.
(Electric) on page 9‑35.
H. Traction Control System (TCS) T. Horn on page 5‑4.
on page 9‑38. O. Hood Release. See Hood on
page 10‑5. U. Steering Wheel Controls (Audio)
Magnetic Ride Control on on page 5‑3.
page 9‑40 (CTS‐V Model Only).
1-4 In Brief
V. Heated and Ventilated Front Initial Drive Starting the Engine

Seats on page 3‑12.
W. Dual Automatic Climate Control
Information When first starting the vehicle, the
engine idle speed will be elevated
System on page 8‑1. This section provides a brief to allow the catalytic converter, an
X. Parking Brake Button. See overview about some of the emissions control device, to quickly
Parking Brake (Manual) on important features that may or may reach operating temperature. After
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake not be on your specific vehicle. approximately 20 seconds, the
(Electric) on page 9‑35. For more detailed information, refer engine will begin to transition to
to each of the features which can be it's normal, quieter idle speed,
Y. Shift Lever. See Automatic
found later in this owner manual. which can vary depending on
Transmission on page 9‑26 or
the temperature. This is normal
Manual Transmission on operation.
page 9‑31.
Z. Instrument Panel Storage on
page 4‑1.
Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
AA. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
In Brief 1-5
Remote Keyless Entry Press and hold V to open the

(RKE) System trunk/liftgate.
The keyless access transmitter is Press L and release to locate the
used to lock and unlock the doors vehicle.
from up to 60 m (195 feet) away
from the vehicle. Press and hold L for more than
two seconds to sound the panic
alarm.
Press L again to cancel the panic
alarm.
Keyless Access For keyless access vehicles, press

the button (A) to remove the key.
Press K to unlock the driver door. The key can be used for all locks.
Press again within five seconds to See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
unlock all remaining doors. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Press Q to lock all doors. Operation (Key Access) on
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
Lock and unlock feedback can (RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Key Access
be personalized. See Vehicle Access) on page 2‑7.
Personalization on page 5‑46.
1-6 In Brief
. From the outside turn the key
Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start
toward the front or rear of the
For vehicles with this feature, the To cancel a remote start: vehicle (Sedan and Wagon),
engine can be started from outside . Aim the RKE transmitter or press the Q or K button on
of the vehicle. at the vehicle and press and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Starting the Vehicle hold / until the parking lamps transmitter. See Remote Keyless
turn off. Entry (RKE) System Operation
1. Aim the Remote Keyless Entry (Key Access) on page 2‑5 or
transmitter at the vehicle. . Turn on the hazard warning Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
flashers. System Operation (Keyless
2. Press Q. Access) on page 2‑7.
. Turn the vehicle on and then off.
3. Immediately after completing
See Remote Vehicle Start on Power Door Locks
Step 2, press and hold / until page 2‑12.
the turn signal lamps flash, or for Power door lock controls are
about 4 seconds if the vehicle is located on the front doors.
Door Locks
not in view. K: Press to unlock the doors.
To lock or unlock a door manually:
When the vehicle starts, the parking Q: Press to lock the doors.
lamps will turn on and remain on as . From the inside, use the door
long as the engine is running. The lock knob on the window sill See Power Door Locks on
doors will be locked and the climate for the rear doors (Sedan and page 2‑17.
control system may come on. Wagon).
The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once.
In Brief 1-7
Liftgate Manual Operation of the Power Windows

Liftgate
Power Liftgate
With the vehicle in P (Park), turn
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to the liftgate mode switch to OFF
operate the power liftgate. and unlock the doors. Press the
To open the liftgate using the touchpad under the liftgate handle
button on the driver door, select the and pull up on the handle. To close
mode then press the center of the the liftgate, pull down on the pull
button. See Liftgate (Wagon) on cup. See Liftgate (Wagon) on
page 2‑21 for more information on page 2‑21.
programming the height opening
settings. Trunk Release
To open the liftgate with the Remote The trunk may be opened by
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, pressing the remote trunk release Sedan Driver Side Shown, Wagon
press and hold & on the RKE button located on the lower portion and Coupe Similar
transmitter. of the driver door, V on the The power window switches are on
To open the liftgate from outside the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the driver door. Each passenger
vehicle, press the touchpad on the transmitter, or the trunk release door has a switch that controls only
outside liftgate handle. button located on the rear of the that window.
trunk above the license plate. See Press the switch to lower the
Trunk (Sedan, Coupe) on page 2‑19 window. Pull the switch up to
for more information. raise it.
For more information, see Power
Windows on page 2‑30.
1-8 In Brief
. Raise or lower the entire seat
Seat Adjustment by moving the entire horizontal
To adjust the lumbar support,
if equipped:
Power Seats control up or down. . Press and hold the top of
Seat Position See Power Seat Adjustment on control (B) to increase support
page 3‑5 for more information. to the top of the seatback and
Use the vertical control to adjust the decrease support to the bottom
seatback. See Reclining Seatbacks of the seatback.
on page 3‑8 for more information. . Press and hold the bottom of the
Power Lumbar control (B) to decrease support
to the top of the seatback and
increase support to the bottom
of the seatback.
. Press and hold the front or rear
of the control (B) to increase or
decrease support to the entire
seatback.
To adjust the seat: See Lumbar Adjustment on

page 3‑7 for more information.
. Move the seat forward or
rearward by moving the Side Bolster
horizontal control forward or To adjust the side bolster support,
rearward. if equipped:
A. Side Bolster Control
. Raise or lower the front or rear . Press the top or bottom of
part of the seat cushion by B. Lumbar Support Control control (A) to increase or
moving the front or rear of the C. Seatback Bolster Control decrease support in seat
horizontal control up or down. cushion bolsters.
In Brief 1-9
. Press the top or bottom of column position, if the vehicle is sound when the button is pressed.
control (C) to increase or equipped with the power tilt and The seat, outside mirrors, and/or
decrease support in the telescopic steering column. power steering column will move to
seatback bolsters. the position previously stored for the
1: Saves and recalls for driver 1.
See Lumbar Adjustment on identified driver.
page 3‑7 for more information. 2: Saves and recalls for driver 2.
If entry/exit recall is programmed on
B: Moves the driver seat and/or in the vehicle personalization menu,
Memory Features power steering column to the exit automatic entry recall occurs when
position. See “Exit Recall” later in the ignition is turned on.
this section for more information.
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Storing Memory Positions Steering Column” under Power Seat
To save into memory: Adjustment on page 3‑5 and Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46 for
1. Adjust the driver seat, outside more information.
mirrors, and the power steering
column, if equipped, to the Exit Recall
desired driving positions. B : Press to move the driver
2. Press and hold “1” until seat and/or power steering column,
two beeps sound. if equipped, to the exit position.
A single beep sounds when the exit
3. Repeat for a second driver feature activates. The vehicle must
using “2”. be in P (Park) for an automatic
On vehicles with the memory
package, memory buttons 1 and 2 To recall memory positions, press transmission, or the parking brake
on the driver door are used to save and release “1” or “2”. The vehicle must be applied for a manual
and recall memory settings for the must be in P (Park) for an automatic transmission.
driver seat cushion and seatback, transmission, or the parking brake
outside mirrors, and the steering must be applied for a manual
transmission. A single beep will
1-10 In Brief
If entry/exit recall is programmed on Heated and Ventilated Press the button once for the
in the vehicle personalization menu, highest setting. With each press of
automatic seat and/or steering
Seats the button, the seat will change to
column movement occurs under the the next lower setting, and then to
following conditions: the off setting. The lights indicate
. The ignition key is removed on three for the highest setting and
vehicles with Remote Keyless one for the lowest.
Entry (RKE). For more information, see Heated
. The ignition is turned to OFF and Ventilated Front Seats on
and the driver door is opened on page 3‑12.
vehicles with Remote Keyless
Access. Head Restraint
If entry/exit recall is programmed Adjustment
off and the exit button is pressed, Do not drive until the head restraints
the driver seat will move back a for all occupants are installed and
preset distance and the steering If available, the controls are on the adjusted properly.
column, if equipped, will move climate control panel.
To achieve a comfortable seating
up and forward. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46 for Press z to heat the seat and position, change the seatback
seatback or { to ventilate the seat. recline angle as little as necessary
more information.
while keeping the seat and the
A light bar in the climate control
head restraint height in the proper
display shows the setting.
position.
For more information see Head
Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3.
In Brief 1-11
Safety Belts Sensing System for seat‐mounted side impact airbags

and the roof‐rail airbags are not
Passenger Airbag affected by the passenger sensing
system. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 5‑18 for
more information.
The passenger airbag status
indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when the vehicle
United States is started.
Refer to the following sections for

important information on how to use
safety belts properly. Canada and Mexico
. Safety Belts on page 3‑14. The passenger sensing system
. How to Wear Safety Belts will turn off the right front
Properly on page 3‑18. passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. The driver airbag,
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑24.
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑53.
1-12 In Brief
Mirror Adjustment 3. Adjust each outside mirror so Steering Wheel

that a little of the vehicle and the
Exterior area behind it can be seen.
Adjustment
4. Press either } or | again to
deselect the mirror.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑28.
Interior
The vehicle has an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare of headlamps from behind
you. The dimming feature comes on
and the indicator light illuminates
each time the vehicle is started.
Controls for the outside power See Automatic Dimming Rearview To adjust the steering wheel:
mirrors are on the driver door. Mirror on page 2‑29. 1. Pull the lever down.
To adjust each mirrors: 2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
1. Press } or | to select the
driver or passenger side mirror. 3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
2. Press one of the four arrows to
move the mirror. 4. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
In Brief 1-13
Power Tilt Wheel Interior Lighting Exterior Lighting

Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on
the overhead console. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened.
For manual operation, press the
button next to each lamp to turn it The exterior lamp control is located
on or off. toward the end of the turn signal/
If the reading lamps are left on, they lane change lever.
automatically shut off 10 minutes O : Turn the band with this
after the ignition has been symbol on it to operate the exterior
For vehicles with the power tilt turned off. lamps.
wheel, the control is on the left side For more information, see: The exterior lamp control has
of the steering column. . Reading Lamps on page 6‑5. four positions:
. Push the control up or down
to tilt the steering wheel up
. Instrument Panel Illumination O : Turns off all lamps, except the
Control on page 6‑5. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
or down.
AUTO: Turns the headlamps on
. Push the control forward or
and off automatically, depending
rearward to move the steering
upon how much light is available
wheel toward the front or rear of
outside of the vehicle.
the vehicle.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
1-14 In Brief
; : Turns on the parking lamps, & : For a delayed wiping cycle.

together with the sidemarker lamps, Turn the adjustable interval wiper
taillamps, license plate lamps, and band to set the frequency of wipes.
instrument panel lights. 6: Turn the band up for more
5: Turns on the headlamps, frequent wipes or down for less
together with parking lamps, frequent wipes.
sidemarker lamps, taillamps, 1 : Slow wipes.
license plate lamps, and instrument
panel lights. 2 : Fast wipes.
For more information, see: Windshield Washer
. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1. Sedan and Coupe Model shown { WARNING
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) In freezing weather, do not use
on page 6‑3. the washer until the windshield
. Fog Lamps on page 6‑5. is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the
Windshield Wiper/Washer windshield, blocking your vision.
The windshield wiper lever is on the Wagon Model shown
right side of the steering column. Sedan and Coupe Model
Move the windshield wiper lever to
select the wiper speed. K : Press the button with
this symbol, on the end of the
7 : Single wipe, briefly move windshield washer lever, to wash
the lever down and release. the windshield. The washer fluid
Several wipes, hold the lever down. sprays onto the windshield and the
T: Turns the wipers off.
In Brief 1-15
wipers run for a few cycles to

clear the windshield. Press and
hold K for more wash cycles.
Wagon Model
Pull the lever toward you to spray
washer fluid on the windshield. The
spray continues until the lever is
released. The wipers will run a
few times.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4 and Rear Window Wiper/
Washer on page 5‑6 (if equipped).
A. Display H. Temperature and Heated/
Climate Controls B. Fan Ventilated Seat
C. Power I. Air Conditioning

The heating, cooling, and ventilation
for the vehicle can be controlled D. AUTO J. Recirculation
with this system. K. Outside Air
E. PASS (Passenger Climate
Control) L. Rear Window Defogger
F. Defrost See Dual Automatic Climate Control
G. Air Delivery Mode System on page 8‑1.
1-16 In Brief
Transmission Vehicle Features Storing a Favorite Station

Automatic Transmission A maximum of 36 stations can be
Radio(s) programmed as favorites using the
Driver Shift Control (DSC) or Tap six softkeys below the radio station
Shift VOL/ O : Press to turn the system frequency tabs on the display and
on and off. Turn to increase or by using the radio favorites page
Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows
decrease the volume. button (FAV button). Press the FAV
shifting an automatic transmission
similar to a manual transmission. FM/AM: Press to select between button to go through up to six pages
DSC can be enabled through the FM or AM. of favorites, each having six favorite
shift lever or the Tap Shift controls, stations available per page. Each
m: Press to select XM™, page of favorites can contain any
located on the back of the steering if equipped.
wheel (if equipped). See Manual combination of AM, FM, or XM
Mode on page 9‑29. TUNE/TONE: Turn to select radio stations.
stations. For more information, see AM-FM
Manual Transmission
¨ SEEK/ © SEEK: Press to seek Radio on page 7‑9.
Skip Shift (CTS‐V) the next or previous station.
Under light acceleration, the INFO: Press to display additional
transmission will only allow shifting information that may be available for
from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth). This the current song. When information
helps improve fuel mileage. is not available, No Information
Under harder acceleration, Skip displays.
Shift is disabled, and all gears are For more information about these
available. See Manual Transmission and other radio features, see
on page 9‑31. Operation on page 7‑2.
In Brief 1-17
Setting the Clock Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices

The analog clock is located on the Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite This vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
instrument panel above the radio. Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite auxiliary input and a USB port
The clock is not connected with any Radio subscription can receive XM located in the center console.
other vehicle system and runs by programming. External devices such as iPods®,
itself. To adjust the clock: laptop computers, MP3 players, CD
XM Satellite Radio Service changers, and USB storage devices
1. Locate the adjustment buttons
directly below the clock face. XM is a satellite radio service based may be connected, depending on
in the 48 contiguous United States the audio system.
2. Push and hold the right
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM For more information, see Auxiliary
adjustment button to move the Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
clock hands forward, or the left Devices on page 7‑35.
programming and commercial-free
adjustment button to make the
music, coast to coast, and in
clock hands go backward.
digital-quality sound. A fee is
Bluetooth®
Holding either button down will required to receive the XM service. The Bluetooth® system allows users
cause the clock to advance with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
faster. Release the button before For more information refer to:
to make and receive hands-free
the desired time is reached. . www.xmradio.com or call calls using the vehicle audio
3. Push and release either button 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). system, microphone, and controls.
to adjust the time by one minute . www.xmradio.ca or call The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
increments until the desired time 1-877-438-9677 (Canada). must be paired with the in-vehicle
is reached. Bluetooth system before it can be
For more information, see Satellite
For more information on setting the Radio on page 7‑12. used in the vehicle. Not all phones
clock, see Clock on page 5‑8. will support all functions.
See Bluetooth on page 7‑37.
1-18 In Brief
. For vehicles without a navigation
Steering Wheel Controls y/cz: Press to go to the
previous or next radio station stored system, press and hold g for
(Audio) two seconds to interact with
as a favorite, or the previous or next
track of a CD. OnStar® or Bluetooth.
Press to interact with the Bluetooth® . For vehicles with a navigation
system. See Bluetooth on system, OnStar, or Bluetooth,
page 7‑37 for more information. press and hold g for
two seconds and say “hands
+ e − : Press to increase or to
free” to interact with OnStar or
decrease the volume. Bluetooth.
b g : Press and release to silence For more information, see Steering
the vehicle speakers only. The Wheel Controls (Audio) on
audio of the wireless and wired page 5‑3.
headphones, if the vehicle has
these features, does not mute.
Some audio steering wheel controls Press and release b g again, to
could differ depending on the turn the sound on.
vehicle's options. Controls that can . For vehicles with a navigation
be adjusted at the steering wheel
system, press and hold g for
may include:
two seconds to initiate speech
SRCE: Press to switch between recognition.
the radio AM, FM, XM (if equipped),
CD, HDD (if equipped), auxiliary
input jack, DVD (if equipped), and
USB (if equipped).
In Brief 1-19
Cruise Control [ : Press to cancel cruise control Driver Information

without erasing the set speed from Center (DIC)
memory.
The DIC display is located at the
See Cruise Control on page 9‑41. bottom of the instrument panel
cluster. It shows the status of many
Navigation System vehicle systems and enables
If the vehicle has a navigation access to the personalization menu.
system, there is a separate
Navigation System Manual that
includes information on the radio,
audio players, and navigation
system.
CTS Shown, CTS‐V Similar The navigation system provides
detailed maps of most major
The cruise control buttons are freeways and roads. After a
located on the left side of the destination has been set, the
steering wheel. system provides turn-by-turn
I: Press to turn the system on or instructions for reaching the
off. The indicator light on the button destination. In addition, the system
turns on when cruise control is on. can help locate a variety of points of
interest (POI), such as banks, The DIC buttons are located on the
+RES : Press to make the vehicle airports, restaurants, and more. instrument panel to the left of the
accelerate or resume to a previously steering wheel.
set speed. See the Navigation System Manual
for more information. 3 : Press to scroll through the
−SET : Press to set the speed or trip and fuel displays.
make the vehicle decelerate.
1-20 In Brief
. Chime Volume
T: Press to scroll through the Ultrasonic Parking Assist
vehicle information displays. . Memory Settings
For vehicles with this feature, it uses
U: Press to customize the feature See Vehicle Personalization on sensors on the rear bumper to
settings on your vehicle. See page 5‑46. detect objects while parking the
Vehicle Personalization on vehicle. It operates at speeds
page 5‑46 for more information. Rear Vision less than 8 km/h (5 mph) while
V: Press to reset certain DIC Camera (RVC) in R (Reverse).
features and to acknowledge DIC Keep the sensors on the vehicle's
The rear vision camera displays a
warning messages and clear them rear bumper clean to ensure proper
view of the area behind the vehicle
from the DIC display. operation.
on either the navigation screen or
y z : Press to scroll up and down the inside rear view mirror when the The system can be disabled through
the menu items. vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). the Driver Information Center (DIC).
For more information, see Driver Once shifted out of R (Reverse), the See "Park Assist" under Vehicle
Information Center (DIC) on navigation screen will go back to the Personalization on page 5‑46 for
page 5‑27. last screen that had been displayed, more information.
after a delay or the video image
Vehicle Customization automatically disappears from the
Some vehicle features can be inside rear view mirror.
programmed by using the DIC To clean the camera lens, located
buttons on the instrument panel to above the license plate, rinse it with
the left of the steering wheel. These water and wipe it with a soft cloth.
features include: See, Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on
. Language page 9‑44 for more information.
. Door Lock and Unlock Settings
. Lighting
In Brief 1-21
Storage Compartments Power Outlets Universal Remote System

Accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
There are three accessory power
outlets. The power outlets located
below the climate control system,
inside the center console storage
bin, and on the rear of the center The Universal Home Remote
console are powered while the System allows for garage door
vehicle is in ON/RUN, START or openers, security systems, and
ACC/ACCESSORY mode, or until home automation devices to be
the driver door is opened within programmed to work with these
10 minutes of turning off the vehicle. buttons in the vehicle.
Press the bottom of the load floor See Universal Remote System on
handle assembly to lift the top on On the CTS Wagon there is an
additional accessory power outlet page 5‑54.
the handle. Pull up on the handle
to open the cargo management located near the rear cargo net that
system. is powered at all times.
See Cargo Management System Remove the cover to access and
(Wagon Only) on page 4‑3 for more replace when not in use.
information. See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
1-22 In Brief
Sunroof Express Open/Express Close: Performance and

Press and release the rear or front
The ignition must be in ON/RUN or of the switch to express open or Maintenance
ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained express close the sunshade.
Accessory Power (RAP), to operate
the sunroof and power sunshade.
Traction Control
See Ignition Positions (Key Access) System (TCS)
on page 9‑17 or Ignition Positions The traction control system limits
(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 and wheel spin. The system turns on
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) automatically every time the vehicle
on page 9‑22. is started.
The sunroof switches are on the The passenger side switch operates . To turn off traction control,
overhead console. the sunroof. press and release the t
Vent: Press and hold the front of located on the Instrument panel
the switch to vent the sunroof. Press (CTS) or the steering wheel
and hold the rear of the switch to (CTS-V). F illuminates and the
close the sunroof vent. appropriate DIC message is
Express Open/Express Close: displayed. See Ride Control
For Sedan and Wagon only, press System Messages on page 5‑40.
The driver side switch operates the and release the rear or front of the . Press the button again to turn
sunshade. switch to express open or express traction control back on.
close the sunroof.
Open/Close: Press the front or For more information, see Traction
rear of the switch to open or close For more information see Sunroof Control System (TCS) on
the sunshade. (Sedan and Wagon) on page 2‑33 page 9‑38.
or Sunroof (Coupe) on page 2‑34.
In Brief 1-23
StabiliTrak® System Tire Pressure Monitor During cooler conditions, the low tire
pressure warning light may appear
StabiliTrak assists with directional This vehicle may have a Tire when the vehicle is first started and
control of the vehicle in difficult Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). then turn off. This may be an early
driving conditions. The system turns indicator that the tire pressures are
on automatically every time the getting low and the tires need to be
vehicle is started. inflated to the proper pressure.
. To turn off both traction control The TPMS does not replace normal
and electronic stability control, monthly tire maintenance. It is the
press and hold t on the driver’s responsibility to maintain
instrument panel (CTS) or correct tire pressures.
steering wheel (CTS-V) The TPMS warning light alerts you
to a significant loss in pressure of See Tire Pressure Monitor System
until F illuminates and the one of the vehicle's tires. If the on page 10‑74.
appropriate DIC message is warning light comes on, stop as
displayed. See Ride Control soon as possible and inflate the Tire Sealant and
System Messages on page 5‑40. tires to the recommended pressure Compressor Kit
. Press the button again to turn on shown on the Tire and Loading
both systems. Information label. See Vehicle Load This vehicle may come with a jack
Limits on page 9‑11. The warning and spare tire or a tire sealant and
For more information, see compressor kit. The kit can be used
light will remain on until the tire
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑39. to temporarily seal small punctures
pressure is corrected.
in the tread area of the tire.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit on page 10‑89 for complete
operating information.
1-24 In Brief
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
If the vehicle came with a jack and Driving for Better Fuel the same TPC Spec number
spare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑87.
Economy molded into the tire's sidewall
Driving habits can affect fuel near the size.
Engine Oil Life System mileage. Here are some driving . Follow recommended scheduled
tips to get the best fuel economy maintenance.
The engine oil life system calculates possible.
engine oil life based on vehicle use
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE . Avoid fast starts and accelerate Roadside Service
OIL SOON message when it is time smoothly. U.S. or Canada: 1-800-882-1112
to change the engine oil and filter. . Brake gradually and avoid
The oil life system should be reset TTY Users (U.S. or Canada):
abrupt stops. 1-888-889-2438
to 100% only following an oil
change.
. Avoid idling the engine for long Mexico: 01-800-466-0805
periods of time.
Resetting the Oil Life System As the owner of a new Cadillac, you
. When road and weather are automatically enrolled in the
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with conditions are appropriate, use Roadside Service program.
the engine off. cruise control.
See Roadside Service (U.S. and
2. Fully press and release the . Always follow posted speed Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
accelerator pedal three times limits or drive more slowly when Service (Mexico) on page 13‑9 for
within five seconds. conditions require. more information.
See Engine Oil Life System on . Keep vehicle tires properly
page 10‑14. inflated.
. Combine several trips into a
single trip.
In Brief 1-25
Roadside Service and OnStar OnStar® How OnStar Service Works

(U.S. and Canada)
Q : Push this blue button to
If you have an active OnStar connect to a specially trained
subscription, press the Q button OnStar Advisor to verify your
and the current GPS location will account information and to answer
be sent to an OnStar advisor who questions.
will assess your problem, contact ] : Push this red emergency
Roadside Service, and relay your button to get priority help from
exact location to get the help For vehicles with an active OnStar specially trained OnStar Emergency
you need. subscription, OnStar uses several Advisors.
Online Owner Center innovative technologies and live X : Push this button for hands‐free,
(U.S. and Canada) Advisors to provide a wide range voice‐activated calling and to give
of safety, security, navigation, voice commands for Hands‐Free
The Online Owner Center is a diagnostics, and calling services.
complimentary service that includes Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn
online service reminders, vehicle Automatic Crash Response Navigation.
maintenance tips, online owner In a crash, built‐in sensors can Automatic Crash Response,
manual, special privileges, automatically alert an OnStar Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
and more. Advisor who is immediately Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Sign up today at: connected to the vehicle to see if Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
www.cadillacownercenter.com you need help. Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada). Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling
are available on most vehicles.
1-26 In Brief
Not all OnStar services are OnStar service requires wireless a working electrical system and
available on all vehicles. For more communication networks and the adequate battery power for the
information, see the OnStar Owner's Global Positioning System (GPS) OnStar equipment to operate.
Guide; visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) satellite network. Not all OnStar OnStar service may not work if the
or www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact services are available everywhere OnStar equipment isn’t properly
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR or on all vehicles at all times. installed or you haven’t maintained
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or OnStar service can’t work unless it and the vehicle is in good working
TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080; or push the vehicle is in a place where order and in compliance with all
the Q button to speak with an OnStar has an agreement with a government regulations. If you
OnStar Advisor 24 hours a day, wireless service provider for service try to add, connect, or modify
7 days a week. in that area, and the wireless any equipment or software in the
service provider has coverage, vehicle, OnStar service may not
For a full description of OnStar work. Other problems OnStar can’t
services and system limitations, see network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar control may prevent service to you,
the OnStar Owner's Guide in the such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
glove box. service. Service involving location
information about the vehicle can’t weather, electrical system design
OnStar service is subject to the work unless GPS signals are and architecture of the vehicle,
OnStar Terms and Conditions available, unobstructed, and damage to important parts of the
included in the OnStar Glove compatible with the OnStar vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone
Box Kit. hardware. The vehicle has to have network congestion or jamming.
In Brief 1-27
See Radio Frequency Statement on Your Responsibility

page 13‑18 for information
Increase the volume of the radio if
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
the OnStar Advisor cannot be
Communications Commission (FCC)
heard.
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310. If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may
OnStar Steering Wheel not be functioning properly. Push
Controls the Q button and request a vehicle
This vehicle may have diagnostic check. If the light
a b g / $ i Talk/Mute button appears clear (no light appears),
that can be used to interact with your OnStar subscription has
OnStar Hands-Free calling. See expired and all services have been
Steering Wheel Controls (Audio) on deactivated. Push the Q button to
page 5‑3 for more information. confirm that the OnStar equipment
is active.
On some vehicles, the $ i button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
1-28 In Brief
2 NOTES
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors and Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . .
2-17
2-17
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Windows Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Locks (Sedan and
2-18 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-28
2-29
Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Keys and Locks Doors Interior Mirrors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Trunk (Sedan, Coupe) . . . . . . . 2-19 Automatic Dimming Rearview
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Liftgate (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Vehicle Security Windows
System Operation (Key Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-25 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
System Operation (Keyless Immobilizer Operation (Key
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Roof
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . 2-12 Immobilizer Operation Sunroof (Sedan and
Door Locks (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . 2-14 (Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Door Locks (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Sunroof (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Central Door Unlocking
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks { WARNING

Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keyless access transmitter is
{ WARNING dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly
Leaving children in a vehicle with injured or even killed. They could
the ignition key is dangerous for operate the power windows or
many reasons. Children or others other controls or even make the
could be badly injured or even vehicle move. The windows will
killed. They could operate the function with the keyless access
power windows or other controls transmitter in the vehicle and they
One of the following keys comes
or even make the vehicle move. could be seriously injured or killed
with the vehicle.
The windows will function with the if caught in the path of a closing
keys in the ignition and children window. Do not leave the keyless
could be seriously injured or killed access transmitter in a vehicle
if caught in the path of a closing with children.
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
Key Access Keyless Access Keyless Access

This key is used for the driver door, This key, located inside the keyless If the vehicle has the Keyless
ignition, and glove box. access transmitter, is used for the Access System, the transmitter has
driver door, glove box, and rear seat a thin button (A) near the bottom of
pass-through door. See “Rear Seat the transmitter used to remove the
Pass-Through Door” under Trunk key. Press (A) and pull the key out.
(Sedan, Coupe) on page 2‑19 for Do not pull the key out without
more information. pressing the button.
This vehicle may have the Key Remote Keyless Entry

Access System or a Keyless Access
System. See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
(RKE) System Operation (Key See Radio Frequency Statement on
Access) on page 2‑5 or Remote page 13‑18 for information
Keyless Entry (RKE) System regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Operation (Keyless Access) on Communications Commission (FCC)
page 2‑7 for more information. See rules and Industry Canada
Ignition Positions (Key Access) on Standards RSS-210/220/310.
page 9‑17 or Ignition Positions
If there is a decrease in the RKE
(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 for
operating range:
information on starting the vehicle.
Key Access
. Check the distance. The
See your dealer if a new key is
transmitter may be too far from
If the vehicle has the Key Access needed.
the vehicle.
System, there is no key in the Notice: If the keys get locked in . Check the location. Other
transmitter. the vehicle, it may have to be
vehicles or objects may be
Notice: If the transmitter does not damaged to get them out. Always
blocking the signal.
have a button near the base, do carry a spare key.
. Check the transmitter's battery.
not pull on the chrome base of Contact Roadside Service if you
See “Battery Replacement” later
the transmitter. Pulling on the are locked out of the vehicle.
in this section.
base of this transmitter could See Roadside Service (U.S. and
damage it. Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑9.

. If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
dealer or a qualified technician driver door. If K is pressed again
for service. within five seconds, all remaining
doors unlock. The interior lamps
Remote Keyless Entry come on and stay on for 20 seconds
or until the ignition is turned on.
(RKE) System Operation
If enabled through the DIC, the
(Key Access) parking lamps flash twice to indicate
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle
transmitter works up to 20 m Personalization on page 5‑46.
(65 feet) away. V / & (Remote Trunk/Liftgate
There are other conditions that can Do not pull on the chrome base of Release): Press and hold for about
affect the performance of the the transmitter. one second to unlock the trunk/
transmitter. See Remote Keyless liftgate. The automatic transmission
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑4.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the must be in P (Park) or the manual
doors. transmission must be in Neutral with
If enabled through the Driver the parking brake set.
Information Center (DIC), the L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
parking lamps may flash once to Alarm): Press and release to
indicate locking has occurred. locate the vehicle. The turn signal
The horn may chirp when Q is lamps flash and the horn sounds
pressed again within five seconds. three times.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑46 for additional information.
Press and hold L for more than Programming Transmitters to Notice: When replacing the
two seconds to activate the panic the Vehicle battery, do not touch any of the
alarm. The turn signal lamps circuitry on the transmitter. Static
Only RKE transmitters programmed from your body could damage the
flash and the horn sounds for to the vehicle will work. If a
30 seconds. The alarm turns off transmitter.
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
when the ignition is moved to replacement can be purchased and
START or L is pressed again. The programmed through your dealer.
ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for When the replacement transmitter
the panic alarm to work. is programmed to the vehicle, all
The vehicle comes with remaining transmitters must also
two transmitters. Each transmitter be programmed. Any lost or stolen
will have a number on top transmitters no longer work once the
of it, “1” or “2”. These numbers new transmitter is programmed.
correspond to the driver of the Each vehicle can have up to
vehicle. For example, the memory eight transmitters programmed to it.
seat position for driver 1 will be Battery Replacement
recalled when using the transmitter
labeled “1”, if enabled through the Replace the battery if the Replace
DIC. See “Memory Seat” under Battery In Remote Key message To replace the battery:
Power Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5 displays in the DIC. See “Replace 1. Separate the transmitter with
and Vehicle Personalization on Battery In Remote Key” under Key a flat, thin object inserted into
page 5‑46 for more information. and Lock Messages on page 5‑37 the notch, located above the
for additional information. metal base.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive Keyless Unlocking Keyless Locking

side facing up. Replace with a With the keyless access transmitter The doors lock after several
CR2032 or equivalent battery. within 1 m (3 feet), approach the seconds if all doors are closed
4. Snap the transmitter back front door and pull the handle to and at least one keyless access
together. unlock and open the door. On some transmitter has been removed
models there is a touch sensor on from the interior of the vehicle. To
Remote Keyless Entry the door handle. If the transmitter is customize if the doors automatically
recognized, the door will unlock lock upon exiting the vehicle, see
(RKE) System Operation and open. “Keyless Locking” under Vehicle
(Keyless Access) Personalization on page 5‑46.
To access the rear doors first, pull
The Keyless Access System the rear door handle once to unlock Keyless Trunk Opening
transmitter will work up to 60 m all doors and a second time to open
(195 feet) away. the door. Press the trunk release button
located on the trunk above the
The Keyless Access System locks Entering any door other than the license plate to open the trunk if the
and unlocks the doors and trunk driver door will cause all of the keyless access transmitter is within
without pressing the buttons on the doors to unlock. This is not range. See Trunk (Sedan, Coupe)
keyless access transmitter. The customizable. on page 2‑19 for additional
keyless access transmitter must be information.
within 1 m (3 feet) of the door or To customize which doors unlock
trunk being opened. when the driver door is opened, see
“Keyless Unlock” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46.
There are other conditions that To program the vehicle so the turn For vehicles with the memory
affect the performance of the signal indicators do not flash and feature, press K on the keyless
transmitter. See Remote Keyless the horn does not sound when access transmitter to program and
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑4. pressing Q on the keyless access recall the memory settings. See
transmitter, see “Remote Door “Memory Seat” under Power Seat
Lock Feedback” under Vehicle Adjustment on page 3‑5 for more
Personalization on page 5‑46. information.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock / (Remote Start): Press to
only the driver door. The turn signal operate the remote start feature.
indicators flash twice. See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑12 for additional information.
Press K twice within five seconds
to unlock all the doors. The interior V / & (Remote Trunk/Liftgate
lamps may come on. Release): Press and hold for about
one second to unlock the trunk/
To program the vehicle so the turn liftgate. The automatic transmission
signal indicators do not flash and must be in P (Park) or the manual
With Remote Start Shown, Without the fog lamps and reverse lamps transmission must be in Neutral with
Similar remain on steady for about the parking brake set.
Q (Lock): Press once to lock the 20 seconds when the keyless
access transmitter is used to unlock L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
doors. The turn signal indicators Alarm): Press and release to
the vehicle, see “Remote Door
flash. When Q is pressed twice, the Unlock Feedback” under Vehicle locate the vehicle. The horn sounds
turn signal indicators flash twice, Personalization on page 5‑46. three times and the turn signal
and the horn sounds once to lamps flash three times.
confirm locking.
Press and hold L for The vehicle can be reprogrammed 5. The Driver Information Center
three seconds to sound the so that lost or stolen transmitters no (DIC) displays Ready To Learn
panic alarm. The horn sounds longer work. Each vehicle can have Electronic Key #2, 3 or 4.
and the turn signal lamps flash up to four transmitters matched to it.
for 30 seconds. Press and Programming with a Recognized
release L again to stop the alarm. Transmitter
The vehicle comes with A new transmitter can be
two transmitters. Each transmitter programmed to the vehicle when
will have a number on top of there is one recognized transmitter.
it, “1” or “2”. These numbers For vehicles sold in Canada,
correspond to the driver of the two recognized transmitters are
vehicle. For example, the memory required to program a new
seat position for driver 1 will be transmitter.
recalled when using the transmitter 1. The vehicle must be off.
labeled “1”, if enabled through the
DIC. See “Memory Seat” under 2. Place the recognized
Power Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5 transmitter(s) in the cupholder. 6. Place the new transmitter into
and Vehicle Personalization on Have the new transmitter the transmitter pocket with the
page 5‑46 for more information. available with you. buttons facing the front of the
vehicle. The transmitter pocket
Programming Transmitters to 3. Insert the vehicle key into the is inside the center console
key lock cylinder located on the storage area located between
the Vehicle outside of the driver door. the driver and front passenger
Only keyless access transmitters seats.
4. Turn the key to the unlock
programmed to the vehicle will work.
position five times within
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
five seconds.
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
7. A beep sounds once the The procedure requires three, 3. Insert the vehicle key into the
transmitter is programmed. ten minute cycles to complete the key lock cylinder located on the
The DIC displays Ready To matching process. driver door.
Learn Electronic Key #3 or 4, 1. The vehicle must be off. 4. Turn the key to the unlock
or Maximum # Electronic Keys position five times within
Learned. five seconds.
8. Press the ignition control knob to 5. The DIC displays Press Start
exit programming mode. Control To Learn Keys.
9. Remove the transmitter from 6. Press the ignition switch in.
the transmitter pocket and
press K on the keyless access 7. The DIC reads Learn Delay
transmitter two times. Active Wait XX Min and counts
down to zero.
10. To program additional
transmitters, repeat 8. The DIC displays Press Start
Steps 6 through 9. Control To Learn Keys again.
9. Press the ignition switch in
Programming without a again.
Recognized Transmitter 2. Place the new transmitter into
the transmitter pocket with the 10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9.
United States owners are permitted
buttons facing the front of the 11. The DIC reads Learn Delay
to program a new transmitter to
vehicle. The transmitter pocket Active Wait XX Min and counts
their vehicle when a recognized
is inside the center console down to zero.
transmitter is not available. The
storage area located between
Canadian immobilizer standard 12. A beep sounds and the DIC
the driver and front passenger
requires that Canadian owners see reads Ready To Learn
seats.
their dealer for programming new Electronic Key # X. All
transmitters when two recognized previously known transmitter
transmitters are not available. programming has been erased.
13. A beep sounds once Starting the Vehicle with a Low Battery Replacement
programming is complete. The Transmitter Battery Notice: When replacing the
DIC displays Ready To Learn
Replace the battery if the Replace battery, do not touch any of the
Electronic Key # 2.
Battery In Remote Key message circuitry on the transmitter. Static
To program additional displays in the DIC. See “Replace from your body could damage the
transmitters, insert each Battery In Remote Key” under Key transmitter.
transmitter in the pocket until and Lock Messages on page 5‑37
a beep is heard and the for additional information.
DIC advances to the next
electronic key number. Up If the transmitter battery is weak,
to four transmitters can be the DIC may display Electronic Key
programmed. The DIC displays Not Detected when you try to start
Maximum # Electronic Keys the vehicle. To start the vehicle,
Learned and exits the place the transmitter in the center
programming mode. console storage area transmitter
pocket with the buttons facing to the
Press the ignition control knob front of the vehicle. Then, with the
to complete the process. vehicle in P (Park) or Neutral, press
14. Press the ignition control knob the brake pedal and the ignition
if programming is complete. control knob. See Starting the
Engine on page 9‑19, for additional 1. Separate the transmitter with a
15. Press K on each newly information about the vehicle's flat, thin object inserted into the
programmed transmitter to electronic keyless ignition with push slot on the side or back of the
complete the process. start. Replace the transmitter battery transmitter.
as soon as possible. 2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive to ON/RUN. See Dual Automatic Starting the Engine Using Remote
side facing down. Replace with a Climate Control System on Start
CR2032 or equivalent battery. page 8‑1. To start the engine using the remote
4. Snap the transmitter back Laws in some local communities start feature:
together. may restrict the use of remote 1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle
starters. For example, some laws
and press Q on the transmitter.
Remote Vehicle Start may require a person using remote
start to have the vehicle in view 2. Press and hold / for at least
This vehicle may have a remote when doing so. Check local
starting feature that allows you to four seconds or until the
regulations for any requirements vehicle's turn signal lamps flash.
start the engine from outside the on remote starting of vehicles.
vehicle. The parking lamps will turn on
If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not and remain on as long as the
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): use the remote start feature. The engine is running. The vehicle's
This button will be on the RKE vehicle may run out of fuel. doors will be locked.
transmitter if you have remote start.
If your vehicle has the remote 3. After entering the vehicle during
The automatic climate control will start feature, the RKE transmitter a remote start, press the brake
begin to heat or cool your vehicle functions will have an increased pedal and turn the ignition to
during remote start depending on range of operation. However, the ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
the temperature inside and outside range may be less while the vehicle
of the vehicle. The windshield After a remote start, the engine
is running. will automatically shut off after
defroster and/or rear window
defogger turn on if it is cold outside. There are other conditions which 10 minutes unless a time
If the vehicle has heated seats, can affect the performance of the extension has been done or
they may also be turned on during transmitter, see Remote Keyless the ignition has been turned to
remote start to warm up the seat Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑4 for ON/RUN.
in cold weather. Normal operation additional information.
of the climate control system
returns after the ignition is turned
Extending Engine Run Time A maximum of two remote starts or Conditions in Which Remote Start
To extend the engine run time by remote start attempts are allowed Will Not Work
10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 and 2 between ignition cycles. The remote vehicle start feature will
while the engine is still running. After the vehicle's engine has been not operate if any of the following
The engine run time can only be started two times using the remote occur:
extended if it is the first remote start start button, the ignition must be . The ignition is in any position
since the vehicle has been driven. turned on and then back off before other than LOCK/OFF.
Remote start can be extended the remote start procedure can be
. A keyless access transmitter is
one time. used again.
inside the vehicle.
If the remote start procedure Shutting the Engine Off After a
is used again before the Remote Start
. The vehicle's hood is not closed.
first 10 minute time frame has . The hazard warning flashers
To manually shut off the engine
ended, the first 10 minutes will are on.
after a remote start, do any of the
immediately expire and the
second 10 minute time frame will following: . There is an emission control
system malfunction.
start. . Press / until the parking lamps
For example, if the lock button and turn off. . The engine coolant temperature
then the remote start buttons are is too high.
. Turn on the hazard warning
pressed again after the vehicle flashers. . The oil pressure is low.
has been running for five minutes,
10 minutes are added, allowing
. Turn the ignition switch on and . Two remote vehicle starts
the engine to run for a total of then off. have already been used. The
15 minutes. maximum number of remote
starts or remote start attempts
between ignition cycles with the
key is two.
Door Locks (Sedan) WARNING (Continued)

Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access) on
{ WARNING . Young children who get into
On vehicles with the Remote
unlocked vehicles may be
Unlocked doors can be unable to get out. A child can Keyless Access system, the door
dangerous. be overcome by extreme heat unlocks by pulling the door handle
and can suffer permanent when you have the transmitter with
. Passengers, especially
you. See Remote Keyless Entry
children, can easily open the injuries or even death from
(RKE) System Operation (Key
doors and fall out of a moving heat stroke. Always lock the
Access) on page 2‑5 or Remote
vehicle. When a door is vehicle whenever leaving it. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
locked, the handle will not . Outsiders can easily enter Operation (Keyless Access) on
open it. The chance of being
through an unlocked door page 2‑7 for more information.
thrown out of the vehicle in
when you slow down or stop If the windows are down and the
a crash is increased if the
the vehicle. Locking the doors doors are locked, do not reach
doors are not locked. So,
can help prevent this from in to manually unlock the vehicle
all passengers should wear
happening. because you will set off the alarm.
safety belts properly and
the doors should be locked From the inside, press the power
whenever the vehicle is There are several ways to lock and door lock switch located on the front
driven. unlock the vehicle. door. See Power Door Locks on
(Continued) From the outside, use the key, page 2‑17.
or press the lock or unlock button on Push down or pull up on the manual
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) lock knob, located at the top of the
transmitter. See Remote Keyless door near the window, for the rear
Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key doors.
Access) on page 2‑5 or Remote
Door Locks (Coupe) WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING . Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
Unlocked doors can be unable to get out. A child can
dangerous. be overcome by extreme heat
. Passengers — especially and can suffer permanent
children — can easily open injuries or even death from
the doors and fall out of a heat stroke. Always lock
moving vehicle. When a door your vehicle whenever you
is locked it will not open. You leave it.
increase the chance of being When you have the transmitter with
thrown out of the vehicle in a
. Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door you, you may also unlock and open
crash if the doors are not the door by squeezing the door
locked. So, wear safety belts when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your handle sensor (A). You do not have
properly and lock the doors to press the unlock button on the
whenever you drive. doors can help prevent this
from happening. transmitter. You will be able to open
(Continued) the door when you press the door
handle sensor and the vehicle
There are several ways to lock and recognizes your keyless access
unlock your vehicle. transmitter. When the passenger
From the outside, press the lock or door is opened first, the driver's
unlock button on the keyless access door will also unlock.
transmitter.
From the inside, use the power door

lock switch (C) located on the door
panel near the power window
switches. See Power Door Locks on
page 2‑17.
To open a door from the inside,
press the button (B) on the door trim
pull handle and push the door open.
You will hear a tone when the button
is pressed.
If power to the vehicle or the
keyless access transmitter is
lost, there are two ways to open 1. From inside the vehicle, use the 3. Pull the door release tab,
the door. door release handle located on located under the package shelf
the floor next to each seat. Pull at the top of the trunk, to unlock
the handle up to unlock and and unlatch the driver door.
unlatch the door.
2. From outside the vehicle, use
the key in the cylinder above the
license plate to open the trunk.
Central Door Unlocking Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks

System With this feature, you can delay the For vehicles with an automatic
The vehicle has a central door actual locking of the doors. transmission, the doors will lock
unlocking feature. When unlocking When the power door lock switch automatically when all doors are
the driver door, the other doors can is pressed when the key is not in closed, the ignition is on, and the
be unlocked by holding the key the ignition and the driver door shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
in the turned position for a few is opened, a chime will sound The doors will automatically unlock
seconds or by quickly turning the three times indicating that delayed when the vehicle is stopped and the
key twice in the lock cylinder. locking is active. shift lever is moved into P (Park).
When all the doors are closed, the For vehicles with a manual
Power Door Locks doors will lock automatically after transmission, the doors will lock
five seconds. If a door is reopened automatically after the vehicle
The switches are located on the
before five seconds have elapsed, speed reaches 8 km (5 mph). The
front doors.
the five second timer will reset itself doors will automatically unlock when
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the once all the doors are closed again. the key is turned off and removed
doors. from the ignition.
You can press the door lock switch
Q (Lock): Remove the key from
again or the lock button on the RKE Use the manual or power door locks
the ignition and press to lock the to unlock the doors if someone
transmitter to override this feature
doors. needs to exit, and to lock the doors
and lock the doors immediately.
again.
The power door locks can be
programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑46.
Lockout Protection Safety Locks (Sedan and To set the locks:

If the power door lock switch is Wagon) 1. Insert the key into the security
pressed when the key is in the lock slot and turn it so the slot is
The vehicle has rear door security in the horizontal position.
ignition and a door is open, all the locks. These prevent passengers
doors will lock and only the driver from opening the rear doors from 2. Close the door.
door will unlock. If the doors are the inside. When you want to open a rear door
closed, they can be locked by using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) when the security lock is on:
transmitter. Be sure to remove the 1. Unlock the door using the
key from the ignition when locking Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
the vehicle. or Keyless Access System
This feature can be overridden by transmitter, if the vehicle has
pressing the lock button on the RKE one, the power door lock switch,
or the rear door manual lock.
transmitter or by pressing the power
lock switch a second time. 2. Open the door from the outside.
On vehicles with a Keyless Access To cancel the rear door
System, the system can be security lock:
programmed to alert you when 1. Unlock the door and open it from
all the doors are closed and a Lock Label shown the outside.
transmitter has been left inside
of the vehicle. See Vehicle The rear door security locks are 2. Insert the key into the security
Personalization on page 5‑46 for located on the inside edge of each lock slot and turn it so the slot is
more information. rear door. The rear doors must be in the vertical position.
open to access them. The label
showing lock and unlock positions is
located near the lock.
Doors Trunk Lock Release

WARNING (Continued)
Trunk (Sedan, Coupe) . Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
{ WARNING brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See Climate
vehicle if it is driven with the Control System in the Index.
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with . If the vehicle is equipped with
any objects that pass through the a power liftgate, disable the
seal between the body and the power liftgate function.
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine For more information about
exhaust contains Carbon carbon monoxide, see Engine
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be Exhaust on page 9‑25. The remote trunk release button is
seen or smelled. It can cause on the driver door.
unconsciousness and even death.
For vehicles with an automatic
If the vehicle must be driven with transmission, the shift lever must
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: be in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
. Close all of the windows. For vehicles with a manual
transmission, the shift lever must
. Fully open the air outlets on be in N (Neutral), and the parking
or under the instrument brake set.
panel.
Press the button to open the trunk
(Continued) or press the button with the trunk
symbol on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
With the Keyless Access System, 3. Pull forward on the trunk Rear-Seat Pass Through
when you have the transmitter, the release handle to open the
If the vehicle has the rear-seat pass
trunk can be opened by the trunk trunk lid.
through door, the trunk can be
release button located above the On vehicles with a split folding accessed through the rear seat.
license plate. The vehicle must be rear seat: This is useful when transporting
in P (Park) and the valet mode
1. Fold down the rear seatback. long items.
turned off.
See Rear Seats on page 3‑13 To open the door, pull down the rear
If the vehicle is locked, the for more information. seat armrest. Then pull the lever all
keyless access transmitter must
2. Reach upward through the the way down to release the door.
be within 1 m (3 ft) of the trunk
opening for it to be recognized. opening to locate the trunk To close the door, push it up and
release handle. back into place. Then try to open
If the vehicle is ever without power,
3. Pull forward on the trunk release the door without pulling up on the
the trunk area can still be accessed.
handle to open the trunk lid. lever to make sure it is locked into
On vehicles with a rear seat place.
pass-through door: Close the trunk by pulling on the
handle. Do not use the handle as a
1. Fold the rear armrest down and tie-down.
open the pass-through door.
See “Rear-Seat Pass Through”
following for more information.
2. Reach upward through the
opening to locate the emergency
trunk release handle. See
“Emergency Trunk Release
Handle” following for more
information.
Emergency Trunk Release There is a glow-in-the-dark

Handle emergency trunk release handle WARNING (Continued)
located on the back wall of the
trunk. This handle will glow following If the vehicle must be driven with
exposure to light. Pull the release the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
handle toward the front of the . Close all of the windows.
vehicle to open the trunk from the . Fully open the air outlets on
inside.
or under the instrument
panel.
Liftgate (Wagon) . Adjust the Climate Control
Power Liftgate Operation system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
{ WARNING set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Exhaust gases can enter the Control System in the Index.
Notice: Do not use the
vehicle if it is driven with the . If the vehicle is equipped with
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with a power liftgate, disable the
when securing items in the trunk any objects that pass through the power liftgate function.
as it could damage the handle. seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine For more information about
The emergency trunk release carbon monoxide, see Engine
handle is only intended to aid a exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be Exhaust on page 9‑25.
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk seen or smelled. It can cause
from the inside. unconsciousness and even death.
(Continued)
into overhead obstructions such as

{ WARNING a garage door or roof mounted
cargo during power operation. The
You or others could be injured if liftgate can still be opened fully
caught in the path of the power manually.
liftgate. Make sure there is no one
in the way of the liftgate as it is OFF: The liftgate only operates
opening and closing. manually in this position.
Manual operation of a liftgate that
also has power operation requires
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead more effort than a standard manual
obstructions such as a garage liftgate.
door, you could damage the The power liftgate mode selector In either the MAX or the ¾ mode,
liftgate or the liftgate glass. switch is located on the driver door. the liftgate can be power opened
Always check to make sure the The vehicle must be in P (Park) to and closed by:
area above and behind the liftgate use the power feature. The taillamps . Pressing and holding the power
is clear before opening it. flash when the power liftgate liftgate button & on the Remote
moves. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
Turn the selector switch to choose until the liftgate starts moving.
one of three modes: See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Key
MAX: The liftgate power opens to Access) on page 2‑5 or Remote
the full open height. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
3/4: The liftgate power opens to a Operation (Keyless Access) on
reduced open height that can be set page 2‑7.
in a range of approximately ¾ open
to full open. Use this setting to
prevent the liftgate from opening

. Pressing the power liftgate Pressing any button that operates position. Cargo could fall out of the
button in the center of the mode the power liftgate, or the touchpad vehicle. Close and latch the power
selector switch on the driver while the liftgate is moving, stops it. liftgate before driving.
door, with the driver door Pressing the button or RKE again
unlocked. If the liftgate is powered open and
reverses the direction. There is a the liftgate support struts have lost
. Pressing the touchpad on the minimum that the power liftgate pressure, the turn signals will flash
liftgate outside handle, with all must already be open for the and a chime will sound. The liftgate
doors unlocked, to open the system to hold it open. If movement will stay open, and then slowly
liftgate. is stopped below that minimum, the close. See your dealer for service
liftgate closes. before using the liftgate.
Do not force the liftgate open or
closed during a power cycle. Obstacle Detection Features
The power liftgate may be If the liftgate encounters an obstacle
temporarily disabled under extreme during a power open or close
temperatures or low battery cycle, a warning chime will sound
conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate and the liftgate will automatically
can still be operated manually. reverse direction to the full closed
or open position. After removing
If the transmission is shifted out of the obstacle, the power liftgate
P (Park) while the power function operation can be used again.
is in progress, the liftgate power If the liftgate encounters multiple
function will continue to completion. obstacles on the same power cycle,
If the transmission is shifted out of the power function will deactivate.
. Pressing and releasing the
P (Park) and accelerate before the After removing the obstacles, the
power liftgate button on the
power liftgate latch is closed, the liftgate will resume normal power
liftgate adjacent to the latch to
liftgate may reverse to the open operation.
close the liftgate.
The vehicle has pinch sensors When power opened with To open the liftgate, press the
located on the side edges of the the ¾ mode selected, the liftgate touchpad on the handle on the
liftgate. If an object is caught stops at the new set position. outside of the liftgate and lift. To
between the liftgate and the body If an audible and visual response close the liftgate, use the pull cup.
and presses against this sensor, the is not received when setting the With the power liftgate disabled, the
liftgate will reverse direction and intermediate stop position, the liftgate electric latch will still power
open fully. The liftgate will remain liftgate height is below the ¾ open latch once contact is made with the
open until it is activated again or height minimum, approximately striker. Always close the liftgate
closed manually. 5 feet at the edge of the liftgate. before driving.
Setting the Power Liftgate If the RKE button is pressed while
Manual Operation of Power power operation is disabled, the turn
Intermediate Mode Liftgate signals will flash and the liftgate will
To change the liftgate stop position: To change the liftgate to manual not move.
1. Turn the liftgate switch to either operation, turn the mode selector The liftgate has an electric latch.
the MAX, or the ¾ mode position switch to OFF. If the battery is disconnected or has
and power open the liftgate. With the power liftgate disabled and low voltage, the liftgate will not
2. Stop the liftgate movement at all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate open. The liftgate will resume
the desired height by pressing can be manually opened and operation when the battery is
any button that operates the closed. Manual operation of a reconnected and charged.
power liftgate, or the touchpad. vehicle with a power liftgate requires
Manually adjust the liftgate more effort than a standard
position if required. non-power liftgate.
3. Press and hold the button on the
liftgate adjacent to the latch until
the turn signals flash and a beep
sounds to indicate that the new
setting is recorded.
Vehicle Security 3. Close all doors. The security start the vehicle with the correct
light should go off after about ignition key if the alarm has been
This vehicle has theft-deterrent 30 seconds. The alarm is not set off.
features; however, they do not make armed until the security light To avoid setting off the alarm by
it impossible to steal. goes off. accident:
If a locked door or trunk is opened
Anti-Theft Alarm System without using the key in the driver
. Lock the vehicle with the door
key after the doors are closed.
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm door key cylinder or the transmitter,
system. a ten second pre-alarm will occur. . Always unlock a door with the
The horn will chirp and the lights will transmitter or by using the key
flash. If the key is not placed in the in the driver door cylinder.
ignition and turned to START or the Unlocking a door any other way
door is not unlocked by pressing will set off the alarm.
the unlock button on the transmitter Turn off the alarm by pressing the
during the ten second pre-alarm, unlock button on the transmitter.
the alarm will go off. The headlamps
will flash and the horn will sound for How to Detect a Tamper
The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
about 30 seconds, then will turn off Condition
to save the battery power.
when the system is arming. If K is pressed and the horn
The theft-deterrent system will not sounds, an attempted break-in has
Arming the System activate if the doors are locked with occurred while the system was
To arm the system, the key or the manual door lock. armed.
It activates only if the power door
1. Open the door. lock switch is used while the door is If the alarm has been activated,
2. Lock the door with the open or with the transmitter. You the Theft Attempted message will
transmitter. The security light should also remember that you can appear on the DIC. See Key and
should come on and stay on. Lock Messages on page 5‑37 for
additional information.
Immobilizer unit in the vehicle and automatically If the engine still does not start and
disarms the system. The vehicle the light continues to stay on, try
See Radio Frequency Statement on may not start if the key is damaged. another key.
page 13‑18 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal If the engine still does not start with
Communications Commission (FCC) the other key, the vehicle needs
rules and Industry Canada service. If the vehicle does start,
Standards RSS-210/220/310. the first key may be damaged. See
your dealer who can service the
Immobilizer Operation theft-deterrent system and have a
new key made.
(Key Access) The security light, located in the
It is possible for the theft-deterrent
This vehicle has a passive instrument panel cluster, comes on
system decoder to learn the
theft-deterrent system. if there is a problem with arming
transponder value of a new or
or disarming the theft-deterrent
The system does not have to be replacement key. Up to 10 keys
system.
manually armed or disarmed. can be programmed for the vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, the The following procedure is for
The vehicle is automatically security light comes on briefly when programming additional keys only.
immobilized when the key is the ignition is turned on.
removed from the ignition. To program a new key do the
If the engine does not start and the following:
The system is automatically security light stays on, there is a
disarmed when the vehicle is 1. Verify that the new key
problem with the system. Turn the
started with the correct key. The ignition off and try again. has 1 stamped on it.
key uses a transponder that
If the engine still does not start and 2. Insert the current key in the
matches an immobilizer control
the key appears to be undamaged, ignition and start the engine.
try another ignition key. If the engine will not start see
your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, Immobilizer Operation The system has one or more
turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and keyless access transmitters that are
remove the key.
(Keyless Access) matched to an immobilizer control
4. Insert the key to be programmed This vehicle has a passive unit in your vehicle. Only a correctly
and turn it to ON/RUN within theft-deterrent system. matched keyless access transmitter
five seconds of the ignition being will start the vehicle. If the keyless
The system does not have to be
turned to LOCK/OFF in Step 3. access transmitter is ever damaged,
manually armed or disarmed.
you may not be able to start your
5. The security light will turn The vehicle is automatically vehicle.
off once the key has been immobilized when the ignition
programmed. It may not be When trying to start the vehicle, the
control knob is turned to LOCK/OFF.
apparent that the security light security light comes on briefly when
The immobilization system is the ignition is turned on.
went on due to how quickly the
disarmed when the ignition control
key is programmed. If the engine does not start and the
knob is pushed in and a valid
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if security light stays on, there is a
transmitter is found in the vehicle.
additional keys are to be problem with the system. Turn the
programmed. ignition control knob off and try
again.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft If the ignition control knob does
deterrent system in the vehicle. not rotate, and the keyless
access transmitter appears to be
undamaged, try another keyless
The security light, located in the access transmitter. Or, you may
instrument panel cluster, comes on try placing the transmitter in the
if there is a problem with arming or transmitter pocket located in the
disarming the theft-deterrent center console. See “Electronic Key
system. Not Detected” under Key and Lock
Messages on page 5‑37.
If the ignition control knob still does Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors
not rotate with the other transmitter,
the vehicle needs service. If the
ignition control knob does rotate, the Convex Mirrors
first transmitter may be faulty. See
your dealer who can service the { CAUTION
theft-deterrent system and have a
new keyless access transmitter A convex mirror can make things,
programmed to the vehicle. like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
It is possible for the immobilizer
cut too sharply into the right lane,
system to learn new or replacement
keyless access transmitters. Up you could hit a vehicle on the
to 4 keyless access transmitters can right. Check the inside mirror or
be programmed for the vehicle. To glance over your shoulder before
program additional transmitters, see changing lanes.
Controls for the outside power
“Programming Transmitters to the
mirrors are on the driver door.
Vehicle” for Keyless Access under The passenger side mirror is convex
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) shaped. A convex mirror's surface is To adjust each mirror:
System Operation (Key Access) on curved so more can be seen from
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry 1. Press } or | to select the
the driver seat. driver or passenger side mirror.
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7. 2. Press one of the four arrows to
Do not leave the key or device that move the mirror.
disarms or deactivates the theft 3. Press either } or | again to
deterrent system in the vehicle. deselect the mirror.
Folding Mirrors Interior Mirrors If the vehicle has a rear vision

camera (RVC), see Rear Vision
Manual Camera (RVC) on page 9‑44 for
Automatic Dimming more information.
Vehicles with manual fold mirrors
are folded inward toward the vehicle Rearview Mirror Vehicles with OnStar® will have
to prevent damage when going The vehicle has an automatic controls located at the bottom of the
through an automatic car wash. dimming inside rearview mirror. mirror. See your dealer for more
Push the mirror outward, to return it information on the system and how
Automatic dimming reduces the
to the original position. to subscribe to OnStar. See the
glare of headlamps from behind
OnStar Owner's Guide for more
you. The dimming feature comes on
Heated Mirrors and the indicator light illuminates
information about the services
OnStar provides.
= (Rear Window Defogger): each time the vehicle is started.
Press to heat the mirrors. O (On/Off): Press to turn the Cleaning the Mirror
See Dual Automatic Climate Control dimming feature on or off. Do not spray glass cleaner directly
System on page 8‑1. on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Windows Power Windows
{ WARNING { WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults, Leaving children in a vehicle with
or pets in a vehicle with the the keys is dangerous for many
windows closed is dangerous. reasons. Children or others could
They can be overcome by be badly injured or even killed.
the extreme heat and suffer They could operate the power
permanent injuries or even death windows or other controls or
from heat stroke. Never leave a even make the vehicle move. The
child, a helpless adult, or a pet windows will function and they
alone in a vehicle, especially with The vehicle aerodynamics are could be seriously injured or killed
designed to improve fuel economy if caught in the path of a closing
the windows closed in warm or
performance. This may result in a window. Do not leave keys in a
hot weather.
pulsing sound when either rear vehicle with children.
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the When there are children in the
sound, open either a front window rear seat use the window lockout
or the sunroof (if equipped). button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Express-Down/Up Windows Express Window Anti‐Pinch

Windows with the express feature Override
allow the windows to be raised and
lowered all the way without holding { WARNING
the switch.
If express override is activated,
Press or pull the switch fully and the window will not reverse
release it to activate the express automatically. You or others could
feature.
be injured and the window could
The express mode can be canceled be damaged. Before you use
by briefly pressing or pulling the express override, make sure that
switch. all people and obstructions are
Sedan Driver Side Shown, Wagon clear of the window path.
and Coupe Similar Express Window Anti-Pinch
Feature
The power window switches are on The anti‐pinch feature can be
the driver door. Each passenger If any object is in the path of the
window when the express‐up is overridden. Hold the window
door has a switch that controls only switch all the way up to the
that window. active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto‐reverse to a second position. The window will
Press the switch to lower the preset factory position. Weather rise for as long as the switch is held.
window to the desired level. Pull the conditions such as severe icing Once the switch is released, the
switch up to raise the window. may also cause the window to express mode is re‐activated.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) auto‐reverse. The window will In this mode, the window can close
allows the use of the power return to normal operation after the on an object in its path. Use care
windows after the ignition has been obstruction or condition is removed. when using the override mode.
turned off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑22.
Programming the Power The window is now reprogrammed. Sun Visors

Windows Repeat the process for the other
windows.
If the vehicle battery has been
recharged, disconnected or not Window Lockout
working, the front power windows
o (Window Lockout): The rear
will need to be reprogrammed for
window lockout button is located on
the express-up feature to work.
the driver door near the window
Before reprogramming, replace or
switches.
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Press the right side of the button to
To program:
disable the rear window switches.
1. With the ignition in ON/RUN or The light on the button indicates it is
ACC/ACCESSORY, or when on. The rear windows still can be
Retained Accessory Power raised or lowered using the driver
(RAP) is active, close all doors. window switches when the lockout Pull the sun visor down to block
2. Press and hold the power feature is active. glare. Detach the sun visor from the
window switch until the window To restore power to the rear center mount to pivot to the side
is fully open. windows, press the button again. window, or to extend along the rod,
3. Pull the power window switch up The light on the button will go out. if available.
until the window is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up
for approximately two seconds
after the window is completely
closed.
Roof Express-Open: To open the Express-Open: To open the

sunshade, fully press and release sunroof, fully press and release the
the rear of the driver side switch. rear of the passenger side switch.
Sunroof (Sedan and The sunshade will automatically The sunroof will automatically open.
Wagon) open. To stop the sunshade To stop the sunroof partway, press
partway, press the switch a the switch a second time.
If the vehicle has a power sunroof it
second time. Express-Close: To close the
will only operate when the ignition is
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, Express-Close: To close the sunroof, fully press and release the
or when Retained Accessory Power sunshade, fully press and release front of the driver's side switch. The
(RAP) is active. See Retained the front of the driver side switch. sunroof will automatically close. To
Accessory Power (RAP) on The sunshade will automatically stop the sunroof partway, press the
page 9‑22. close. To stop the sunshade switch a second time.
partway, press the switch a Comfort Stop Feature: The
The sunroof switches are located on
second time. sunroof has a comfort stop feature
the overhead console.
The sunshade will open which stops the sunroof from
automatically with the sunroof, but opening to the full-open position.
can also be opened manually. From the comfort stop position,
press the rear of the passenger side
switch a second time to open the
sunroof to the full-open position.
Vent Feature: Press and hold the
The driver side switch operates the front of the passenger side switch to
sunshade. vent the sunroof. The sunshade will
Press and hold the rear of the automatically open approximately
switch to open the sunshade. Press The passenger side switch operates fifteen inches. Press and hold the
and hold the front of the switch to the sunroof. rear of the passenger side switch to
close the sunshade. close the sunroof vent.
Anti-Pinch Feature operation, noise or plugging the

water drainage system. Periodically
If an object is in the path of the
open the sunroof and remove any
sunroof/sunshade when it is
obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
closing, the anti-pinch feature will
sunroof seal and roof sealing area
detect the object and stop the
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
sunroof/sunshade from closing at
water. Do not remove grease from The driver side switch operates the
the point of the obstruction. The
sunroof. sunshade.
sunroof/sunshade will then return
to the full-open position. To close Press and hold the rear of the
the sunroof/sunshade, see Sunroof (Coupe) switch to open the sunshade. Press
“Express-Close” earlier in this If the vehicle has a power sunroof it and hold the front of the switch to
section. will only operate when the ignition is close the sunshade.
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, Express-Open: To open the
or when Retained Accessory Power sunshade, fully press and release
(RAP) is active. See Retained the rear of the driver side switch.
Accessory Power (RAP) on The sunshade will automatically
page 9‑22. open. To stop the sunshade
The sunroof switches are located on partway, press the switch a
the overhead console. second time.
Express-Close: To close the
sunshade, fully press and release
the front of the driver side switch.
The sunshade will automatically
close. To stop the sunshade
partway, press the switch a
Dirt and debris may collect on the
second time.
sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
The sunshade will open Anti-Pinch Feature

automatically with the sunroof, but
If an object is in the path of the
can also be opened manually.
sunroof/sunshade when it is
closing, the anti-pinch feature will
detect the object and stop the
sunroof/sunshade from closing
at the point of the obstruction.
The sunroof/sunshade will then
return to the full-open position. To
close the sunroof/sunshade, see
The passenger side switch operates “Express-Close” earlier in this
the sunroof. section.
Dirt and debris may collect on the
Press and hold the front of the
sunroof seal or in the track. This
passenger side switch to vent
could cause an issue with sunroof
the sunroof. The sunshade will
operation, noise or plugging the
automatically open approximately
water drainage system. Periodically
fifteen inches. Press and hold the
open the sunroof and remove any
rear of the passenger side switch to
obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
close the sunroof vent.
sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
water. Do not remove grease from
sunroof.
2 NOTES
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety Belts

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Restraints How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-42
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-43
Head Restraints Safety Belt Use During Replacing Airbag System
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-3 Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-28 Child Restraints
Front Seats Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Replacing Safety Belt System Infants and Young
Easy Entry Seat (Coupe Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-49
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-5 Airbag System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-51
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 3-8 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-32 for Children (LATCH
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 When Should an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Replacing LATCH System
Heated and Ventilated Front What Makes an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Securing Child Restraints
How Does an Airbag (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Rear Seats Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 What Will You See After an (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-61
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
The vehicle's rear seats have head
restraints in the outboard seating
positions, but they are not
adjustable.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not Adjust the head restraint so that the Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
installed and adjusted properly, top of the restraint is at the same To lower the head restraint, press
there is a greater chance that height as the top of the occupant's the button, located on the top
occupants will suffer a neck/ head. This position reduces the of the seatback, and push the
spinal injury in a crash. Do not chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint down.
drive until the head restraints for Push down on the head restraint
all occupants are installed and after the button is released to make
adjusted properly. sure that it is locked in place.
The vehicle's head restraints are not
designed to be removed.
Active Head Restraints Front Seats To adjust a manual seat:

The vehicle has an active head
restraint system in the front seating Seat Adjustment
positions. These automatically tilt
forward to reduce the risk of neck
injury if the vehicle is hit from
{ WARNING
behind. You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
the vehicle is not moving.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
Easy Entry Seat To fold the seatback, pull the

(Coupe Models Only) handle (A) on the upper seatback. { WARNING
The seatback will fold forward.
If either seatback is not locked, it
To move the seat forward, press could move forward in a sudden
and hold the top of the switch (B) on stop or crash. That could cause
the upper seatback. To move the injury to the person sitting there.
seat rearward, press and hold the Always push and pull on the
bottom of the switch (B). Release seatbacks to be sure they are
the switch when the seat reaches
locked.
the desired position.
After entering or exiting the rear
seat, return the seatback to the A driver seat entry/exit position
upright position. Push and pull on can be recalled automatically using
the seatback to make sure is the vehicle personalization menu.
locked. See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Steering Column” under Power Seat
A. Folding Seatback Handle Adjustment on page 3‑5 and Vehicle
B. Seat Adjustment Switch Personalization on page 5‑46 for
On coupe models, the front seats more information.
can be moved out of the way to
make it easier to get in and out of
the rear seat.

. Raise or lower the entire seat
Power Seat Adjustment by moving the entire horizontal
mirrors, and the steering column
position, if the vehicle is equipped
Power Seats control up or down. with the power tilt and telescopic
To adjust the seatback, see steering column.
“Power Reclining Seatbacks” under 1: Saves and recalls for driver 1.
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑8 for
more information. 2: Saves and recalls for driver 2.
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and

B (Exit Button): Moves the driver
seat and/or power steering column
Steering Column to the exit position. See “Exit Recall”
later in this section for more
information.
Storing Memory Positions
To save into memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, outside
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: mirrors, and the power steering
. Move the seat forward or column, if equipped, to the
rearward by sliding the desired driving positions.
horizontal control forward or 2. Press and hold “1” until
rearward. two beeps sound.
. Raise or lower the front or rear 3. Repeat for a second driver
part of the seat cushion by On vehicles with the memory using “2.”
moving the front or rear of the feature, memory buttons 1 and 2 on
horizontal control up or down. the driver door are used to save and
recall memory settings for the driver
seat cushion and seatback, outside
The vehicle comes with two keyless Automatic Entry Recall Exit Recall
entry transmitters. Each transmitter If entry/exit recall is programmed B (Exit Button): Press to move
has a number “1” or “2” on it. These on in the vehicle personalization the driver seat and/or power
numbers correspond to “1” and “2” menu, automatic entry recall occurs steering column, if equipped, to the
on the driver door. The current when the ignition is turned on. See exit position. A single beep sounds
driver is identified when the unlock “Entry/Exit Recall” under Vehicle when the exit feature activates.
button on the transmitter is pressed, Personalization on page 5‑46 for The vehicle must be in P (Park) for
or when “1” or “2” on the driver door more information. an automatic transmission, or the
is pressed. parking brake must be applied for a
To stop recall movement, press
To recall memory positions, press one of the power seat, memory, manual transmission.
and release “1” or “2.” The vehicle or outside mirror buttons, or the If entry/exit recall is programmed on
must be in P (Park) for an automatic power steering column switch, in the vehicle personalization menu,
transmission, or the parking brake if equipped. automatic seat and/or steering
must be applied for a manual column movement occurs under the
transmission. A single beep will If something has blocked the
driver seat or the steering column following conditions:
sound when the button is pressed.
The seat, outside mirrors, and/or while recalling a memory position, . The ignition key is removed on
power steering column will move to the recall may stop. Remove vehicles with Remote Keyless
the position previously stored for the the obstruction; then press the Entry (RKE).
identified driver. appropriate control for the area that . The ignition is turned to OFF
is not recalling for two seconds. Try and the driver door is opened on
recalling the memory position again vehicles with Remote Keyless
by pressing the appropriate memory Access.
button. If the memory position is still
not recalling, see your dealer for
service.
If entry/exit recall is programmed Lumbar Adjustment

off and the exit button is pressed,
the driver seat will move back a
preset distance and the steering
column, if equipped, will move
up and forward. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46 for
more information.
If something has blocked the driver
seat while recalling the exit position,
the recall may stop. Remove the
obstruction; then press and hold the
power seat control rearward for A. Side Bolster Adjustment
two seconds. Try recalling the exit B. Lumbar Support Adjustment
position again. If the exit position is
If available, hold the control on the C. Seatback Bolster Adjustment
still not recalling, see your dealer for
outboard side of the seat forward or
service.
rearward to increase or decrease
the lumbar support on the driver or
front passenger seat.

. Press the top or bottom of
Power Lumbar
control (C) to increase or
Reclining Seatbacks
To adjust the lumbar support, decrease support in the
if equipped: seatback bolsters. { WARNING
. Press and hold the top of Sitting in a reclined position when
control (B) to increase support Thigh Support the vehicle is in motion can be
to the top of the seatback and Adjustment dangerous. Even when buckled
decrease support to the bottom
of the lumbar. up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
. Press and hold the bottom of the
control to decrease support to The shoulder belt cannot do its
the top of the seatback and job because it will not be against
increase support to the bottom your body. Instead, it will be in
of the seatback. front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
. Press and hold the front or rear
injuries.
of the control to increase or
decrease support to the entire The lap belt cannot do its job
seatback. either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
Side Bolster
belt forces would be there, not at
To adjust the side bolster support, If available, adjust the manual leg your pelvic bones. This could
if equipped: extension by reaching under it, in cause serious internal injuries.
. Press the top or bottom of the pocketed area. Press the button (Continued)
control (A) to increase or and pull or push to lengthen or
decrease support in seat shorten it. Release the button to
cushion bolsters. lock it in place.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks To recline a manual seatback:

WARNING (Continued)
For proper protection when the { WARNING
vehicle is in motion, have the
If either seatback is not locked, it
seatback upright. Then sit well
could move forward in a sudden
back in the seat and wear the
stop or crash. That could cause
safety belt properly.
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is moving.
To return the seatback to the upright Power Reclining Seatbacks Heated Front Seats
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
{ WARNING
seatback, and the seatback will If you cannot feel temperature
return to the upright position. change or pain to the skin, the
2. Push and pull on the seat heater may cause burns
seatback to make sure it even at low temperatures. To
is locked. reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
To adjust a power seatback, heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
if equipped: cover, or similar item. This
. Tilt the top of the vertical control may cause the seat heater to
rearward to recline. overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
. Tilt the top of the vertical control
forward to raise. damage the seat.
A light bar in the climate control Remote Start Heated Seats

display shows the setting; high, When it is cold outside, the heated
medium, or low. seats may turn on during a vehicle
Press either button to turn on the remote start. The heated seats will
heated seats at the highest setting. be canceled when the ignition is
Press and release the button to turned on. Press the button to use
decrease the setting. To turn the the heated seats after the vehicle is
heated seat off, press and release started.
the button until the light turns off. The indicator lights on the climate
The heated seats turn off when the control display do not turn on during
vehicle is turned off. a remote start.
If available, the buttons are on the The performance of an unoccupied
climate control panel. heated seat may be reduced.
Press M or L to heat the driver or See Remote Vehicle Start on
passenger seat and seatback. page 2‑12 for more information.
Heated and Ventilated The passenger seat may take

longer to heat up.
Front Seats
The heated or ventilated seats turn
off when the vehicle is turned off.
{ WARNING
Remote Start Heated Seats
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the During a remote start, the heated
seat heater may cause burns seats may turn on, depending upon
the outside temperature. They are
even at low temperatures. See
canceled when the ignition is turned
the Warning under Heated Front
on. Press the button to use the
Seats on page 3‑10. heated seats after the vehicle is
If available, the buttons are on the started.
climate control panel. The indicator lights on the climate
Press M to heat the seat or { to control display do not turn on during
a remote start.
cool the seat.
The temperature performance of an
Press the button once for the
unoccupied seat may be reduced.
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to See Remote Vehicle Start on
the next lower setting, and then to page 2‑12 for more information.
the off setting. The lights on the
climate control display indicate
three for the highest setting and
one for the lowest.
Rear Seats Sedan or Coupe Wagon

To lower one or both of the rear To lower one or both of the rear
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
seatbacks: seatbacks:
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
The vehicle may have a split folding
rear seat.
1. Pull forward on the tab, on the 1. Pull on the lever, on the top
outboard side of the seatback, to outboard side of the seatback, to
unlock the seatback. unlock the seatback.
2. Fold the seatback down. This 2. Fold the seatback down.
allows access to the trunk.
See Trunk (Sedan, Coupe) on
To return a seatback to the upright Safety Belts

position: { WARNING
This section of the manual
It is extremely dangerous to ride
{ WARNING describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside
If either seatback is not locked, it things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision, people
could move forward in a sudden riding in these areas are more
stop or crash. That could cause { WARNING likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the Do not let anyone ride where in any area of your vehicle that
seatbacks to be sure they are a safety belt cannot be worn is not equipped with seats and
locked. properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in
passenger(s) are not wearing the vehicle is in a seat and using
safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly.
1. Lift the seatback up and push it much worse. You can hit things
back into place. inside the vehicle harder or be This vehicle has indicators as a
2. Make sure the seatback is ejected from the vehicle. You reminder to buckle the safety belts.
locked into place by pushing and and your passenger(s) can be See Safety Belt Reminders on
pulling on it. seriously injured or killed. In the page 5‑16 for additional information.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the same crash, you might not be,
In most states and in all Canadian
other seatback. if you are buckled up. Always provinces, the law requires wearing
fasten your safety belt, and safety belts. Here is why:
When the seatback is not in use, it
check that your passenger(s)
should be kept in the upright, locked You never know if you will be in
position. are restrained properly too.
a crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some Why Safety Belts Work
crashes can be so serious that even
When you ride in or on anything,
buckled up, a person would not
you go as fast as it goes.
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot! Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose

it is just a seat on wheels.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the The person keeps going until or the instrument panel...
vehicle. The rider does not stop. stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
Questions and Answers About Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why

Safety Belts should I have to wear safety
belts?
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a A: Airbags are supplemental
safety belt? systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
A: You could be — whether you are them. Whether or not an airbag
wearing a safety belt or not. But is provided, all occupants still
your chance of being conscious have to buckle up to get the
during and after an accident, most protection. That is true not
so you can unbuckle and get only in frontal collisions, but
out, is much greater if you are especially in side and other
belted. And you can unbuckle collisions.
or the safety belts!
a safety belt, even if you are
With safety belts, you slow down upside down.
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I How to Wear Safety Belts First, before you or your
never drive far from home, passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
why should I wear safety
Properly there is important information you
belts? This section is only for people of should know.
A: You may be an excellent driver, adult size.
but if you are in a crash — even Be aware that there are special
one that is not your fault — you things to know about safety belts
and your passenger(s) can be and children. And there are different
hurt. Being a good driver does rules for smaller children and
not protect you from things infants. If a child will be riding in
beyond your control, such as the vehicle, see Older Children on
bad drivers. page 3‑44 or Infants and Young
Most accidents occur within Children on page 3‑47. Follow those
40 km (25 miles) of home. rules for everyone's protection.
And the greatest number of It is very important for all occupants
serious injuries and deaths to buckle up. Statistics show that
occur at speeds of less than unbelted people are hurt more often
65 km/h (40 mph). in crashes than those who are Sit up straight and always keep your
Safety belts are for everyone. wearing safety belts. feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
Occupants who are not buckled up low and snug on the hips, just
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a touching the thighs. In a crash, this
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
applies force to the strong pelvic Q: What is wrong with this?

bones and you would be less likely { WARNING
to slide under the lap belt. If you
slid under it, the belt would apply You can be seriously hurt if the
force on your abdomen. This could shoulder belt is too loose. In a
cause serious or even fatal injuries. crash, you would move forward
The shoulder belt should go over too much, which could increase
the shoulder and across the chest. injury. The shoulder belt should fit
These parts of the body are best snugly against your body.
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.

It will not give as much
protection this way.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
not give nearly as much buckle.
protection this way.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured if the You can be seriously injured if the
belt is buckled in the wrong place belt goes over an armrest like
like this. In a crash, the belt would this. The belt would be much too
go up over your abdomen. The high. In a crash, you can slide
belt forces would be there, not under the belt. The belt force
on the pelvic bones. This could would then be applied on the
cause serious internal injuries. abdomen, not on the pelvic
Always buckle the belt into the bones, and that could cause
buckle nearest you. serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under The shoulder belt should go over A: The belt is behind the body.
the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder and across the
the shoulder at all times. chest.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured by You can be seriously injured by a
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt twisted belt. In a crash, you would
properly. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
not be restrained by the shoulder to spread impact forces. If a belt
belt. Your body could move too is twisted, make it straight so it
far forward increasing the chance can work properly, or ask your
of head and neck injury. You dealer to fix it.
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across
go over the shoulder and across the body.
the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt

height adjuster, move it to the
All seating positions in the vehicle height that is right for you. See
have a lap-shoulder belt. “Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
The following instructions explain later in this section for use and
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt important safety information.
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it 3. Push the latch plate into the
get twisted. buckle until it clicks.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if Pull up on the latch plate to

you pull the belt across you very make sure it is secure. If the belt
quickly. If this happens, let the is not long enough, see Safety
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Belt Extender on page 3‑28.
Then pull the belt across you Position the release button on 5. To make the lap part tight, pull
more slowly. the buckle so that the safety belt up on the shoulder belt.
If the shoulder portion of a could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary. It may be necessary to pull
passenger belt is pulled out stitching on the safety belt
all the way, the child restraint through the latch plate to fully
locking feature may be engaged. tighten the lap belt on smaller
If this happens, let the belt go occupants.
back all the way and start again.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

(Sedan and Wagon)
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
Adjust the guide so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
To unlatch the belt, push the button Push down on the release button (A)
could reduce the effectiveness of
on the buckle. The belt should and move the height adjuster to the
the safety belt in a crash. See How
return to its stowed position. desired position. The adjuster can
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
Before a door is closed, be sure be moved up by pushing up on the
page 3‑18.
the safety belt is out of the way. If a shoulder belt guide.
door is slammed against a safety After the height adjuster is set to the
belt, damage can occur to both the desired position, try to move it down
safety belt and the vehicle. without pressing the release button
to make sure it has locked into
position.
Safety Belt Pretensioners Pretensioners work only once. If the Here is how to install a comfort
pretensioners activate in a crash, guide to the safety belt:
This vehicle has safety belt
the pretensioners and possibly other
pretensioners for front outboard
parts of the safety belt system will
occupants. Although the safety belt
need to be replaced. See Replacing
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
Safety Belt System Parts After a
are part of the safety belt assembly.
Crash on page 3‑29.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a Rear Safety Belt Comfort
moderate to severe frontal or Guides
near frontal crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner This vehicle may have rear shoulder
activation are met. And, if the belt comfort guides. If not, they are
vehicle has side impact airbags, available through your dealer. The
safety belt pretensioners can help guides may provide added safety
tighten the safety belts in a side or belt comfort for older children who
rear crash. have outgrown booster seats and 1. Pull the elastic cord out from
for some adults. When installed and between the edge of the
properly adjusted, the comfort guide seatback and the interior body
positions the shoulder belt away to remove the guide from its
from the neck and head. storage clip.
WARNING (Continued)
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt 3. Be sure that the belt is not
and insert the two edges of the twisted and it lies flat. The
belt into the slots of the guide. elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the 4. Buckle, position, and release
protection needed in a crash. the safety belt as described
The person wearing the belt could previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt is on the shoulder and not
belt should go over the shoulder
falling off of it. The belt should
(Continued) be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
To remove and store the comfort Safety Belt Extender

guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
be removed from the guide. Pull the around you, you should use it.
guide upward to expose its storage But if a safety belt is not long
clip, and then slide the guide onto enough, your dealer will order you
the clip. Turn the guide and clip an extender. When you go in to
inward and slide them in between order it, take the heaviest coat you
the seatback and the interior body, will wear, so the extender will be
leaving only the loop of the elastic long enough for you. To help avoid
cord exposed. personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
Safety Belt Use During A pregnant woman should wear seat it is made to fit. The extender
Pregnancy a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap has been designed for adults. Never
portion should be worn as low as use it for securing child seats. To
Safety belts work for everyone, wear it, attach it to the regular safety
including pregnant women. Like all possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy. belt. For more information, see the
occupants, they are more likely to instruction sheet that comes with
be seriously injured if they do not The best way to protect the fetus is the extender.
wear safety belts. to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely Safety System Check
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for Now and then, check that the safety
anyone, the key to making safety belt reminder light, safety belts,
belts effective is wearing them buckles, latch plates, retractors,
properly. and anchorages are working
properly. Look for any other loose
or damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not be necessary.
safety belts may not protect you in
System Parts After a But the safety belt assemblies that
a crash. They can rip apart under Crash were used during any crash may
impact forces. If a belt is torn or have been stressed or damaged.
frayed, get a new one right away. { WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt A crash can damage the safety replaced.
Reminders on page 5‑16 for more belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be
information. A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt
may not properly protect the system was not being used at the
Keep safety belts clean and dry. person using it, resulting in
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑29. time of the crash.
serious injury or even death in a
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the
Safety Belt Care safety belt systems are working
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
Keep belts clean and dry. properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
{ WARNING replacements made as soon as
possible.
Readiness Light on page 5‑17.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Airbag System For frontal airbags, the word

AIRBAG will appear on the middle
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
The vehicle has the following part of the steering wheel for the
airbags: driver and on the instrument panel
for the outboard front passenger.
{ WARNING
. A frontal airbag for the driver.
With seat-mounted side impact You can be severely injured or
. A frontal airbag for the outboard killed in a crash if you are not
front passenger. airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback wearing a safety belt — even if
. A seat-mounted side impact closest to the door. the vehicle has airbags. Airbags
airbag for the driver. are designed to work with safety
With roof-rail airbags, the word
. A seat-mounted side impact belts, but do not replace them.
AIRBAG will appear along the
airbag for the outboard front Also, airbags are not designed to
headliner or trim.
passenger. deploy in every crash. In some
Airbags are designed to supplement crashes safety belts are the only
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver the protection provided by safety restraint. See When Should an
and the passenger seated belts. Even though today's airbags Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑33.
directly behind the driver. are also designed to help reduce
. A roof-rail airbag for the the risk of injury from the force of an Wearing a safety belt during a
outboard front passenger and inflating bag, all airbags must inflate crash helps reduce your chance
the passenger seated directly very quickly to do their job. of hitting things inside the vehicle
behind the outboard front or being ejected from it. Airbags
passenger. are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in the
All of the airbags in the vehicle will vehicle should wear a safety belt
have the word AIRBAG embossed
properly — whether or not there is
in the trim or on an attached label
an airbag for that person.
near the deployment opening.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against,
faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag
Anyone who is up against, or when it inflates can be seriously
very close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument panel cluster,
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but
which shows the airbag symbol. The
close to any airbag, as you would not for young children and infants. system checks the airbag electrical
be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle's safety belt system for malfunctions. The light
of the seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is tells you if there is an electrical
Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young problem. See Airbag Readiness
position before and during a children and infants need the Light on page 5‑17 for more
crash. Always wear a safety belt, protection that a child restraint information.
even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in the
while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
the vehicle. Children on page 3‑44 or Infants
Occupants should not lean on or and Young Children on
sleep against the door or side page 3‑47.
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
Where Are the Airbags?
The outboard front passenger Driver Side shown, Passenger

frontal airbag is in the instrument Side similar
The driver's frontal airbag is in the panel on the passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact
middle of the steering wheel. airbags for the driver and outboard
front passenger are in the side of
the seatbacks closest to the door.
WARNING (Continued)
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
that person causing severe injury Frontal airbags are designed to
or even death. The path of an inflate in moderate to severe frontal
inflating airbag must be kept or near-frontal crashes to help
clear. Do not put anything reduce the potential for severe
between an occupant and an injuries mainly to the driver's or
airbag, and do not attach or put outboard front passenger's head
anything on the steering wheel and chest. However, they are
hub or on or near any other only designed to inflate if the
airbag covering. impact exceeds a predetermined
Driver Side shown, Passenger Do not use seat accessories deployment threshold. Deployment
Side similar thresholds are used to predict how
that block the inflation path of a
severe a crash is likely to be in time
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, seat-mounted side impact airbag.
for the airbags to inflate and help
outboard front passenger, and Never secure anything to the roof restrain the occupants.
second row outboard passengers of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
are in the ceiling above the side Whether your frontal airbags will
by routing a rope or tie down or should deploy is not based on
windows. through any door or window how fast your vehicle is traveling.
opening. If you do, the path of It depends largely on what you hit,
{ WARNING an inflating roof-rail airbag will be the direction of the impact, and how
blocked. quickly your vehicle slows down.
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)
Frontal airbags may inflate at Frontal airbags are not intended to the system's designed threshold
different crash speeds. For inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear level. The threshold level can vary
example: impacts, or in many side impacts. with specific vehicle design.
. If the vehicle hits a stationary In addition, the vehicle has Roof-rail airbags are not
object, the airbags could inflate dual-stage frontal airbags. intended to inflate in rear impacts.
at a different crash speed than if Dual-stage airbags adjust the A seat-mounted side impact airbag
the vehicle hits a moving object. restraint according to crash severity. is intended to deploy on the side of
. If the vehicle hits an object that Your vehicle has electronic frontal the vehicle that is struck. Both
deforms, the airbags could sensors, which help the sensing roof-rail airbags will deploy when
inflate at a different crash speed system distinguish between a either side of the vehicle is struck or
than if the vehicle hits an object moderate frontal impact and a more if the sensing system predicts that
that does not deform. severe frontal impact. For moderate the vehicle is about to roll over, or in
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags a severe frontal impact.
. If the vehicle hits a narrow object inflate at a level less than full
(like a pole), the airbags could In any particular crash, no one
deployment. For more severe frontal can say whether an airbag should
inflate at a different crash speed impacts, full deployment occurs.
than if the vehicle hits a wide have inflated simply because
object (like a wall). The vehicle has seat-mounted side of the damage to a vehicle or
impact and roof-rail airbags. See because of what the repair costs
. If the vehicle goes into an object Airbag System on page 3‑30. were. For frontal airbags, inflation is
at an angle, the airbags could Seat-mounted side impact and determined by what the vehicle hits,
inflate at a different crash speed roof-rail airbags are intended to the angle of the impact, and how
than if the vehicle goes straight inflate in moderate to severe side quickly the vehicle slows down.
into the object. crashes. In addition, these roof-rail For seat-mounted side impact and
Thresholds can also vary with airbags are intended to inflate roof-rail airbags, deployment is
specific vehicle design. during a rollover or in a severe determined by the location and
frontal impact. Seat-mounted side severity of the side impact.
impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above
In a rollover event, roof‐rail airbag How Does an Airbag full or partial ejection in rollover
deployment is determined by the events, although no system can
direction of the roll.
Restrain? prevent all such ejections.
In moderate to severe frontal or But airbags would not help in
What Makes an Airbag near frontal collisions, even belted many types of collisions, primarily
Inflate? occupants can contact the steering because the occupant's motion
wheel or the instrument panel. In is not toward those airbags. See
In a deployment event, the sensing moderate to severe side collisions, When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
system sends an electrical signal even belted occupants can contact page 3‑33 for more information.
triggering a release of gas from the the inside of the vehicle.
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the Airbags should never be regarded
Airbags supplement the as anything more than a supplement
airbag causing the bag to break out
protection provided by safety to safety belts.
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
belts. Frontal airbags distribute
the airbag, and related hardware are
the force of the impact more evenly
all part of the airbag module.
over the occupant's upper body,
What Will You See After
Frontal airbag modules are located stopping the occupant more an Airbag Inflates?
inside the steering wheel and gradually. Seat‐mounted side impact After the frontal airbags and
instrument panel. For vehicles with and roof-rail airbags distribute the seat-mounted side impact airbags
seat-mounted side impact airbags, force of the impact more evenly inflate, they quickly deflate, so
there are airbag modules in the side over the occupant's upper body. quickly that some people may not
of the front seatbacks closest to even realize an airbag inflated.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
are designed to help contain the
airbags, there are airbag modules in partially inflated for some time after
head and chest of occupants
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the they deploy. Some components of
in the outboard seating positions
side windows that have occupant the airbag module may be hot for
in the first and second rows. The
seating positions. several minutes. For location of the
rollover capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to help reduce the risk of airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑35.
The parts of the airbag that come

into contact with you may be warm, WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming problems following an airbag appears to be drivable after a
from the vents in the deflated deployment, you should seek moderate crash, there may be
airbags. Airbag inflation does not medical attention. concealed damage that could
prevent the driver from seeing out of make it difficult to safely operate
the windshield or being able to steer The vehicle has a feature that may the vehicle.
the vehicle, nor does it prevent automatically unlock the doors, turn Use caution if you should attempt
people from leaving the vehicle. on the interior lamps, turn on the to restart the engine after a crash
hazard warning flashers, and shut has occurred.
{ WARNING off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
When an airbag inflates, there off the interior lamps, and turn off In many crashes severe enough to
may be dust in the air. This dust the hazard warning flashers by inflate the airbag, windshields are
could cause breathing problems using the controls for those broken by vehicle deformation.
for people with a history of features. Additional windshield breakage
asthma or other breathing trouble. may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
To avoid this, everyone in the { WARNING . Airbags are designed to inflate
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have A crash severe enough to inflate only once. After an airbag
breathing problems but cannot the airbags may have also inflates, you will need some
get out of the vehicle after an damaged important functions in new parts for the airbag system.
airbag inflates, then get fresh air the vehicle, such as the fuel If you do not get them, the
by opening a window or a door. system, brake and steering airbag system will not be there
If you experience breathing systems, etc. Even if the vehicle to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
(Continued) (Continued) airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual The passenger sensing system

for your vehicle covers the need turns off the outboard front
to replace other parts. passenger frontal airbag under
. The vehicle has a crash sensing certain conditions. The driver airbag,
and diagnostic module which seat‐mounted side impact airbags
records information after a and the roof-rail airbags are not
crash. See Vehicle Data United States affected by the passenger sensing
Recording and Privacy on system.
page 13‑16 and Event Data The passenger sensing system
Recorders on page 13‑16. works with sensors that are part of
. Let only qualified technicians the outboard front passenger seat.
work on the airbag systems. The sensors are designed to detect
Improper service can mean that the presence of a properly-seated
an airbag system will not work occupant and determine if the
Canada and Mexico outboard front passenger frontal
properly. See your dealer for
service. The words ON and OFF, or the airbag should be enabled (may
symbol for on and off, will be visible inflate) or not.
Passenger Sensing during the system check. If the According to accident statistics,
vehicle has remote start, and it is children are safer when properly
System being used to start the vehicle from secured in a rear seat in the correct
The vehicle has a passenger a distance, you may not see the child restraint for their weight
sensing system for the outboard system check. When the system and size.
front passenger position. The check is complete, either the word
passenger airbag status indicator ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or
will be visible on the instrument off, will be visible. See Passenger
panel when the vehicle is started. Airbag Status Indicator on
page 5‑18.
We recommend that children be The passenger sensing system is

secured in a rear seat, including: WARNING (Continued) designed to turn off the outboard
an infant or a child riding in a front passenger airbag if:
rear-facing child restraint; a child passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
. The outboard front passenger
riding in a forward-facing child seat; seat is unoccupied.
an older child riding in a booster position.
seat; and children, who are large Even if the passenger sensing
. The system determines an infant
enough, using safety belts. system has turned off the right is present in a child restraint.
A label on the sun visor says, front passenger frontal airbag, . An outboard front passenger
“Never put a rear-facing child seat no system is fail-safe. No one takes his/her weight off of the
in the front.” This is because the risk can guarantee that an airbag will seat for a period of time.
to the rear-facing child is so great, not deploy under some unusual . Or, if there is a critical problem
if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though the with the airbag system or the
airbag is turned off. passenger sensing system.
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child When the passenger sensing
restraints in a rear seat, even if system has turned off the outboard
A child in a rear-facing child
the airbag is off. If you secure a front passenger frontal airbag, the
restraint can be seriously
forward-facing child restraint in off indicator will light and stay lit to
injured or killed if the right
the right front seat, always move remind you that the airbag is off.
front passenger airbag inflates.
the front passenger seat as far See Passenger Airbag Status
This is because the back of the Indicator on page 5‑18.
back as it will go. It is better to
rear-facing child restraint would
secure the child restraint in a
be very close to the inflating
rear seat.
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
(Continued)
The passenger sensing system is 3. Remove any additional items

designed to turn on (may inflate) the { WARNING from the seat such as blankets,
outboard front passenger frontal cushions, seat covers, seat
airbag anytime the system senses If the airbag readiness light ever heaters, or seat massagers.
that a person of adult size is sitting comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong 4. Reinstall the child restraint
properly in the outboard front following the directions
passenger seat. with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, provided by the child restraint
When the passenger sensing have the vehicle serviced right manufacturer and refer to
system has allowed the airbag to be Securing Child Restraints
away. See Airbag Readiness
enabled, the on indicator will light (Rear Seat) on page 3‑59 or
Light on page 5‑17 for more
and stay lit to remind you that the Securing Child Restraints (Front
airbag is active. information, including important Passenger Seat) on page 3‑61.
safety information.
For some children, including 5. If, after reinstalling the child
children in child restraints, restraint and restarting the
and for very small adults, the If the On Indicator is Lit for a vehicle, the on indicator is
passenger sensing system may or Child Restraint still lit, turn the vehicle off.
may not turn off the outboard front If a child restraint has been installed Then slightly recline the vehicle
passenger frontal airbag, depending and the on indicator is lit: seatback and adjust the seat
upon the person’s seating posture cushion, if adjustable, to make
and body build. Everyone in the 1. Turn the vehicle off. sure that the vehicle seatback is
vehicle who has outgrown child 2. Remove the child restraint from not pushing the child restraint
restraints should wear a safety belt the vehicle. into the seat cushion.
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
Also make sure the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an use the following steps to allow the
restraint is not trapped under Adult-Size Occupant system to detect that person and
the vehicle head restraint. enable the outboard front passenger
If this happens, adjust the head frontal airbag:
restraint. See Head Restraints 1. Turn the vehicle off.
on page 3‑2.
2. Remove any additional material
6. Restart the vehicle. from the seat, such as blankets,
The passenger sensing system cushions, seat covers, seat
may or may not turn off the heaters, or seat massagers.
airbag for a child in a child 3. Place the seatback in the fully
restraint depending upon the upright position.
child's seating posture and body
build. It is better to secure the 4. Have the person sit upright in
child restraint in a rear seat. the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
If a person of adult-size is sitting in extended.
the outboard front passenger seat, 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
but the off indicator is lit, it could be person remain in this position for
because that person is not sitting two to three minutes after the on
properly in the seat. If this happens, indicator is lit.
Additional Factors Affecting A wet seat can affect the The on indicator may be lit if an
System Operation performance of the passenger object, such as a briefcase,
sensing system. Here is how: handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
Safety belts help keep the other electronic device, is put on
passenger in position on the . The passenger sensing system
may turn off the passenger an unoccupied seat. If this is not
seat during vehicle maneuvers desired remove the object from
and braking, which helps the airbag when liquid is soaked into
the seat. If this happens, the off the seat.
passenger sensing system maintain
the passenger airbag status. indicator will be lit, and the
See “Safety Belts” and “Child airbag readiness light on the { WARNING
Restraints” in the Index for instrument panel will also be lit.
Stowing of articles under the
additional information about the . Liquid pooled on the seat that passenger seat or between the
importance of proper restraint use. has not soaked in may make it passenger seat cushion and
A thick layer of additional material, more likely that the passenger seatback may interfere with the
such as a blanket or cushion, sensing system will enable (turn proper operation of the passenger
or aftermarket equipment such on) the passenger airbag while a
sensing system.
as seat covers, seat heaters, and child restraint or child occupant
seat massagers can affect how is on the seat. If the passenger
well the passenger sensing system airbag is turned on, the on Servicing the
operates. We recommend that indicator will be lit.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
you not use seat covers or other If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
aftermarket equipment except when the seat immediately. If the airbag Airbags affect how the vehicle
approved by GM for your specific readiness light is lit, do not install a should be serviced. There are parts
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to child restraint or allow anyone to of the airbag system in several
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on occupy the seat. See Airbag places around the vehicle. Your
page 3‑42 for more information Readiness Light on page 5‑17 for dealer and the service manual have
about modifications that can affect important safety information. information about servicing the
how the system operates. vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Adding Equipment to the In addition, the vehicle has a
Service Publications Ordering passenger sensing system
Information on page 13‑14.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle for the right front passenger
Q: Is there anything I might add position, which includes sensors
{ WARNING to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing
For up to 10 seconds after the from working properly? system may not operate
ignition is turned off and the properly if the original seat trim
A: Yes. If you add things that
battery is disconnected, an airbag is replaced with non-GM covers,
change the vehicle's frame,
can still inflate during improper upholstery or trim, or with
bumper system, height, front end
service. You can be injured if you GM covers, upholstery or
or side sheet metal, they may
are close to an airbag when it trim designed for a different
keep the airbag system from
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. vehicle. Any object, such as an
working properly. Changing or
They are probably part of the aftermarket seat heater or a
moving any parts of the front
comfort enhancing pad or
airbag system. Be sure to follow seats, safety belts, the airbag
device, installed under or on top
proper service procedures, and sensing and diagnostic module,
of the seat fabric, could also
make sure the person performing steering wheel, instrument
interfere with the operation of
work for you is qualified to do so. panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
the passenger sensing system.
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
This could either prevent proper
trim, overhead console, front
deployment of the passenger
sensors, side impact sensors,
airbag(s) or prevent the
rollover sensor module, or airbag
passenger sensing system
wiring can affect the operation of
from properly turning off the
the airbag system.
passenger airbag(s). See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑37.
If you have questions, call Q: Because I have a disability, Airbag System Check
Customer Assistance. The I have to get my vehicle
phone numbers and addresses modified. How can I find out The airbag system does not need
for Customer Assistance are in whether this will affect my regularly scheduled maintenance or
Step Two of the Customer airbag system? replacement. Make sure the airbag
Satisfaction Procedure in readiness light is working. See
A: If you have questions, call Airbag Readiness Light on
this manual. See Customer Customer Assistance. The
Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. page 5‑17 for more information.
phone numbers and addresses
and Canada) on page 13‑1 for Customer Assistance are Notice: If an airbag covering is
or Customer Satisfaction in Step Two of the Customer damaged, opened, or broken, the
Procedure (Mexico) on Satisfaction Procedure in airbag may not work properly.
page 13‑3. this manual. See Customer Do not open or break the airbag
If the vehicle has rollover Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. coverings. If there are any
roof-rail airbags, see Different and Canada) on page 13‑1 or opened or broken airbag covers,
Size Tires and Wheels on Customer Satisfaction have the airbag covering and/or
page 10‑83 for additional Procedure (Mexico) on airbag module replaced. For the
important information. page 13‑3. location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
In addition, your dealer and the Inflate? on page 3‑35. See your
service manual have information dealer for service.
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to Child Restraints
replace airbag system parts. See
Parts After a Crash your dealer for service.
Older Children
If the airbag readiness light stays on
{ WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag
airbag systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system the vehicle serviced right away.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
may not work properly and
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as Older children who have outgrown
possible. booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
The manufacturer's instructions that

. Does the lap belt fit low and This applies belt force to the
come with the booster seat state the snug on the hips, touching the child's pelvic bones in a crash.
weight and height limitations for that thighs? If yes, continue. If no, It should never be worn over the
booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat. abdomen, which could cause
lap-shoulder belt until the child . Can proper safety belt fit be severe or even fatal internal
passes the fit test below: maintained for the length of injuries in a crash.
. Sit all the way back on the seat. the trip? If yes, continue. If no, Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Do the knees bend at the seat return to the booster seat. Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
edge? If yes, continue. If no, Q: What is the proper way to page 3‑24.
return to the booster seat. wear safety belts? According to accident statistics,
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. A: An older child should wear a children and infants are safer
Does the shoulder belt rest on lap-shoulder belt and get the when properly restrained in a child
the shoulder? If yes, continue. additional restraint a shoulder restraint system or infant restraint
If no, try using the rear safety belt can provide. The shoulder system secured in a rear seating
belt comfort guide. See “Rear belt should not cross the face position.
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” or neck. The lap belt should fit
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on snugly below the hips, just
page 3‑24 for more information. touching the top of the thighs.
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not

buckled up can strike other people WARNING (Continued)
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older might also slide under the lap
children need to use safety belts belt. The belt force would then
properly. be applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
{ WARNING go over the shoulder and across
Never do this. the chest.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the
{ WARNING
two children can be crushed Never do this.
together and seriously injured.
A safety belt must be used by Never allow a child to wear the
only one person at a time. safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts

WARNING (Continued)
offer protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only
protection! This includes infants safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
and all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every infant will suddenly become a
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the arms. An infant should be
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate secured in an appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints. restraint.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to
the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child
tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not
unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash.
allow children to play with the (Continued)
safety belts.
For most basic types of child

{ WARNING restraints, there are many
different models available. When
Never do this. purchasing a child restraint, be
Children who are up against, sure it is designed to be used
or very close to, any airbag when in a motor vehicle. If it is, the
it inflates can be seriously injured restraint will have a label saying
or killed. Never put a rear-facing that it meets federal motor
child restraint in the right front vehicle safety standards.
seat. Secure a rear-facing child The restraint manufacturer's
restraint in a rear seat. It is also instructions that come with the
better to secure a forward-facing restraint state the weight and
child restraint in a rear seat. If you Q: What are the different types of height limitations for a particular
must secure a forward-facing add-on child restraints? child restraint. In addition, there
child restraint in the right front are many kinds of restraints
A: Add-on child restraints, which
seat, always move the front available for children with
are purchased by the vehicle
passenger seat as far back as it special needs.
owner, are available in four basic
will go. types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
Child Restraint Systems

{ WARNING { WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and A young child's hip bones are still
head injury during a crash, infants so small that the vehicle's regular
need complete support. This is safety belt may not remain low
because an infant's neck is not on the hip bones, as it should.
fully developed and its head Instead, it may settle up around
weighs so much compared with the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the rest of its body. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a
an infant in a rear-facing child body area that is unprotected by
restraint settles into the restraint, any bony structure. This alone
so the crash forces can be could cause serious or fatal
distributed across the strongest injuries. To reduce the risk of
part of an infant's body, the back serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
and shoulders. Infants should crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A)
always be secured in rear-facing always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating
child restraints. child restraints. surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of
to see out the window. injury, the child restraint must be
secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system. See
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
Children can be endangered in a In some areas of the United Where to Put the
crash if the child restraint is not States and Canada, Certified
properly secured in the vehicle. Child Passenger Safety
Restraint
When securing an add-on child Technicians (CPSTs) are available According to accident statistics,
restraint, refer to the instructions to inspect and demonstrate how children and infants are safer
that come with the restraint which to correctly use and install child when properly restrained in a child
may be on the restraint itself or in a restraints. In the U.S., refer to the restraint system or infant restraint
booklet, or both, and to this manual. National Highway Traffic Safety system secured in a rear seating
The child restraint instructions Administration (NHTSA) website position.
are important, so if they are not to locate the nearest child safety
We recommend that children and
available, obtain a replacement seat inspection station. For CPST
child restraints be secured in a rear
copy from the manufacturer. availability in Canada, check with
seat, including: an infant or a child
Transport Canada or the Provincial
Keep in mind that an unsecured riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
Ministry of Transportation office.
child restraint can move around in a a child riding in a forward-facing
collision or sudden stop and injure Securing the Child Within the child seat; an older child riding in a
people in the vehicle. Be sure to Child Restraint booster seat; and children, who are
properly secure any child restraint in large enough, using safety belts.
the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
A label on the sun visor says, Child restraints and booster seats
“Never put a rear-facing child WARNING (Continued) vary considerably in size, and some
restraint in the front.” This is may fit in certain seating positions
because the risk to the rear-facing guarantee that an airbag will not better than others. Always make
child is so great if the airbag deploy under some unusual sure the child restraint is properly
deploys. circumstance, even though it is secured.
turned off.
Depending on where you place
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child the child restraint and the size of
restraints in a rear seat, even if the child restraint you may not be
A child in a rear-facing child the airbag is off. If you secure a able to access adjacent safety
restraint can be seriously forward-facing child restraint in belt assemblies or LATCH anchors
injured or killed if the right front the right front seat, always move for additional passengers or
passenger airbag inflates. the front passenger seat as far child restraints. Adjacent seating
This is because the back of the back as it will go. It is better to positions should not be used if the
rear-facing child restraint would secure the child restraint in a child restraint prevents access to or
be very close to the inflating rear seat. interferes with the routing of the
airbag. A child in a forward-facing safety belt.
child restraint can be seriously See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑37 for additional Wherever a child restraint is
injured or killed if the right front installed, be sure to secure the child
passenger airbag inflates and the information.
restraint properly.
passenger seat is in a forward
position. When securing a child restraint Keep in mind that an unsecured
in a rear seating position, study child restraint can move around in a
Even if the passenger sensing collision or sudden stop and injure
the instructions that came with the
system has turned off the right people in the vehicle. Be sure to
child restraint to make sure it is
front passenger frontal airbag, no compatible with this vehicle. properly secure any child restraint
system is fail-safe. No one can in the vehicle — even when no child
(Continued) is in it.
Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint with Lower Anchors
a top tether, you must also use
Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the
(LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the
The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must
restraint during driving or in a crash. never be installed using only the top
This system is designed to make tether and anchor.
installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system
The LATCH system uses anchors in in your vehicle, you need a
the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that has LATCH
child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint
with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
with instructions on how to use the built into the vehicle. There are
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint and its attachments. two lower anchors for each
child restraint is properly installed
The following explains how to LATCH seating position that will
using the anchors, or use the
attach a child restraint with these accommodate a child restraint with
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
attachments in your vehicle. lower attachments (B).
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or
also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may Lower Anchor and Top Tether
have a single tether (A) or a Anchor Locations
dual tether (C). Either will have
a single attachment (B) to secure
the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
A top tether (A, C) anchors the forward-facing child restraints have
top of the child restraint to the a top tether, and that the tether be
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built attached. Be sure to read and follow
into the vehicle. The top tether the instructions for your child
attachment (B) on the child restraint Rear Seat ‐ Sedan or Wagon
restraint.
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
To assist you in locating the lower

anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion. For a wagon
the lower anchors are beneath
Rear Seat ‐ Coupe zippers, located near the labels. Sedan
Open the zippers to access the
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating lower anchors.
positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
To assist you in locating the top

tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover.
Coupe
the vehicle floor, behind the rear Securing a Child Restraint

seatback. Be sure to use an anchor Designed for the LATCH
located on the same side of the System
vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be
placed. { WARNING
Do not secure a child restraint in a If a LATCH-type child restraint is
position without a top tether anchor not attached to anchors, the child
if a national or local law requires restraint will not be able to protect
that the top tether be attached, or if the child correctly. In a crash, the
the instructions that come with the child could be seriously injured
child restraint say that the top tether or killed. Install a LATCH-type
Wagon must be attached. child restraint properly using the
The top tether anchors for a sedan According to accident statistics, anchors, or use the vehicle safety
or a coupe are located under the children and infants are safer belts to secure the restraint,
tether covers, on the rear seatback when properly restrained in a child following the instructions that
filler panel. For the wagon, the restraint system or infant restraint came with the child restraint and
outboard top tether anchors are system secured in a rear seating the instructions in this manual.
located under the tether covers position. See Where to Put the
behind the rear seatback. The Restraint on page 3‑51 for
wagon's center top tether anchor is additional information.
under the tether cover, located on
the safety belts. Refer to your

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
Do not attach more than one child of the retractor to set the lock, in this manual.
restraint to a single anchor. if the vehicle has one, after the
Attaching more than one child child restraint has been installed. 1.1. Find the lower anchors
restraint to a single anchor could for the desired seating
cause the anchor or attachment position.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
to come loose or even break attachments rub against the 1.2. Put the child restraint on
during a crash. A child or others vehicle’s safety belts. This may the seat.
could be injured. To reduce the damage these parts. If necessary, 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
risk of serious or fatal injuries move buckled safety belts to attachments on the child
during a crash, attach only avoid rubbing the LATCH restraint to the lower
one child restraint per anchor. attachments. anchors.
Do not fold the empty rear seat 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
with a safety belt buckled. This recommends that the top tether
{ WARNING could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
Children can be seriously injured safety belt to its stowed position, anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
or strangled if a shoulder belt is before folding the seat. child restraint instructions and
wrapped around their neck and 1. Attach and tighten the the following steps:
the safety belt continues to lower attachments to the 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
tighten. Buckle any unused safety lower anchors. If the child
belts behind the child restraint so 2.2. Press the ribbed area of the
restraint does not have lower
children cannot reach them. Pull cover to open the cover and
attachments or the desired
expose the anchor.
the shoulder belt all the way out seating position does not have
(Continued) lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
2.3. If you have an adjustable

head restraint, raise the
head restraint.
2.4. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according
to your child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are using If the position you are using
does not have a headrest has a fixed headrest or
or head restraint and you head restraint and you are
are using a dual tether, using a dual tether, route
route the tether over the the tether around the
seatback. headrest or head restraint.
If the position you are using

does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints

Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in
{ WARNING a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
A crash can damage the child restraint to make sure it is
LATCH system in the vehicle. compatible with this vehicle.
A damaged LATCH system may
not properly secure the child If the child restraint has the
If the position you are using LATCH system, see Lower Anchors
has a fixed headrest or restraint, resulting in serious
and Tethers for Children (LATCH
head restraint and you are injury or even death in a crash.
System) on page 3‑53 for how and
using a single tether, route To help make sure the LATCH
where to install your child restraint
the tether over the headrest system is working properly after using LATCH. If a child restraint is
or head restraint. a crash, see your dealer to have secured in the vehicle using a
3. Before placing a child in the the system inspected and any safety belt and it uses a top tether,
child restraint, make sure it is necessary replacements made as see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
securely held in place. To soon as possible. Children (LATCH System) on
check, grasp the child restraint page 3‑53 for top tether anchor
at the LATCH path and attempt If the vehicle has the LATCH system locations.
to move it side‐to‐side and and it was being used during a Do not secure a child restraint in a
back‐and‐forth. There should be crash, new LATCH system parts position without a top tether anchor
no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of may be needed. if a national or local law requires
movement for proper installation. that the top tether be anchored, or if
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH the instructions that come with the
system was not being used at the child restraint say that the top strap
time of the crash. must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
needs to be installed in the rear buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
the Restraint on page 3‑51. the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat. necessary.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
(Front Passenger Seat)
regarding the use of the top This vehicle has airbags. A rear
tether. See Lower Anchors and seat is a safer place to secure a
Tethers for Children (LATCH forward-facing child restraint. See
System) on page 3‑53 for more Where to Put the Restraint on
information. page 3‑51
7. Before placing a child in the In addition, the vehicle has a
child restraint, make sure it is passenger sensing system which
securely held in place. To check, is designed to turn off the front
grasp the child restraint at the passenger frontal airbag under
5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to certain conditions. See Passenger
on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back Sensing System on page 3‑37
shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child and Passenger Airbag Status
tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed, Indicator on page 5‑18 for more
and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than information, including important
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. safety information.
a forward-facing child restraint, To remove the child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
knee to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
A label on the sun visor says, If the child restraint has the LATCH
“Never put a rear-facing child seat WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and
in the front.” This is because the risk Tethers for Children (LATCH
to the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing System) on page 3‑53 for how and
if the airbag deploys. system has turned off the front where to install the child restraint
passenger frontal airbag, no using LATCH. If a child restraint is
system is fail-safe. No one can
{ WARNING guarantee that an airbag will not
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
A child in a rear-facing child deploy under some unusual Anchors and Tethers for Children
restraint can be seriously injured circumstance, even though it is (LATCH System) on page 3‑53 for
or killed if the front passenger turned off. top tether anchor locations.
airbag inflates. This is because Secure rear-facing child Do not secure a child seat in a
the back of the rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if position without a top tether anchor
restraint would be very close to the airbag is off. If you secure a if a national or local law requires
the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint in that the top tether be anchored, or if
forward-facing child restraint can the front seat, always move the the instructions that come with the
be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger seat as far back child restraint say that the top strap
front passenger airbag inflates as it will go. It is better to secure must be anchored.
and the passenger seat is in a the child restraint in a rear seat. In Canada, the law requires that
forward position. forward-facing child restraints have
See Passenger Sensing System
(Continued) a top tether, and that the tether be
on page 3‑37 for additional
attached.
information.
You will be using the lap-shoulder

belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
passenger frontal airbag, the
off indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when the 4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
vehicle is started. See buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
Passenger Airbag Status Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
Indicator on page 5‑18. the buckle, so that the safety set, the belt can be tightened but
belt could be quickly unbuckled not pulled out of the retractor.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat. if necessary.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
Try to pull the belt out of the If the airbag is off, the off indicator
retractor to make sure the in the passenger airbag status
retractor is locked. If the indicator will come on and stay on
retractor is not locked, repeat when the vehicle is started.
Steps 5 and 6. If a child restraint has been installed
7. Before placing a child in the and the on indicator is lit, see “If
child restraint, make sure it is the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
securely held in place. To Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
check, grasp the child restraint System on page 3‑37 for more
at the safety belt path and information.
attempt to move it side‐to‐side To remove the child restraint,
and back‐and‐forth. When unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
6. To tighten the belt, push down the child restraint is properly let it return to the stowed position.
on the child restraint, pull the installed, there should be no
shoulder portion of the belt to more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
tighten the lap portion of the belt, movement.
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Cupholders

Compartments
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cargo Management System
(Wagon Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cargo Net (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Convenience Net (Sedan and
Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 There are cupholders in the front
of the center console. Push the
Roof Rack System cover (A) to open.
Roof Rack System (Wagon) . . . 4-6
There are also cupholders in the
There is a storage area below the
rear center armrest. Pull the armrest
climate control system. To access,
down to use.
push the cover.
Glove Box
To open, press the button. Use the
key to lock and unlock. The glove
box has a shelf that can be removed
by pulling it out.
4-2 Storage
Center Console Storage Additional Storage 2. Align the cartridge over the
pin (B) on both sides. Press
Features the cartridge down and turn it
slightly forward until it clicks.
Cargo Cover (Wagon) 3. The cartridge is properly
The cargo cover can be used to installed if it fits firmly when
cover items in the cargo area. pulled and pushed.
4. Grasp the handle and unroll the
cover. Latch the posts into the
sockets.
To remove the cargo cover:
1. Release the cover from the
latch posts and carefully roll it
The center console has an upper back up.
and lower storage area. To access, 2. Pull the handle (A) back and
lift the levers on either side of remove it from the pin (B) on the
the center console. There is an trim panel. Repeat this on the
additional storage area behind the other side.
center console. To access, push the
cover. To install the cargo cover:
1. Hold the cartridge with the
pull-out shade toward the rear
of the vehicle.
Storage 4-3
Cargo Management
{ WARNING System (Wagon Only)
An improperly stored cargo cover
could be thrown about the vehicle
during a collision or sudden
maneuver. Someone could be
injured. If the cover is removed,
always store it in the proper
storage location. When it is
replaced, always be sure that
it is securely reattached.
The cover can be opened to
two positions to allow access to
the storage area.
Press the bottom of the load floor Some items may be stored in the
handle assembly to lift the top on cargo area when the cover is
the handle. Pull up on the handle closed.
to open the cargo management
system.
4-4 Storage
D-Ring Sliders Cargo Net (Wagon)

There are four D-Ring sliders that
move along rails on both sides of { WARNING
the cargo management area. These
can be used as tie-downs when Do not stack items higher than
storing cargo. the upper end of the cargo net or
hang anything from the net. Avoid
Installing D-Ring Sliders
items that have sharp edges or
that apply excessive force to the
net. If items are not properly
stored, damage to the net could
occur and items can be thrown
The loop of the D-Ring slider must about the vehicle. You or others
be facing inward toward the storage could be injured. Always store
area and the ring must be in the up items behind the net.
position for proper usage.
Push the button to move the D-Ring For vehicles equipped with a cargo
slider. The rings can be locked into net, it can be used to store light
various positions along the rail. loads, keeping them from falling
over or being thrown.
To install the D-Ring slider (A), The net should not be overloaded or
insert it into the channel (B) located used to store heavy loads.
in the middle of each rail.
Storage 4-5
1. There are four installation points 3. Mount the cargo net to the rear 4. The net can also be mounted to
in the roof, two located in front of seat tethers located on the front the tethers on the back of the
and two behind the rear seats. of the bottom cushions. rear seats when the seats are
Insert the top corners of the upright.
cargo net into the large opening
in the roof and secure by sliding
them into the small opening.
2. There are four tether positions
for the lower hook straps. In the
front position, the seat backs
should be down for the net to
properly hold items.
4-6 Storage
Roof Rack System crossrails can be purchased as

an accessory. See your dealer for
Roof Rack System
Notice: Loading cargo on the
(Wagon) roof rack that weighs more than
75 kg (165 lbs) or hangs over the
{ WARNING rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
If something is carried on top of so that it rests evenly between
the vehicle that is longer or wider the crossrails, making sure to
than the roof rack— like paneling, fasten cargo securely.
plywood, or a mattress— the wind
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
5. Pull on the straps to tighten can catch it while the vehicle is
when driving, check to make sure
the net. being driven. The item being
crossrails and cargo are securely
carried could be violently torn off, fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
Convenience Net and this could cause a collision, rack will make the vehicle’s center
and damage the vehicle. Never
(Sedan and Coupe) carry something longer or wider
of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
The vehicle may have a than the roof rack on top of the braking or abrupt maneuvers,
convenience net in the rear. Put vehicle unless using a GM otherwise it may result in loss of
small loads behind the net. It can certified accessory carrier. control. If driving for a long distance,
also be positioned into an envelope on rough roads, or at high speeds,
style to hold smaller items. The net occasionally stop the vehicle to
is not for heavier loads. Store items For vehicles with a roof rack, the
rack can be used to load items. make sure the cargo remains in its
as far forward as you can. place.
For roof racks that do not have
crossrails included, GM Certified
Storage 4-7
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle

capacity when loading the vehicle.
For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑11.
Installing the Crossrails
1. Identify the front and rear 3. The crossrail supports are

crossrail. labeled with an arrow that needs
2. The front crossrail (A) is smaller to point toward the front of the
than the rear crossrail (B). vehicle. A pin (A) will be visible
on the bottom when the crossrail
support lever is down. To install
the crossrail support, move the
A. Crossrails lever into the forward upper
position, the pin (A) will not be
B. Siderail Cover visible.
Before installing the crossrails (A),
remove the siderail covers (B). Pull
straight up on the rear of the siderail
cover. Store covers flat, do not stack
items on them.
4-8 Storage
7. Move the levers on both

crossrails to the down position.
Slide the crossrail until the
crossrail pin engages.
8. The crossrails should lock in the
same hole position on each side.
Removing the Crossrails
1. Move both levers of the crossrail
into the upper forward position.
2. Slide the crossrail into the
cut-out area.
4. Locate the forward or rearward 6. Levers must still be in the
cut-out (A) in the siderail forward up position. Move the 3. Remove the crossrail from the
channel. front crossrail forward beyond vehicle.
5. Insert both crossrail ends into the cut-out area (B). For the 4. Repeat for the other crossrail.
the cut-outs, making sure the rear crossrail, slide the crossrail
assembly (A) rearward until the 5. Replace the siderail covers on
arrows are pointed toward the the siderails.
front of the vehicle. entire crossrail support is in
first position beyond the channel
cut-out area (B).
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-26
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Controls Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Engine Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . 5-14
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Engine Oil Pressure Information Displays

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Driver Information
Controls Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Engine Coolant Temperature
Steering Wheel Controls Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Vehicle Messages
(Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-4 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-17 Battery Voltage and Charging
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Passenger Airbag Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-32
Rear Window Wiper/ Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-19 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Malfunction Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-34
Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Brake System Warning Engine Cooling System
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-35
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-36
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-36
Traction Control System Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-37
Warning Lights, Gauges, and (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-24 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Indicators Engine Coolant Temperature Object Detection System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Ride Control System
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-43
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Anti-Theft Alarm System Controls Power Tilt Wheel

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-43
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44 Steering Wheel
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-45 Adjustment
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-45
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-46
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-46
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-54
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Universal Remote System For vehicles with the power tilt
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 wheel, the control is on the left side
of the steering column.
. Push the control up or down to
To adjust the steering wheel: tilt the steering wheel up
1. Pull the lever down. or down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
. Push the control forward or
or down. rearward to move the steering
wheel toward the front or rear of
3. Pull or push the steering wheel the vehicle.
closer or away from you.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
4. Pull the lever up to lock the while driving.
steering wheel in place.

. For vehicles without a navigation
Steering Wheel Controls y / c z (Previous/Next): Press
to go to the previous or next radio system, press and hold g for
(Audio) two seconds to interact with
station stored as a favorite, or the
previous or next track of a CD. OnStar® or Bluetooth. See
the OnStar Owner's Guide,
Press to interact with the Bluetooth® or Bluetooth on page 7‑37 for
system. See Bluetooth on more information about these
page 7‑37 for more information. features.
+ e − (Volume): Press to increase . For vehicles with a navigation
or to decrease the volume. system, OnStar, or Bluetooth,
b g (Mute/Speech Recognition/ press and hold g for
Push to Talk): Press and release two seconds and say “hands
to silence the vehicle speakers only. free” to interact with OnStar or
The audio of the wireless and wired Bluetooth. See the OnStar
headphones, if the vehicle has Owner's Guide , or Bluetooth on
these features, does not mute. page 7‑37 for more information
Some audio steering wheel controls
Press and release b g again, to about these features.
could differ depending on the
vehicle's options. Controls that can turn the sound on.
be adjusted at the steering wheel . For vehicles with a navigation
may include:
system, press and hold g for
SRCE (Source): Press to two seconds to initiate speech
switch between the radio AM, FM, recognition. See “Speech
XM™ (if equipped), CD, DVD Recognition” in the Navigation
(if equipped), HDD (if equipped), System manual for more
auxiliary input jack, and USB information.
(if equipped).
Heated Steering Wheel Horn

For vehicles with a heated steering Press near the horn symbols or
wheel. press on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Wagon Model Shown

The windshield wiper lever is on the
right side of the steering column.
Move the windshield wiper lever to
select the wiper speed.
7 (Mist): Single wipe, briefly
move the lever down and release.
Several wipes, hold the lever down.
T (Off): Turns the wipers off.
& (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
( : Press to turn the heated For a delayed wiping cycle, turn the
steering wheel on or off. A light on
Sedan and Coupe Model Shown adjustable interval wiper band to set
the button displays when the feature
the frequency of wipes.
is turned on.
The steering wheel takes about
6 (Adjustable Interval Wiper
Band): Turn the band up for more
three minutes to start heating.
frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes.
1 : Slow wipes.
2 : Fast wipes.
If the windshield wipers are in use Windshield Washer Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid
for about six seconds while you are displays on the Driver Information
driving, the exterior lamps come on
automatically if the exterior lamp
{ WARNING Center (DIC) when the washer fluid
is low. See Driver Information
control is in AUTO. See “Wiper In freezing weather, do not use Center (DIC) on page 5‑27.
Activated Headlamps” for more the washer until the windshield See Washer Fluid on page 10‑26 for
information. is warmed. Otherwise the information on filling the windshield
Clear snow and ice from the wiper washer fluid can form ice on the washer fluid reservoir.
blades before using them. If frozen windshield, blocking your vision.
If the headlamps are on while the
to the windshield, carefully loosen or windshield is being washed, the
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades headlamp washers, if the vehicle
Sedan and Coupe Model
should be replaced. For more has them, will also turn on. See
information, see Wiper Blade K (Washer Fluid): Press the end
“Headlamp Washer” following for
Replacement on page 10‑34. of the windshield washer lever, to
more information.
wash the windshield. The washer
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
fluid sprays onto the windshield and Wiper Activated Headlamps
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
the wipers run for a few cycles to
stop the motor until it cools down. This feature activates the
clear the windshield. Press and
headlamps and parking lamps
Wiper Arm Assembly Protection hold K for more wash cycles. after the windshield wipers have
When using an automatic car wash, Wagon Model been in use for about six seconds.
move the windshield wiper lever to For this feature to work, the exterior
the OFF position. This disables Pull the lever to spray washer lamp control must be in AUTO.
the windshield wipers and/or rear fluid on the windshield. The spray
continues until the lever is released. The wiper-activated headlamps
wipers, if equipped.
The wipers will run a few times. immediately turn off when the
ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF,
or the windshield wiper control is
turned off.
Rear Window Z (Rear Wiper Delay Short): Headlamp Washer

Wiper/Washer Sets a five‐second delay between
For vehicles with headlamp washers
wipes.
For vehicles with a rear window they clear debris from the headlamp
wiper/washer, the controls are on 5 (Rear Wiper Delay Long): Sets lenses.
the end of the windshield wiper a 10‐second delay between wipes.
lever. = (Rear Washer): Push the
windshield wiper lever forward to
spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The lever returns to its
starting position when released.
The windshield washer reservoir is
used for the windshield and the rear
window. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir if either washer is not
working. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑26.
The headlamp washers are beneath
{ WARNING the headlamps.
Press the upper or lower portion of In freezing weather, do not use Press the washer button at the end
the button to control the rear wiper the washer until the windshield of the windshield wiper lever, to
and rear wiper delay. is warmed. Otherwise the wash the headlamps. Both the
washer fluid can form ice on the headlamps and the windshield will
The system turns off when the be washed. After the first wash, the
button is returned to the middle windshield, blocking your vision.
headlamps will not be washed until
position. the fifth press of the windshield
washer button.
The headlamps must be on to be vehicle is in P (Park). On a 3. Press V to scroll through and

washed. If the headlamps are off, manual transmission vehicle, select the appropriate
only the windshield will be washed only set it when the vehicle is variance zone.
when the washer button is pressed. stopped.
If the washer fluid is low, the 4. Press 3 until the vehicle
headlamp washers will not work. Press T until Press V To heading, for example, N for
Change Compass Zone North, is displayed in the DIC.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on displays.
page 5‑4 for more information. 5. Calibrate the compass. See
“Compass Calibration
Compass Procedure” following.
The vehicle may have a compass in Compass Calibration
the Driver Information Center (DIC). The compass can be manually
Compass Zone calibrated. Only calibrate the
compass in a magnetically clean
The zone is set to zone eight. If you and safe location, such as an open
do not live in zone eight or drive out parking lot, where driving the
of the area, the variance needs to vehicle in circles is not a danger.
be changed to the appropriate zone. Also, away from tall buildings, utility
To adjust for compass variance, use wires, manhole covers, or other
the following procedure: industrial structures, if possible.
2. Find the vehicle's current
Compass Variance (Zone) location and variance zone
Procedure number on the map.
1. Do not set the compass zone Zones 1 through 15 are
when the vehicle is moving. available.
On an automatic transmission
vehicle, only set it when the
If the DIC display does not show a Do not operate any switches Clock
heading, for example, N for North, such as window, sunroof,
or the heading does not change climate controls, seats, etc. The analog clock is located on the
after making turns, there may be a during the calibration procedure. instrument panel above the radio.
strong magnetic field interfering with The clock is not connected with any
the compass. Interference may be 2. Press T until Press V To other vehicle system and runs by
caused by a magnetic antenna Calibrate Compass displays. itself. To adjust the clock:
mount, magnetic note pad holder, 3. Press V to start the compass 1. Locate the adjustment buttons
or any other magnetic item. Turn off directly below the clock.
calibration.
the vehicle, move the magnetic
item, then turn on the vehicle and 4. The DIC will display Calibrating 2. Push and release the right
calibrate the compass. Drive In Circles. Drive the adjustment button to move the
vehicle in tight circles at less clock hands forward or the left
Compass Calibration Procedure than 8 km/h (5 mph) to complete adjustment button to make the
1. Before calibrating the compass, the calibration. The DIC will clock hands go backward.
check that the compass is set to display Calibration Complete for Holding either button down will
the correct variance zone. See a few seconds then returns to cause the clock to advance
faster. Release the button before
“Compass Variance (Zone) the Press V To Calibrate
Procedure” earlier in this the desired time is reached.
Compass display.
section. 3. Push and release either button
to adjust the time by one minute
increments.
Power Outlets Notice: Leaving electrical Notice: Hanging heavy

equipment plugged in for an equipment from the power
Accessory power outlets can be extended period of time while outlet can cause damage not
used to plug in electrical equipment, the vehicle is off will drain the covered by the vehicle warranty.
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. battery. Always unplug electrical The power outlets are designed
There are three accessory power equipment when not in use and for accessory power plugs only,
outlets. The power outlets located do not plug in equipment that such as cell phone charge cords.
below the climate control system, exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
inside the center console storage rating. Cigarette Lighter
bin, and on the rear of the center Certain electrical accessories The vehicle may have a cigarette
console are powered while the may not be compatible with the lighter. To use the lighter, push it in
vehicle is in ON/RUN, START or accessory power outlet and could all the way and let go. When it is
ACC/ACCESSORY mode, or until overload vehicle or adapter fuses. ready, it will pop back out by itself.
the driver door is opened within If a problem is experienced, see
10 minutes of turning off the vehicle. your dealer. Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
in while it is heating does not let
On the CTS Wagon there is an When adding electrical equipment, the lighter back away from the
additional accessory power outlet be sure to follow the proper heating element when it is hot.
located near the rear cargo net that installation instructions included Damage from overheating can
is powered at all times. with the equipment. See Add-On occur to the lighter or heating
Remove the cover to access and Electrical Equipment on page 9‑59. element, or a fuse could be
replace when not in use. blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
Ashtrays Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
The vehicle may have Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
two removable ashtrays. lights work together to indicate a
One ashtray can be placed into Indicators problem with the vehicle.
the instrument panel storage Warning lights and gauges can
compartment and the other into the When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
center console rear compartment. before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
To empty the ashtrays, hold on to to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
the edges of the bin and pull straight replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
out. To reinstall, push the tray back warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
into place. prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
Notice: If papers, pins, or other Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
flammable items are put in the could be a problem with a vehicle
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other function. Some warning lights come
smoking materials could ignite on briefly when the engine is started
them and possibly damage the to indicate they are working.
vehicle. Never put flammable
items in the ashtray.
Instrument Cluster
English shown, Metric similar

English V-Series shown, Metric and Manual similar

Speedometer The trip odometer is part of the up-shift to avoid the engine
Driver Information Center (DIC); speed limit. See Automatic
The speedometer shows the for more information see Driver Transmission on page 9‑26 or
vehicle's speed in either kilometers Information Center (DIC) on Manual Transmission on page 9‑31
per hour (km/h) or miles per page 5‑27. for more information.
hour (mph).
For vehicles that have the
navigation system, see the Fuel Gauge
Odometer Navigation System manual for
The odometer shows how far the more information.
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles. Tachometer
This vehicle has a tamper‐resistant The tachometer displays the
odometer. The digital odometer will engine speed in revolutions per
read 999,999 if it is turned back. minute (rpm).
If the vehicle needs a new odometer Notice: If the engine is operated
installed, it must be set to the with the tachometer in the shaded
mileage total of the old odometer. warning area, the vehicle could
If that is not possible, then it must be damaged, and the damages
be set at zero and a label must be would not be covered by the
put on the driver door to show the vehicle warranty. Do not operate
old mileage reading when the new When the ignition is on, the fuel
the engine with the tachometer in gauge indicates how much fuel is
odometer was installed. the shaded warning area. left in the tank.
Trip Odometer The CTS-V tachometer has tracer An arrow on the fuel gauge
lights that follow the movement of indicates the side of the vehicle
The trip odometer can record the the tachometer indicator. The tracer the fuel door is on.
number of kilometers or miles lights also flash when it is time to
traveled for up to two trips.
The Fuel Level Low message Boost Gauge For the CTS-V, this gauge is located
appears in the Driver Information in the instrument panel cluster.
Center (DIC) and a single chime This gauge indicates positive
sounds. See Fuel System manifold pressure which is the
Messages on page 5‑36 for more induction air pressure level in the
information. intake manifold before it enters the
Normal operation of the fuel gauge combustion chamber. This gauge
includes: reads zero under light throttle before
. At the service station, the fuel boost is generated.
pump shuts off before the gauge The gauge automatically resets
reads full. to zero every time the engine is
. It takes a little more or less started.
fuel to fill up than the gauge
indicated. Metric Engine Speed Limiter
. The gauge moves a little while This feature prevents the engine
turning a corner or speeding up. speed from reaching an unsafe
level. If the level is too high, the
. The gauge takes a few seconds throttle closes or limits the fuel
to stabilize after the ignition is supply until the engine speed
turned on, and goes back to returns to a safe level. Throttle
empty when the ignition is operation and fuel supply return
turned off. to normal when engine speed is
lowered.
English
For the CTS-V, the tachometer A reading outside the normal

tracer lights flash prior to reaching operating range may be caused
engine speed limit. The tracer lights by a dangerously low oil level or
also flash on automatic transmission some other problem causing low oil
vehicles while in the DSC or Tap pressure. Oil should be checked as
Shift modes. soon as possible. See Oil Pressure
Low Stop Engine under Driver
Engine Oil Pressure Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27 and Engine Oil on
Gauge page 10‑10.
{ WARNING
English
Do not keep driving if the oil
For vehicles with an engine oil pressure is low. The engine can
pressure gauge, it shows the engine become so hot that it catches fire.
oil pressure in kPa (kilopascals) Someone could be burned. Check
or psi (pounds per square inch)
the oil as soon as possible and
when the engine is running.
have the vehicle serviced.
Oil pressure may vary with engine
speed, outside temperature, and oil
viscosity, but if readings are outside Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
Metric the normal operating range, the oil maintenance can damage the
pressure light will come on. See engine. The repairs would not be
Engine Oil Pressure Light on covered by the vehicle warranty.
page 5‑25 for more information. Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
Engine Coolant Safety Belt Reminders

Temperature Gauge Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
English
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature. If the engine When the engine is started, this light
Metric
coolant overheats, the engine comes on and a chime sounds for
coolant temperature warning light several seconds to remind a driver
comes on. See Engine Coolant to fasten the safety belt, unless the
Temperature Warning Light on driver safety belt is already buckled.
page 5‑24 and Engine Overheating The safety belt light flashes for
on page 10‑24 for more information. several seconds, then comes on
solid for several more.
This cycle repeats if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
If the driver safety belt is already The front passenger safety belt
buckled, neither the light nor the warning light and chime may turn
chime comes on. on if an object such as a briefcase,
handbag, grocery bag, laptop,
Passenger Safety Belt or other electronic device is put on
Reminder Light the seat . To turn off the warning
light and/or chime, remove the The airbag readiness light comes on
object from the seat or buckle the and stays on for several seconds
safety belt. when the vehicle is started. Then
the light goes out.
Airbag Readiness Light
This light shows if there is an { WARNING
electrical problem. The system
Several seconds after the engine If the airbag readiness light stays
check includes the airbag sensor,
is started, a chime sounds for a on after the vehicle is started or
the pretensioners, the airbag
number of seconds to remind the comes on while driving, it means
modules, the wiring, and the crash
front passenger to buckle their
sensing and diagnostic module. the airbag system might not be
safety belt. The passenger safety
For more information on the airbag working properly. The airbags in
belt light comes on and stays on for
system, see Airbag System on the vehicle might not inflate in a
several seconds, flashes for several
page 3‑30. crash, or they could even inflate
more seconds, and then comes on
solid for several more. without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
This cycle repeats if the passenger right away.
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
Passenger Airbag Status several seconds as a system check. If, after several seconds, both
If the vehicle has remote start, and status indicator lights remain on,
Indicator it is being used to start the vehicle or if there are no lights at all, there
The vehicle has a passenger from a distance, you may not see may be a problem with the lights or
sensing system. See Passenger the system check. Then, after the passenger sensing system. See
Sensing System on page 3‑37 for several more seconds, the status your dealer for service.
important safety information. The indicator will light either ON or OFF,
instrument panel has a passenger
airbag status indicator.
or either the on or off symbol, to let
you know the status of the right front
{ WARNING
passenger frontal airbag. If the airbag readiness light ever
If the word ON or the on symbol is comes on and stays on, it means
lit on the passenger airbag status that something may be wrong
indicator, it means that the outboard with the airbag system. To help
front passenger frontal airbag is avoid injury to yourself or others,
enabled (may inflate). have the vehicle serviced right
United States away. See Airbag Readiness
If the word OFF or the off symbol
is lit on the passenger airbag Light on page 5‑17 for more
status indicator, it means that the information, including important
passenger sensing system has safety information.
turned off the outboard front
passenger frontal airbag.
Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light the words ON and OFF,
or the symbols for on and off, for
Charging System Light When this light comes on, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) also
displays a message.
See Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 5‑31.
If a short distance must be driven
This light should come on when the
with the light on, be sure to turn off
ignition is on, but the engine is not
all accessories, such as the radio
The charging system light comes on running, as a check to show it is
and air conditioner.
briefly when the ignition is turned working. If it does not, have the
on, but the engine is not running, as vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Malfunction
a check to show the light is working. If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
It should go out when the engine is Indicator Lamp comes on and stays on while the
started. A computer system called OBD II engine is running, this indicates that
If the light stays on, or comes on (On-Board Diagnostics-Second there is an OBD II problem and
while driving, there may be a Generation) monitors operation of service is required.
problem with the electrical charging the fuel, ignition, and emission
system. Have it checked by your control systems. It ensures that
dealer. Driving while this light is on emissions are at acceptable levels
could drain the battery. for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
Malfunctions often are indicated by costly repairs not covered by If the light continues to flash,
the system before any problem is the vehicle warranty. This when it is safe to do so, stop the
apparent. Being aware of the light could also result in a failure vehicle. Find a safe place to park
can prevent more serious damage to pass a required Emission the vehicle. Turn the vehicle off,
to the vehicle. This system assists Inspection/Maintenance test. See wait at least 10 seconds, and
the service technician in correctly Accessories and Modifications on restart the engine. If the light is still
diagnosing any malfunction. page 10‑3. flashing, follow the previous steps
Notice: If the vehicle is This light comes on during a and see your dealer for service as
continually driven with this light malfunction in one of two ways: soon as possible.
on, after a while, the emission Light Flashing: A misfire condition Light On Steady: An emission
controls might not work as well, has been detected. A misfire control system malfunction has
the vehicle fuel economy might increases vehicle emissions and been detected on the vehicle.
not be as good, and the engine could damage the emission control Diagnosis and service might be
might not run as smoothly. This system on the vehicle. Diagnosis required.
could lead to costly repairs that and service might be required. The following may correct an
might not be covered by the emissions system malfunction:
vehicle warranty. To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle: . Make sure the fuel cap is
Notice: Modifications made to the fully installed. See Filling the
engine, transmission, exhaust, . Reduce vehicle speed.
Tank on page 9‑50. The
intake, or fuel system of the . Avoid hard accelerations. diagnostic system can determine
vehicle or the replacement if the fuel cap has been left off or
of the original tires with other
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
improperly installed. A loose or
than those of the same Tire . If towing a trailer, reduce the missing fuel cap allows fuel to
Performance Criteria (TPC) can amount of cargo being hauled evaporate into the atmosphere.
affect the vehicle's emission as soon as it is possible. A few driving trips with the cap
controls and can cause this light properly installed should turn the
to come on. Modifications to light off.
these systems could lead to

. Make sure the electrical If none of the above have made
system is not wet. The system the light turn off, your dealer
could be wet if the vehicle was can check the vehicle. The dealer
driven through a deep puddle of has the proper test equipment
water. The condition is usually and diagnostic tools to fix any
corrected when the electrical mechanical or electrical problems
system dries out. A few driving that might have developed.
trips should turn the light off. The DLC is under the instrument
Emissions Inspection and panel to the left of the steering
. Make sure to fuel the vehicle wheel. See your dealer if assistance
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality Maintenance Programs
is needed.
causes the engine not to run as Some state/provincial and local
efficiently as designed and can governments may have programs The vehicle may not pass
cause: stalling after start-up, to inspect the on-vehicle emission inspection if:
stalling when the vehicle is control equipment. For the . The malfunction indicator
changed into gear, misfiring, inspection, the emission system lamp is on with the engine
hesitation on acceleration, test equipment is connected running, or if the light does not
or stumbling on acceleration. to the vehicle’s Data Link come on when the ignition is
These conditions might go away Connector (DLC). turned to ON/RUN while the
once the engine is warmed up. engine is off.
If one or more of these . The critical emission
conditions occurs, change the control systems have not
fuel brand used. It will require at been completely diagnosed
least one full tank of the proper by the system. This can
fuel to turn the light off. happen if the battery has
See Recommended Fuel on recently been replaced or
page 9‑48. if the battery has run down.
The diagnostic system evaluates

critical emission control systems { CAUTION
during normal driving. This can
take several days of routine The brake system might not be
driving. If this has been done working properly if the brake
and the vehicle still does not system warning light is on.
pass the inspection, your dealer Metric English Driving with the brake system
can prepare the vehicle for warning light on can lead to a
inspection. This light should come on briefly crash. If the light is still on after
when the ignition is placed in the vehicle has been pulled off
Brake System Warning ON/RUN. If it does not come on the road and carefully stopped,
then, have it fixed so it will be ready have the vehicle towed for
Light to warn if there is a problem. service.
The vehicle brake system consists When the ignition is on, the brake
of two hydraulic circuits. If one system warning light also comes on
circuit is not working, the remaining For vehicles with the Electric Park
when the parking brake is set. Brake (EPB), this red brake warning
circuit can still work to stop the
vehicle. For normal braking The light flashes or stays on if the light comes on when the park brake
performance, both circuits need parking brake is not fully released. is applied. If the light continues
to be working flashing after the park brake is
If the light stays on after the parking released, or while driving, there is a
If the warning light comes on, there brake is fully released, there is a problem with the Electric Parking
is a brake problem. Have the brake base brake problem. Brake system.
system inspected right away.
If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, see your
dealer.
Antilock Brake System brakes, but not antilock brakes.

If the regular brake system warning
(ABS) Warning Light light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
For vehicles with the Electric Park page 5‑22.
Brake (EPB), this park brake status For vehicles with a Driver
light should come on briefly when Information Center (DIC), see
ignition is placed in ON/RUN. If it Driver Information Center (DIC) on
does not come on then, have it fixed For vehicles with the Antilock Brake page 5‑27 for all brake related DIC
so it will be ready to warn if there is System (ABS), this light comes on messages.
a problem. briefly when the engine is started.
If this park brake light comes on, If the light does not come on, have it Up-Shift Light
there is a problem with a system on fixed so it will be ready to warn if
the vehicle that is causing the park there is a problem.
brake system to work at a reduced If the ABS light stays on, turn the
level. The vehicle can still be driven, ignition off. If the light comes on
but should be taken to a dealer while driving, stop as soon as it is
See Brake Assist (Except CTS-V) safely possible and turn the ignition
on page 9‑37 for more information. off. A chime may also sound when
the light comes on steady. If this The vehicle may have an up-shift
happens, start the engine again to light. It indicates when to shift to
reset the system. If the ABS light the next higher gear for best fuel
stays on, or comes on again while economy.
driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning See Manual Transmission on
light is not on, the vehicle still has page 9‑31 for more information.
For the CTS-V, the tracer lights If the light comes on or stays on If it does not, have the vehicle
function as a performance up-shift while driving, there may be a serviced by your dealer. If the
light. problem with the TCS/StabiliTrak system is working normally, the
The tracers flash to indicate when and the vehicle may need service. indicator light then goes off.
to shift to the next higher gear to When this warning light is on, the If the light comes on and stays on
avoid the engine speed limit. system does not limit wheel spin. while driving, the vehicle may have
See Automatic Transmission on Adjust driving accordingly. a problem with the cooling system.
page 9‑26 or Manual Transmission See Traction Control System (TCS) Stop the vehicle and turn off the
on page 9‑31 for more information. on page 9‑38 and StabiliTrak® engine to avoid damage to the
System on page 9‑39 for more engine. A warning chime sounds
Traction Control System information. when this light is on.
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light See Engine Overheating on
Engine Coolant page 10‑24 for more information.
Temperature Warning
Light Tire Pressure Light
The Traction Control System (TCS)/

StabiliTrak warning light should
come on briefly when the engine is
started. The engine coolant temperature For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
If it does not, have the vehicle warning light comes on briefly when Monitor System (TPMS), this light
serviced by your dealer. If the the engine is started. comes on briefly when the engine
system is working normally, the is started. It provides information
indicator light then goes off. about tire pressures and the TPMS.
When the Light is On Steady Engine Oil Pressure Light

This indicates that one or more
of the tires are significantly
underinflated.
{ WARNING
A tire pressure message can Do not keep driving if the oil
accompany the light. See Tire pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire. The oil pressure light should come
Messages on page 5‑44 for more
Someone could be burned. Check on briefly as the engine is started.
information. Stop as soon as
the oil as soon as possible and If it does not come on have the
possible, and inflate the tires to the
have the vehicle serviced. vehicle serviced by your dealer.
pressure value shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See If the light comes on and stays on, it
Tire Pressure on page 10‑72 for Notice: Lack of proper engine oil means that oil is not flowing through
more information. maintenance can damage the the engine properly. The vehicle
engine. The repairs would not be could be low on oil and might have
When the Light Flashes First and some other system problem. See
Then is On Steady covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance your dealer.
This indicates that there may be a schedule for changing engine oil.
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on
steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑75 for more
information.
Security Light See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Lamps On Reminder

Changer on page 6‑2 for more
information.
Front Fog Lamp Light
This light flashes when the security This light comes on whenever the
system is activated. parking lamps are on.
For more information, see Vehicle See Exterior Lamps Off Reminder
Security on page 2‑25. on page 6‑2 for more information.
The front fog lamp light comes on
when the fog lamps are in use.
High-Beam On Light
The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6‑5 for more
information.
The high-beam on light comes on

when the high-beam headlamps are
in use.
Cruise Control Light Information Displays If a problem is detected, a warning

message appears on the display. All
messages should be taken seriously
Driver Information and clearing the message does not
Center (DIC) correct the problem.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) DIC Operation and Displays
provides status of many vehicle
systems. The DIC displays warning/
This light comes on whenever the status messages. The DIC display
cruise control is active. is at the bottom of the instrument
panel cluster. The DIC buttons are
The light goes out when the cruise on the instrument panel next to the
control is turned off. See Cruise steering wheel.
Control on page 9‑41 for more
information. The DIC comes on when the ignition
is on. After a short delay, the DIC
displays the information that was
last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The top line of the DIC display
shows the DIC information. The Press the DIC buttons to access the
bottom line shows the compass. different displays.
The compass displays in the 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to scroll
trip/fuel menus and in some through the trip and fuel displays.
vehicle information menus. See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items”
following for more information.
T (Vehicle Information): Press Trip A or Trip B If the fuel is low, the Fuel Level Low
to scroll through the vehicle Displays the current distance message displays. See “Fuel Level
information displays. See “Vehicle traveled since the last reset for each Low” under Fuel System Messages
Information Display Menu Items” trip odometer in either miles (mi) or on page 5‑36 for more information.
following for more information. kilometers (km). Both odometers AVG (Average) Economy
U (Customization): Press can be used at the same time.
Reset each trip odometer to zero by Displays the approximate average
to scroll through each of the liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
customization features. See Vehicle pressing and holding the set/reset
button when Trip A or Trip B is or miles per gallon (mpg). The
Personalization on page 5‑46 for calculation is based on the number
more information. displayed.
of L/100 km (mpg) recorded since
V (Set/Reset): Press to reset Fuel Range the last time this display was reset.
certain DIC features and to Displays the approximate remaining Press the set/reset button to reset
acknowledge and clear DIC kilometers (km) or miles (mi) you to zero.
warning messages. can drive without refilling the fuel Timer
y z (Menu Up/Down): Press to tank. This estimate is based on the
Can be used to measure time. For
scroll up and down the menu items. current driving conditions and
changes if the driving conditions example, timing how long it takes to
Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items change. For example, freeway travel from one point to another. To
access the timer, press the trip/fuel
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to display driving may produce better fuel
button until Timer 00:00:00 displays.
the following menu items: economy than city driving with
frequent stops, so the range would To turn on the timer, press the
Odometer adjust for that. set/reset button.
Displays the distance the vehicle Once the range drops below about
has been driven in either miles (mi) 30 miles (48 km) remaining, the
or kilometers (km). display shows Low Range.
To turn off the timer, press the Speedometer When the oil life is depleted, the
set/reset button again. The timer Displays a digital speedometer in Change Engine Oil Soon message
displays the end timing value. the DIC. The speed displays in displays. Change the oil as soon as
To reset the timer to zero, press and either miles per hour (mph) or possible. Additional maintenance
hold the set/reset button. kilometers per hour (km/h). To is also recommended in the
change the units from English to Maintenance Schedule in this
Inst (Instantaneous) Economy metric, see “Units” later in this manual. See Scheduled
Displays the current fuel economy section. Maintenance on page 11‑2 and
in either liters per 100 kilometers Engine Oil on page 10‑10.
(L/100 km) or miles per Blank Display The Oil Life must be reset after
gallon (mpg). This number This display shows no information. each oil change. Avoid accidental
changes frequently as driving resetting of the Oil Life system.
conditions change. It cannot be Vehicle Information Display It cannot be reset accurately until
reset. Menu Items the next oil change. To reset the
AVG (Average) Speed T (Vehicle Information): Press engine oil life system, See Engine
to display the following menu items: Oil Life System on page 10‑14.
Displays the average speed of the The system is reset when
vehicle in either kilometers per Oil Life Remaining 100% displays.
hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph). If the vehicle has this display,
This calculation is based on the Units
it shows the estimated oil life
various vehicle speeds recorded remaining. If you see 99% Oil Life Select to display English or
since the last reset of this display. Remaining on the display, that Metric units of measure. Press the
Press the set/reset button to reset means that 99% of the current oil set/reset button to select when units
to zero. life remains. is displayed.
Parking Assist information button again until the Calibrate Compass

If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic DIC displays Rear Tire kPa (PSI) The vehicle may have this feature.
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, Left ## Right ##. The compass can be manually
this display allows the system to If a low tire pressure condition calibrated. To calibrate the compass
be turned on or off. Once in this is detected by the system while through the DIC, see “DIC
display, press the set/reset button driving, a message advises to add Compass” later in this section.
to select between On or Off. The air to a specific tire displays. See
URPA system automatically turns Tire Pressure on page 10‑72 and Change Compass Zone
back on after each vehicle start. Tire Messages on page 5‑44 for The vehicle may have this feature.
When the URPA system is turned more information. To change the compass zone
off and the vehicle is shifted out through the DIC, see “DIC
of P (Park), the DIC displays the Battery Voltage Compass” later in this section.
Parking Assist Off message as a This display shows the current
battery voltage. The vehicle's Trans (Transmission) Temp
reminder that the system has been
(Temperature) (CTS-V Only)
turned off. See Object Detection charging system regulates voltage
System Messages on page 5‑40 based on the state of the battery. This display shows the transmission
and Ultrasonic Parking Assist on The battery voltage may fluctuate fluid temperature in either degrees
page 9‑43 for more information. when viewing this information on the Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees
DIC. This is normal. Celsius (°C).
Tire Pressure
If there is a problem with the Oil Pressure (CTS-V Only)
Tire pressure is displayed in battery charging system, the
the DIC for each tire in either This display shows the oil pressure
charging system light illuminates
kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per in either pounds per square
and/or the DIC displays a message.
square inch (psi). Press the vehicle inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
See Charging System Light on
information button until the DIC page 5‑19, Battery Voltage and
displays Front Tire kPa (PSI) Charging Messages on page 5‑31
Left ## Right ##. Press the vehicle and Battery Load Management on
Lateral Acceleration (CTS-V Only) Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and

Lateral Acceleration measures the
Messages displayed on the DIC Charging Messages
force of a turn or corner. For
indicate the status of the vehicle BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
example, when turning right, it
or some action may be needed
forces to the left. This gauge This message displays when the
to correct a condition. Multiple
displays the “g” force from 0.0 g system detects that the battery
messages may appear one after
to 2.0 g. voltage is dropping below expected
another.
Blank Display levels. The battery saver system
The messages that do not starts reducing certain features of
This display shows no information. require immediate action can be the vehicle that may be noticeable.
acknowledged and cleared by At the point that the features are
DIC Compass
pressing V (Set/Reset). disabled, this message is displayed.
The vehicle may have a compass in It means that the vehicle is trying to
the Driver Information Center (DIC). The messages that require
immediate action cannot be cleared save the charge in the battery.
See Compass on page 5‑7 for
information. until that action is performed. Turn off all unnecessary
All messages should be taken accessories to allow the battery
seriously and clearing the message to recharge.
does not correct the problem. The normal battery voltage range
The following are the possible is 11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor
messages and some information battery voltage on the DIC by
about them. pressing the vehicle information
button until Battery Voltage is
displayed.
BATTERY VOLTS LOW The normal battery voltage range is Brake System Messages
11.5 to 15.5 volts. Monitor battery
This message displays when the PARK BRAKE RELEASED
voltage on the DIC by pressing the
electrical system is charging less
vehicle information button until For vehicles with the Electric
than 10 volts or the battery has
Battery Voltage is displayed. Parking Brake, this message
been drained.
SERVICE BATTERY displays when the parking brake
If this message appears has been released from the set
immediately after starting the CHARGING SYSTEM
position. See the Electric Parking
engine, it is possible that the This message displays when there Brake information under Parking
generator can still recharge the is a problem with the generator and Brake (Manual) on page 9‑34
battery. The battery should recharge battery charging systems. Driving or Parking Brake (Electric) on
while driving, but may take a few with this problem could drain the page 9‑35 for more information.
hours to do so. Consider using battery. Turn off all unnecessary
an auxiliary charger to boost the accessories. Stop and turn off the PARK BRAKE SET
battery after returning home or vehicle as soon as it is safe to do For vehicles with the Electric
to a final destination. Make sure so. Have the electrical system Parking Brake, this message
you follow the manufacturer's checked by your dealer. Under displays when the parking brake
instructions. certain conditions, the charging has been applied to the set position.
If this message appears while system light may also turn on in See the Electric Parking Brake
driving or after starting the vehicle the instrument panel cluster. information under Parking Brake
and stays on, have it checked See Charging System Light on (Manual) on page 9‑34 or Parking
immediately to determine the cause page 5‑19 for more information. Brake (Electric) on page 9‑35 for
of this problem. more information.
To help the generator recharge the
battery quickly, reduce the load on
the electrical system by turning off
the accessories.
PRESS BRAKE TO START SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

ENGINE (AUTOMATIC This message displays if there is This message displays, while the
TRANSMISSION ONLY) a problem with the brake system. ignition is on, when the brake fluid
If the vehicle has the keyless The brake system warning light and level is low. The brake system
access system, this message the antilock brake system (ABS) warning light on the instrument
displays if you try to start the engine warning light may also display on panel cluster also comes on. See
without having the brake pressed. the instrument panel cluster. See Brake System Warning Light on
The brake needs to be pressed Brake System Warning Light on page 5‑22 for more information. This
when starting the engine. See page 5‑22 and Antilock Brake message may also be displayed for
Ignition Positions (Key Access) on System (ABS) Warning Light on other brake system problems. Have
page 9‑17 or Ignition Positions page 5‑23 for more information. the brake system serviced by your
(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 for Stop as soon as possible and turn dealer as soon as possible.
more information. off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the SERVICE PARK BRAKE
RELEASE PARK BRAKE DIC display. If the message displays For vehicles with the Electric
SWITCH immediately or again after you begin Parking Brake, this message
For vehicles with the Electric driving, the brake system needs displays if a problem is detected
Parking Brake, this message service. See your dealer as soon with the electric parking brake
displays if the Park Brake switch is as possible. See Antilock Brake system. See your dealer for service.
pulled while the vehicle is moving. System (ABS) on page 9‑33 for
See the Electric Parking Brake more information.
information under Parking Brake
(Manual) on page 9‑34 or Parking
Brake (Electric) on page 9‑35 for
more information.
STEP ON BRAKE TO CALIBRATION COMPLETE LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

RELEASE PARK BRAKE This message displays when the This message displays when the
For vehicles with the Electric compass calibration is complete. driver side rear door is not closed
Parking Brake, this message See Compass on page 5‑7 for more completely. Make sure that the door
displays if you try to release the information. is closed completely.
park brake system without first
pressing the brake pedal. See the Cruise Control Messages PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
Electric Parking Brake information This message displays when the
under Parking Brake (Manual) on CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH passenger side front door is not
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake (KM/H) closed completely. Make sure that
(Electric) on page 9‑35 for more This message displays whenever the door is closed completely.
information. the cruise control is set. See Cruise REAR ACCESS OPEN (Wagon)
Control on page 9‑41 for more
Compass Messages information. This message displays when the
liftgate is not closed completely.
CALIBRATING DRIVE IN Make sure that the liftgate is closed
CIRCLES
Door Ajar Messages
completely.
This message displays when DRIVER DOOR OPEN
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
calibrating the compass. Drive the This message displays when the
vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph driver door is not closed completely. This message displays when the
(8 km/h) to complete the calibration. Close the door completely. passenger side rear door is not
See Compass on page 5‑7 for more closed completely. Make sure that
information. HOOD OPEN the door is closed completely.
This message displays when the
hood is not closed completely.
Make sure that the hood is closed
completely.
TRUNK OPEN If this message continues to appear, See Overheated Engine Protection
(Sedan and Coupe) have the system repaired by your Operating Mode on page 10‑25 for
dealer as soon as possible to avoid information on driving to a safe
This message displays when the damage to the engine. place in an emergency.
trunk is not closed completely.
Make sure that the trunk is closed ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE Engine Oil Messages
completely. ENGINE
Notice: If you drive the vehicle CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Engine Cooling System while the engine is overheating, When this message displays, it
Messages severe engine damage may means that service is required
occur. If an overheat warning for the vehicle. See your dealer.
ENGINE HOT A/C (AIR appears on the instrument panel See Scheduled Maintenance on
CONDITIONING) OFF cluster and/or DIC, stop the page 11‑2 and Engine Oil on
This message displays when the vehicle as soon as possible. page 10‑10 for more information.
engine coolant becomes hotter than Do not increase the engine
When you reset the Change Engine
the normal operating temperature. speed above normal idling speed.
Oil Soon message by clearing it
See Engine Coolant Temperature See Engine Overheating on
from the display, you still must reset
Gauge on page 5‑16. To avoid page 10‑24 for more information.
the engine oil life system separately.
added strain on a hot engine, This message displays when the For more information on resetting
the air conditioning compressor engine coolant temperature is too the engine oil life system, see
automatically turns off. When the hot. Stop and allow the vehicle Engine Oil Life System on
coolant temperature returns to to idle until it cools down. If the page 10‑14.
normal, the air conditioning message does not clear in a few
compressor turns back on. You minutes or if the overheat light stays
can continue to drive the vehicle. on, shut the vehicle off and have
it serviced before driving again.
See Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light on page 5‑24.
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL pressure is corrected. See Engine If this message is on, but there
Oil on page 10‑10 for more is no reduction in performance,
If the vehicle has an oil level sensor,
information. proceed to your destination. The
this message displays if the oil level
This message displays when the performance may be reduced the
in the vehicle is low. Check the oil
vehicle's engine oil pressure is low. next time the vehicle is driven. The
level and correct it as necessary.
The oil pressure light may also vehicle may be driven at a reduced
You may need to let the vehicle cool
appear on the instrument panel speed while this message is on,
or warm up and cycle the ignition to
cluster. See Engine Oil Pressure but acceleration and speed may be
be sure this message clears.
Light on page 5‑25. See Engine Oil reduced. Anytime this message
This message clears itself after stays on, the vehicle should be
on page 10‑10 for more information.
10 seconds, until the next ignition taken to your dealer for service as
cycle. See Engine Oil on Stop the vehicle immediately, as soon as possible.
page 10‑10 for additional engine damage can result from
information. driving a vehicle with low oil Fuel System Messages
pressure. Have the vehicle serviced
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP by your dealer as soon as possible FUEL LEVEL LOW
ENGINE when this message is displayed.
Notice: If you drive the vehicle vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel
while the engine oil pressure Engine Power Messages tank as soon as possible. A chime
is low, severe engine damage may sound when this message
may occur. If a low oil pressure ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
displays. See Filling the Tank on
warning appears on the This message displays when the page 9‑50.
instrument panel cluster and/or engine power is being reduced to
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as protect the engine from damage.
possible. Do not drive the vehicle There could be several malfunctions
until the cause of the low oil that might cause this message.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP information for Remote Keyless Try moving the keyless access
Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key transmitter away from these
This message displays when
Access) on page 2‑5 or Remote devices when starting the
the fuel cap has not been fully
Keyless Entry (RKE) System vehicle. In addition, PDA devices
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to
Operation (Keyless Access) on and remote garage and gate
ensure that it is on and tightened
page 2‑7 for more information. openers may also generate
properly.
Electromagnetic Interference
ELECTRONIC KEY NOT (EMI) that may interfere with the
Key and Lock Messages DETECTED keyless access transmitter. Do
ACCESSORY MODE ACTIVE If the vehicle has the keyless not carry the keyless access
access system, this message transmitter in the same pocket or
If the vehicle has the keyless displays if the vehicle does not bag as these devices.
access system, this message detect the presence of a transmitter
displays when the accessory mode
. The vehicle is experiencing
when you have attempted to start Electromagnetic Interference
is active. See Ignition Positions (Key the vehicle or a vehicle door has
Access) on page 9‑17 or Ignition (EMI). Some locations, such as
just closed. The following conditions airports, automatic toll booths,
Positions (Keyless Access) on may cause this message to appear:
page 9‑18 for more information. and some gas stations have EMI
. Driver-added equipment plugged fields which may interfere with
ELECTRONIC KEY ALREADY into the accessory power outlet the keyless access transmitter.
KNOWN on the center console is causing
If the vehicle has the keyless interference. Examples of these
access system, this message devices are cell phones and cell
displays if you try to match a phone chargers, two-way radios,
transmitter that has already been power inverters, or similar items.
learned. See the Keyless Access
ELECTRONIC KEY NOT LEARN DELAY ACTIVE WAIT

DETECTED RESTART XX MIN (MINUTES)
ALLOWED If the vehicle has the keyless
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this message
access system, this message displays when matching new
displays when the keyless access transmitters to the vehicle. See
transmitter is not detected inside the the Keyless Access information
vehicle while you are trying to turn for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
the ignition off. The vehicle may be System Operation (Key Access) on
near a strong radio antenna signal page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
causing the keyless access system (RKE) System Operation (Keyless
to be jammed. If you have the Access) on page 2‑7 for more
If moving the transmitter to keyless access transmitter with information.
different locations within the you, get out of the vehicle and lock
vehicle does not help, place the the doors. If you do not have the
MAXIMUM # ELECTRONIC
transmitter in the center console keyless access transmitter with you, KEYS LEARNED
transmitter pocket with the you will be able to start the vehicle If the vehicle has the keyless
buttons facing the front of the again within five minutes, or until the access system, this message
vehicle and then start the vehicle's content theft deterrent displays when the maximum
vehicle. system is armed. See Starting the number of transmitters have been
. The vehicle's battery voltage is Engine on page 9‑19 for more learned. See the Keyless Access
low. The battery voltage must information. information for Remote Keyless
be above 10 volts for the Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key
keyless access transmitter Access) on page 2‑5 or Remote
to be detected properly. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access) on
PRESS START CONTROL TO REPLACE BATTERY IN SERVICE KEYLESS START

LEARN KEYS REMOTE KEY SYSTEM
If the vehicle has the keyless This message displays when the If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message battery in the Remote Keyless access system, this message
displays when matching new Entry (RKE) or keyless access displays when there is a problem
transmitters to the vehicle. See the transmitter needs to be replaced. with this feature. See your dealer.
Keyless Access information for To replace the battery, see
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) “Battery Replacement” under Lamp Messages
System Operation (Key Access) on Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry System Operation (Key Access) on AFL (ADAPTIVE FORWARD
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry LIGHTING) LAMPS NEED
Access) on page 2‑7 for more (RKE) System Operation (Keyless SERVICE
information. Access) on page 2‑7.
READY TO LEARN ROTATE CONTROL TO OFF Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)
ELECTRONIC KEY # X POSITION system is disabled and needs
service. See your dealer. See
If the vehicle has the keyless If the vehicle has the keyless Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) on
access system, this message access system, this message page 6‑4 for more information.
displays while matching new displays when the ignition is in
transmitters to the vehicle. See the ACC/ACCESSORY and the shift
Keyless Access information for lever has just been moved to
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) P (Park). The message displays as
System Operation (Key Access) on a reminder to turn the ignition off.
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry To avoid draining the battery, make
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless sure the ignition is turned off before
Access) on page 2‑7 for more leaving the vehicle.
information.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT Object Detection System Ride Control System

CONTROL OFF Messages Messages
This message displays when
the automatic headlamps are PARKING ASSIST OFF ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
turned off. If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic If the vehicle has the All-Wheel
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, Drive (AWD) system, this message
AUTOMATIC LIGHT after the vehicle has been started, displays when there is a temporary
CONTROL ON this message displays to remind the condition making the AWD system
This message displays when the driver that the URPA system has unavailable. The vehicle will run
automatic headlamps are turned on. been turned off. Press the set/reset in 2WD. This could be caused by:
button to acknowledge this message . Loss of wheel or vehicle speed
TURN SIGNAL ON and clear it from the DIC display.
This message displays as a To turn the URPA system back on, . AWD system overheat
reminder to turn off the turn see “Parking Assist” under Driver . Certain vehicle electrical
signal if you drive the vehicle for Information Center (DIC) on conditions
more than about 1.6 km (1 mile) page 5‑27. See Ultrasonic Parking
Assist on page 9‑43 for more This message turns off when the
with a turn signal on. A multiple
information. above conditions are no longer
chime sounds when this message
present and by resetting the
displays. SERVICE PARKING ASSIST warning message.
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic To reset the warning message, turn
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, the ignition off and then back on
this message displays if there is a again after 30 seconds. If the
problem with the URPA system. message stays on, see your dealer
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on right away. See All-Wheel Drive on
page 9‑43 for more information. See page 9‑33 for more information.
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE notice that the effort required to SERVICE SUSPENSION
steer the vehicle increases or feels SYSTEM
This message displays if a problem
heavier, but you will still be able to
occurs with the All-Wheel Drive This message displays when there
steer the vehicle. See Steering on
(AWD) system. The vehicle will run is a problem with the Magnetic Ride
page 9‑4.
in 2WD. This could be caused by: Control system. See Magnetic Ride
. An electronics problem SERVICE STABILITRAK Control on page 9‑40 for more
information. Have the vehicle
. An AWD system oil overheat This message displays if there
serviced by your dealer.
has been a problem detected
. Worn out or overheated clutch with the StabiliTrak® system. The SERVICE TRACTION
plates TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on CONTROL
. Various electrical issues the instrument panel cluster also
comes on. This message displays when
If this message appears, stop as there is a problem with the
soon as possible and turn off the If this message comes on while you Traction Control System (TCS). The
ignition for 30 seconds. Restart the are driving, pull off the road as soon TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on the
vehicle and check for the message as possible and stop carefully. Try instrument panel cluster also comes
on the DIC display. If the message resetting the system by turning the on. When this message displays,
is still displayed or appears again ignition off then back on. If this the system will not limit wheel spin.
when you begin driving, the system message still stays on or comes Adjust your driving accordingly. See
needs service. See your dealer back on again while you are driving, your dealer for service. See Traction
right away. the vehicle needs service. Have the Control System (TCS) on page 9‑38
StabiliTrak system inspected by for more information.
SERVICE POWER STEERING your dealer as soon as possible.
This message displays if a problem See StabiliTrak® System on
is detected with the speed variable page 9‑39 for more information.
assist steering system. When this
message is displayed, you may
STABILITRAK STABILITRAK OFF

. The message could display
COMPETITIVE MODE if the stability system takes
This message displays when longer than usual to complete its
This message displays when you turn off StabiliTrak, or when diagnostic checks due to driving
the Competitive Driving mode is the stability control has been conditions.
selected. When in this mode, automatically disabled. The
the Traction Control System (TCS) TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on
. The message displays if an
will not be operating and the TCS/ the instrument panel cluster also engine or vehicle related
StabiliTrak warning light will turn on. comes on. problem has been detected
Adjust your driving accordingly. See and the vehicle needs service.
To realize the full benefits of the See your dealer.
“Competitive Driving Mode” under stability enhancement system, you
Traction Control System (TCS) on should normally leave StabiliTrak The message turns off as soon as
page 9‑38 for more information. on. To turn the StabiliTrak system the conditions that caused the
on or off, see StabiliTrak® System message to be displayed are no
STABILITRAK NOT READY longer present.
on page 9‑39.
This message may display after first
driving the vehicle and exceeding There are several conditions that SUSPENSION MODE SPORT
30 km/h (19 mph) for 30 seconds. can cause this message to appear. (CTS-V ONLY)
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light . One condition is overheating, This message will be displayed
on the instrument panel cluster also which could occur if StabiliTrak when sport mode is selected using
comes on. The StabiliTrak system is activates continuously for an the Magnetic Ride Control button in
not functional until the message has extended period of time. the center of the instrument panel.
turned off. See StabiliTrak® System See Magnetic Ride Control on
. The message also displays if
on page 9‑39 for more information. page 9‑40 for more information.
the brake system warning light is
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑22.
SUSPENSION MODE TOUR Anti-Theft Alarm System START ABORTED BY THEFT

(CTS-V ONLY) Messages DETERRENT
This message will be displayed This message displays if there is a
when touring mode is selected SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT communication problem between
using the Magnetic Ride Control SYSTEM the keyless access system and
button in the center of the This message displays when there the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be
instrument panel. See Magnetic is a problem with the theft-deterrent started when this message displays.
Ride Control on page 9‑40 for more system programmed in the key. See your dealer for service.
information. A fault has been detected in the THEFT ATTEMPTED
system which means that the
Airbag System Messages system is disabled and it is not This message displays if the
protecting the vehicle. The vehicle theft-deterrent system has detected
SERVICE AIR BAG usually restarts; however, you may a break-in attempt while you were
This message displays when there want to take the vehicle to your away from the vehicle. See
is a problem with the airbag system. dealer before turning off the Anti-Theft Alarm System on
Have the vehicle serviced by your engine. See Immobilizer Operation page 2‑25 for more information.
dealer immediately. See Airbag (Key Access) on page 2‑26 or
Readiness Light on page 5‑17 for Immobilizer Operation (Keyless Service Vehicle Messages
more information. Access) on page 2‑27 for more
information. SERVICE A/C SYSTEM
electronic sensors that control the
air conditioning and heating
systems are no longer working.
Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer if you
notice a drop in heating and air
conditioning efficiency.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE If a tire pressure message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you
This message displays when a This message displays when the
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
non-emissions related malfunction Tire Pressure Monitor System
until the tire pressure is equal to the
occurs. Have the vehicle serviced (TPMS) is re-learning the tire
values shown on the Tire Loading
by your dealer as soon as possible. positions on the vehicle. The tire
Information label. See Tires on
positions must be re-learned after
page 10‑64, Vehicle Load Limits on
Tire Messages rotating the tires or after replacing a
page 9‑11, and Tire Pressure on
tire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR page 10‑72.
page 10‑79, Tire Pressure Monitor
SYSTEM System on page 10‑74, and Tire If the vehicle does not have a spare
Pressure on page 10‑72 for more tire, the message will display “Use
This message displays if a part on
information. Inflator Kit in Trunk”. Use the inflator
the Tire Pressure Monitor System
kit to inflate the tires to the correct
(TPMS) is not working properly. TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE pressure. See Tire Sealant and
The tire pressure light also flashes
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Compressor Kit on page 10‑89 for
and then remains on during the
Monitor System (TPMS), this more information.
same ignition cycle. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 5‑24. message displays when the More than one tire pressure
Several conditions may cause pressure in one or more of the message can be received at a
this message to appear. See Tire vehicle’s tires is low. This message time. To read the other messages,
Pressure Monitor Operation on also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT press the set/reset button.
page 10‑75 for more information. FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT
REAR to indicate the location of the The DIC display also shows the
If the warning comes on and stays tire pressure values. See Driver
on, there may be a problem with the low tire.
Information Center (DIC) on
TPMS. See your dealer. The low tire pressure warning page 5‑27.
light will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 5‑24.
Transmission Messages SERVICE TRANSMISSION SPORT MODE

DIFFERENTIAL HOT, REDUCE This message displays when there This message displays when the
is a problem with the vehicle's vehicle is in sport mode. The
SPEED (CTS-V ONLY) transmission. Have the vehicle transmission gear position will also
This message displays and a serviced by your dealer. be displayed when DSC is in use.
chime sounds if the differential See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)”
fluid temperature exceeds 150°C SHIFT TO PARK (AUTOMATIC under Automatic Transmission on
(300°F). Driving aggressively or TRANSMISSION ONLY) page 9‑26 for more information.
at high speeds can cause the If the vehicle has the keyless
differential fluid temperature to be TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
access system, this message
higher than normal. If this message displays if the vehicle is not in ENGINE
appears, you may continue to drive P (Park) while the engine is being This message displays when the
at a slower speed. If you have been turned off. The vehicle will be in transmission fluid in the vehicle is
operating the vehicle under normal ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the shift too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it
driving conditions, the vehicle may lever is moved to P (Park), the to idle until the transmission cools
need service. See your dealer for an ignition needs to be turned off. If the down or until this message is
inspection. ignition is not turned off, the vehicle removed.
To acknowledge the message, will remain in ACC/ACCESSORY.
press V. The message reappears To avoid draining the battery, turn Vehicle Speed Messages
the ignition to off before leaving the
and a chime sounds every ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
vehicle.
two minutes until this condition
WITH CARE
changes. If you do not clear the
message, it will remain on until the This message displays when the
condition changes. outside temperature is cold enough
to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
SPEED LIMITED TO Vehicle 2. Press the customization

XXX KM/H (MPH) button to enter the feature
Personalization settings menu.
vehicle speed is limited to 128 km/h Vehicle customization allows certain Feature Settings Menu Items
(80 mph) because the vehicle features to be programmed for one
preferred setting. The following are customization
detects a problem in the speed
features that allow you to program
variable assist steering, magnetic Only the customization options settings to the vehicle:
ride control, or automatic leveling available will be displayed on
control systems. Have the vehicle the DIC. Display In English
serviced by your dealer.
The default settings were preset This feature will only display if a
when the vehicle left the factory, but language other than English has
Washer Fluid Messages may have been changed. been set. This feature allows for
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD changing the language of the DIC
The customization preferences are messages back to English.
FLUID automatically recalled.
Press the customization button until
This message displays when the To change customization
vehicle is low on windshield washer preferences, use the following the Press V To Display In English
fluid. Refill the windshield washer procedure. screen appears on the DIC display.
fluid reservoir as soon as possible. Press the set/reset button once to
See Washer Fluid on page 10‑26 for Entering the Feature select English as the language in
more information. Settings Menu which all DIC messages will appear.
1. Turn the ignition on. Display Language
To avoid excessive drain on the This feature allows you to select
battery, it is recommended that the language in which the DIC
the headlamps are turned off. messages will appear.
Press the customization button No Change: No change will be At Vehicle Speed (default on
until the Display Language screen made to this feature. The current Manual Transmission): The
appears on the DIC display. Press setting will remain. vehicle's doors automatically lock
the set/reset button once to access To select a setting, press the when the vehicle speed is above
the settings for this feature. Then set/reset button while the desired 5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds.
press the menu up/down button to setting is displayed on the DIC. No Change: No change will be
scroll through the following settings: made to this feature. The current
English (default): All messages Auto Door Lock setting will remain.
will appear in English. This feature allows you to select To select a setting, press the
Deutsch: All messages will appear when the vehicle's doors will set/reset button while the desired
in German. automatically lock. See Automatic setting is displayed on the DIC.
Door Locks on page 2‑17 for more
Italiano: All messages will appear information. Auto Door Unlock
in Italian.
Press the customization button This feature allows you to select
Francais: All messages will appear until Auto Door Lock appears on the whether or not the door(s) will
in French. DIC display. Press the set/reset automatically unlock. It also allows
Espanol: All messages will appear button once to access the settings you to select which doors and when
in Spanish. for this feature. Then press the they will automatically unlock. See
menu up/down button to scroll Automatic Door Locks on page 2‑17
Portugese: All messages will through the following settings: for more information.
appear in Portugese.
Shift Out Of Park (default on
Arabic: All messages will appear in Automatic Transmission)
Arabic. (Automatic Transmission Only):
Chinese: All messages will appear The vehicle's doors automatically
in Chinese. lock when the doors are closed and
the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
Japanese: All messages will
appear in Japanese.
Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the Press the customization button until
Auto Door Unlock appears on the set/reset button while the desired Remote Door Lock appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the Remote Door Lock Feedback for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll This feature allows you to select the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings: type of feedback you will receive through the following settings:
Off: None of the doors will when locking the vehicle with the Off: There will be no feedback
automatically unlock. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or when you press the lock button on
keyless access transmitter, or when the transmitter.
Driver Only At Off: Only the driver the vehicle is automatically locked
door will unlock when the ignition is using the Keyless Locking feature. Lights Only: The exterior lamps
turned off. You will not receive feedback will flash when you press the lock
All At Off (default on Manual when locking the vehicle with the button on the transmitter.
Transmission): All of the doors transmitter if the doors are open. Horn Only: The horn will sound on
will unlock when the ignition is See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the second press of the lock button
turned off. System Operation (Key Access) on on the transmitter.
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
All In Park (default on Automatic (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Horn & Lights (default): The
Transmission) (Automatic Access) on page 2‑7 or “Keyless exterior lamps will flash when
Transmission Only): All of the Locking” later in this section for you press the lock button on the
doors will unlock when the vehicle is more information. transmitter, and the horn will sound
shifted into P (Park). when the lock button is pressed
No Change: No change will be again within five seconds of the
made to this feature. The current previous command.
setting will remain. No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the Press the customization button until Press the customization button
set/reset button while the desired Remote Door Unlock appears on until Exit Lighting appears on the
setting is displayed on the DIC. the DIC display. Press the set/reset DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings button once to access the settings
Remote Door Unlock Feedback for this feature. Then press the for this feature. Then press the
This feature allows you to select the menu up/down button to scroll menu up/down button to scroll
type of feedback you will receive through the following settings: through the following settings:
when unlocking the vehicle with the Lights Off: The exterior lamps will Off: The exterior lamps will not
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or not flash when you press the unlock turn on.
keyless access transmitter, or button on the transmitter.
when the vehicle is automatically 10 Seconds (default): The exterior
unlocked using the Keyless Unlock Lights On (default): The exterior lamps will stay on for 10 seconds.
feature. You will not receive lamps will flash when you press the 30 Seconds: The exterior lamps
feedback when unlocking the unlock button on the transmitter. will stay on for 30 seconds.
vehicle with the transmitter if the No Change: No change will be
doors are open. See Remote 2 Minutes: The exterior lamps will
made to this feature. The current stay on for two minutes.
Keyless Entry (RKE) System setting will remain.
Operation (Key Access) on No Change: No change will be
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry To select a setting, press the made to this feature. The current
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless set/reset button while the desired setting will remain.
Access) on page 2‑7 or “Keyless setting is displayed on the DIC.
Unlock” later in this section for more To select a setting, press the
Exit Lighting set/reset button while the desired
information.
This feature allows you to select setting is displayed on the DIC.
the amount of time you want the
exterior lamps to remain on when
it is dark enough outside. This
happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
Approach Lighting System Operation (Key Access) on No Change: The customization

This feature allows you to select page 2‑7 or Remote Keyless Entry features will not be set to their
whether or not to have the exterior (RKE) System Operation (Keyless factory default settings.
lights turn on briefly during low light Access) on page 2‑7 for more To select a setting, press the
periods after unlocking the vehicle information. set/reset button while the desired
using the Remote Keyless Entry No Change: No change will be setting is displayed on the DIC.
(RKE) or keyless access transmitter. made to this feature. The current
setting will remain. Keyless Locking
Approach Lighting appears on the To select a setting, press the set/ If the vehicle has the keyless
DIC display. Press the set/reset reset button while the desired access system, this feature allows
button once to access the settings setting is displayed on the DIC. you to select whether the doors
for this feature. Then press the automatically lock during normal
menu up/down button to scroll Factory Settings vehicle exit. When the ignition is
through the following settings: This feature allows you to set all of turned off and all doors become
the customization features back to closed, the vehicle will determine
Off: The exterior lights will not turn how many keyless access
on when you unlock the vehicle with their factory default settings.
transmitters remain in the vehicle
the transmitter. Press the customization button until interior. If at least one keyless
On (default): If it is dark enough Factory Settings appears on the access transmitter has been
outside, the exterior lights will turn DIC display. Press the set/reset removed from the interior of the
on briefly when you unlock the button once to access the settings vehicle, the doors will lock after
vehicle with the transmitter. for this feature. Then press the several seconds.
menu up/down button to scroll
The lights will remain on for through the following settings:
20 seconds or until the lock button
on the transmitter is pressed, or Restore All (default): The
the vehicle is no longer off. See customization features will be set
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) to their factory default settings.
For example, if there are To select whether the horn sounds To select a setting, press the
two keyless access transmitters in or the lights flash when the vehicle set/reset button while the desired
the vehicle and one is removed, the is locked, see “Remote Door Lock” setting is displayed on the DIC.
other will be locked in. The keyless earlier in this section.
access transmitter locked in the Keyless Unlock
vehicle can still be used to start Keyless Locking appears on the If the vehicle has the keyless
the vehicle or unlock the doors, DIC display. Press the set/reset access system, this feature allows
if needed. A person approaching button once to access the settings you to select which doors will
the outside of the locked vehicle for this feature. Then press the automatically unlock when you
without an authorized keyless menu up/down button to scroll approach the vehicle with the
access transmitter, however, will through the following settings: keyless access transmitter and
not be able to open the door, even open the driver door. See the
with a transmitter in the vehicle. Off (default): The keyless locking Keyless Access information for
See the Keyless Access information feature will be disabled. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) On: The keyless locking feature will System Operation (Key Access) on
System Operation (Key Access) on be enabled. page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Keyless
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless The doors will automatically lock Access) on page 2‑7 for more
Access) on page 2‑7 for more several seconds after you turn information.
information. the ignition off, remove a keyless
access transmitter from the interior To select whether the lights flash
You may temporarily disable of the vehicle, and close all of the when the vehicle is unlocked, see
the keyless locking feature by doors. “Remote Door Unlock” earlier in this
pressing the door unlock switch for section.
three seconds on an open door. To No Change: No change will be
enable keyless locking, transition made to this feature. The current
the power mode from off. setting will remain.
Press the customization button Chime Volume Entry/Exit Recall

until Keyless Unlock appears on This feature allows you to select the If the vehicle has this feature, it
the DIC display. Press the set/reset volume level of the chime. allows you to select your preferred
button once to access the settings automatic recall of stored memory
for this feature. Then press the Press the customization button
until Chime Volume appears on the and exit positions. See the “Memory
menu up/down button to scroll Seat, Mirrors, and Steering Column”
through the following settings: DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings information under Power Seat
Entry Door Only: Only the driver for this feature. Then press the Adjustment on page 3‑5 for more
door will automatically unlock when menu up/down button to scroll information.
you approach the vehicle with the through the following settings: Press the customization button until
keyless access transmitter and Entry/Exit Recall appears on the
open the driver door. Normal: The chime volume will be
set to a normal level. DIC display. Press the set/reset
All Doors (default): All doors will button once to access the settings
automatically unlock when you Loud: The chime volume will be for this feature. Then press the
approach the vehicle with the set to a loud level. menu up/down button to scroll
keyless access transmitter and No Change: No change will be through the following settings.
open the driver door. made to this feature. The current To select a setting, press the
No Change: No change will be setting will remain. set/reset button while the desired
made to this feature. The current There is no default for chime setting is displayed on the DIC.
setting will remain. volume. The volume will stay at the
To select a setting, press the last known setting.
set/reset button while the desired To select a setting, press the
setting is displayed on the DIC. set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Entry/Exit Recall Off (default): Easy Entry will automatically recall Easy Entry will automatically
No automatic Entry/Exit Recall will the driver seat and outside mirror recall the driver seat, outside
occur when entering or leaving the memory positions of the current mirrors and steering column
vehicle. The Exit recall will only driver (1 or 2) when the ignition is memory positions of the current
occur after pressing the door turned on. driver (1 or 2) when the ignition
mounted EXIT button. This button Entry/Exit Recall On (Vehicles is turned on.
will cause the drivers seat to move with Power Tilt Steering Wheel): . Entry/Exit Steering Only:
rearward a certain distance, and the If this setting is selected the Easy Exit will automatically
steering column to move full up following two options will be move the steering column to a
and full forward, if equipped. Entry available. full up and full forward position
Recall will only occur by pressing when the key is removed from
the door mounted “1” or “2” button. . Entry/Exit Steering and Seat:
Easy Exit will automatically the ignition on Key Access
Entry/Exit Recall On (Vehicles move the steering column to a vehicles, or when the ignition is
without Power Tilt Steering full up and full forward position turned off and the driver door
Wheel): If this setting is selected and move the driver seat opened on Keyless Access
the following option will be available. rearward a certain distance vehicles. This movement will
Easy Exit will automatically move when the key is removed from also occur when the door
the driver seat rearward a certain the ignition on Key Access mounted EXIT button is pressed.
distance when the key is removed vehicles, or when the ignition is Easy Entry will automatically
from the ignition on Key Access turned off and the driver door recall the driver seat, outside
vehicles, or when the ignition is opened on Keyless Access mirrors and steering column
turned off and the driver door vehicles. These movements memory positions of the current
opened on Keyless Access will also occur when the door driver (1 or 2) when the ignition
vehicles. This movement will also mounted EXIT button is pressed. is turned on.
occur when the door mounted EXIT No Change: No change will be
button is pressed. made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
Exiting the Feature Universal Remote Do not use the Universal Home
Settings Menu Remote with any garage door
System opener that does not have the stop
The feature settings menu will be and reverse feature. This includes
exited when any of the following See Radio Frequency Statement on
any garage door opener model
occurs: page 13‑18 for information
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
. The vehicle is no longer in Communications Commission (FCC) Read the instructions completely
ON/RUN. rules and Industry Canada before attempting to program the
. The trip/fuel or vehicle Standards RSS-210/220/310. Universal Home Remote. Because
information DIC buttons are of the steps involved, it may be
pressed. Universal Remote System helpful to have another person
available to assist you with
. The end of the feature settings Programming programming the Universal Home
menu is reached and exited.
Remote.
. A 40 second time period has
Keep the original hand-held
elapsed with no selection made.
transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future Universal Home
Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed
This system provides a way to Universal Home Remote buttons
replace up to three remote control should be erased for security
transmitters used to activate purposes. See “Erasing Universal
devices such as garage door Home Remote Buttons” later in this
openers, security systems, and section.
home automation devices.
When programming a garage door, To program up to three devices: 2. Hold the end of your hand-held
park outside of the garage. Park transmitter about 3 to 8 cm
directly in line with and facing the (1 to 3 inches) away from the
garage door opener motor-head or Universal Home Remote buttons
gate motor-head. Be sure that while keeping the indicator
people and objects are clear of the light in view. The hand-held
garage door or gate that is being transmitter was supplied by the
programmed. manufacturer of your garage
It is recommended that a new door opener receiver (motor
1. From inside the vehicle, press head unit).
battery be installed in your and hold down the two outside
hand-held transmitter for quicker buttons at the same time, 3. At the same time, press and
and more accurate transmission of releasing only when the hold both the Universal Home
the radio-frequency signal. Universal Home Remote Remote button to be used to
indicator light begins to flash, control the garage door and the
Programming the Universal hand-held transmitter button. Do
after 20 seconds. This step will
Home Remote System erase the factory settings or all not release the Universal Home
For questions or help programming previously programmed buttons. Remote button or the hand-held
the Universal Home Remote transmitter button until Step 4
Do not hold down the buttons for has been completed.
System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go longer than 30 seconds and do
to www.homelink.com. not repeat this step to program Some entry gates and garage
Programming a garage door opener the remaining two Universal door openers may require
involves time-sensitive actions, so Home Remote buttons. substitution of Step 3 with
read the entire procedure before the procedure noted in “Gate
starting. Otherwise, the device will Operator and Canadian
time out and the procedure will have Programming” later in this
to be repeated. section.
4. The indicator light on the

. If the Universal Home “Smart” button. The name and
Universal Home Remote will Remote indicator light color of the button may vary by
flash slowly at first and then blinks rapidly for manufacturer.
rapidly after Universal Home two seconds and then
turns to a constant 7. Firmly press and release the
Remote successfully receives “Learn” or “Smart” button. After
the frequency signal from the light, continue with the
programming Steps 6 you press this button, you will
hand-held transmitter. Release have 30 seconds to complete
both buttons. through 8.
Step 8.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained It may be helpful to have
another person assist with 8. Immediately return to the
Universal Home Remote button vehicle. Firmly press and hold
and observe the indicator light. the remaining steps.
the Universal Home Remote
. If the indicator light stays button, selected in Step 3 to
on continuously, the control the garage door, for
programming is complete two seconds, and then release
and the garage door should it. If the garage door does not
move when the Universal move, press and hold the
Home Remote button is same button a second time for
pressed and released. two seconds, and then release
There is no need to it. Again, if the door does not
continue programming move, press and hold the
Steps 6 through 8. same button a third time for
6. After Steps 1 through 5 have
two seconds, and then release.
been completed, locate inside
the garage the garage door The Universal Home Remote
opener receiver (motor-head should now activate the
unit). Locate the “Learn” or garage door.
To program the remaining two If you live in Canada, or you are The Universal Home Remote
Universal Home Remote buttons, having difficulty programming a indicator light will flash slowly at
begin with Step 2 of “Programming gate operator or garage door first and then rapidly. Proceed
the Universal Home Remote opener by using the “Programming with Step 4 under “Programming
System.” Do not repeat Step 1, Universal Home Remote” Universal Home Remote” to
as this will erase all previous procedures, regardless of where complete the training procedure.
programming from the Universal you live, replace Step 3 under
Home Remote buttons. “Programming Universal Home Universal Remote System
Remote” with the following:
Gate Operator and Canadian Operation
Programming Continue to press and hold the
Universal Home Remote button Using Universal Remote
If you have questions or need while you press and release Press and hold the appropriate
help programming the Universal every two seconds (cycle) the Universal Remote button for at least
Home Remote System, call hand-held transmitter button until half of a second. The indicator light
1-800-355-3515 or go to the frequency signal has been will come on while the signal is
www.homelink.com. successfully accepted by the being transmitted.
Canadian radio-frequency laws Universal Home Remote.
require transmitter signals to time
out or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be
long enough for Universal Home
Remote to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some U.S.
gate operators are manufactured to
time out in the same manner.
Erasing Universal Remote Reprogramming a Single

Buttons Universal Remote Button
All programmed buttons should be To reprogram any of the three
erased when the vehicle is sold or Universal Remote buttons, repeat
the lease ends. the programming instructions
To erase all programmed buttons on earlier in this section, beginning
the Universal Remote device: with Step 2.
For help or information on the
Universal Home Remote System,
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑4 or Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
1. Press and hold down the
two outside buttons until the
indicator light begins to flash,
after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 Lighting Features
Exterior Lamps Off Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
Daytime Running Exterior Lighting Battery
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 The exterior lamp control is located
Automatic Headlamp toward the end of the turn signal/
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 lane change lever.
Adaptive Forward O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 the band with this symbol on it to
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 operate the exterior lamps.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 The exterior lamp control has
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 four positions:
O (Off): Turns off all lamps, except
the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
6-2 Lighting
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the Headlamp High/ Flash-to-Pass

headlamps on and off automatically,
depending upon how much light is
Low-Beam Changer This feature allows the high-beam
available outside of the vehicle. Push the turn signal/lane change headlamps to be used to signal the
lever away from you to turn the high driver in front of you that you want
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the to pass.
parking lamps together with the beams on. Pull the lever toward you
following: and then release it to return to low Pull and hold the turn signal/lane
beams. change lever toward you to use this
. Sidemarker Lamps feature. When this is done the
If the vehicle is turned off while the
. Taillamps highbeams are on, they will come following will occur:
. License Plate Lamps on the next time the vehicle is . If the headlamps are off or in
started. low-beam mode, the high-beam
. Instrument Panel Lights headlamps will turn on. They will
5 (Headlamps): Turns on the stay on as long as the lever is
headlamps, together with the held there. Release the lever to
previously listed lamps and lights. turn them off.
. If the headlamps are already in
Exterior Lamps Off high-beam mode, they will
Reminder remain on high‐beam.
This indicator light turns on in the
A warning chime will sound if the instrument panel cluster when the
exterior lamp control is left on in high‐beam headlamps are on.
either the headlamp or parking lamp
position and the driver door is
opened with the ignition off.
Lighting 6-3
Daytime Running When DRLs are on, only the Turning the exterior lamp control to
reduced intensity low‐beam off or to the low-beam headlamp
Lamps (DRL) headlamps or dedicated DRLs will position will turn off the DRL. If the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can be on. The other exterior lamps and parking lamps or the fog lamps were
make it easier for others to see the the instrument panel cluster will not turned on instead, the DRL will still
front of your vehicle during the day. be on. turn off.
Fully functional daytime running When the exterior lamp control is in This will work regardless of gear
lamps are required on all vehicles AUTO and it is dark enough outside, position and whether or not the
first sold in Canada. the DRL turns off and the low-beam parking brake is set.
The DRL system will make either headlamps will turn on. When it is
the reduced intensity low‐beam bright enough outside, the low-beam Automatic Headlamp
headlamps or dedicated DRLs come headlamps will go off, and the
on when the following conditions DRL will turn back on. If the vehicle
System
are met: is started in a dark garage, the When it is dark enough outside and
automatic headlamp system comes the exterior lamps control is in the
. It is still daylight and the ignition
on immediately. Once the vehicle automatic position, the headlamps
is in ON/RUN or START.
leaves the garage, it takes about come on automatically. See Exterior
. The exterior lamp control is in off one minute for the automatic Lamp Controls on page 6‑1.
or AUTO and the headlamps headlamp system to change to The vehicle has a light sensor
are off. DRL if it is light outside. During that located on top of the instrument
. The automatic transmission is delay, the instrument panel cluster panel. Make sure it is not covered,
not in P (Park). may not be as bright as usual. Make or the headlamps will be on when
sure the instrument panel brightness they are not needed.
lever is in the full bright position.
See Instrument Panel Illumination The system may also turn on the
Control on page 6‑5. headlamps when driving through a
parking garage or tunnel.
6-4 Lighting
Adaptive Forward This warns others that you are The lever returns to its starting
having trouble. Press again to turn position when it is released.
Lighting (AFL) the flashers off. If after signaling a turn or lane
The Adaptive Forward Lighting change the arrow flashes rapidly or
System (AFL) pivots the headlamps Turn and Lane-Change does not come on, a signal bulb
horizontally to provide greater road Signals may be burned out.
illumination while turning. To enable
AFL, set the exterior lamp switch on Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
the multifunction lever to the AUTO is not burned out, check the fuse.
position. Moving the switch out of See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
the AUTO position will deactivate page 10‑41.
the system. AFL will operate when Turn Signal On Chime
the vehicle speed is greater than
3 km/h (2 mph). AFL will not If the turn signal is left on for about
operate when the transmission is in An arrow on the instrument panel 1.6 km (1 mile), a warning chime will
R (Reverse). AFL is not immediately cluster flashes in the direction of the sound and the TURN SIGNAL ON
operable after starting the vehicle; turn or lane change. message will appear on the Driver
driving a short distance is required Information Center (DIC) display.
to calibrate the AFL. See Exterior Move the lever all the way up or See “Turn Signal On” under Driver
Lamp Controls on page 6‑1. down to signal a turn. Information Center (DIC) on
Raise or lower the lever until the page 5‑27 for more information.
Hazard Warning Flashers arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it briefly until the lane
| Hazard Warning Flasher: change is complete. The arrow will
Press this button located on the automatically flash three times.
instrument panel near the audio
system, to make the front and rear
turn signal lamps flash on and off.
Lighting 6-5
Fog Lamps Interior Lighting Reading Lamps

Use the fog lamps for better vision The reading lamps are located on
in foggy or misty conditions. The fog Instrument Panel the overhead console. These lamps
lamp control is located on the turn Illumination Control come on automatically when any
signal/multifunction lever. door is opened.
The instrument panel brightness
# (Fog Lamps): Turn the fog knob is located on the instrument For manual operation, press the
lamp band on the lever up to # and panel to the left of the steering button next to each lamp to turn it
release it, to turn the fog lamps on column. on or off.
or off. The band will return to its D (Instrument Panel If the reading lamps are left on, they
original position. Brightness): Turn the knob automatically shut off 10 minutes
The parking lamps must be on for clockwise or counterclockwise to after the ignition has been
the fog lamps to work. brighten or dim the lights. Turn the turned off.
If the high-beam headlamps are knob completely clockwise to turn
turned on, the fog lamps will also on the interior lamps.
turn off. They will turn back on again
when you change back to low-beam
headlamps.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
6-6 Lighting
Lighting Features Exit Lighting Parade Dimming

The headlamps, taillamps, parking This feature does not let the
Entry Lighting lamps, reverse lamps, and license instrument panel backlight dim
The headlamps, taillamps, license plate lamps come on at night, or in during daylight hours while the
plate lamps, reverse lamps, dome areas with limited lighting, when the key is in the ignition and the
lamps, and most of the interior lights key is removed from the ignition. headlamps are on. Parade dimming
turn on briefly, when the Remote The dome lamps also come on automatically works with the light
when the key is removed from the sensor, located on top of the
Keyless Entry (RKE) K is pressed, ignition. The exterior lights and dashboard. If it is dark enough
or when the door handle is pulled dome lamps remain on after the outside and the parking lamps are
on a Keyless Access Vehicle. See door is closed for a set amount of on, the backlight on the instrument
Ignition Positions (Key Access) on time, then automatically turn off. panel can be adjusted by turning the
page 9‑17 or Ignition Positions instrument panel brightness knob
(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18. For a vehicle with Keyless Access,
the exterior lights and dome lamps clockwise or counterclockwise to
After about 30 seconds the exterior brighten or dim the lighting. See
lamps turn off, and then the dome automatically turn on when a door is
opened after the ignition is turned Instrument Panel Illumination
and remaining interior lights will dim Control on page 6‑5.
to off. Entry lighting can be disabled off. See Ignition Positions (Key
manually by changing the ignition Access) on page 9‑17 or Ignition
out of the OFF position, or by Positions (Keyless Access) on Battery Load
pressing the Remote Keyless Entry page 9‑18. Management
(RKE) Q button. The exterior lights turn off The vehicle has Electric Power
immediately by turning the exterior Management (EPM) that estimates
This feature can be changed. See lamps control to OFF. the battery's temperature and state
Vehicle Personalization on
This feature can be changed. See of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
page 5‑46.
Vehicle Personalization on for best performance and extended
page 5‑46. life of the battery.
Lighting 6-7
When the battery's state of charge A high electrical load occurs when Normally, these actions occur in
is low, the voltage is raised slightly several of the following are on, such steps or levels, without being
to quickly bring the charge back up. as: headlamps, high beams, fog noticeable. In rare cases at the
When the state of charge is high, lamps, rear window defogger, highest levels of corrective action,
the voltage is lowered slightly to climate control fan at high speed, this action may be noticeable to the
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle heated seats, engine cooling fans, driver. If so, a Driver Information
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage trailer loads, and loads plugged into Center (DIC) message might be
display on the Driver Information accessory power outlets. displayed, such as BATTERY
Center (DIC), you may see the EPM works to prevent excessive SAVER ACTIVE or BATTERY
voltage move up or down. This is discharge of the battery. It does this VOLTS LOW. If this message is
normal. If there is a problem, an by balancing the generator's output displayed, it is recommended that
alert will be displayed. and the vehicle's electrical needs. the driver reduce the electrical loads
The battery can be discharged at It can increase engine idle speed to as much as possible. See Driver
idle if the electrical loads are very generate more power, whenever Information Center (DIC) on
high. This is true for all vehicles. needed. It can temporarily reduce page 5‑27.
This is because the generator the power demands of some
(alternator) may not be spinning fast accessories.
enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
6-8 Lighting
Battery Power Protection Exterior Lighting Battery

This feature helps to prevent battery Saver
drain if accessory lamps are left on. The exterior lamps turn off about
If accessory lamps such as the 10 minutes after the ignition is
vanity mirror, cargo, reading, turned to LOCK/OFF, if the parking
console, or glove box are left on, lamps or headlamps have been left
they automatically time-out after on. This protects against draining
about 20 minutes. To reset the the battery. The battery saver does
battery protection, all of the above not work if the headlamps are
lamps must be turned off or the turned on after the ignition is turned
ignition must be in the ACC/ to LOCK/OFF.
ACCESSORY position.
To keep the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, turn the lamps back on
with the exterior lamp control.
Infotainment System 7-1

. Set up the tone, speaker
Infotainment Introduction adjustments, and preset radio
System Infotainment
stations.
For more information, see Defensive
Read the following pages to Driving on page 9‑2.
Introduction become familiar with the audio
Notice: Contact your dealer
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 system's features.
before adding any equipment.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 { WARNING Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
Radio Taking your eyes off the road the operation of the engine, radio,
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 for extended periods could or other systems, and could
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 cause a crash resulting in injury damage them. Follow federal
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 rules covering mobile radio and
or death to you or others. Do
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 telephone equipment.
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving. The vehicle has Retained
Audio Players Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 the audio system can be played
This system provides access to
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 even after the ignition is turned off.
many audio and non‐audio listings.
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 See Retained Accessory Power
Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . . 7-29 To minimize taking your eyes off the (RAP) on page 9‑22 for more
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 road while driving, do the following information.
while the vehicle is parked:
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
. Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
7-2 Infotainment System
Navigation System Operation

For vehicles with a navigation
system, see the separate Navigation
System Manual.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
TheftLock® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
Full View of Radio with CD Shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD Similar

Setting the Tone

(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
or Treble): To adjust bass,
midrange, or treble:
1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob
until the tone control tabs
display.
2. Continue pressing the
TUNE/TONE knob, or press
the softkey under the desired
Partial View of Radio with DVD Audio, Hard Drive Device (HDD), tab to highlight the desired tone
and USB setting.
3. To increase the highlighted
The vehicle may have one of these Turning the System On or Off setting, do one of the following:
radios as its audio system.
VOL P (Volume/Power): Press . Turn the TUNE/TONE knob
If the vehicle does not have one of to turn the system on and off. clockwise.
these radio systems, it may have a
navigation radio system. See the Volume Control
. Turn the MENU/SELECT
Navigation System manual for more knob clockwise.
information on the navigation audio VOL P (Volume/Power): Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
. Press the \ FWD button.
system.
increase or decrease the volume. . Press the ¨ SEEK button.
4. To decrease the highlighted Adjusting the Speakers 4. To decrease the highlighted

setting, do one of the following: (Balance/Fade) setting, do one of the following:
. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): . Turn the TUNE/TONE knob
counterclockwise. To adjust balance or fade: counterclockwise.
. Turn the MENU/SELECT . Turn the MENU/SELECT
1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob
knob counterclockwise. until the speaker control tabs knob counterclockwise.
display.
. Press the s REV button. . Press the s REV button.
2. Continue pressing the TUNE/
. Press the © SEEK button. TONE knob, or press the softkey
. Press the © SEEK button.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, under the desired tab to highlight To quickly adjust balance or fade
or treble to the middle position, the desired tone setting. to the middle position, press the
press the softkey under the BASS, 3. To increase the highlighted softkey under the BAL or FADE tab
MID, or TREB tab for more than setting, do one of the following: for more than two seconds.
two seconds. To quickly adjust all speaker and
. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob
To quickly adjust all tone and clockwise. tone controls to the middle position,
speaker controls to the middle press the TUNE/TONE knob for
position, press the TUNE/TONE
. Turn the MENU/SELECT more than two seconds.
knob for more than two seconds. knob clockwise.
. Press the \ FWD button.
. Press the ¨ SEEK button.
Adjusting the Equalizer (EQ) To choose a DSP setting:

. Centerpoint®: Select to enable
Bose® Centerpoint signal
If the radio has this feature, the EQ 1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to processing circuitry. Centerpoint
can be adjusted between talk and display the tone/speaker and creates a Bose® surround sound
manual. DSP tabs. listening experience from stereo
To choose an EQ setting: 2. Press the softkey under the CDs, MP3s, and satellite radio.
DSP tab. As a result, vehicle owners enjoy
1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob. a surround sound listening
3. Press the softkey below the
2. Select EQ. experience from many audio
Back tab to return to the original
sources. Simply turn it on, and it
3. Select Talk or Manual. tone/speaker display, or wait for
operates automatically.
4. Press the Back button to go the display to time out.
This feature is not available in
back to the Tone Settings menu. The DSP settings available are:
AM/FM radio mode.
Digital Signal . Normal: Select for normal mode;
If the vehicle is equipped with
Processing (DSP) this provides the best sound
the Bose 5.1 Cabin Surround
quality for all seating positions.
If the radio has this feature, it has sound system, the radio can
either a Bose® sound system or a
. Driver: Select to adjust the support the playback of 5.1
Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround® sound audio for the driver to receive surround sound DVD-A discs or
system. DSP is used to provide the best possible sound quality. DTS 5.1 surround sound CD
a choice of different listening . Rear: Select to adjust the audio discs. When a 5.1 surround
experiences. for the rear seat passengers to sound formatted disc is playing,
receive the best possible sound DSP options available are:
quality. ‐ 5.1 Surround + Normal: Best
for all seating positions.
‐ 5.1 Surround + Rear: Best for
the rear seating positions.
System Settings 4. Press the FAV button, or let the 4. Press the softkey under the
menu time out, to return to the desired Speed Compensated
CONFIG: Press to adjust the
original main radio screen Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
number of favorites pages, auto
showing the radio station or High) to select the level of
volume, XM (if equipped), and HDD
frequency tabs and to begin radio volume compensation.
(if available) settings. The FAV,
the process of programming The display times out after
AUTO VOL, XM (if equipped), and
favorites for the chosen number approximately 10 seconds. Each
HDD (if available) tabs display.
of pages. higher setting allows for more
The display will time out after
radio volume compensation at
approximately ten seconds. Speed Compensated faster vehicle speeds.
Volume (SCV)
Configuring the Number of
A radio with SCV automatically Noise Compensation Technology
Favorite Pages
adjusts the sound to compensate for If the vehicle has the radio with DVD
The number of favorite pages can
road and wind noise as the vehicle Audio, HDD, and USB, it has Bose
be set up using the CONFIG button.
speeds up or slows down, so that AudioPilot® noise compensation
To setup the number of favorite
the volume is consistent while technology.
pages:
driving. To activate SCV: When turned on, AudioPilot
1. Press the CONFIG button to
1. Set the radio volume to the continuously adjusts the audio
display the radio setup menu.
desired level. system equalization, to compensate
2. Press the softkey located below for background noise.
2. Press the CONFIG button to
the FAV tab.
display the radio setup menu. To activate AudioPilot:
3. Select the desired number of
3. Press the softkey under the 1. Press the CONFIG button to
favorites pages by pressing
AUTO VOL tab on the radio display the radio setup menu.
the softkey located below the
display. 2. Press the softkey under the
displayed page numbers.
AUTO VOL tab on the radio
display.
3. Press the softkey below the On Other Information CD and music-related data from
or Off tab located under the Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
The radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
AUTO VOL display to turn this 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
and USB utilizes Gracenote®
feature on or off. The display Software, copyright © 2000-2007
technology to provide Song, Artist,
times out after approximately Gracenote. This product and
Album, and Genre information
10 seconds. service may practice one or
for many CD audio discs and is
This feature is most effective at more of the following U.S.
capable of playing DVD-A and
lower radio volume settings where Patents: #5,987,525;
DTS‐encoded discs (DTS and DTS
background noise can affect how #6,061,680; #6,154,773;
Digital Surround are registered
the music being played through the #6,161,132; #6,230,192;
trademarks of Digital Theater
vehicle's audio system is heard. At #6,230,207; #6,240,459;
Systems, Inc.).
higher volume settings, where the #6,330,593, and other patents
Dolby and the double-D symbol are issued or pending. Some services
music is much louder than the
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. supplied under license from
background noise, there may
Manufactured under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
be little or no adjustments by
Dolby Laboratories. Patent: #6,304,523.
AudioPilot. For additional
information on AudioPilot, visit Gracenote® Database Gracenote and CDDB are registered
www.bose.com/audiopilot. trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote Music Recognition
Gracenote logo and logotype, and
Radio Message Service, Music recognition
the “Powered by Gracenote” logo
technology, and related data are
Locked: Displays when the are trademarks of Gracenote.
provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote
TheftLock® system has locked up is the industry standard in music If you require more information
the infotainment system. Take the recognition technology and regarding the use of the Gracenote
vehicle to your dealer for service. related content delivery. Service, visit: www.gracenote.com/
If any error occurs repeatedly or For more information, visit corporate.
if an error cannot be corrected, www.gracenote.com.
contact your dealer.
For the data provided by Software, and Gracenote Under no circumstances will
Gracenote® Music Recognition Servers for your own personal Gracenote become liable for any
Service, the content is not non-commercial use only. You payment to you for any information
necessarily guaranteed 100%. agree not to assign, copy, transfer, that you provide. You agree that
Regarding the use of Gracenote or transmit the Gracenote Software Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its
Music Recognition Service. When or any Gracenote Data to any third rights under this Agreement against
this product is used, it is necessary party. you directly in its own name.
to agree to the following articles. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR The Gracenote service uses a
This application or device contains EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE unique identifier to track queries for
software from Gracenote, Inc. of GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR statistical purposes.
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT The purpose of a randomly
AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED assigned numeric identifier is to
The software from Gracenote (the HEREIN. You agree that your
“Gracenote Software”) enables allow the Gracenote service to
non-exclusive license to use the count queries without knowing
this application to perform disc Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
and/or file identification and obtain anything about who you are. For
Software, and Gracenote Servers more information, see the web page
music-related information, including will terminate if you violate
name, artist, track, and title for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for
these restrictions. If your license the Gracenote service.
information (“Gracenote Data”) terminates, you agree to cease any
from online servers or embedded and all use of the Gracenote Data, The Gracenote Software and each
databases (collectively, “Gracenote the Gracenote Software, and item of Gracenote Data are licensed
Servers”) and to perform other Gracenote Servers. to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes
functions. no representations or warranties,
Gracenote reserves all rights in express or implied, regarding the
You may use Gracenote Data only Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
by means of the intended End-User accuracy of any Gracenote Data
Software, and the Gracenote from in the Gracenote Servers.
functions of this application or Servers, including all ownership
device. You agree that you will use rights.
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Gracenote reserves the right to GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS Radio

delete data from the Gracenote ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS
Servers or to change data OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
categories for any cause that BUT NOT LIMITED TO, AM-FM Radio
Gracenote deems sufficient. IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF Control Buttons
No warranty is made that the MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, The buttons used to control the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote radio are:
Servers are error-free or that TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
functioning of Gracenote Software GRACENOTE DOES NOT FM/AM: Press to choose between
or Gracenote Servers will be WARRANT THE RESULTS FM and AM.
uninterrupted. THAT WILL BE OBTAINED
BY YOUR USE OF THE TUNE: Turn to search for stations.
Gracenote is not obligated to GRACENOTE SOFTWARE MENU/SELECT: Turn clockwise or
provide you with new enhanced or OR ANY GRACENOTE counterclockwise to scroll through
additional data types or categories SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL the station list. Press the MENU/
that Gracenote may provide in the GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR SELECT knob to select the desired
future and is free to discontinue its ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR station.
services at any time. INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR
INFO: Press to display additional
ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
information that may be available for
REVENUES.
the current song. When information
is not available, No Information
displays.
¨ SEEK or © SEEK: Press to go to
the previous or to the next radio
station and stay there.
The radio only tunes into stations Selecting a Station Station List
with a strong signal that are in the Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
selected band. Seek Tuning
display the station list. To create a
FAV: Press to change the If the radio station is not known: list of available stations, select
favorites page. Briefly press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK. “Refresh AM Station List” or
Softkeys: Press to select preset The radio will search for the next “Refresh FM Station List”,
stations. receivable station. If the radio depending on which band is
does not find a station, it switches being used.
Radio Data System (RDS) automatically to a more sensitive In FM, RDS information may be
The audio system has a Radio search level. If it still does not find a utilized to categorize the stations by
Data System (RDS) feature. RDS station, the frequency that was last genre.
is available for use only on FM active begins to play and “None
In both AM and FM, the stations are
stations that broadcast RDS Found” displays.
arranged in frequency order.
information. This system relies upon If the radio station is known:
receiving specific information from Storing a Radio Station as a
these stations and only works when Press and hold ¨ SEEK or © SEEK Favorite
the information is available. While until the desired station on the
Drivers are encouraged to set up
the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS pop‐up frequency display is almost
their radio station favorites while the
station, the station name or call reached, then release the button.
vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite
letters display. In rare cases, a radio
Manual Tuning stations using the presets, favorites
station can broadcast incorrect
button, and steering wheel controls,
information that causes the radio Turn the TUNE knob to select the
if the vehicle has this feature.
features to work improperly. If this frequency on the pop‐up display.
happens, contact the radio station.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 4. Repeat the steps for each radio Time-shifting — Pause and
36 stations can be programmed as station to be stored as a favorite. Rewind Live FM and AM
favorites using the six softkeys The number of favorites pages can
below the radio station frequency The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
be set up using the CONFIG button. and USB has the ability to rewind
tabs on the display and by using the To set up the number of favorites
radio favorites page button (FAV 60 minutes of FM and AM content.
pages, perform the following steps: While listening to the radio, the
button). Press the FAV button to go
through up to six pages of favorites, 1. Press the CONFIG button to content from the current station is
each having six favorite stations display the radio setup menu. always being buffered to the HDD.
available per page. Each page 2. Press the softkey located below Press r / j (play/pause) to pause
of favorites can contain any the FAV label. the radio. The radio display will
combination of AM, FM, or XM show the Time Shift buffer status
stations. 3. Select the desired number of
favorites pages by pressing bar. The status bar shows the
To store a station as a favorite, the softkey located below the amount of content stored in the
perform the following steps: displayed page numbers. buffer and the current pause point.
1. Tune to the desired radio station. 4. Press the FAV button, or let the To resume playback from
menu time out, to return to the the current pause point,
2. Press the FAV button to display
the page where the station is to original main radio screen press r / j again. The radio
be stored. showing the radio station will no longer be playing “live”
frequency labels and to begin radio. Instead, time shifted content
3. Press and hold one of the the process of programming is being played from the buffer.
six softkeys until a beep sounds favorites for the chosen number When the radio is playing time
and “Favorite Saved” displays. of pages. shifted content from the buffer, a
When that softkey is pressed buffer status bar shows below the
and released, the radio recalls station number on the left side of
the station that was set. screen.
Press and hold the REV or FWD Pausing FM or AM with the receive the XM service. For
buttons to rewind or fast forward Vehicle Turned Off more information, contact
through the time shift buffer. Hold If FM or AM is paused before the XM at www.xmradio.com or
FWD until the end of the currently vehicle is turned off, the radio will 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,
recorded buffer to resume “live” continue to buffer the current radio and www.xmradio.ca or
radio playback. With “live” radio station for up to one hour. If the 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
playing, the radio display will no vehicle is turned back on within
longer show the buffer bar below Control Buttons
one hour, the radio will automatically
the station number. resume playback from the pause The buttons used to control the
On FM or AM, press the REV or point. radio are:
FWD button multiple times to rewind m (XM): Press to choose the XM
or fast forward. Each press will Satellite Radio band (if equipped).
rewind or fast forward 30 seconds of
Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite TUNE: Turn to search for stations.
content.
Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite MENU/SELECT: Turn clockwise
When the radio station is Radio subscription can receive XM or counterclockwise to scroll
changed, the buffer is cleared and programming. through the category list. Press the
automatically restarted for the
XM Satellite Radio Service MENU/SELECT knob to select the
current station. You cannot rewind
desired category.
to content from a previously tuned XM is a satellite radio service based
station. in the 48 contiguous United States INFO: Press to display additional
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM information that may be available for
Time shifting of FM or AM is not
Satellite Radio has a wide variety of the current song. When information
available while recording or while
programming and commercial-free is not available, No Information
other sources of playback are
music, coast-to-coast, and in displays.
selected.
digital-quality sound. A service ¨ SEEK or © SEEK: Press to go to
fee is required to receive the XM the next or to the previous radio
service. A service fee is required to station.
FAV: Press to change the Selecting an XM Station Selecting a Station by Category

favorites page. The infotainment system can list XM
Seek Tuning
Softkeys: Press to select preset stations by genre.
stations. Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK to go to
To select a station from the
the next or previous station.
XM Categories category list:
Selecting a Station by Station List 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
XM stations are organized in
categories. The infotainment system can list all and highlight the desired genre,
XM stations. then press the MENU/SELECT
Removing or Adding Categories knob to select the genre.
(Radio with CD and Radio with To select a station from the
Six-Disc CD Only) station list: 2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
and highlight the desired station,
1. Press the CONFIG button. 1. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob and
then press the MENU/SELECT
highlight the desired station.
2. Press the softkey below the knob to select the station.
XM tab. 2. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to
select the station. Storing an XM Station as a
3. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob or Favorite
the MENU/SELECT knob to The highlighted station will also
scroll through the available automatically be selected if the Drivers are encouraged to set up
categories. TUNE/TONE is released and no their radio station favorites while the
longer turned. vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite
4. Press any softkey below the stations using the presets, favorites
Remove or Add tab to add or button, and steering wheel controls,
remove the displayed category. if the vehicle has this feature.
5. Press any softkey below the
Restore All tab to restore all
removed categories.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of The number of favorites pages can Time-shifting — Pause and
36 stations can be programmed as be set up using the CONFIG button. Rewind Live XM
favorites using the six softkeys To set up the number of favorites
below the radio station frequency pages, perform the following steps: The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
tabs on the display and by using the and USB has the ability to rewind
1. Press the CONFIG button to 60 minutes of XM content. While
radio favorites page button (FAV display the radio setup menu.
button). Press the FAV button to go listening to the radio, the content
through up to six pages of favorites, 2. Press the softkey located below from the current station is always
each having six favorite stations the FAV label. being buffered to the HDD.
available per page. Each page 3. Select the desired number of Press r / j (play/pause) To pause
of favorites can contain any favorites pages by pressing the radio. The radio display will
combination of AM, FM, or XM the softkey located below the show the Time Shift buffer status
stations. displayed page numbers. bar. The status bar shows the
To store a station as a favorite: 4. Press the FAV button, or let the amount of content that is stored in
menu time out, to return to the the buffer and the current pause
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
original main radio screen point.
2. Press the FAV button to display showing the radio station To resume playback from
the page where the station is to frequency labels and to begin the current pause point,
be stored. the process of programming press r / j again. The radio will no
3. Press and hold one of the favorites for the chosen number longer be playing “live” radio.
six softkeys until a beep sounds. of pages. Instead, time shifted content is
When that softkey is pressed being played from the buffer. When
and released, the radio recalls the radio is playing time shifted
the station that was set. content from the buffer, a buffer
4. Repeat the steps for each radio status bar shows below the station
station to be stored as a favorite. number on the left side of screen.
Press and hold the REV or FWD Pausing XM with the Vehicle Loading XM: The audio system is
buttons to rewind or fast forward Turned Off acquiring and processing audio and
through the time shift buffer. Hold If XM is paused before the vehicle is text data. No action is needed. This
FWD until the end of the currently turned off, the radio will continue to message should disappear shortly.
recorded buffer to resume “live” buffer the current radio station for Channel Off Air: This channel is
radio playback. With “live” radio up to one hour. If the vehicle is not currently in service. Tune in to
playing, the radio display will no turned back on within one hour, the another channel.
longer show the buffer bar below radio will automatically resume
the station number. Channel Unauth: This channel is
playback from the pause point. blocked or cannot be received with
Press the REV or FWD button your XM Subscription package.
multiple time to jump to the previous XM Messages
or next song or commercial. XL (Explicit Language Channel Unavail: This previously
Channels): These channels, assigned channel is no longer
When the radio station is assigned. Tune to another station.
changed, the buffer is cleared or any others, can be blocked at a
customer's request, by calling If this station was one of the
and automatically restarted for the presets, choose another station for
current station. You cannot rewind 1-800-929-2100.
that preset button.
to content from a previously tuned XM Updating: The encryption code
station. in the receiver is being updated, No Artist Info: No artist
and no action is required. This information is available at this
Time shifting of XM is not available time on this channel. The system
while recording or while other process should take no longer than
30 seconds. is working properly.
sources of playback are selected.
No XM Signal: The system is No Title Info: No song title
functioning correctly, but the vehicle information is available at this time
is in a location that is blocking the on this channel. The system is
XM signal. When the vehicle is working properly.
moved into an open area, the signal
should return.
No CAT Info: No category Check XM Receivr: If this FM

information is available at this time message does not clear within a
FM signals only reach about 16 to
on this channel. The system is short period of time, the receiver
65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the
working properly. could have a fault. Consult with your
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
No Information: No text or dealer.
that automatically works to reduce
informational messages are XM Not Available: If this message interference, some static can occur,
available at this time on this does not clear within a short period especially around tall buildings or
channel. The system is working of time, the receiver could have a hills, causing the sound to fade in
properly. fault. Consult with your dealer. and out.
CAT Not Found: There are no AM
channels available for the selected Radio Reception
category. The system is working Frequency interference and static The range for most AM stations is
properly. can occur during normal radio greater than for FM, especially at
reception if items such as cell phone night. The longer range can cause
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, station frequencies to interfere
this message alternates with the XM chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic with each other. For better radio
Radio 8‐digit radio ID label. This reception, most AM radio stations
label is needed to activate the devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is boost the power levels during the
service. day, and then reduce these levels
interference or static, unplug the
Unknown: If this message is item from the accessory power during the night. Static can also
received when tuned to channel 0, outlet. occur when things like storms and
there could be a receiver fault. power lines interfere with radio
Consult with your dealer. reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service Backglass Antenna not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not clear the inside
XM Satellite Radio Service gives The AM-FM antenna is integrated rear window with sharp objects.
digital radio reception from coast to with the rear window defogger,
coast in the 48 contiguous United located in the rear window. Make Notice: Do not apply aftermarket
States, and in Canada. Just as sure that the inside surface of the glass tinting with metallic film.
with FM, tall buildings or hills can rear window is not scratched and The metallic film in some tinting
interfere with satellite radio signals, that the lines on the glass are not materials will interfere with or
causing the sound to fade in and damaged. If the inside surface is distort the incoming radio
out. In addition, traveling or damaged, it could interfere with reception. Any damage caused to
standing under heavy foliage, radio reception. For proper radio your backglass antenna due to
bridges, garages, or tunnels may reception, the antenna connector metallic tinting materials will
cause loss of the XM signal for a needs to be properly attached to the not be covered by the vehicle
period of time. post on the glass. warranty.
Cellular Phone Usage If a cellular telephone antenna Multi-Band Antenna
needs to be attached to the glass,
Cellular phone usage may cause The antenna located on the roof of
make sure that the grid lines for the
interference with the vehicle's radio. the vehicle is used for the OnStar,
AM-FM antenna are not damaged.
This interference may occur when XM Satellite Radio Service System,
There is enough space between
making or receiving phone calls, and GPS (Global Positioning
the grid lines to attach a cellular
charging the phone's battery, System), if the vehicle has these
telephone antenna without
or simply having the phone on. features. Keep the antenna clear
interfering with radio reception.
This interference can cause an of obstructions for clear reception.
increased level of static while Notice: Using a razor blade or
If the vehicle has a sunroof and it is
listening to the radio. If static is sharp object to clear the inside
open, the performance of OnStar,
received while listening to the radio, rear window can damage the rear
XM, and GPS can be affected.
unplug the cellular phone and turn window antenna and/or the rear
it off. window defogger. Repairs would
Audio Players the surface. Pick up discs by

grasping the outer edges or the
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
edge of the hole and the outer edge. without any label, load one CD at
CD Player a time, and keep the CD player
If the surface of a disc is soiled,
The infotainment system's CD take a soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen and the loading slot free of
player can play audio CDs and a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral foreign materials, liquids, and
MP3 CDs. detergent solution mixed with water, debris.
CDs that are 8 cm (3 in) in diameter and clean it. Make sure the wiping Control Buttons
will not work in the CD player. process starts from the center to
the edge. The buttons used to control the CD
Care of CDs player are:
Care of the CD Player
If playing a CD, the sound quality CD: Press to play a CD when
can be reduced due to disc quality, Do not add a label to a disc; it could listening to the radio. The disc
the method of recording, the get caught in the CD player. If a and/or track number display when a
quality of the music that has been label is needed, label the top of the CD is in the player.
recorded, and the way the disc recorded disc with a marking pen.
¨ SEEK/© SEEK: Press to select
has been handled. Handle discs The use of disc lens cleaners for tracks.
carefully. Store CDs in their original discs is not advised, due to the risk
cases or other protective cases and TUNE/TONE: Turn and then press
of contaminating the lens of the disc
away from direct sunlight and dust. to select tracks.
optics with lubricants internal to the
The CD player scans the bottom CD player mechanism. MENU/SELECT: Turn and then
surface of the disc. If the surface of press to select.
a disc is damaged, such as cracked, Notice: If a label is added to a
broken, or scratched, the disc may CD, or more than one CD is r /j (Play/Pause): Press to pause
not play properly or not at all. Do inserted into the slot at a time, and restart CD playback.
not touch the bottom side of a disc or an attempt is made to play s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
while handling it; this could damage scratched or damaged CDs, the and hold to reverse playback quickly
CD player could be damaged. within a track.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Inserting a CD (Six-Disc CD To insert multiple CDs:

and hold to advance playback Player) 1. Press and hold the ^ button
quickly within a track. ^ (Load): Press to load CDs into for five seconds. A beep sounds
^ (Load): Press to load CDs into the CD player. This CD player holds and Load All Discs displays.
the Six-Disc CD player. up to six CDs.
2. Follow the displayed instruction
Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc. To insert one CD: on when to insert the discs. The
For the Six-Disc CD player, press 1. Press and release the load CD player takes up to six CDs.
and hold for two seconds to eject all button. 3. Press the ^ button again to
discs. 2. Wait for the message to insert cancel loading more CDs.
Inserting a CD (Single Disc the disc. If the ignition or radio is turned off
Player) 3. Load a CD. Insert the CD while a CD is in the player, it stays
With the printed side facing up, partway into the slot, label side in the player. When the ignition or
insert a CD into the audio CD slot up. The player pulls the CD in. radio is turned on, the CD starts
until it is drawn in. The CD track A Shuffle tab and the DISC icon playing where it stopped, if it was
number and a Shuffle tab display display. the last selected audio source.
and playback begins. 4. Press the softkey located below When a CD is inserted, the disc
If the ignition or radio is turned off the Shuffle tab to play the tracks number displays on the upper right
while a CD is in the player, it stays of a current disc in random side of the screen and the track
in the player. When the ignition or order. Press the softkey again number displays at the left and
radio is turned on, the CD starts to turn Shuffle off. Shuffle Off center of the screen. The Shuffle
playing where it stopped, if it was displays. and Disc labels appear below.
the last selected audio source. 5. The CD resumes normal
playback.
Press the softkeys located under To use the TUNE/TONE knob or the For vehicles with a Radio with
the Disc tab to change to another MENU/SELECT knob: Six-Disc CD player, the shuffle
disc. The CD begins playback of the Turn the TUNE/TONE knob or the feature only works on the disc that
first track on the selected disc. As MENU/SELECT knob to highlight is currently playing.
each new track starts to play, the the desired track, then press the
track number displays in the left and Playing an MP3/WMA Disc
TUNE/TONE knob or MENU/
center of the screen. SELECT knob to select the track. CD players with the MP3 feature are
capable of playing an MP3/WMA
Playing a CD Fast Forward and Rewind CD-R or CD-RW disc. See MP3 on
Selecting a CD Track s REV (Fast Reverse): Press page 7‑25 for more information.
Tracks can be selected using the and hold to reverse playback quickly Disc Messages
seek buttons, TUNE/TONE knob, within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed DISC ERROR: If this message
or the MENU/SELECT knob.
time of the track displays. Release displays and/or the disc ejects, it
To use the seek buttons: to resume playing the track. could be for one of the following
reasons:
Press the © SEEK button to go to \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
the start of the current track, if more and hold to advance playback
. The radio system does not
than five seconds have played. quickly within a track. Sound is support the playlist format, the
Press the ¨ SEEK button to go to heard at a reduced volume and the compressed audio format, or the
elapsed time of the track displays. data file format.
the next track. If © SEEK or ¨ SEEK
Release to resume playing the . It is very hot. When the
is held, or pressed multiple times, track.
the player continues moving temperature returns to normal,
backward or forward through the Playing Tracks in Random Order the disc should play.
tracks on the CD. Press the softkey under the Shuffle
. The road is very rough. When
tab to play the tracks of a CD in the road becomes smoother, the
random order. Press again to turn disc should play.
Shuffle off. Shuffle Off displays.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.
CD/DVD Player direct sunlight and dust. The
CD/DVD player scans the bottom
. The infotainment system's CD/DVD surface of the disc. If the surface of
The air is very humid. If so, wait
player can play audio discs and a disc is damaged, such as cracked,
about an hour and try again.
MP3 discs. broken, or scratched, the disc may
. There was a problem while not play properly or not at all. Do
Discs that are 8 cm (3 in) in
burning the disc. not touch the bottom side of a disc
diameter will not work in the
. The label is caught in the CD/DVD player. while handling it; this could damage
CD/DVD-A player. the surface. Pick up discs by
The CD/DVD player does not grasping the outer edges or the
If the disc is not playing correctly, support the playback of DVD video edge of the hole and the outer edge.
for any other reason, try a known discs. If a DVD video disc is
good disc. inserted into the player, the radio If the surface of a disc is soiled,
displays “Read Error Please Check take a soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen
If any error occurs repeatedly or
Disc” and ejects the disc. a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
if an error cannot be corrected,
detergent solution mixed with water,
contact your dealer. If the radio Care of CDs and DVDs and clean it. Make sure the wiping
displays an error message, write it
If playing a CD/DVD, the sound process starts from the center to
down and provide it to your dealer
quality can be reduced due to disc the edge.
when reporting the problem.
quality, the method of recording, the Care of the CD/DVD Player
quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the disc Do not add a label to a disc; it
has been handled. Handle discs could get caught in the CD/DVD
carefully. Store CDs and DVDs player. If a label is needed, label
in their original cases or other the top of the recorded disc with a
protective cases and away from marking pen.
The use of disc lens cleaners for ¨ SEEK/© SEEK: Press to select reduced volume. When released,
discs is not advised, due to the risk tracks. normal playback resumes and the
of contaminating the lens of the disc elapsed time of the track displays.
optics with lubricants internal to the TUNE/TONE: Turn and then press
to select tracks. In DVD‐Audio playback mode,
CD/DVD player mechanism. press once to change playback to a
Notice: If a label is added to a MENU/SELECT: Turn and then speed of 2X. Each successive press
disc, or more than one disc is press to select. changes playback to a speed of 4X,
inserted into the slot at a time, r /j (Play/Pause): Press to pause 10X, or 21X. Press r / j to resume
or an attempt is made to play and restart CD or DVD playback. normal playback.
scratched or damaged discs,
the CD/DVD player could be
s REV (Fast Reverse): In CD or Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.
MP3 playback mode, press and
damaged. While using the CD/ Inserting a Disc
hold to reverse playback quickly
DVD player, use only discs in
within a track. Sound is heard at a With the printed side facing up,
good condition without any label,
reduced volume. When released, insert a disc into the audio CD/DVD
load one dosc at a time, and
normal playback resumes and the slot until it is drawn in. The disc
keep the CD/DVD player and the
elapsed time of the track displays. track number and a Shuffle tab
loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris. In DVD‐Audio playback mode, display and playback begins.
press once to change playback to a If the ignition or radio is turned off
Control Buttons speed of 2X. Each successive press while a disc is in the player, it stays
The buttons used to control the changes playback to a speed of 4X, in the player. When the ignition or
CD/DVD player are: 10X, or 21X. Press r / j to resume radio is turned on, the disc starts
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to normal playback. playing where it stopped, if it was
switch between CD/DVD, auxiliary \ FWD (Fast Forward): In CD or the last selected audio source.
input, and USB devices. MP3 playback mode, press and
hold to advance playback quickly
within a track. Sound is heard at a
Playing a CD To use the MENU/SELECT knob: Playing a DVD-A (Audio) Disc

Selecting a CD Track Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
highlight the desired track, then and USB is capable of playing DVD
Tracks can be selected using the press the MENU/SELECT knob to audio discs in the Bose® 5.1 Cabin
seek buttons, TUNE/TONE knob, select the track. surround sound system.
or the MENU/SELECT knob.
Fast Forward and Rewind Insert the DVD audio disc into
To use the seek buttons: the CD/DVD player. DVD Audio
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
Press the © SEEK button to go to and hold to reverse playback quickly
displays and playback begins. The
the start of the current track, if more Group and track number display
within a track. Sound is heard at a
than five seconds have played. during playback.
reduced volume and the elapsed
Press the ¨ SEEK button to go to time of the track displays. Release Selecting a DVD‐A Track
the next track. If © SEEK or ¨ SEEK to resume playing the track.
Tracks can be selected using
is held, or pressed multiple times, \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press the seek buttons, or the TUNE/
the player continues moving and hold to advance playback TONE knob.
backward or forward through the quickly within a track. Sound is
To use the seek buttons:
tracks on the CD. heard at a reduced volume and the
To use the TUNE/TONE knob: elapsed time of the track displays. Press the © SEEK button to go to
Release to resume playing the the start of the current track, if more
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to track. than five seconds have played.
highlight the desired track, then
press the TUNE/TONE knob to Playing Tracks in Random Order Press the ¨ SEEK button to go
select the track. Press the softkey under the Shuffle to the next track. If the © SEEK
tab to play the tracks of a CD in or ¨ SEEK button is held, or
random order. Press again to turn pressed multiple times, the player
Shuffle off. Shuffle Off displays. continues moving backward or
forward through the tracks within
the current group.
To use the TUNE/TONE knob: to a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X. Press the softkey under
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to Press r / j to resume normal the c tab again while in DVD
display a list of all tracks in all playback. PreStop. “DVD Stop” displays.
groups on the DVD audio disc and \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to Press the r / j button while in
to highlight tracks. Stop turning the advance playback quickly within a DVDStop to begin playback
TUNE/TONE knob or press the track. Sound is heard at a reduced from the beginning of the DVD
TUNE/TONE knob to start playback volume. Press once to change audio disc.
of the highlighted track. playback to a speed of 2X. Each
Press the r / j button during DVD
To use the MENU/SELECT knob: successive press changes playback
to a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X. audio playback to pause or resume
Press the softkey under the Menu playback.
tab to display a list of all Groups. Press r / j to resume normal
To change Groups, turn the playback. Selecting DVD Audio Streams
MENU/SELECT knob to highlight Playing Tracks in Random Order Each DVD audio Group may contain
the desired Group. Press the audio content that is encoded in
MENU/SELECT knob to select it. Press the softkey under the Shuffle one or two formats. For example, a
Playback begins from track 1 of the tab to begin random playback of all particular Group may have both a
highlighted Group. songs in the current Group. Press 5.1 surround audio stream and
again to turn off random playback. a 2.0 stereo audio stream available.
Fast Forward and Rewind
Stopping DVD Audio Playback Press the softkey located under
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to
the Audio tab to display the current
reverse playback quickly within a Press the softkey under the c tab
audio stream playing. “Audio
track. Sound is heard at a reduced to stop playback of the DVD audio Stream 1” or “Audio Stream 2” briefly
volume. Press once to change disc. “DVD PreStop” displays. Press displays. Press the softkey located
playback to a speed of 2X. Each the r / j button to resume playback under the Audio tab again to toggle
successive press changes playback from where it was stopped. between Audio Stream 1 or Audio
Stream 2 (if available).

. It is very hot. When the
Check the DSP settings to
temperature returns to normal,
MP3
determine if a 5.1 surround sound
audio stream is playing. See the disc should play. MP3/WMA Format
Operation on page 7‑2 for more . The road is very rough. When The Single CD and the Six-Disc
information. Press the DSP the road becomes smoother, the CD Radio will play MP3/WMA files
tab to see if the 5.1 + Normal disc should play. that were recorded on a CD−R or
or 5.1 + Rear settings are available CD−RW disc. The HDD Radio can
for selection. If these settings are
. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down. also play MP3/WMA files recorded
available, Audio Stream 1 is playing. on DVD+/−R discs or stored on a
. The air is very humid. If so, wait USB storage device. Some USB
Playing an MP3/WMA Disc about an hour and try again. storage devices may not be
CD/DVD players with the MP3 . There was a problem while supported.
feature are capable of playing an burning the disc.
MP3/WMA on DVD+/−R, CD−R, The files can be recorded with the
or CD−RW discs. For more . The label is caught in the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
information, see MP3 on page 7‑25. CD/DVD player. 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,
96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
Disc Messages If the disc is not playing correctly,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,
for any other reason, try a known
DISC ERROR: If this message 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a
good disc.
displays and/or the disc ejects, it variable bit rate. Song title, artist
could be for one of the following If any error occurs repeatedly or name, and album can display when
reasons: if an error cannot be corrected, files are recorded using ID3 tags
contact your dealer. If the radio version 1 and 2.
. The radio system does not displays an error message, write it
support the playlist format, the down and provide it to your dealer
compressed audio format, or the when reporting the problem.
data file format.
Creating an MP3/WMA Disc

. Minimize the length of the file, The HDD Radio can support more
folder, or playlist names. Long than 255 files on an MP3/WMA disc.
When creating an MP3/WMA disc: file, folder, or playlist names,
. Make sure the MP3/WMA files or a combination of a large The HDD Radio does not support
are recorded on a CD−R or number of files, folders, playlists on a disc or USB storage
CD−RW disc. or playlists can cause the player device.
to be unable to play up to the Root Directory
. Do not mix standard audio and
maximum number of files,
MP3/WMA files on one disc. The root directory of the CD-R or
folders, playlists, or sessions.
. Make sure the CD does not CD-RW is treated as a folder. If
. Finalize the audio disc before the root directory has compressed
have more than a maximum of
burning it. Adding music to an audio files, the directory displays
50 folders and playlists, and
existing disc can cause the disc as F1 DISC. All files contained
255 files to read and play.
not to function. directly under the root directory are
. Create a folder structure that accessed prior to any root directory
Playlists can be selected by using
makes it easy to find songs folders. Playlists (Px) are always
the previous and next folder
while driving. Organize songs by accessed after root folders or files.
buttons, the SEEK arrows, or
albums using one folder for each
album. Each folder or album the \ FWD or s REV buttons. The HDD Radio displays the root
should contain 18 songs or less. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that directory of an MP3/WMA disc as
was recorded using no file folders F1 MP3 and the root directory of a
. Avoid subfolders. The system can also be played. If a CD-R or USB storage device as F1 USB.
can support up to 8 subfolders CD-RW contains more than the
deep. Keep the total number of maximum of 50 folders and
folders to a minimum to reduce playlists, and 255 files, the player
the complexity and confusion lets you access and navigate up to
during playback. the maximum, but all items over the
. Create playlists that have a .m3u maximum are not accessible.
or .wpl extension; other file
extensions may not work.
Empty Directory or Folder Order of Play File System and Naming

If a root directory or a folder exists Tracks recorded to the CD-R or The song name that is contained in
somewhere in the file structure CD-RW play in the following order: the ID3 tag displays. If the song
that contains empty folders and . Play begins from the first track name is not in the ID3 tag, the radio
no compressed files in them, the in the first folder and continues displays the file name without the
player advances to the next folder sequentially through all tracks extension.
in the file structure that contains in each folder. When the last Track names longer than
compressed audio files. track of the last folder has 32 characters are shortened.
No Folder played, play continues from the Parts of words on the last page of
first track of the first playlist. text and the extension of the file
When the CD contains only name are not displayed.
compressed files, the files are ‐ Playlists can be changed by
located under the root folder. The pressing the next and previous The HDD Radio will display file
next and previous folder functions folder button. names with the extension.
do not display on a CD that was . Play begins from the first track in Preprogrammed Playlists
recorded without folders or playlists. the first playlist and continues
The radio displays F1 DISC for the sequentially through all tracks Preprogrammed playlists that
root directory. in each playlist. When the last were created using WinAmp™,
track of the last playlist has MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
When the CD contains only playlists software can be accessed, however
and compressed audio files, but no played, play continues from the
first track of the first folder. they cannot be edited using the
folders, all files are located under radio. These playlists are special
the root folder. The folder down When play enters a new folder, the folders containing compressed
and the folder up buttons search display does not automatically show audio song files. Playlists must have
playlists (Px) first and then go to the new folder name unless the a file extension of PLS or M3U.
the root folder. The radio displays folder mode has been chosen as
F1 DISC for the root directory. the default display. The new track
name displays.
Playlists can be selected using the To use the seek buttons: Fast Forward and Rewind
previous and next folder buttons. s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
Tracks can be changed by pressing Press the © SEEK button to go to
the start of the current track, if more and hold to reverse playback quickly
the seek buttons or turning the within a track. Sound is heard at a
tune knob. Songs are played than five seconds have played.
reduced volume and the elapsed
sequentially; press s REV Press the ¨ SEEK button to go to
time of the track displays. Release
or \ FWD to reverse or advance the next track. If © SEEK or ¨ SEEK to resume playing the track.
through the playing song. is held, or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
The HDD Radio does not support and hold to advance playback
backward or forward through the
preprogrammed playlists. To create quickly within a track. Sound is
tracks on the disc.
a playlist on the HDD radio from heard at a reduced volume and the
songs recorded to the HDD, see To use the TUNE/TONE knob: elapsed time of the track displays.
Hard Drive Device (HDD) on Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to Release to resume playing the
page 7‑29. highlight the desired track, then track.
press the TUNE/TONE knob to Searching for MP3 Tracks
Playing an MP3/WMA from a
select the track.
Disc or a USB Storage Device Tracks can be searched for by using
To use the softkeys below the the menu system.
Selecting an MP3 Track folder tabs:
To use the menu system:
Tracks can be selected using the S Folder (Previous Folder): Press
seek buttons, the TUNE/TONE the softkey under the Folder tab to 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
knob, or the softkeys below the go to the first track in the previous to display the MP3 Menu.
folder tabs on the infotainment folder. 2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
display. highlight an option from the MP3
Folder T (Next Folder): Press the
softkey under the Folder tab to go to Menu. The available options are:
the first track in the next folder. . Playlists*
. Tracks

. Folders . Press the second softkey The last radio station that was on
. Artists located under the display to go begins playing and a status bar
to the middle section of the list. appears on the top of the display
. Albums . Press the third softkey located when the recording process starts.
. Song Titles under the display to go to the The status bar disappears when the
last section of the list. process has ended. The recorded
. AudioBook
songs are now available.
3. Press the MENU/SELECT knob Playing Tracks in Random Order
to select the desired option. Copy Protected CD(s)
Press the softkey under the Shuffle
*The HDD Radio does not support tab to play the tracks of the current Make sure the disc is not
preprogrammed playlists. To create folder in random order. Press again copy-protected. The radio does
a playlist on the HDD radio from to turn Shuffle off. Shuffle Off not copy a copy-protected CD to
songs recorded to the HDD, see displays. the HDD.
Hard Drive Device (HDD) on Deleting a Recorded Song or
page 7‑29. Hard Drive Device (HDD) Category
Quick Jump To use the HDD, tracks must be DEL (Delete): Press the DEL
recorded from a CD, MP3 Disc, button to delete the track that is
To scroll up or down the list of
or USB device first. currently playing or select a track
Artists, Albums, or Song Titles,
press and hold the softkey located from one of the song lists.
Recording from Audio Discs
under the FWD or REV tab. To delete an entire category, select
REC (Record): Press to start
To jump to the beginning, middle, a category and press DEL.
recording tracks from the disc while
or last section of the list: it is playing. The radio has the
. Press the first softkey located option to record the current track
under the display to go to the playing or all tracks from the CD.
beginning section of the list. Press the softkey under the desired
record option.
Stopping the Recording Audio CD Song, Artist, Album, Songs recorded with “NO INFO”
While recording from the audio CD, and Genre Information to the HDD will be hard to sort,
press the REC button to display the Radios with HDD contain a identify, and select. To make HDD
stop recording option. Press the Gracenote® Database that the radio navigation easier, CDs with “NO
softkey under this option to confirm uses to determine the song, artist, INFO” can first be converted to MP3
the selection. album, and genre information. The format with Tag information on a
Gracenote Database allows the home computer and then recorded
Ejecting a CD or Turning Off the radio to record an audio CD to the to the HDD from an MP3 disc or
Vehicle While Recording HDD and store the content using USB device.
If the CD is ejected or the vehicle song, artist, album, and genre Occasionally, the radio may find
is turned off before the recording information. more than one match in the
process has completed, tracks that Newly released audio CDs as well Gracenote Database for an audio
have been completely recorded as some less common audio CDs CD that has been recorded. If this
are stored to the HDD. Incomplete may not be found in the Gracenote happens, the radio will display
tracks are discarded. Database stored on the HDD. “Multi‐Hit” for the name information
If these audio CDs contain CD-text, when the songs are selected from
Re-recording Audio CDs
the radio will use the CD-text the HDD. With a “Muli‐Hit” song
If a CD has already been recorded, playing, press the button below the
information when recording the
the radio system will not record EDIT tab to bring up the list of
content to the HDD. If an audio
the contents again. If a partially multiple names found in the
CD is not found in the Gracenote
recorded CD is selected for Gracenote Database. Use the
Database and it does not have
recording, only those songs which MENU/SELECT knob to highlight
CD-text information, the radio will
are not already on the HDD will be and select the correct name for the
record the audio CD with all song,
recorded. “Multi‐Hit” recorded CD.
artist, album and genre names as
“NO INFO.”
The Gracenote Database stored on The last radio station that was on USB Host Support
the HDD can be updated so that it begins playing and a status bar The USB connector uses the USB
includes name information for more appears on the top of the display standards, 1.1 and 2.0.
recently released audio CDs. See when the recording process starts.
your dealer for more information on The status bar disappears when the USB Supported Devices
Gracenote® Database updates for process has ended. The recorded . USB Flash Drives
the HDD radio. songs are now available.
. Portable USB Hard Drives
Recording from MP3/WMA AAC and OGG Vorbis file types are
Discs or USB not fully supported. These file types Playing from the Hard Drive
may or may not play and may be Device
REC (Record): Press to start shown without Tag information.
recording tracks from a MP3/WMA Without Tag information available, HDD (Hard Drive Device): Press
disc or a USB device (excluding these file types may be identified the HDD button to start playing
iPods) while it is playing. The radio only by file name. tracks from the HDD. HDD displays
has the option to record the current and playback resumes from where it
track playing or all tracks from the AudioBooks from www.audible.com was last stopped.
CD. Press the softkey under the can also be transferred to the HDD
desired record option. using the record function. See
“AudioBooks” later in this section for
more information.
HDD Playback Mode

. Artists
The infotainment system displays the current HDD playback mode. The
. Albums
following table shows the display mode options and what happens as the . Song Titles
mode is displayed: . Genres
Mode When Displayed . Recently Saved
Shuffle System is randomly playing back all HDD content. . AudioBook
System is playing back content by a selected artist in 3. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
Artist
alphabetical order. to select the desired option.
System is playing back content from a selected album in Quick Jump
Album
track order.
To scroll up or down the list of
Genre System is playing back content in a selected genre in Artists, Albums, or Song Titles,
alphabetical order. press and hold the softkey under
Song System is playing back all songs in alphabetical order. the FWD or REV tab.
Playlist System is playing back all songs from the selected To jump to the beginning, middle,
playlist in the order they were added. or last section of the list:
AudioBook System is playing back AudioBook content.

. Press the first softkey located
under the display to go to the
beginning section of the list.
HDD Menu 2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to . Press the second softkey
highlight an option from the HDD located under the display to go
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to the middle section of the list.
to display the HDD Menu. Menu. The available options are:
. Shuffle Songs . Press the third softkey located
under the display to go to the
. Playlist last section of the list.
Shuffle Songs HDD Categories Select the HDD Menu category to

Select this option from the HDD The HDD category mode can be display the available items in each
Menu to randomly play back HDD used to select a song by a particular individual category, then select an
content. artist, album, or genre for playback. item from one of these submenus to
As an example, the HDD Menu display a list of songs related to that
Playlist displays a layout such as: menu item. Select a song to begin
Select this option from the HDD playback of that song and to put the
Menu to display all six favorite Artists (5) HDD in the playback mode.
playlists, then select one of the Albums (6) Recently Saved
six playlists to display a list of
songs that have been added to that Song Titles (77) Select this option from the HDD
favorite playlist. Select a song from Menu to display the last 50 songs
Genres (3)
the list to begin playback of that added since the vehicle was
song and to put the HDD into the last turned on. The songs are
The radio system displays the categorized into songs recorded
Playlist mode. See “Saving HDD number of available items in each
Favorites” later in this section for from CDs or USB devices.
individual category as shown on the
more information. sample display. For example, the AudioBook
sample display shows there is The radio is able to play back
content on the hard drive from AudioBook content downloaded
five individual artists. from www.audible.com. This content
can be transferred into the HDD by
either burning it to a CD or copying
it to a USB storage device and then
recording it to the HDD.
The audible.com® playback requires Favorites can be saved by pressing and holding the softkey under the
activation of the vehicle as a player favorites selection. Store favorites according to the following table:
for downloaded content. The radio
system activates the audible.com Favorites
Action on Press-and-Hold
system when information is found Display Mode
on either a CD inserted into the Adds currently playing track to the playlist
CD/DVD player or a USB storage Playlist
selected.
device that is connected. The
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Saves the artist associated with the currently
Artist
is required in order to activate the playing track in the indicated favorites position.
vehicle. Saves the album associated with the currently
Album
playing track in the indicated favorites position.
Saving HDD Favorites
Press the FAV button to change Saves the genre associated with the currently
Genre
between favorite modes during HDD playing track in the indicated favorites position.
playback. The following favorite
modes are supported:
.
Configuring HDD Favorites Time-shifting — Pause and
Playlists Rewind Live FM/AM and XM™
Press the CONFIG button to display
. Artists the radio configuration options. (if equipped)
. Albums Press the softkey under the HDD The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
tab to display the available favorite and USB has the ability to rewind
. Genres
modes. Press the softkey under the 60 minutes of FM/AM and XM
favorite tab to set the available (if equipped) content. While listening
favorite modes. Available favorite to the radio, the content from the
modes are highlighted. current station is always being
buffered to the HDD.
Press r / j (play/pause) to pause On AM/FM, press the REV or FWD If the vehicle is turned back on
the radio. The radio display will button multiple times to rewind or within one hour, the radio will
show the Time Shift buffer status fast forward. Each press will rewind automatically resume playback from
bar. The status bar shows the or fast forward 30 seconds of the pause point.
amount of content that is stored in content. On XM, press the REV or
the buffer and the current pause FWD button multiple times to jump Auxiliary Devices
point. to the previous or next song or
commercial. The 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack and
To resume playback from the USB port (if equipped), located
the current pause point, When the radio station is in the center console bin, allow
changed, the buffer is cleared portable devices to connect to the
press r / j again. The radio
and automatically restarted for the vehicle. This is not an audio output;
will no longer be playing “live” radio. current station. You cannot rewind
Instead, time shifted content is do not plug headphones into the
the content from a previously tuned auxiliary input jack.
being played from the buffer. When station.
the radio is playing time shifted Set up auxiliary devices while the
content from the buffer, a buffer Time shifting of AM/FM or XM is not vehicle is stopped. See Defensive
status bar shows below the station available while recording or while Driving on page 9‑2 for more
number on the left side of screen. other sources of playback are information on driver distraction.
selected.
Press and hold the REV or FWD When a device is first connected
buttons to rewind or fast forward Pausing AM/FM or XM™ to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack
through the time shift buffer. Hold (if equipped) with the Vehicle or the USB port (if equipped) the
FWD until the end of the currently Turned Off infotainment system automatically
recorded buffer to resume “live” If AM/FM or XM is paused before switches to that device. If an
radio playback. With “live” radio the vehicle is turned off, the radio auxiliary device has already been
playing, the radio display will no will continue to buffer the current connected, press the AUX or
longer show the buffer bar below radio station for up to one hour. CD/AUX button.
the station number.
3.5 mm Jack USB Supported Devices Connecting an iPod

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to . USB Flash Drives To connect the iPod, connect one
the auxiliary input jack to use a . Portable USB Hard Drives end of the special iPod connection
portable audio player. cable to the iPod’s dock connector.
. Fifth generation or later iPods* Connect the other end to both the
Playback of an audio device that is
. First, Second, or Third USB port and the auxiliary input jack
connected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
generation iPod nanos* located in the center console. The
jack can only be controlled using
USB port and the auxiliary input jack
the controls on the device. . iPod classics* are located in the center console
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn *For proper operation, make bin. If the vehicle is on and the USB
clockwise or counterclockwise to sure the iPod has the latest connection works, a GM logo may
increase or decrease the volume of firmware from Apple®. The iPod appear on the iPod. The iPod's
the portable player. Use the portable firmware can be updated using the music information will be shown on
device to make additional volume latest iTunes application. See the radio’s display and the music
adjustments. www.apple.com/itunes. begins playing through the vehicle's
audio system.
CD or CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Connecting a USB Storage Device
Press to play a CD when a portable The iPod's battery charges while
Connect the USB storage device to it is connected to the vehicle
audio device is playing. Press again the USB port located in the center
to start playing audio from the and if the ignition is turned to
console. Some USB devices may ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
connected portable audio player. not be supported.
If a portable audio player is not It can also be left connected to the
connected, “No Aux Device” Playing an MP3/WMA from a USB vehicle after the vehicle is turned
displays. Storage Device off. With the vehicle turned off, the
iPod will automatically be powered
USB Port See MP3 on page 7‑25 for more off and will not charge or draw
information. power from the vehicle's battery.
The USB connector uses the USB
standards, 1.1 and 2.0.
A standard iPod USB cable, like To connect and control the iPod Phone
the one that came with the iPod, using the radio controls, use the
cannot be used to connect an iPod special iPod connection cable that
to the vehicle. The special iPod came as standard equipment with Bluetooth
connection cable that came the vehicle as part of the USB Vehicles with a Bluetooth® system
equipped with the vehicle or that option. The special iPod connection can use a Bluetooth‐capable cell
was made available from your cable can also be purchased or phone with a Hands‐Free Profile
dealer must be used to command made available, from your dealer. to make and receive phone calls.
and control an iPod. See your dealer for more The system can be used while
Use a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) information. the ignition is in the ON/RUN or
stereo cable to connect an older Use the Menu/Select knob to bring ACC/ACCESSORY position. The
iPod model that is not supported, up the iPod Menu and select Songs, range of the Bluetooth system
or if the special iPod connection Artists, Albums, Playlists and Audio can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all
cable is missing. Command and books to play from the iPod. phones support all functions, and
control of the iPod using the not all phones are guaranteed to
infotainment control buttons and Disconnecting an iPod work with the Bluetooth system. See
knobs is not supported when only a To properly dismount the iPod www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable is used. USB device before disconnecting information on compatible phones.
from the vehicle, press the softkey
Commanding and Controlling under the EJECT tab on the
an iPod infotainment display screen during
An iPod™ can be controlled by iPod playback.
using the radio buttons and knobs;
the song information shows on the
infotainment system's display.
Voice Recognition How to Speak: Speak clearly in a Bluetooth Controls

calm and natural voice.
The Bluetooth system uses voice Use the buttons located on the
recognition to interpret voice Audio System steering wheel to operate the
commands to dial phone numbers in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See
and name tags. When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth Steering Wheel Controls (Audio) on
system, sound comes through page 5‑3 for more information.
For additional information say the vehicle's front audio system
“Help” while you are in a voice speakers and over‐rides the audio b g (Push To Talk): Press to
recognition menu. system. Use the audio system answer incoming calls, to confirm
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to volume knob, during a call, to system information, and to start
a minimum. The system may not change the volume level. The speech recognition.
recognize voice commands if there adjusted volume level remains in c ª (Phone On Hook): Press
is too much background noise. memory for later calls. To prevent to end a call, reject a call, or to
missed calls, a minimum volume cancel an operation.
When to Speak: A short tone level is used if the volume is turned
sounds after the system responds down too low. For vehicles without a navigation
indicating when it is waiting for a system, the system responds with
voice command. Wait until the tone “Ready” followed by a tone.
and then speak. For vehicles with a navigation
system, the system responds with
a tone. After the tone, say “Hands
Free.” The system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.
Pairing
. Only one paired cell phone can 4. Start the pairing process on the
be connected to the Bluetooth cell phone that you want to pair.
A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone system at a time. For help with this process, see
must be paired to the in‐vehicle . If multiple paired cell phones your cell phone manufacturer's
Bluetooth system first and then
are within range of the system, user guide.
connected to the vehicle before it
can be used. See the cell phone the system connects to the 5. Locate the device named “Your
manufacturer's user guide for first available paired cell phone Vehicle” in the list on the cell
Bluetooth functions before pairing in the order that they were first phone. Follow the instructions
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone paired to the system. To link to on the cell phone to enter the
is not connected, calls will be made a different paired phone, see PIN that was provided in Step 3.
using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling, “Connecting to a Different After the PIN is successfully
if available. Refer to the OnStar Phone” later in this section. entered, the system prompts you
Owner's Guide for more information. Pairing a Phone to provide a name for the paired
cell phone. This name will be
Pairing Information: 1. Press and hold b g for used to indicate which phones
. Up to five cell phones can be two seconds. For vehicles are paired and connected to the
paired to the Bluetooth system. with a navigation system say vehicle. See “Listing All Paired
. The pairing process is disabled “Hands Free” after the tone. and Connected Phones” in this
when the vehicle is moving. section for more information.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
. Pairing only needs to be 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
completed once, unless the additional phones.
with instructions and a four‐digit
pairing information on the cell Personal Identification Number
phone changes or the cell phone (PIN). The PIN will be used in
is deleted from the system. Step 5.
Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone 3. Say “Change phone.”
Phones To connect to a different cell phone, . If another phone is found,
1. Press and hold b g for the Bluetooth system looks for the the response will be
two seconds. For vehicles next available cell phone in the “<Phone name> is now
with a navigation system say order in which all the available cell connected.”
“Hands Free” after the tone. phones were paired. Depending on . If another phone is not
which cell phone you want to found, the original phone
2. Say “Bluetooth.” connect to, you may have to use remains connected.
3. Say “List.” this command several times.
Storing and Deleting Phone
Deleting a Paired Phone 1. Press and hold b g for
Numbers
two seconds. For vehicles with a
1. Press and hold b g for navigation system say “Hands The system can store up to
two seconds. For vehicles Free” after the tone. 30 phone numbers as name tags in
with a navigation system say the Hands Free Directory that is
“Hands Free” after the tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
shared between the Bluetooth and
2. Say “Bluetooth.” OnStar systems.
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
which phone to delete.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
The following commands are used to delete and store phone numbers. To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
Command Usage “Verify” at any time.
Store This command will store a phone number,
1. Press and hold b g for
or a group of numbers as a name tag.
two seconds. For vehicles
Digit Store This command allows a phone number to with a navigation system say
be stored as a name tag by entering the “Hands Free” after the tone.
digits one at a time.
2. Say “Digit Store.”
Delete This command is used to delete individual
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
name tags.
that you want to store. After
Delete All Name Tags This command deletes all stored name tags each digit is entered, the system
in the Hands Free Calling Directory and the repeats back the digit it heard
OnStar Turn by Turn Destinations Directory. followed by a tone. After the
last digit has been entered, say
“Store,” and then follow the
Using the “Store” Command follow the directions given by the directions given by the system to
system to save a name tag for save a name tag for this number.
1. Press and hold b g for this number.
two seconds. For vehicles Using the “Delete” Command
with a navigation system say Using the “Digit Store” Command
1. Press and hold b g for
“Hands Free” after the tone. If an unwanted number is two seconds. For vehicles
2. Say “Store.” recognized by the system, say with a navigation system say
“Clear” at any time to clear the “Hands Free” after the tone.
3. Say the phone number or group last number.
of numbers you want to store all 2. Say “Delete.”
at once with no pauses, then 3. Say the name tag you want to
delete.
Using the “Delete All Name Tags” Making a Call

Command
Calls can be made using the following commands.
This command deletes all stored
name tags in the Hands Free Command Usage
Calling Directory and the OnStar Dial or Call The dial or call command can be used
Turn by Turn Destinations Directory. interchangeably to dial a phone number or
To delete all name tags: a stored name tag.
1. Press and hold b g for Digit Dial This command allows a phone number to
two seconds. For vehicles be dialed by entering the digits one at
with a navigation system say a time.
“Hands Free” after the tone. Re‐dial This command is used to dial the last
2. Say “Delete all name tags.” number used on the cell phone.
Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all the Using the “Dial” or “Call” Once connected, the person called
stored numbers and name tags. Command will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Using the “List” Command 1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. For vehicles Using the “Digit Dial” Command
1. Press and hold b g for with a navigation system say The digit dial command allows a
two seconds. For vehicles “Hands Free” after the tone. phone number to be dialed by
with a navigation system say
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” entering the digits one at a time.
“Hands Free” after the tone.
After each digit is entered, the
2. Say “Directory.” 3. Say the entire number without system repeats back the digit it
pausing or say the name tag. heard followed by a tone.
3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”
4. Say “List.”
If an unwanted number is Using the “Re‐dial” Command Call Waiting

“Clear” at any time to clear the last 1. Press and hold b g for Call waiting must be supported on
two seconds. For vehicles the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
number.
with a navigation system say the wireless service carrier to work.
To hear all of the numbers “Hands Free” after the tone.
. Press b g to answer an
“Verify” at any time. 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.” incoming call when another
Once connected, the person called call is active. The original call is
1. Press and hold b g for placed on hold.
will be heard through the audio
two seconds. For vehicles speakers.
with a navigation system say
. Press b g again to return to the
“Hands Free” after the tone. Receiving a Call original call.
2. Say “Digit Dial.” When an incoming call is received,
. To ignore the incoming call,
the audio system mutes and a ring continue with the original call
3. Say each digit, one at a time, with no action.
that you want to dial. After tone is heard in the vehicle.
each digit is entered, the system . Press b g to answer the call. . Press c ª to disconnect the
repeats back the digit it heard current call and switch to the call
followed by a tone. After the . Press c ª to ignore a call. on hold.
last digit has been entered,
say “Dial.”
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Three‐Way Calling Muting a Call To Transfer Audio from the

Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
Three‐Way Calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside
supported on the Bluetooth the vehicle can be muted so that the 1. Press b g.
phone and enabled by the person on the other end of the call
wireless service carrier to work. cannot hear them. 2. Say “Transfer Call.”
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
1. While on a call press b g. To mute a call, press b g and then System from a Cell Phone
2. Say “Three‐way call.” say “Mute Call.”
During a call with the audio on
3. Use the dial or call command to To cancel mute, press b g and the cell phone, press b g for
dial the number of the third party then say “Un‐mute Call.” two seconds. For vehicles with a
to call. navigation system say “Hands Free”
Transferring a Call
4. Once the call is connected, after the tone. The audio transfers
Audio can be transferred between to the vehicle. If the audio does not
press b g to link all the callers the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and
together. transfer to the vehicle, use the audio
the cell phone. transfer feature on the cell phone.
Ending a Call The cell phone must be paired See your cell phone manufacturer's
and connected with the Bluetooth user guide for more information.
Press c ª to end a call. system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Voice Pass‐Thru Dual Tone Multi‐Frequency Other Information

Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to (DTMF) Tones The Bluetooth® word mark and
the voice recognition commands on The Bluetooth system can send logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
the cell phone. See the cell phone numbers and the numbers stored SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
manufacturer's user guide to see if as name tags during a call. You by General Motors is under license.
the cell phone supports this feature. can use this feature when calling Other trademarks and trade names
This feature can be used to verbally a menu‐driven phone system. are those of their respective owners.
access contacts stored in the cell Account numbers can also be See Radio Frequency Statement on
phone. stored for use. page 13‑18 for Federal
1. Press and hold b g for 1. Press b g. Communications Commission (FCC)
two seconds. rules and Industry Canada
2. Say “Dial.” Standards.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say the number or name tag
3. Say “Voice.” The system to send.
responds with “OK, accessing
<phone name>.” Clearing the System
. The cell phone's normal Unless information is deleted out of
prompt messages will the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
go through their cycle will be retained indefinitely. This
according to the phone's includes all saved name tags in
operating instructions. the phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous sections on “Deleting a
Paired Phone” and “Storing and
Deleting Phone Numbers.”
2 NOTES
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Climate Control Systems The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
Dual Automatic Climate Control
this system.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
A. Display F. Defrost
B. Fan G. Air Delivery Mode
C. Power H. Temperature and Heated/
D. AUTO Ventilated Seat
E. PASS (Passenger Climate I. Air Conditioning

Control) J. Recirculation
8-2 Climate Controls
K. Outside Air To avoid blowing cold air in Q / R (Temperature Control):

L. Rear Window Defogger cold weather, the system delays The temperature can be adjusted
turning on the fan until warm air separately for the driver and the
Automatic Operation is available. The system starts passenger. Press to increase or
AUTO (Automatic): The system out blowing air at the floor, decrease the automatic temperature
automatically controls fan speed, air but can automatically change settings.
delivery, and air conditioning in modes as the vehicle warms
up to maintain the chosen PASS (Passenger Climate
order to heat or cool the vehicle to Control): Press to set a different
the desired temperature. When the temperature setting. The length
of time needed for warm up temperature for the passenger.
indicator light is on, the system is in Then adjust the passenger
full automatic operation. If the air depends on the outside
temperature and the length temperature buttons to a
delivery mode or fan setting is comfortable setting.
manually adjusted, the auto of time that has elapsed since
indicator turns off and displays the vehicle was last driven. Pressing the PASS button again
will show the selected settings. 3. Wait for the system to regulate. automatically sets the passenger's
This may take from 10 to temperature to the driver's setting.
1. Press the AUTO button.
30 minutes. Then adjust the Turning the passenger's
2. Adjust the temperature to a temperature, if necessary. temperature display off does
comfortable setting between not shut the passenger's climate
21°C (70°F) and 27°C (80°F). English can be changed to
metric units through the Driver control system off.
Choosing the coldest or warmest Information Center (DIC). See
temperature setting will not Driver Information Center (DIC) on
cause the system to heat or page 5‑27.
cool any faster.
Manual Operation H G (Air Delivery Mode Control): - (Defog): This mode clears the
O (Power): Press to turn the Press the buttons to change the windows of fog or moisture. Air is
climate control system on or off. direction of the airflow. The current directed to the windshield, floor,
When the climate control system is mode appears in the display screen. and side window outlets. When
turned off the air inlet defaults to Changing the mode cancels the this mode is selected, the system
outside air. automatic air delivery. Press AUTO turns off recirculation and runs the
to return to automatic operation. air-conditioning compressor unless
D C (Fan Control): Press the the outside temperature is at or
buttons to increase or decrease the The outboard air outlets always
receive some airflow in every mode, below freezing. If recirculation is
fan speed. Pressing either button selected while in defog mode, it is
cancels automatic fan control. except defrost.
cancelled after 10 minutes.
Press AUTO to return to automatic To change the current mode, select
operation. The blower may reduce one of the following: 0 (Defrost): This mode clears
during an Onstar® session to limit the windshield of fog or frost
background noise. Y (Vent): Air is directed to the more quickly. Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets. windshield, with some air directed
If the airflow seems low when the to the side windows. In this mode,
fan speed is at the highest setting, \ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel the system automatically turns
the passenger compartment air off recirculation and runs the
filter might need to be replaced. For outlets and the floor outlets. In
automatic operation, cooler air is air-conditioning compressor, unless
more information, see Passenger the outside temperature is at or
Compartment Air Filter on page 8‑7 directed to the upper outlets and
warmer air to the floor outlets. below freezing.
and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2. [ (Floor): Air is directed to the This mode can also cause the fan
floor outlets, with some air directed speed and air temperature to
to the windshield and outboard increase.
outlets.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to Using recirculation for long periods The rear window defogger stays on
turn the air conditioning system on of time could cause the air inside for about 15 minutes, before turning
or off and override the automatic the vehicle to become too dry off if the vehicle is moving at a
system. When in AUTO, the air or stuffy. To prevent this from slower speed. At higher speeds, the
conditioning compressor comes on happening, after the air in the rear window defogger may stay on
automatically, as needed. vehicle has cooled, select outside continuously. With each additional
air or press the auto button. press, the defogger runs for about
The air conditioning system 10 minutes. The defogger can also
removes moisture from the air, so F (Outside Air): Press to turn
be turned off by turning off the
water might drip under the vehicle on the outside air. An indicator light
turns on. The outside air mode pulls engine.
while idling or after turning off the
engine. This is normal. fresh air from outside the vehicle. The heated outside rearview mirrors
Outside air is always selected in turn on when the rear window
M (Recirculation): Press to turn defrost mode to prevent fogging. defogger button is on and helps to
on recirculation. An indicator light clear fog or frost from the surface of
comes on. Air is recirculated inside Rear Window Defogger the mirrors. See Heated Mirrors on
the vehicle. It helps to quickly cool The rear window defogger uses a page 2‑29.
the air inside the vehicle or prevent warming grid to remove fog or frost
outside air and odors from entering. Notice: Do not try to clear frost
from the rear window. It only works or other material from the inside
Press the AUTO button to have the when the ignition is in ON/RUN.
system select the best air delivery of the front windshield and rear
mode for the temperature setting. = (Rear Window Defogger): window with a razor blade or
Press to turn the rear window anything else that is sharp. This
Recirculation is not available in the defogger on or off. may damage the rear window
defrost mode and automatically defogger grid and affect your
turns off 10 minutes after defog is radio's ability to pick up stations
selected. This helps to limit window clearly. The repairs wouldn't be
fogging in the vehicle. covered by your warranty.
z / { (Heated and Ventilated Sensors

Seats): Press to heat or ventilate
the seat. See Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats on page 3‑12.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation: For vehicles with
remote vehicle start, the climate
control system automatically heats
and cools the vehicle based on the
temperature inside and outside of
the vehicle. The climate control
displays will be blank. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 2‑12. The interior temperature sensor,
located on the instrument panel
In cold weather the windshield The solar sensor located on to the right of the steering wheel,
defroster and/or rear window the instrument panel, near the measures the temperature of the air
defogger automatically turn on. windshield, monitors the solar heat. inside the vehicle.
If the vehicle has heated seats, they
will also turn on. The climate control system uses the
information from these sensors to
When the ignition is turned to adjust the fan speed and the air
ON/RUN, the climate control system delivery, in order to maintain the
returns to the settings used before selected temperature. The system
the vehicle was last turned off. may also supply cooler air to the
The heated seats will turn off, side of the vehicle facing the sun.
if equipped. The recirculation mode will also be
activated, as necessary.
Do not cover the sensors or the Under certain conditions, the air Air Vents
automatic climate control system will quality sensor will not activate
not work properly. recirculation, such as during cold Use the air outlets located in the
weather or with odors, like skunk. To center and on the side of the
Air Quality Sensor instrument panel to direct the
limit odors manually, press M until
For vehicles with an air quality the condition has passed. airflow. Use the thumbwheels near
sensor, the climate control system the air outlets to open or close off
adjusts to limit some exhaust fumes The air quality sensor system the airflow.
from being pulled inside your does not protect against carbon
monoxide (CO), which you cannot Operation Tips
vehicle.
see or smell. See Engine Exhaust . Clear away any ice, snow,
Press the AUTO button on the on page 9‑25. or leaves from air inlets at the
climate control to activate the air
base of the windshield that could
quality sensor. The recirculation
block the flow of air into the
indicator light comes on when poor
vehicle.
quality air is detected. The air
quality sensor will not maintain . Keep the path under the front
recirculation for an extended period seats clear of objects to help
to prevent the air inside the vehicle circulate the air inside of the
from becoming too dry or stuffy. vehicle more effectively.
. Use of non‐GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
Maintenance To replace the passenger

compartment air filter:
Passenger Compartment 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
Air Filter
2. Turn on the windshield wipers
The passenger compartment air and turn the ignition off again
filter traps most of the dust and when the wipers are straight up
pollen from the air entering the on the windshield.
vehicle. The filter will need to
be changed periodically. See This allows access to the
Maintenance Replacement Parts on leaf screen. The passenger
page 11‑9. compartment air filter is located
The passenger compartment air under the screen.
Using the climate control system
without the passenger air filter filter is located under the hood 3. Open the hood to access
installed could let water or other below the windshield wiper arm the engine compartment. See
debris enter the system. This could and the screen on the passenger Hood on page 10‑5 for more
cause a water leak or noises. Make side of the vehicle. See Engine information.
sure a new air filter is installed after Compartment Overview on
4. Remove the three screws that
removing the old one. page 10‑6 for more information
hold the screen in place and
on location.
lift off the screen by lifting and
sliding it toward the center of the
vehicle.
5. Pull out on the two tabs located

on each end of the filter cover.
6. Lift the filter cover off by pulling
it straight up.
7. Remove the old filter and insert
a new one.
See Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 11‑9 for the
correct part number for the filter.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to
reinstall the cover.
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .

Retained Accessory
9-19 Brakes
Antilock Brake
Operating Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . .
9-22
9-22
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake (Manual) . . . . . .
9-33
9-34
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Parking Brake (Electric) . . . . . . 9-35
Driving Information Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Brake Assist
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parking (Manual (Except CTS-V) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Parking Over Things Ride Control Systems
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Traction Control
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Engine Exhaust StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Competitive Driving Mode . . . 9-39
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Running the Vehicle While Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-40
Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-40
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Automatic Transmission Cruise Control
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-26 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11 Object Detection Systems
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Manual Transmission Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-43
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-31 Rear Vision
Starting and Operating Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16 Drive Systems
Ignition Positions (Key All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Ignition Positions (Keyless
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9-2 Driving and Operating
Fuel Driving Information

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 WARNING (Continued)
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Gasoline Specifications Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause
(U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . 9-48 collisions resulting in injury or
Defensive driving means “always
California Fuel expect the unexpected.” The first possible death. These simple
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48 step in driving defensively is to wear defensive driving techniques
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-49 the safety belt. See Safety Belts on could save your life.
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49 page 3‑14.
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Drunk Driving
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
{ WARNING
Towing Assume that other road users { WARNING
General Towing (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 drivers) are going to be careless very dangerous. Your reflexes,
Driving Characteristics and and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness, and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 what they might do and be ready. judgment can be affected by
Trailer Towing In addition: even a small amount of alcohol.
(Except CTS-V and . Allow enough following You can have a serious — or
Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57 distance between you and even fatal — collision if you drive
Trailer Towing the driver in front of you. after drinking. Do not drink and
(CTS-V and Coupe) . . . . . . . . 9-58
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 . Focus on the task of driving. drive or ride with a driver who has
been drinking. Ride home in a
(Continued)
Conversions and Add-Ons cab; or if you are with a group,
Add-On Electrical designate a driver who will not
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59 drink.
Death and injury associated with Medical research shows that Braking
drinking and driving is a global alcohol in a person's system
tragedy. can make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light on
especially injuries to the brain, page 5‑22.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle: spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves perception
judgment, muscular coordination, that when anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding to
vision, and attentiveness. drinking — driver or passenger — is push the brake pedal is perception
in a crash, that person's chance of time. Actually doing it is
Police records show that being killed or permanently disabled reaction time.
almost 40 percent of all motor is higher than if the person had not
vehicle-related deaths involve been drinking. Average reaction time is about
alcohol. In most cases, these three‐fourths of a second. But
deaths are the result of someone that is only an average. It might be
Control of a Vehicle less with one driver and as long as
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than The following three systems two or three seconds or more with
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related help to control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition,
deaths have been associated with driving — brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and
the use of alcohol, with about accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do
250,000 people injured. driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration.
ask more of those control systems But even in three‐fourths of
For persons under 21, it is against than the tires and road can provide. a second, a vehicle moving at
the law in every U.S. state to drink Meaning, you can lose control of 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
alcohol. There are good medical, the vehicle. See Traction Control (66 ft). That could be a lot of
psychological, and developmental System (TCS) on page 9‑38. distance in an emergency, so
reasons for these laws. keeping enough space between
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
The obvious way to eliminate the the vehicle and others is important.
affect vehicle performance. See
leading highway safety problem is Accessories and Modifications on
for people never to drink alcohol page 10‑3.
and then drive.
And, of course, actual stopping If the engine ever stops while the Speed Variable Assist Steering
distances vary greatly with the vehicle is being driven, brake
The vehicle has a steering system
surface of the road, whether it is normally but do not pump the
that varies the amount of effort
pavement or gravel; the condition brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
required to steer the vehicle in
of the road, whether it is wet, dry, the pedal could get harder to push
relation to the speed of the vehicle.
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the down. If the engine stops, there will
brakes; the weight of the vehicle; still be some power brake assist but The amount of steering effort
and the amount of brake force it will be used when the brake is required is less at slower speeds
applied. applied. Once the power assist is to make the vehicle more
used up, it can take longer to stop maneuverable and easier to park.
Avoid needless heavy
and the brake pedal will be harder At faster speeds, the steering effort
braking. Some people drive in
to push. increases to provide a sport-like
spurts — heavy acceleration
feel to the steering. This provides
followed by heavy braking — rather Adding non‐dealer accessories can
maximum control and stability.
than keeping pace with traffic. This affect vehicle performance. See
is a mistake. The brakes might not Accessories and Modifications on If the vehicle seems harder to steer
have time to cool between hard page 10‑3. than normal when parking or driving
stops. The brakes will wear out slowly, there may be a problem with
much faster with a lot of heavy Steering the system. You will still have power
braking. Keeping pace with the steering, but steering will be stiffer
traffic and allowing realistic Power Steering than normal at slow speeds. See
following distances eliminates If power steering assist is lost your dealer for service.
a lot of unnecessary braking. That because the engine stops or the
means better braking and longer power steering system is not
brake life. functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips Steering in Emergencies

It is important to take curves at a There are times when steering can
reasonable speed. be more effective than braking. For
Traction in a curve depends on the example, you come over a hill and
condition of the tires and the road find a truck stopped in your lane,
surface, the angle at which the or a car suddenly pulls out from
curve is banked, and vehicle speed. nowhere, or a child darts out from
While in a curve, speed is the between parked cars and stops right
one factor that can be controlled. in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
If there is a need to reduce speed, stop in time. But sometimes you
do it before entering the curve, while cannot stop in time because there
the front wheels are straight. is no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires
Try to adjust the speed so you can evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision.
drive through the curve. Maintain a the problem. If holding the steering wheel at the
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to The vehicle can perform very recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
accelerate until out of the curve, well in emergencies like these. positions, it can be turned a full
and then accelerate gently into the First apply the brakes. See Braking 180 degrees very quickly without
straightaway. on page 9‑3. It is better to remove removing either hand. But you have
as much speed as possible from to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
a collision. Then steer around quickly straighten the wheel once
the problem, to the left or right you have avoided the object.
depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery pavement edge. Then turn the The three types of skids
steering wheel to go straight down correspond to the vehicle's
The vehicle's right wheels can drop the roadway. three control systems. In the
off the edge of a road onto the braking skid, the wheels are not
shoulder while driving. Loss of Control rolling. In the steering or cornering
skid, too much speed or steering
Let us review what driving experts in a curve causes tires to slip and
say about what happens when the lose cornering force. And in the
three control systems — brakes, acceleration skid, too much throttle
steering, and acceleration — do not causes the driving wheels to spin.
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
has asked. your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you
In any emergency, do not give up. want the vehicle to go. If you start
Keep trying to steer and constantly steering quickly enough, the vehicle
seek an escape route or area of may straighten out. Always be ready
less danger. for a second skid if it occurs.
Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when
If the level of the shoulder is only
In a skid, a driver can lose control of water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
slightly below the pavement,
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid material is on the road. For safety,
recovery should be fairly easy.
most skids by taking reasonable slow down and adjust your driving to
Ease off the accelerator and then,
care suited to existing conditions, these conditions. It is important to
if there is nothing in the way, steer
and by not overdriving those slow down on slippery surfaces
so that the vehicle straddles the
conditions. But skids are always because stopping distance is longer
edge of the pavement. Turn the
possible. and vehicle control more limited.
steering wheel 8 to 13 cm
(3 to 5 in), about one-eighth turn,
until the right front tire contacts the
While driving on a surface with Be sure to check the oil level Always drive slower in these types
reduced traction, try to avoid often during competitive driving of driving conditions and avoid
sudden steering, acceleration, and keep the level at or near the driving through large puddles and
or braking, including reducing upper mark that shows the proper deep‐standing or flowing water.
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower operating range on the engine oil
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might
dipstick. For information on how
to add oil, see Engine Oil on
{ WARNING
not realize the surface is slippery page 10‑10. Wet brakes can cause crashes.
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to CTS‐V Only: For competitive They might not work as well in
recognize warning clues — such as driving, it is recommended that a quick stop and could cause
enough water, ice, or packed snow the brake fluid be replaced with a pulling to one side. You could
on the road to make a mirrored high performance brake fluid that lose control of the vehicle.
surface — and slow down when has a dry boiling point greater than
you have any doubt. After driving through a large
279°C (534°F). After conversion to puddle of water or a car/vehicle
Remember: Antilock brakes help the high performance brake fluid, wash, lightly apply the brake
avoid only the braking skid. follow the brake fluid service
pedal until the brakes work
recommendations outlined by the
normally.
Competitive Driving fluid manufacturer. Do not use
silicone or DOT‐5 brake fluids. Flowing or rushing water creates
Competitive driving may affect the strong forces. Driving through
vehicle warranty. See the warranty
book before using the vehicle for
Driving on Wet Roads flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away. If this
competitive driving. Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your happens, you and other vehicle
Notice: If you use your vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
for competitive driving, the ability to stop and accelerate.
ignore police warnings and be
engine may use more oil than it very cautious about trying to drive
would with normal use. Low oil through flowing water.
levels can damage the engine.

. Keep the windshield washer fluid
Hydroplaning
reservoir filled.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water . Driving on steep hills or through
can build up under the vehicle's Have good tires with proper
mountains is different than driving
tires so they actually ride on the tread depth. See Tires on
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
water. This can happen if the road page 10‑64.
driving in these conditions include:
is wet enough and you are going . Turn off cruise control.
fast enough. When the vehicle is
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in
hydroplaning, it has little or no good shape.
Highway Hypnosis
contact with the road. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
Always be alert and pay attention tires, cooling system, and
There is no hard and fast rule about to your surroundings while driving.
hydroplaning. The best advice is to transmission.
If you become tired or sleepy, find
slow down when the road is wet. a safe place to park the vehicle
. Shift to a lower gear when going
and rest. down steep or long hills.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Other driving tips include:
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include: . Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
{ WARNING
. Allow extra following distance. . Keep interior temperature cool. If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
. Pass with caution. . Keep your eyes moving — scan would not work well. You would
. Keep windshield wiping the road ahead and to the sides. then have poor braking or even
equipment in good shape. . Check the rearview mirror and none going down a hill. You could
vehicle instruments often. crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.

. Pay attention to special road Try not to break the fragile traction.
{ WARNING signs (falling rocks area, winding If you accelerate too fast, the drive
roads, long grades, passing or wheels will spin and polish the
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take surface under the tires even more.
or with the ignition off is appropriate action.
dangerous. The brakes will have The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑33 improves vehicle
to do all the work of slowing down Winter Driving stability during hard stops on
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You Driving on Snow or Ice slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
would then have poor braking or Drive carefully when there is snow
even none going down a hill. You or ice between the tires and the Allow greater following distance on
could crash. Always have the road, creating less traction or grip. any slippery road and watch for
engine running and the vehicle in Wet ice can occur at about 0°C slippery spots. Icy patches can
gear when going downhill. (32°F) when freezing rain begins to occur on otherwise clear roads in
fall, resulting in even less traction. shaded areas. The surface of a
Avoid driving on wet ice or in curve or an overpass can remain
. Stay in your own lane. Do not icy when the surrounding roads
freezing rain until roads can be
swing wide or cut across the are clear. Avoid sudden steering
treated with salt or sand.
center of the road. Drive at maneuvers and braking while
speeds that let you stay in your Drive with caution, whatever the on ice.
own lane. condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
. Top of hills: Be on slippery surfaces.
quickly causes the wheels to spin
alert — something could
and makes the surface under the Blizzard Conditions
be in your lane (stalled car,
tires slick, so there is even less
accident). Being stuck in snow can be a
traction.
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside

Service (U.S. and Canada) on WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
page 13‑7 or Roadside Service
(Mexico) on page 13‑9. To get If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
help and keep everyone in the . Clear away snow from around carbon monoxide, see Engine
vehicle safe: the base of your vehicle, Exhaust on page 9‑25.
. Turn on the hazard warning especially any that is blocking Snow can trap exhaust gases
flashers. the exhaust pipe. under your vehicle. This can
. Check again from time to cause deadly CO (Carbon
. Tie a red cloth to an outside
time to be sure snow does Monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
mirror.
not collect there. could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so
{ WARNING . Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the you might not know it is in your
Snow can trap engine exhaust vehicle that is away from the vehicle. Clear away snow from
under the vehicle. This may wind to bring in fresh air. around the base of your vehicle,
cause exhaust gases to get especially any that is blocking the
. Fully open the air outlets exhaust.
inside. Engine exhaust contains on or under the instrument
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which panel.
cannot be seen or smelled. It can Run the engine for short periods
. Adjust the climate control only as needed to keep warm, but
cause unconsciousness and even
system to a setting that be careful.
death.
circulates the air inside the
(Continued) vehicle and set the fan speed To save fuel, run the engine for
to the highest setting. See only short periods as needed to
Climate Control System in the warm the vehicle and then shut the
Index. engine off and close the window
(Continued) most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives wheels stop spinning before shifting
but only when you feel really { WARNING gears. Release the accelerator
uncomfortable from the cold. pedal while shifting, and press
Moving about to keep warm If the vehicle's tires spin at high lightly on the accelerator pedal
also helps. speed, they can explode, and you when the transmission is in gear.
or others could be injured. The Slowly spinning the wheels in the
If it takes some time for help to vehicle can overheat, causing an
arrive, now and then when you run forward and reverse directions
engine compartment fire or other causes a rocking motion that could
the engine, push the accelerator damage. Spin the wheels as little
pedal slightly so the engine runs free the vehicle. If that does not get
as possible and avoid going the vehicle out after a few tries, it
faster than the idle speed. This
above 55 km/h (35 mph). might need to be towed out. If the
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help vehicle does need to be towed
with the headlamps. Do this as little out, see Towing the Vehicle on
For information about using tire
as possible to save fuel. page 10‑111.
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 10‑86.
If the Vehicle is Stuck Vehicle Load Limits
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
Slowly and cautiously spin the it Out It is very important to know how
wheels to free the vehicle when much weight the vehicle can
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. Turn the steering wheel left and carry. This weight is called the
right to clear the area around the vehicle capacity weight and
If stuck too severely for the traction front wheels. Turn off any traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the includes the weight of all
system. Shift back and forth
traction system off and use the between R (Reverse) and a forward occupants, cargo and all
rocking method. gear, or with a manual transmission, nonfactory‐installed options.
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
R (Reverse), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
Two labels on the vehicle Tire and Loading Information positions (A), and the maximum
show how much weight it may Label vehicle capacity weight (B) in
properly carry, the Tire and kilograms and pounds.
Loading Information label and The Tire and Loading
the Certification label. Information label also shows
the tire size of the original
{ WARNING equipment tires (C) and the
Do not load the vehicle any recommended cold tire inflation
heavier than the Gross pressures (D). For more
Vehicle Weight Rating information on tires and inflation
(GVWR), or either the see Tires on page 10‑64 and
maximum front or rear Gross Tire Pressure on page 10‑72.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). There is also important loading
This can cause systems to Label Example information on the Certification
break and change the way the A vehicle specific Tire and label. It tells you the Gross
vehicle handles. This could Loading Information label is Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
cause loss of control and a attached to the vehicle's center and the Gross Axle Weight
crash. Overloading can also pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's Rating (GAWR) for the front and
shorten the life of the vehicle. door open, you will find the label rear axle. See “Certification
attached near the door lock Label” later in this section.
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
Steps for Determining Correct and luggage load capacity

Load Limit is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
1. Locate the statement (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
“The combined weight of 5. Determine the combined
occupants and cargo should weight of luggage and cargo
never exceed XXX kg or being loaded on the vehicle.
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's That weight may not safely
placard. exceed the available cargo
2. Determine the combined and luggage load capacity
weight of the driver and calculated in Step 4.
passengers that will be riding 6. If your vehicle will be towing Example 1
in your vehicle. a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
3. Subtract the combined for Example 1 = 453 kg
weight of the driver and your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this (1,000 lbs).
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs. reduces the available cargo B. Subtract Occupant Weight
and luggage load capacity of @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle. 136 kg (300 lbs).
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity. See Trailer Towing (Except C. Available Occupant and
For example, if the “XXX” CTS-V) on page 9‑57 or Trailer Cargo Weight = 317 kg
amount equals 1400 lbs and Towing (CTS-V) on page 9‑58 (700 lbs).
there will be five 150 lb for important information on
passengers in your vehicle, towing a trailer, towing safety
the amount of available cargo rules and trailering tips.
seating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 = 453 kg for Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = Label Example
340 kg (750 lbs). 453 kg (1,000 lbs). A vehicle specific Certification
C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight = label is attached to either the
113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). driver's door edge or the lower
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and center pillar on the driver's side
Loading Information label for of the vehicle. The label tells
specific information about the the gross weight capacity of
vehicle's capacity weight and the vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight

of the vehicle, all occupants, WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed cause loss of control and a . Never stack heavier
the GVWR for the vehicle, or crash. Overloading can also things, like suitcases,
the Gross Axle Weight Rating shorten the life of the vehicle. inside the vehicle so that
(GAWR) for either the front or some of them are above
rear axle. the tops of the seats.
If the vehicle is carrying a heavy { WARNING . Do not leave an
load, it should be spread out. unsecured child restraint
See “Steps for Determining Things inside the vehicle can in the vehicle.
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this strike and injure people in a
section. sudden stop or turn, or in a
. Secure loose items in the
crash. vehicle.
{ WARNING . Put things in the cargo
. Do not leave a seat folded
area of the vehicle. In the down unless needed.
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross cargo area, put them as
Vehicle Weight Rating far forward as possible.
(GVWR), or either the Try to spread the weight
maximum front or rear Gross evenly.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). (Continued)
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
vehicle handles. This could
(Continued)

. Avoid downshifting to brake or . Check engine oil with every
Starting and slow the vehicle when the refueling and add if necessary.
Operating engine speed will exceed Oil and fuel consumption may be
4000 rpm. higher than normal during the
New Vehicle Break-In . Do not let the engine labor. first 2 414 km (1,500 miles).
Never lug the engine in high . To break in new tires, drive
Follow these recommended
gear at low speeds. With a at moderate speeds and
guidelines during the
manual transmission, shift to avoid hard cornering for the
first 2 414 km (1,500 miles)
the next lower gear. This rule first 322 km (200 miles). New
of driving this vehicle. Parts
applies at all times, not just tires do not have maximum
have a break-in period and
during the break-in period. traction and may tend to slip.
performance will be better in
the long run. . Do not participate in track . New brake linings also need
events, sport driving schools, a break–in period. Avoid
For the first 2 414 km (1,500 miles):
or similar activities during this making hard stops during the
. Avoid full throttle starts and break–in period. first 322 km (200 miles). This is
abrupt stops. recommended every time brake
. Do not exceed linings are replaced.
4,000 engine rpm.
. Avoid driving at any one
constant speed, fast or slow.
Ignition Positions key is all the way in. If it is and In an emergency:

you have a manual transmission
(Key Access) vehicle, turn the steering wheel
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
left and right while you turn the brakes repeatedly. This may
key hard. If none of this works, deplete power assist, requiring
then the vehicle needs service. increased brake pedal force.
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ 2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is can be done while the vehicle is
stopped, turn the ignition switch to moving. After shifting to neutral,
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. firmly apply the brakes and steer
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) the vehicle to a safe location.
will remain active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on 3. Come to a complete stop. Shift
page 9‑22 for more information. to P (Park) with an automatic
transmission, or Neutral with a
This is the only position in which the manual transmission. Turn the
The ignition switch can be turned to key can be removed. This position ignition to LOCK/OFF.
four different positions. locks the ignition and shifter on
automatic transmission vehicles, 4. Set the parking brake. See
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition and the ignition and steering wheel Parking Brake (Manual) on
switch must be in ON/RUN or on manual transmission vehicles. page 9‑34 or Parking Brake
ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake (Electric) on page 9‑35.
pedal must be applied. Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
Notice: Using a tool to force the loss of power assist in the brake
key from its cylinder could cause and steering systems and disable
damage or break the key. Use the the airbags.
correct key and turn the key only
with your hand. Make sure the
The ignition switch can bind in the D (START): This position starts the
LOCK/OFF position with the wheels engine. When the engine starts,
turned off center. If this happens, release the key. The ignition switch
move the steering wheel from right returns to ON/RUN for driving.
to left while turning the key to ACC/ A warning tone will sound when the
ACCESSORY. If this does not work, driver door is opened, the ignition is
then the vehicle needs service. in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This OFF, and the key is in the ignition.
position lets you use things like the
radio and the windshield wipers Ignition Positions
when the engine is off. This position
allows you to turn off the engine.
(Keyless Access)
You can turn the ignition control Using a tool to force the ignition
C (ON/RUN): This position is for
knob to four different positions. control knob from its cylinder could
driving. It is the position the ignition
switch returns to after the engine To shift out of P (Park), the damage it.
starts, and the key is released. ignition must be in ON/RUN or Make sure the keyless access
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular transmitter is inside the vehicle
To shift the transmission out of
brake pedal must be applied. when trying to turn the ignition
P (Park), the ignition key has to be
in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN. control knob.
The battery could be drained if the A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
or ON/RUN position with the engine stopped, turn the ignition switch to
off. The vehicle might not start if the LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
battery is allowed to drain for an Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
extended period of time. will remain active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑22
The ignition control knob cannot be 3. Come to a complete stop. Shift The battery could be drained if
removed from the vehicle. The to P (Park) with an automatic you leave the ignition in the ACC/
keyless access transmitter must transmission, or Neutral with a ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
be inside the vehicle to start the manual transmission. Turn the with the engine off. You may not be
engine. This position locks the ignition to LOCK/OFF. able to start the vehicle if the battery
ignition and shifter on automatic 4. Set the parking brake. See is allowed to drain for an extended
transmission vehicles, and the Parking Brake (Manual) on period of time.
ignition and steering wheel on page 9‑34 or Parking Brake D (START): This position starts the
manual transmission vehicles. (Electric) on page 9‑35 engine.
Do not turn the engine off when the B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
vehicle is moving. This will cause a position allows you to use things Starting the Engine
loss of power assist in the brake like the radio and the windshield
and steering systems and disable Place the transmission in the
wipers when the engine is off. This proper gear.
the airbags. position will allow you to turn off the
In an emergency: engine. If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, the keyless access
1. Brake using a firm and steady C (ON/RUN): This position is for transmitter must be authenticated
pressure. Do not pump the driving. It is the position the ignition in order for the ignition control knob
brakes repeatedly. This may switch returns to after the engine to turn. The transmitter can be
deplete power assist, requiring starts, and the control knob is authenticated either by putting
increased brake pedal force. released. your foot on the brake pedal or by
2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This If you need to shift the pushing the ignition control knob in.
can be done while the vehicle is transmission out of P (Park),
moving. After shifting to neutral, the ignition control knob has to
firmly apply the brakes and steer be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
the vehicle to a safe location. ON/RUN.
Automatic Transmission If the battery in the keyless access Starting Procedure

Move the shift lever to P (Park) or transmitter needs replacing, the 1. With your foot off the accelerator
N (Neutral). The engine will not start DIC displays REPLACE BATTERY pedal, turn the ignition key to
in any other position. To restart the IN REMOTE KEY. The vehicle START. If the vehicle has the
engine when the vehicle is already can still be driven. See “Battery keyless access system, push
moving, use N (Neutral) only. Replacement” under Remote the ignition control knob in and
Keyless Entry (RKE) System rotate the knob to the START
If the vehicle has the keyless Operation (Key Access) on
access system, your foot must be position. When the engine starts,
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry let go of the ignition. The idle
on the brake pedal to start the (RKE) System Operation (Keyless
engine. To rotate the ignition control speed will go down as your
Access) on page 2‑7 for more engine gets warm. Do not race
knob, put your foot on the brake information.
pedal and turn the ignition control the engine immediately after
knob to the START position. If the Notice: Do not try to shift to starting it. Operate the engine
ignition control knob does not turn, P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. and transmission gently to allow
try pushing the knob in and turning If you do, you could damage the the oil to warm up and lubricate
again. When the engine begins transmission. Shift to P (Park) all moving parts.
cranking, let go of the ignition only when the vehicle is stopped. The vehicle has a
control knob, it will return to the Manual Transmission Computer-Controlled Cranking
ON/RUN position. System. This feature assists in
The shift lever should be in neutral starting the engine and protects
If the transmitter is not in the position and the parking brake
vehicle or something is interfering components. If the ignition key
engaged. Hold the clutch pedal is turned to the START position,
with the transmitter, the Driver down to the floor and start the
Information Center (DIC) will and then released when the
engine. The vehicle will not start engine begins cranking, the
display ELECTRONIC KEY NOT if the clutch pedal is not all the
DETECTED. See Driver Information engine will continue cranking
way down. for a few seconds or until the
Center (DIC) on page 5‑27 for more
information. vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, Notice: Cranking the engine for If the vehicle starts briefly but
cranking will be stopped after long periods of time, by returning then stops again, do the same
15 seconds to prevent cranking the key to the START position thing. This clears the extra
motor damage. To prevent gear immediately after cranking has gasoline from the engine. Do not
damage, this system also ended, can overheat and damage race the engine immediately
prevents cranking if the engine the cranking motor, and drain the after starting it. Operate the
is already running. Engine battery. Wait at least 15 seconds engine and transmission gently
cranking can be stopped by between each try, to let the until the oil warms up and
turning the ignition switch cranking motor cool down. lubricates all moving parts.
to ACC/ACCESSORY or 2. If the engine does not start Notice: The engine is designed to
LOCK/OFF. after 5‐10 seconds, especially work with the electronics in the
When first starting the vehicle, in very cold weather (below 0°F vehicle. If you add electrical
the engine idle speed will be or −18°C), it could be flooded parts or accessories, you could
elevated to allow the catalytic with too much gasoline. Try change the way the engine
converter, an emissions pushing the accelerator pedal all operates. Before adding electrical
control device, to quickly reach the way to the floor and holding equipment, check with your
operating temperature. After it there as you hold the key in dealer. If you do not, the engine
approximately 20 seconds, the START for up to a maximum might not perform properly. Any
engine will begin to transition to of 15 seconds. Wait at least resulting damage would not be
its normal, quieter idle speed, 15 seconds between each try, to covered by the vehicle warranty.
which can vary depending on allow the cranking motor to cool
the temperature. This is normal down. When the engine starts,
operation. let go of the key and accelerator.
Retained Accessory Engine Coolant Heater

Power (RAP)
{ WARNING
Vehicles with the engine coolant
These vehicle accessories can be heater can use this option in Plugging the cord into an
used for up to 10 minutes after the cold weather conditions at or ungrounded outlet could cause
engine is turned off: below −18°C (0°F) for easier an electrical shock. Also, the
starting and better fuel economy wrong kind of extension cord
. Audio System during engine warm-up. Plug in the could overheat and cause a fire.
. Power Windows coolant heater at least four hours You could be seriously injured.
.
before starting your vehicle. An Plug the cord into a properly
Sunroof (if equipped) internal thermostat in the plug-end grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
Power to the audio system will of the cord may exist which will outlet. If the cord will not reach,
work up to 10 minutes or until the prevent engine coolant heater use a heavy-duty three-prong
driver door is opened. Power to operation at temperatures extension cord rated for at least
the windows or sunroof will work above −18°C (0°F). 15 amps.
up to 10 minutes or until any
door is opened. For an additional To Use the Engine Coolant
10 minutes of operation, close all Heater 4. Before starting the engine, be
the doors and turn the key to 1. Turn off the engine. sure to unplug and store the
ON/RUN and then back to cord as it was before to keep
LOCK/OFF. 2. Open the hood and unwrap it away from moving engine
the electrical cord. The cord is parts. If you do not, it could be
located near the driver side strut damaged.
tower.
Contact your dealer for information
Remove the plastic cap to on how long to use the heater in
access the plug. your particular area.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
Shifting Into Park 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)

WARNING (Continued)
by holding in the button on the
shift lever and pushing the lever
{ WARNING all the way toward the front of firmly set. And, if you leave the
the vehicle. vehicle with the engine running, it
It can be dangerous to get out of could overheat and even catch
the vehicle if the shift lever is not 3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. fire. You or others could be
fully in P (Park) with the parking 4. For vehicles with key access, injured. Do not leave the vehicle
brake firmly set. The vehicle can remove the key and take it with with the engine running.
roll. If you have left the engine you. If you can leave the vehicle
running, the vehicle can move with the ignition key in your
suddenly. You or others could be If you have to leave the vehicle with
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
injured. To be sure the vehicle will the engine running, the vehicle must
For vehicles with the keyless
not move, even when you are on be in P (Park) and the parking brake
access system, take the keyless
set. After shifting into P (Park), try to
fairly level ground, use the steps access transmitter with you.
move the shift lever out without first
that follow. If you are pulling a pushing the button on the shift lever.
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
Leaving the Vehicle With the
and Towing Tips on page 9‑53. Engine Running (Automatic If you can, the shift lever was not
Transmission) fully locked into P (Park).
Use this procedure to shift into
P (Park): { WARNING
1. Hold the brake pedal down and It can be dangerous to leave the
set the parking brake. vehicle with the engine running.
See Parking Brake (Manual) on The vehicle could move suddenly
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake if the shift lever is not fully in
(Electric) on page 9‑35 for more P (Park) with the parking brake
information. (Continued)
Torque Lock (Automatic Shifting Out of Park To shift out of P (Park):

Transmission) 1. Apply the brake pedal.
This vehicle is equipped with
Torque lock is when the weight an electronic shift lock release 2. Press the shift lever button.
of the vehicle puts too much system. The shift lock release is
force on the parking pawl in the designed to: 3. Move the shift lever.
transmission. This happens when If unable to shift out of P (Park):
. Prevent ignition key removal
parking on a hill and shifting the
unless the shift lever is in 1. Fully release the shift lever
transmission into P (Park) is not
P (Park) with the shift lever button.
done properly and then it is difficult
button fully released, for vehicles 2. While holding down the brake
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
with key access. pedal, press the shift lever
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find . Prevent movement of the shift button again.
out how, see "Shifting Into Park" lever out of P (Park), unless the 3. Move the shift lever.
listed previously. ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the brake If the shift lever will not move from
If torque lock does occur, the P (Park), consult your dealer or a
pedal is applied.
vehicle may need to be pushed professional towing service.
uphill by another vehicle to relieve The shift lock release is always
the parking pawl pressure, so you functional except in the case of an
can shift out of P (Park). uncharged or low voltage (less than
Parking (Manual
9 volt) battery. Transmission)
If the vehicle has an uncharged Before getting out of the vehicle,
battery or a battery with low voltage, place the shift lever in R (Reverse)
try charging or jump starting the and firmly apply the parking brake.
battery. See Jump Starting on For vehicles with the key access
page 10‑106 for more information. ignition, turn the ignition key to
OFF/LOCK, and remove the key.
See Ignition Positions (Key Access) Engine Exhaust

on page 9‑17 or Ignition Positions WARNING (Continued)
(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 for
more information. { WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
For vehicles with the keyless Engine exhaust contains Carbon damage or after-market
access ignition, turn the ignition to Monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
LOCK/OFF and remove the keyless seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
access transmitter. can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
If towing a trailer, see Driving even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
Characteristics and Towing Tips on Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
page 9‑53.
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows
Parking Over Things with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
That Burn that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
{ WARNING . The exhaust smells or
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
Things that can burn could touch sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
hot exhaust parts under the . The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
vehicle and ignite. Do not park due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
over papers, leaves, dry grass, . The vehicle exhaust system
or other things that can burn. has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Running the Vehicle Automatic

While Parked
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out
Transmission
It is better not to park with the The shift lever is located on the
engine running. But if you ever have of the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully center console between the front
to, here are some things to know. seats.
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do
{ WARNING not leave the vehicle when the
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed engine is running unless you
area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the
which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when
It can cause unconsciousness you are on fairly level ground,
and even death. Never run the always set the parking brake and
engine in an enclosed area that move the shift lever to P (Park).
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine Follow the proper steps to be sure There are several different positions
Exhaust on page 9‑25. the vehicle will not move. See for the shift lever.
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑23. P (Park): This position locks the
If parking on a hill and pulling a rear wheels. Use this position when
trailer, see Driving Characteristics starting the engine because the
and Towing Tips on page 9‑53. vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)

{ WARNING P (Park) before starting the engine. while the vehicle is moving
The vehicle has an electronic shift forward could damage the
It is dangerous to get out of the lock release system. Fully apply the transmission. The repairs would
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully regular brakes first and then press not be covered by the vehicle
in P (Park) with the parking brake the shift lever button before shifting warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. from P (Park) when the ignition key after the vehicle is stopped.
Do not leave the vehicle when is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out R (Reverse): Use this gear to
the engine is running unless you of P (Park), ease pressure on the back up.
have to. If you have left the shift lever and push the shift lever
all the way into P (Park) as you At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse)
engine running, the vehicle can
maintain brake application. Then can be used to rock the vehicle
move suddenly. You or others back and forth to get out of snow,
press the shift lever button and
could be injured. To be sure the ice, or sand without damaging your
move the shift lever into another
vehicle will not move, even when transmission. See If the Vehicle is
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on
you are on fairly level ground, page 9‑24. Stuck on page 9‑11 for additional
always set the parking brake and information.
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 9‑23. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑53.
N (Neutral): In this position, the Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) Downshifting the transmission in
engine does not connect with the or N (Neutral) with the engine slippery road conditions could result
wheels. To restart when the vehicle running at high speed may in skidding; see “Skidding” under
is already moving, use N (Neutral) damage the transmission. The Loss of Control on page 9‑6
only. You can also use N (Neutral) repairs would not be covered by While in D (Drive), the CTS‐V
when the vehicle is being towed. the vehicle warranty. Be sure the vehicle's first forward gear
engine is not running at high automatic shift after starting the
{ WARNING speed when shifting the vehicle. vehicle will be from 1 (First).
D (Drive): This position is for Afterwards, the CTS‐V vehicles will
Shifting into a drive gear while the normal driving. It provides the best always start in 2 (Second) gear.
engine is running at high speed is fuel economy. If you need more While in M (Manual Mode), for
dangerous. Unless your foot is power for passing, and you are: increased performance, the vehicle
firmly on the brake pedal, the will start in 1 (First) gear.
vehicle could move very rapidly.
. Going less than 55 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator M (Manual Mode): This position
You could lose control and hit
pedal about halfway down. allows the driver to select the range
people or objects. Do not shift
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or of gears appropriate for current
into a drive gear while the engine driving conditions. See Driver Shift
is running at high speed. more, push the accelerator all
the way down. Control (DSC) later in this section.
The transmission will shift down Notice: Spinning the tires

to a lower gear and have more or holding the vehicle in
power. one place on a hill using only
the accelerator pedal may
damage the transmission. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires.
When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in
place.
Manual Mode When you are in sport mode To use the DSC feature with the Tap
the vehicle will still shift Shift controls (if equipped):
Driver Shift Control (DSC) or automatically. The transmission
Tap Shift may remain in a gear longer
than it would in the normal
Notice: If you drive the vehicle at
driving mode based on braking,
a high rpm without upshifting
throttle input, and vehicle lateral
while using Driver Shift Control
acceleration.
(DSC), you could damage the
vehicle. Always upshift when SPORT MODE will be displayed
necessary while using DSC. in the DIC momentarily. The
vehicle will remain in sport
Vehicles with Driver Shift Control
mode if the shift lever is not
(DSC) allow shifting an automatic
moved. Sport mode will shift
transmission similar to a manual
automatically, but remain in a
transmission.
gear longer then it would in
Use DSC through the shift lever or normal driving mode based on 1. Move the shift lever to
the Tap Shift controls on the back of braking and acceleration. the right from D (Drive) to
the steering wheel (if equipped). M (Manual Mode).
2. To go from sport mode to DSC,
To use the DSC feature using the move the shift lever forward to 2. The Tap Shift controls are on the
shift lever: upshift or rearward to downshift. back of the steering wheel. Tap
1. Move the shift lever to the left control to downshift, and
3. To exit DSC and enter sport
the right from D (Drive) to the right control to upshift.
mode, hold the shift lever in the
M (Manual Mode). upshift/forward position briefly. 3. To return to sport mode, hold the
Once in M (Manual Mode) upshift/right control briefly.
position, if you do not move the
shift lever forward or rearward,
the vehicle will be in sport mode.
While using the DSC feature, the While in the DSC mode, the
vehicle will have firmer, quicker CTS automatic transmission will
shifting. You can use this for automatically downshift when the
sport driving or when climbing or vehicle comes to a stop. This will
descending hills, to stay in gear allow for more power during
longer, or to downshift for more acceleration.
power or engine braking. The CTS-V automatic transmission
The transmission will only allow will not automatically downshift
you to shift into gears appropriate on hard acceleration when in
for the vehicle speed and engine DSC mode.
revolutions per minute (RPM). The When accelerating the vehicle
transmission will not automatically from a stop in snowy and icy
The tachometer display indicates shift to the next lower gear if the conditions, it is suggested to shift
which gear the vehicle is in. The engine rpm is too high, nor to the into second gear. A higher gear
number indicates the requested next higher gear when the maximum allows the vehicle to gain more
gear range when moving the shift engine rpm is reached. traction on slippery surfaces.
lever forward or rearward. If shifting is prevented for any
CTS-V vehicles use tracer reason, the currently selected gear
lights around the outside of the will flash multiple times, indicating
tachometer as a performance that the transmission has not shifted
upshift light. These tracers flash to gears.
indicate when to shift to the next
higher gear to avoid the engine
speed limit. See Tachometer on
Manual Transmission CTS—V 2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal

and let up on the accelerator pedal,
If the vehicle has a manual then shift into 2 (Second). Then,
transmission, the shift lever is slowly let up on the clutch pedal
located on the center console while accelerating.
between the front seats. The
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth),
following explains how to operate
and 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),
the manual transmission.
4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) the
CTS same for 2 (Second).
To stop, let up on the accelerator
pedal and press the brake pedal.
Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake
pedal, and shift to Neutral.
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal Neutral: Use this position when
and shift into 1 (First). Slowly let up you start or idle your engine. Your
on the clutch pedal while pressing shift lever is in Neutral when it is
on the accelerator pedal. centered in the shift pattern, not in
any gear.
Shift into 1 (First) when you are
going less than 40 km/h (25 mph). R (Reverse): To back up, press
For CTS-V, shift into 1 (First) when down the clutch pedal, completely
you are going less than 64 km/h stop the vehicle, and shift into
(40 mph). After a complete stop, if it R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch
is hard to shift into 1 (First), let up pedal slowly while pressing the
on the clutch pedal, then press it accelerator pedal.
back down and shift into 1 (First).
The CTS-V transmission prevents If the vehicle speed drops below While you accelerate, it is normal
easily shifting into R (Reverse) 32 km/h (20 mph), or if the engine is for the light to go on and off if you
using normal shifting force while not running smoothly, downshift to quickly change the position of the
the vehicle is moving at more than the next lower gear. You may have accelerator. Ignore the light when
5 km/h (3 mph), or when the ignition to downshift two or more gears to you downshift.
is in LOCK/OFF. keep the engine running smoothly CTS-V vehicles use tracer
or for good performance. lights around the outside of the
Shift Speeds (Manual
Transmission) Up-Shift Light tachometer as a performance
up‐shift light. These tracers flash to
indicate when to shift to the next
{ WARNING higher gear to avoid the engine
If you skip a gear when you speed limit. See Tachometer on
downshift, you could lose control
of the vehicle. You could injure Skip Shift (CTS‐V)
yourself or others. Do not shift
Vehicles with a manual transmission Under light acceleration, the
down more than one gear at a
have an up‐shift light on the transmission will only allow you to
time when you downshift. shift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth).
instrument panel. This light shows
when to shift to the next higher gear Shifts from 1 (First) to 2 (Second) or
Notice: If you skip more than for the best fuel economy. 3 (Third) are not allowed. This helps
one gear when you downshift, improve fuel mileage.
or if you race the engine when When this light comes on, you
can shift to the next higher gear if Under harder acceleration, Skip
you release the clutch pedal while Shift is disabled, and the driver has
downshifting, you could damage weather, road, and traffic conditions
allow. For the best fuel economy, all gears available.
the engine, clutch, driveshaft or
the transmission. Do not skip accelerate slowly and shift when the
gears or race the engine when light comes on.
downshifting.
Drive Systems Brakes If driving safely on a wet road

and it becomes necessary to slam
on the brakes and continue braking
All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake to avoid a sudden obstacle, a
Vehicles with this feature System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels
always send engine power to all are slowing down. If one of the
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
four wheels. It is fully automatic, wheels is about to stop rolling, the
System (ABS), an advanced
and adjusts itself as needed for computer will separately work the
electronic braking system that helps
road conditions. brakes at each wheel.
prevent a braking skid.
When using a compact spare tire ABS can change the brake pressure
When the engine is started and the
on an AWD vehicle, the system to each wheel, as required, faster
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
automatically detects the compact than any driver could. This can help
checks itself. A momentary motor or
spare and disables AWD. To restore the driver steer around the obstacle
clicking noise might be heard while
AWD operation and prevent while braking hard.
this test is going on, and it might
excessive wear on the system, even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the
replace the compact spare with a pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates
full-size tire as soon as possible. on wheel speed and controls
See Compact Spare Tire on braking pressure accordingly.
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑23.
Remember: ABS does not change Parking Brake (Manual) If the ignition is on, the brake
the time needed to get a foot up to system warning light on the
the brake pedal or always decrease instrument panel cluster should
stopping distance. If you get too come on. If it does not, you need
close to the vehicle in front of you, to have the vehicle serviced. See
there will not be enough time to Brake System Warning Light on
apply the brakes if that vehicle page 5‑22 for more information.
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. You might hear the ABS
pump or motor operating and feel The parking brake pedal is
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is located on the lower portion of
normal. the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel.
Braking in Emergencies
To set the parking brake, hold the
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake pedal down, then push the To release the parking brake, pull
brake at the same time. In many parking brake pedal down. the release lever located to the
emergencies, steering can help left of the steering wheel on the
more than even the very best instrument panel.
braking.
Notice: Driving with the parking Parking Brake (Electric)

brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system { WARNING
parts. Make sure that the parking On vehicles with a manual
brake is fully released and the
transmission, releasing the clutch
brake warning light is off before
and pressing the accelerator
driving.
will release the Electric Parking
A warning chime will sound if the Brake. If the vehicle is not in a
parking brake is set, the ignition is gear, the vehicle could move, and
on, and the vehicle begins to move. you or others could be injured.
To stop the chime, fully release the Make sure the vehicle is in a gear
parking brake. before attempting to drive away. Vehicles with the electric parking
If you are towing a trailer and To avoid unexpected vehicle brake (EPB) have a switch in the
parking on a hill, see Driving movement, do not partially center console.
Characteristics and Towing Tips on release the clutch or press the The EPB takes the place of the
page 9‑53 for more information. accelerator pedal until you are manual parking brake system, the
ready to release the parking foot pedal and release handle.
brake and drive away. The EPB can always be activated,
even if the ignition is OFF. To avoid
draining the battery, do not operate
the EPB too often without the
engine running.
The system has two warning lights If the EPB is applied while the If the yellow light is on, the EPB has
and five Driver Information Center vehicle is in motion, a chime will detected an error in another system
(DIC) messages. See Brake System sound, and the DIC message and is operating with reduced
Warning Light on page 5‑22 and RELEASE PARK BRAKE SWITCH functionality. To apply the EPB when
Driver Information Center (DIC) on will be displayed. The vehicle this light is on, lift up on the EPB
page 5‑27 for more information. In will decelerate as long as the switch and hold it in the up position.
case of insufficient electrical power, switch is held in the up position. Full application of the parking brake
the EPB cannot be applied or Releasing the EPB switch during by the EPB system may take a
released. the deceleration will release the longer period of time than normal
parking brake. If the switch is held when this light is on. Continue to
EPB Apply in the up position until the vehicle hold the switch until the BRAKE
The EPB can be applied any time comes to a stop, the EPB will light remains on. If the yellow light is
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is remain applied. on, see your dealer.
applied by momentarily lifting up on If the BRAKE light is on, either the If the EPB fails to apply, the rear
the EPB switch. Once fully applied, EPB is applied, or there is a failure wheels should be blocked to
the BRAKE light will be on, and the in the hydraulic brake system. prevent vehicle movement.
DIC message PARK BRAKE SET
will be displayed. While the brake is If this light is flashing continuously, EPB Release
being applied, the status light will the EPB is only partially applied
or released, or there is a problem To release the EPB, turn the
flash until full apply is reached. ignition switch to the ON/RUN
If the light does not come on, with the EPB. The DIC message
SERVICE PARK BRAKE will be position, apply and hold the brake
or remains flashing, you need to pedal, and push down momentarily
have the vehicle serviced. Do not displayed. If this light is flashing
continuously, release the EPB, and on the EPB switch. If you attempt
drive the vehicle if the BRAKE light to release the EPB without the
is flashing. See your dealer. See attempt to apply it again. If this light
continues to flash, do not drive the brake pedal applied, a chime will
Brake System Warning Light on sound, and the DIC message
page 5‑22 for more information. vehicle. See your dealer.
STEP ON BRAKE TO RELEASE
PARK BRAKE will be displayed.
The EPB is released when the Automatic EPB Release Brake Assist
BRAKE light is off and the
DIC message PARK BRAKE
The EPB will automatically release (Except CTS-V)
if the vehicle is running, placed into
RELEASED is displayed. This vehicle has a brake assist
gear, and an attempt is made to
If the yellow light is on, the EPB has feature designed to assist the
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration
detected an error in another system driver in stopping or decreasing
when the EPB is applied, to
and is operating with reduced vehicle speed in emergency driving
preserve park brake lining life.
functionality. To release the EPB conditions. This feature uses the
The EPB can also be used to stability system hydraulic brake
when this light is on, push down on
prevent roll back for vehicles with control module to supplement the
the EPB switch and hold it in the
a manual transmission taking off on power brake system under
down position. EPB release may
a hill. In a situation where no roll conditions where the driver has
take a longer period of time than
back is desired, an applied EPB will quickly and forcefully applied the
normal when this light is on.
allow both feet to be used for the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
Continue to hold the switch until the
clutch and accelerator pedals in stop or slow down the vehicle. The
BRAKE light is off. If the yellow light
preparation for starting the vehicle stability system hydraulic brake
is on, see your dealer.
moving in the intended direction. control module increases brake
Notice: Driving with the parking pressure at each corner of the
In this situation, perform the normal
brake on can overheat the brake vehicle until the ABS activates.
clutch and/or accelerator actions
system and cause premature Minor brake pedal pulsation or
required to begin moving the
wear or damage to brake system pedal movement during this time
vehicle. There is no need to push
parts. Make sure that the parking is normal and the driver should
the switch to release the EPB.
brake is fully released and the red continue to apply the brake pedal
brake warning light is off before If you are towing a trailer and as the driving situation dictates.
driving. parking on a hill, see Driving The brake assist feature will
Characteristics and Towing Tips on automatically disengage when
page 9‑53 for more information. the brake pedal is released or
brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Ride Control Systems on page 9‑11 for more information.

See Winter Driving on page 9‑9 for
information on using TCS when
Traction Control driving in snowy or icy conditions.
System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control
System (TCS) that limits wheel The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
spin. This is especially useful in flashes when the traction control
slippery road conditions. On a system is limiting wheel spin.
rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the system The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
operates if it senses that one or comes on if there is a problem
both of the rear wheels are spinning with the traction control system. This button is located on the
or beginning to lose traction. On an When the TCS/StabiliTrak warning instrument panel (CTS) or the
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, the light is on, the system will not limit steering wheel (CTS-V).
system will operate if it senses that wheel spin. Adjust your driving Press and release the TCS/
any of the wheels are spinning or accordingly. See Traction Control StabiliTrak button and the traction
beginning to lose traction. When this System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on control system will turn off and the
happens, the system brakes the page 5‑24 for more information. TCS/StabiliTrak warning light will
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces come on. Press the button again
engine power to limit wheel spin. TCS automatically comes on
whenever the vehicle is started. to turn the system back on. For
The system may be heard or felt To limit wheel spin, especially in information on turning StabiliTrak
while it is working, but this is slippery road conditions, the system off and on, see StabiliTrak System
normal. should always be left on, but it may following.
be necessary to turn the system off Adding non‐dealer accessories can
if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud affect your vehicle's performance.
or snow and rocking the vehicle is See Accessories and Modifications
required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck on page 10‑3 for more information.
StabiliTrak® System the brake pedal. This is normal. StabiliTrak comes on automatically
Continue to steer the vehicle in the whenever the vehicle is started. The
The vehicle has an electronic intended direction. system should be left on to help
stability control system called assist with directional control of the
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced If there is a problem detected
with StabiliTrak, SERVICE vehicle. If StabiliTrak needs to be
computer controlled system that turned off, press and hold the TCS/
assists with directional control of the STABILITRAK displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) and StabiliTrak button until the TCS/
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. StabiliTrak warning light comes on
the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
StabiliTrak activates when the comes on the instrument panel and STABILITRAK OFF comes on
system senses a discrepancy cluster. When this message and the DIC. More steering effort is
between the intended path and the warning light displays, the system is required when the system is
direction the vehicle is actually not operational. Driving should be turned off.
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively adjusted accordingly. See Driver If cruise control is being used when
applies braking pressure at any one Information Center (DIC) on the StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer page 5‑27 and Messages and control will automatically disengage.
the vehicle in the direction which Traction Control System (TCS)/ When road conditions allow,
you are steering. StabiliTrak® Light on page 5‑24 for reengage the cruise control. See
more information. Cruise Control on page 9‑41 for
more information.
Competitive Driving Mode

To select this optional
handling mode, press the
TCS/StabiliTrak button quickly
When the system activates, this
warning light flashes on the two times and STABILITRAK
This button is located on the COMPETITIVE MODE displays in
instrument panel. A noise may be instrument panel (CTS) or the
heard or a vibration may be felt in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
steering wheel (CTS-V).
While in the StabiliTrak Competitive Magnetic Ride Control The Driver Information Center (DIC)
Mode, the TCS/StabiliTrak warning briefly displays SUSPENSION
light comes on, TCS does not limit With this feature on the CTS-V, the MODE TOUR or SUSPENSION
wheel spin, and more effort is Magnetic Ride Control system MODE SPORT on vehicle startup or
required to turn the steering wheel. adjusts the ride of the vehicle to when a new mode is selected.
Adjust your driving accordingly. Tour or Sport modes. Magnetic Ride
Control monitors the suspension
Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button system to determine the proper
again, or turn the ignition to system response.
ACC/ACCESSORY and restart the
vehicle, to turn TCS back on and TOUR: Use for normal city and
turn the TCS/StabiliTrak warning highway driving. This setting
light off. provides a smooth, soft ride.
Press and release this button,
Notice: When traction control is SPORT: Use where road conditions
located in the center of the
turned off, or Competitive Driving or personal preference demand
instrument panel, to change modes.
Mode is active, it is possible more control. This setting provides
to lose traction. If you attempt more “feel,” or response to road
conditions. Limited-Slip Rear Axle
to shift with the drive wheels
spinning with a loss of traction, it The setting can be changed at any Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle
is possible to cause damage to time. Based on road conditions, can give more traction on snow,
the transmission. Do not attempt steering wheel angle, and the mud, ice, sand, or gravel. When
to shift when the drive wheels do vehicle speed, the system traction is low, this feature allows
not have traction. Damage caused automatically adjusts to provide the the drive wheel with the most
by misuse of the vehicle is not best handling while providing a traction to move the vehicle. The
covered. See the warranty book smooth ride. The Tour and Sport limited-slip rear axle also gives the
for additional information. modes will feel similar on a smooth driver enhanced control when
road. Select a new setting whenever cornering hard or completing a
driving conditions change. maneuver, such as a lane change.
Cruise Control If the vehicle has the Stabilitrak® I (On/Off): Turns the system on
system and begins to limit wheel or off. The indicator light on the
spin while you are using cruise button turns on when cruise control
{ WARNING control, the cruise control will is on.
automatically disengage. See
Cruise control can be dangerous StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑39. +RES (Resume/Accelerate):
where you cannot drive safely at When road conditions allow you to Press briefly to make the vehicle
a steady speed. So, do not use safely use it again, the cruise resume to a previously set speed,
the cruise control on winding control can be turned back on. or press and hold to accelerate.
roads or in heavy traffic. −SET (Set/Coast): Press to set the
Cruise control can be dangerous speed and activate cruise control or
on slippery roads. On such roads, make the vehicle decelerate.
fast changes in tire traction can [ (Cancel): Press to disengage
cause excessive wheel slip, and cruise control without erasing the
you could lose control. Do not use set speed from memory.
cruise control on slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
If the cruise button is on when not in
With cruise control, a speed of
use, it could get bumped and go into
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
cruise when not desired. Keep the
be maintained without keeping your
cruise control switch off when cruise
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
CTS Shown, CTS‐V Similar is not being used.
control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph). The cruise control buttons are
When the brakes are applied, the located on the left side of the
cruise control turns off. steering wheel.
The cruise control light on the Increasing Speed While Using

. To slow down in small amounts,
instrument panel cluster comes on Cruise Control press the −SET button on the
after the cruise control has been set steering wheel briefly. Each time
If the cruise control system is this is done, the vehicle goes
to the desired speed. already activated, about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
1. Press the I button. . Press and hold the +RES button
Passing Another Vehicle While
2. Get up to the desired speed. on the steering wheel until the
Using Cruise Control
desired speed is reached, then
3. Press the −SET button and release it. Use the accelerator pedal to
release it. increase the vehicle's speed.
. To increase vehicle speed in
4. Take your foot off the When you take your foot off the
small amounts, press the +RES
accelerator. pedal, the vehicle will slow down to
button. Each time this is done,
the previous set cruise speed.
Resuming a Set Speed the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) faster. Using Cruise Control on Hills
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes Reducing Speed While Using How well the cruise control works
are applied, the cruise control is Cruise Control on hills depends upon the vehicle
disengaged without erasing the set speed, load, and the steepness
If the cruise control system is
speed from memory. of the hills. When going up steep
already activated,
hills, you might have to step on
Once the vehicle is driving at about . Press and hold the −SET button the accelerator pedal to maintain
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press the on the steering wheel until the the vehicle speed. When going
+RES button on the steering wheel. desired speed is reached, then downhill, you might have to brake
The vehicle returns to the previous release it. or shift to a lower gear to keep the
set speed and stays there. vehicle's speed down. When the
brakes are applied the cruise control
is disengaged.
Ending Cruise Control Object Detection

There are four ways to end cruise
{ WARNING
control:
Systems The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
. Step lightly on the brake pedal Assist (URPA) system does not
Ultrasonic Parking Assist replace driver vision. It cannot
(manual and automatic
transmissions). The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist detect:
(URPA) system assists the driver
. Press the clutch pedal to the . Objects that are below the
with parking and avoiding objects
floor (manual transmissions). bumper, underneath the
while in R (Reverse). URPA
vehicle, or too close or far
. Press [ on the steering wheel. operates at speeds less than 8 km/h
from the vehicle.
(5 mph), and the sensors on the rear
. To turn off the cruise control, bumper detect objects up to 2.4 m . Children, pedestrians,
press I on the steering wheel. (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least bicyclists, or pets.
25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground. If you do not use proper care
Erasing Speed Memory
before and while backing, vehicle
The cruise control set speed is
damage, injury, or death could
erased from memory by pressing
occur. Even with URPA, always
the I button or if the ignition is check behind the vehicle before
turned off. backing up. While backing, be
sure to look for objects and check
the vehicle's mirrors.
How the System Works When the System Does Not

. The vehicle's bumper is
Seem to Work Properly damaged. Take the vehicle to
URPA comes on automatically your dealer to repair the system.
when the shift lever is moved into If the URPA system will not activate
R (Reverse). A single tone sounds due to a temporary condition, the
. Other conditions may affect
to indicate the system is working. message PARK ASSIST OFF will be system performance, such as
displayed on the DIC when the shift vibrations from a jackhammer or
Objects must be at least 25.4 cm the compression of air brakes on
(10 in) off the ground and below lever is moved into R (Reverse).
This occurs under the following a very large truck.
trunk level, and within 2.4 m (8 ft)
from the rear bumper to be conditions:
Rear Vision
detected. The distance may be . The driver disables the system.
less during warmer or humid Camera (RVC)
. The ultrasonic sensors are not
weather. The vehicle may have a Rear Vision
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
A single beep sounds the bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, Camera system. Read this entire
first time an object is detected ice and slush. For cleaning section before using it.
between 1.0 m (40 in) and 2.4 m instructions, see Exterior Care The rear vision camera system is
(8 ft) away. Beeping occurs on page 10‑113. designed to help the driver when
continuously when the vehicle is backing up by displaying a view of
. A trailer was attached to the
0.3 m (12 in) or closer to an object. the area behind the vehicle.
vehicle, or a bicycle or an object
The system can be disabled through was hanging out of the trunk
the Driver Information Center (DIC). during the last drive cycle. Once
See “Parking Assist” under Driver the attached object is removed,
Information Center (DIC) on URPA will return to normal
page 5‑27 for more information. operation.
. A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle.
The delay can be cancelled

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) by performing one of the
following:
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) Even though the vehicle has
system does not replace driver the RVC system, always check
. Shifting in to P (Park).
vision. RVC does not: carefully before backing up by . Reach a vehicle speed of
. Detect objects that are checking behind and around the 8 km/h (5 mph).
outside the camera's field of vehicle.
There may be a message on the
view, below the bumper, rear vision camera screen that
or underneath the vehicle. Using the System states “Check Surroundings for
. Detect children, pedestrians, Safety.”
When the driver shifts the vehicle
bicyclists, or pets. into R (Reverse), the video image Rear Vision Camera Error
Do not back the vehicle by only automatically appears on the Messages
looking at the RVC screen, or use navigation screen, or on the inside Service Rear Vision Camera
the screen during longer, higher rear view mirror. Once the driver System: This message can display
speed backing maneuvers or shifts out of R (Reverse), the when the system is not receiving
where there could be cross-traffic. navigation screen will go back to the information it requires from other
last screen that had been displayed, vehicle systems.
Your judged distances using the
or the video image will automatically
screen will differ from actual d (Service Rear Vision Camera
disappear from the mirror after a
distances. delay. System Icon): This icon can
If you do not use proper care display when the system is not
The delay that is received after receiving information it requires from
before backing up, you could shifting out of R (Reverse) is
hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian, other vehicle systems.
approximately 5 seconds.
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in If any other problem occurs or if a
vehicle damage, injury, or death. problem persists, see your dealer.
(Continued)
Rear Vision Camera Location The area displayed by the camera is

limited and does not display objects
that are close to either corner or
under the bumper. The area
displayed can vary depending
on vehicle orientation or road
conditions. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen
differs from the actual distance.
The following illustration shows the
field of view that the camera
provides.
The camera is located above the

license plate.
A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.
When the System Does Not Fuel

Seem To Work Properly
Use of the recommended fuel is
The rear vision camera system an important part of the proper
might not work properly or display a maintenance of this vehicle. To help
clear image if: keep the engine clean and maintain
. It is dark. optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
. The sun or the beam of
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
headlights is shining directly
Gasoline.
into the camera lens.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
builds up on the camera lens.
enhanced detergency standards The eighth digit of the Vehicle
Clean the lens, rinse it with
developed by auto companies. A list Identification Number (VIN) shows
water, and wipe it with a soft
of marketers providing TOP TIER the code letter or number that
cloth.
Detergent Gasoline can be found at identifies the vehicle's engine.
. The back of the vehicle is in www.toptiergas.com. The VIN is at the top left of the
an accident, the position and instrument panel. See Vehicle
mounting angle of the camera Identification Number (VIN) on
can change or the camera can page 12‑1.
be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
dealer.
. There are extreme temperature
changes.
Recommended Fuel You might also hear audible spark California Fuel
knock during acceleration. Refill the
If the vehicle has a V6 engine, tank with premium fuel as soon as
Requirements
use regular unleaded gasoline with possible to avoid damaging the If the vehicle is certified to meet
a posted octane rating of 87 or engine. If heavy knocking is heard California Emissions Standards, it is
higher. If the octane rating is less when using gasoline rated at designed to operate on fuels that
than 87, an audible knocking noise, 91octane or higher, the engine meet California specifications. See
commonly referred to as spark needs service. the underhood emission control
knock, might be heard when driving. label. If this fuel is not available in
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated Gasoline Specifications states adopting California Emissions
at 87 octane or higher as soon as Standards, the vehicle will operate
possible. If heavy knocking is heard (U.S. and Canada Only) satisfactorily on fuels meeting
when using gasoline rated at At a minimum, gasoline should federal specifications, but emission
87 octane or higher, the engine meet ASTM specification D 4814 in control system performance might
needs service. the United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 be affected. The malfunction
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine or 3.511 in Canada. Some indicator lamp could turn on and the
(VIN Code P), use premium gasolines contain an vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane-enhancing additive called See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
octane rating of 91 or higher. For methylcyclopentadienyl manganese page 5‑19. If this occurs, return to
best performance, use premium tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
unleaded gasoline with a posted against the use of gasolines If it is determined that the condition
octane rating of 93. In an containing MMT. See Fuel Additives is caused by the type of fuel used,
emergency, you can use regular on page 9‑49 for additional repairs might not be covered by the
unleaded gasoline with an octane information. vehicle warranty.
rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane
fuel is used, do not perform any
aggressive driving maneuvers such
as wide open throttle applications.
Fuels in Foreign regulations. To help keep fuel We recommend that you use these
injectors and intake valves clean gasolines, if they comply with the
Countries and avoid problems due to dirty specifications described earlier.
Never use leaded gasoline or any injectors or valves, look for gasoline However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuel not recommended in the that is advertised as TOP TIER other fuels containing more than
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs Detergent Gasoline. Look for the 10% ethanol must not be used in
caused by use of improper fuel TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to vehicles that were not designed for
would not be covered by the vehicle ensure gasoline meets enhanced those fuels.
warranty. detergency standards developed Notice: This vehicle was not
by the auto companies. A list of designed for fuel that contains
To check the fuel availability, ask an
marketers providing TOP TIER methanol. Do not use fuel
auto club, or contact a major oil
Detergent Gasoline can be found at containing methanol. It can
company that does business in the
www.toptiergas.com. corrode metal parts in the fuel
country where you will be driving.
For customers who do not use TOP system and also damage plastic
Fuel Additives TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, and rubber parts. That damage
one bottle of GM Fuel System would not be covered under the
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel vehicle warranty.
in the United States are now tank at every engine oil change,
required to contain additives that Some gasolines that are
can help clean deposits from fuel not reformulated for low
help prevent engine and fuel system injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
deposits from forming, allowing the emissions can contain an
System Treatment PLUS is the only octane-enhancing additive called
emission control system to work gasoline additive recommended by
properly. In most cases, nothing methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
General Motors. It is available at tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
should have to be added to the fuel. your dealer.
However, some gasolines contain where you buy gasoline whether the
only the minimum amount of Gasolines containing oxygenates, fuel contains MMT. We recommend
additive required to meet U.S. such as ethers and ethanol, against the use of such gasolines.
Environmental Protection Agency and reformulated gasolines
might be available in your area.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce To open the fuel door, push the
spark plug life and affect emission WARNING (Continued) rearward center edge in and release
control system performance. The and it will open.
malfunction indicator lamp might pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let To remove the tethered fuel cap,
turn on. If this occurs, return to your turn it slowly counterclockwise.
dealer for service. children pump fuel.
While refueling, hang the tethered
Filling the Tank fuel cap from the hook on the
fuel door.
{ WARNING If the fuel cap is not installed
properly, the TIGHTEN GAS CAP
Fuel vapor burns violently and a message will appear on the Driver
fuel fire can cause bad injuries. Information Center display. See Fuel
To help avoid injuries to you and System Messages on page 5‑36.
others, read and follow all the When reinstalling the cap, turn it
instructions on the fuel pump clockwise until it clicks once,
island. Turn off the engine when otherwise the Malfunction
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel Indicator Lamp could turn on.
or when refueling the vehicle. Do See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
not use cellular phones. Keep page 5‑19.
sparks, flames, and smoking The cap is behind a locking fuel
materials away from fuel. Do not door on the passenger side of the
vehicle. The fuel door is locked or
leave the fuel pump unattended
unlocked every time the driver’s
when refueling the vehicle. This is
door is locked or unlocked with the
against the law in some places. power door locks or the transmitter.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
(Continued)
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not

{ WARNING top off or overfill the tank and wait a { WARNING
few seconds after you have finished
Fuel can spray out on you if you pumping before removing the If a fire starts while you are
open the fuel cap too quickly. nozzle. Clean fuel from painted refueling, do not remove the
If you spill fuel and then surfaces as soon as possible. See nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
something ignites it, you could Exterior Care on page 10‑113. by shutting off the pump or by
be badly burned. This spray can notifying the station attendant.
happen if the tank is nearly full, When replacing the fuel cap, turn it Leave the area immediately.
clockwise until it clicks once. Make
and is more likely in hot weather.
sure the cap is fully installed. The
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait Notice: If a new fuel cap is
diagnostic system can determine if
for any hiss noise to stop. Then the fuel cap has been left off or needed, be sure to get the right
unscrew the cap all the way. improperly installed. This would type of cap from your dealer. The
allow fuel to evaporate into the wrong type of fuel cap might not
atmosphere. See Malfunction fit properly, might cause the
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑19. malfunction indicator lamp to
light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑19.
Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing

Container
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
Information
Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be Only use towing equipment that
while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is has been designed for the vehicle.
electricity discharge from the complete. Contact your dealer or trailering
container can ignite the fuel dealer for assistance with preparing
. Do not smoke while the vehicle for towing a trailer.
vapor. You can be badly burned pumping fuel.
and the vehicle damaged if this See the following trailer towing
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
. Do not use a cellular phone information in this section:
and others: while pumping fuel. . For information on driving
. Dispense fuel only into while towing a trailer, see
approved containers. “Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
. Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a . For maximum vehicle and trailer
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
or on any surface other than . For information on equipment
the ground. to tow a trailer, see “Towing
(Continued) Equipment.”
For information on towing a disabled The following information has

vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on WARNING (Continued) important trailering tips and rules
page 10‑111. For information on for your safety and that of your
towing the vehicle behind another have been followed. Ask your passengers. Read this section
vehicle such as a motor home, see dealer for advice and information carefully before pulling a trailer.
Recreational Vehicle Towing on about towing a trailer with the
page 10‑111. vehicle. Pulling a Trailer
Here are some important points:
Driving Characteristics The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is . There are many laws, including
and Towing Tips equipped with the proper trailer speed limit restrictions that apply
towing equipment. To identify the to trailering. Check for legal
trailering capacity of the vehicle, see
{ WARNING Trailer Towing (Except CTS-V) on
requirements with state or
provincial police.
The driver can lose control when page 9‑57 or Trailer Towing (CTS-V)
on page 9‑58. Trailering changes
. Do not tow a trailer at all during
pulling a trailer if the correct the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
handling, acceleration, braking,
equipment is not used or the the new vehicle is driven. The
durability, and fuel economy. With
vehicle is not driven properly. engine, axle, or other parts could
the added weight, the engine,
For example, if the trailer is too transmission, wheel assemblies, be damaged.
heavy, the brakes may not work and tires are forced to work harder . During the first 800 km
well — or even at all. The driver and under greater loads. The (500 miles) that a trailer is
and passengers could be trailer also adds wind resistance, towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
seriously injured. The vehicle may increasing the pulling requirements. (50 mph) and do not make starts
also be damaged; the resulting For safe trailering, correctly use the at full throttle. This reduces wear
repairs would not be covered by proper trailering equipment. on the vehicle.
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section
(Continued)

. Vehicles with automatic Check all trailer hitch parts and Following Distance
transmissions can tow in attachments, safety chains,
D (Drive) but M (Manual Mode) Stay at least twice as far behind the
electrical connectors, lamps, tires,
is recommended. See Manual vehicle ahead as you would when
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
Mode on page 9‑29 for more driving the vehicle without a trailer.
has electric brakes, start the vehicle
information. Use a lower gear if This can help to avoid situations
and trailer moving and then apply
the transmission shifts too often. that require heavy braking and
the trailer brake controller by hand
For vehicles with a manual sudden turns.
to be sure the brakes are working.
transmission, it is better not to Passing
use the highest gear. During the trip, check regularly to be
sure that the load is secure, and the More passing distance is needed
. Use the cruise control when lamps and trailer brakes are working when towing a trailer. Because the
towing. properly. rig is longer, it is necessary to go
. Obey speed limit restrictions. much farther beyond the passed
Towing with a Stability Control
Do not drive faster than the vehicle before returning to the lane.
maximum posted speed for System
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h When towing, the sound of the Backing Up
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the stability control system might be Hold the bottom of the steering
vehicle. heard. The system is reacting to the wheel with one hand. Then, to
vehicle movement caused by the move the trailer to the left, move
Driving with a Trailer trailer, which mainly occurs during that hand to the left. To move the
Towing a trailer requires experience. cornering. This is normal when trailer to the right, move your hand
Get familiar with handling and towing heavier trailers. to the right. Always back up slowly
braking with the added trailer and, if possible, have someone
weight. The vehicle is now longer guide you.
and not as responsive as the
vehicle is by itself.
Making Turns When towing a trailer, the arrows on When towing at high altitude on
the instrument panel flash for turns steep uphill grades, consider the
Notice: Making very sharp turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are following: Engine coolant will boil at
while trailering could cause the
burned out. For this reason you may a lower temperature than at normal
trailer to come in contact with
think other drivers are seeing the altitudes. If the engine is turned off
the vehicle. The vehicle could be
signal when they are not. It is immediately after towing at high
damaged. Avoid making very
important to check occasionally to altitude on steep uphill grades, the
sharp turns while trailering.
be sure the trailer bulbs are still vehicle may show signs similar to
When turning with a trailer, make working. engine overheating. To avoid this,
wider turns than normal. Do this let the engine run while parked,
so the trailer won't strike soft Driving On Grades preferably on level ground, with the
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees Reduce speed and shift to a automatic transmission in P (Park)
or other objects. Avoid jerky or lower gear before starting down a for a few minutes before turning the
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in long or steep downgrade. If the engine off. For vehicles with manual
advance. transmission is not shifted down, the transmissions, let the engine run
brakes might have to be used so while parked, preferably on level
Turn Signals When Towing a much that they would get hot and no ground, with the transmission out of
Trailer longer work well. gear and the parking brake applied,
The arrows on the instrument panel for a few minutes before turning the
Vehicles with an automatic
flash whenever signaling a turn or engine off. If the overheat warning
transmission can tow in
lane change. Properly hooked up, comes on, see Engine Overheating
D (Drive) but M (Manual Mode)
the trailer lamps also flash, telling on page 10‑24.
is recommended. Shift the
other drivers the vehicle is turning, transmission to a lower gear
changing lanes, or stopping. if the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions. For vehicles with a
manual transmission, it is better
not to use the highest gear.
Parking on Hills 3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance When Trailer
place, release the brake pedal Towing
{ WARNING until the chocks absorb the load.
The vehicle needs service more
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then often when pulling a trailer. See this
Parking the vehicle on a hill apply the parking brake and shift manual's Maintenance Schedule or
with the trailer attached can be into P (Park) for vehicles with an Index for more information. Things
dangerous. If something goes automatic transmission or into that are especially important in
wrong, the rig could start to move. gear for vehicles with a manual trailer operation are automatic
People can be injured, and both transmission. transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
the vehicle and the trailer can be 5. Release the brake pedal. lubricant, belts, cooling system, and
damaged. When possible, always brake system. It is a good idea to
park the rig on a flat surface. Leaving After Parking on a Hill inspect these before and during
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal the trip.
If parking the rig on a hill: while you: Check periodically to see that all
1. Press the brake pedal, but do . Start the engine, hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
not shift into P (Park) yet for . Shift into a gear, and Engine Cooling When Trailer
vehicles with an automatic Towing
transmission, or into gear
. Release the parking brake.
for vehicles with a manual 2. Let up on the brake pedal. The cooling system may temporarily
transmission. Turn the wheels overheat during severe operating
into the curb if facing downhill or 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is conditions. See Engine Overheating
into traffic if facing uphill. clear of the chocks. on page 10‑24.
2. Have someone place chocks 4. Stop and have someone pick up
under the trailer wheels. and store the chocks.
Trailer Towing Maximum trailer weight is If there are a lot of options,

calculated assuming only the equipment, passengers or cargo in
(Except CTS-V and driver is in the tow vehicle and it the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
Coupe) has all the required trailering weight the vehicle can carry, which
Before pulling a trailer, there are equipment. The weight of additional will also reduce the trailer weight the
three important considerations that optional equipment, passengers, vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
have to do with weight: and cargo in the tow vehicle must the tongue load must be added to
be subtracted from the maximum the GVW because the vehicle will
. The weight of the trailer. trailer weight. be carrying that weight, too. See
. The weight of the trailer tongue. Ask your dealer for our trailering Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑11
. information or advice, or write us at for more information about the
The total weight on the vehicle's vehicle's maximum load capacity.
tires. our Customer Assistance Offices.
Weight of the Trailer Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
How heavy can a trailer safely be? Service (Mexico) on page 13‑9 for
more information.
It should never weigh more than
450 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that Weight of the Trailer Tongue
can be too heavy. The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
Speed, altitude, road grades, an important weight to measure
outside temperature, special because it affects the total gross
equipment, and the amount of weight of the vehicle. The Gross
tongue weight the vehicle can carry Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
must be considered. See “Weight of curb weight of the vehicle, any
the Trailer Tongue” later in this cargo carried in it, and the people For a weight-carrying hitch,
section for more information. who will be riding in the vehicle. the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10 to 15 percent of the
total loaded trailer weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh Towing Equipment Safety Chains

the trailer and then the tongue,
Hitches Always attach chains between the
separately, to see if the weights are
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
proper. If they are not, adjustments Use the correct hitch equipment. safety chains under the tongue
might be made by moving some See your dealer or a hitch dealer for of the trailer to help prevent the
items around in the trailer. assistance. tongue from contacting the road if it
Total Weight on the . The rear bumper on the vehicle becomes separated from the hitch.
Vehicle's Tires is not intended for hitches. Leave enough slack so the rig can
Do not attach rental hitches or turn. Never allow safety chains to
Inflate the vehicle's tires to the drag on the ground.
upper limit for cold tires. These other bumper-type hitches to it.
numbers can be found on the Use only a frame-mounted hitch Trailer Brakes
Certification label or see Vehicle that does not attach to the
bumper. Does the trailer have its own
Load Limits on page 9‑11. Do not go brakes? Be sure to read and follow
over the GVW limit for the vehicle, . Will any holes be made in the the instructions for the trailer brakes
or the GAWR, including the weight body of the vehicle when the so they are installed, adjusted, and
of the trailer tongue. trailer hitch is installed? If there maintained properly.
are, seal the holes when the
Trailer Towing hitch is removed. If the holes Because the vehicle has antilock
are not sealed, dirt, water, and brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
(CTS-V and Coupe) brake system. If this is done, both
deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
The vehicle is neither designed nor from the exhaust can get into the brake systems will not work well,
intended to tow a trailer. vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on or at all.
page 9‑25.
Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the

vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
Add-Ons vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything
Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Notice: Do not add anything Vehicle on page 3‑41 and Adding
electrical to the vehicle unless Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
you check with your dealer first. Vehicle on page 3‑42.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered
by the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
2 NOTES
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-24 High Intensity Discharge
General Information Overheated Engine (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Protection Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
California Proposition Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 License Plate Lamp (Coupe
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-25 and Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
California Perchlorate Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 License Plate Lamp
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Accessories and Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Vehicle Checks All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Electrical System
Doing Your Own Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-31 Electrical System
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Automatic Transmission Shift Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Lock Control Function Fuses and Circuit
Engine Compartment Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Ignition Transmission Lock Engine Compartment Fuse
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Block (CTS Coupe and
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Park Brake and P (Park) Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-33 Engine Compartment Fuse
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14
Wiper Blade Block (CTS V Coupe and
Automatic Transmission
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Engine Compartment Fuse
Manual Transmission Headlamp Aiming Block (CTS Wagon) . . . . . . . 10-48
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Engine Compartment Fuse
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Block (CTS V Wagon) . . . . . 10-52
10-2 Vehicle Care
Rear Compartment Fuse Tire Pressure Monitor Storing the Tire Sealant and
Block (CTS Coupe and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Compressor Kit
Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Rear Compartment Fuse Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Block (CTS-V Coupe and When It Is Time for New Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . 10-106
Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Rear Compartment Fuse Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 Jump Starting
Block (CTS Wagon) . . . . . . . 10-59 Different Size Tires and Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
Rear Compartment Fuse Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Towing
Block (CTS-V Wagon) . . . . . 10-61 Uniform Tire Quality Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-111
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Recreational Vehicle
Wheels and Tires Wheel Alignment and Tire
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-85 Appearance Care
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-66 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-87 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Tire Sealant and Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120
Tire Terminology and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Storing the Tire Sealant and
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Compressor Kit
Tire Pressure for High-Speed (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Storing the Tire Sealant and
Tire Pressure Monitor Compressor Kit
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Vehicle Care 10-3
General Information California Proposition Accessories and

For service and parts needs, visit 65 Warning Modifications
your dealer. You will receive Most motor vehicles, including this Adding non‐dealer accessories
genuine GM parts and GM-trained one, contain and/or emit chemicals to the vehicle can affect vehicle
and supported service people. known to the State of California to performance and safety, including
Genuine GM parts have one of cause cancer and birth defects or such things as airbags, braking,
these marks: other reproductive harm. Engine stability, ride and handling,
exhaust, many parts and systems, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
many fluids, and some component durability, and electronic systems
wear by-products contain and/or like antilock brakes, traction control,
emit these chemicals. and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause
California Perchlorate malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Materials Requirements
Damage to vehicle components
Certain types of automotive
resulting from the installation or use
applications, such as airbag
of non‐GM certified parts, including
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
control module modifications, is not
and lithium batteries contained in
covered under the terms of the
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
vehicle warranty and may affect
may contain perchlorate materials.
remaining warranty coverage for
Special handling may be necessary.
affected parts.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
10-4 Vehicle Care
GM Accessories are designed to Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service
complement and function with other work, use the proper service
systems on the vehicle. Your GM manual. It tells you much more
dealer can accessorize the vehicle Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. Service Work than this manual can. To order the
When you go to your GM dealer proper service manual, see Service
and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and
{ WARNING Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑14.
supported service technicians will You can be injured and the This vehicle has an airbag system.
perform the work using genuine GM vehicle could be damaged if you Before attempting to do your own
Accessories. try to do service work on a vehicle service work, see Servicing the
Also, see Adding Equipment to the without knowing enough about it. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on . Be sure you have sufficient page 3‑41.
page 3‑42. knowledge, experience, Keep a record with all parts receipts
the proper replacement and list the mileage and the date
parts, and tools before of any service work performed.
attempting any vehicle See Maintenance Records on
maintenance task. page 11‑11.
. Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. Metric and
English fasteners can be
easily confused. If the
wrong fasteners are used,
parts can later break or fall
off. You could be hurt.
Vehicle Care 10-5
Hood Before closing the hood, be sure all

the filler caps are on properly. Then
To open the hood: pull the hood down and close it
firmly.
1. Pull the hood release lever with

this symbol on it. It is located
inside the vehicle on the lower
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
side of the instrument panel.
find the secondary hood release
lever. The lever is located under
the front edge of the grille near
the center. Push the release
lever up and raise the hood.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview

CTS 3.6 L V6 Engine Shown, 3.0 L V6 Engine Similar
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Windshield Washer Fluid D. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on See Jump Starting on View). See Engine Oil on
page 10‑26. page 10‑106. page 10‑10.
B. Engine Compartment Fuse E. Passenger Compartment J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir
Block (CTS Coupe and Sedan) Air Filter. See Passenger (If Equipped) (Not Shown). See
on page 10‑41 or Engine Compartment Air Filter on Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑15.
Compartment Fuse Block page 8‑7. K. Brake Master Cylinder
(CTS V Coupe and Sedan) on F. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of Reservoir (Out of View). See
page 10‑45 or Engine View). See Cooling System on Brakes on page 10‑27.
Compartment Fuse Block page 10‑18.
(CTS Wagon) on page 10‑48 or L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Engine Compartment Fuse G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. Pressure Cap. See Engine
Block (CTS V Wagon) on See Power Steering Fluid on Coolant on page 10‑19.
page 10‑52. page 10‑25. M. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine page 10‑16.
See Jump Starting on Oil on page 10‑10.
page 10‑106.
10-8 Vehicle Care
CTS-V 6.2 L V8 Engine

Vehicle Care 10-9
A. Windshield Washer Fluid D. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on See Jump Starting on (If Equipped) (Not Shown). See
page 10‑26. page 10‑106. Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑15.
B. Engine Compartment Fuse E. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of K. Brake Master Cylinder
Block (CTS Coupe and Sedan) View). See Engine Oil on Reservoir. See Brakes on
on page 10‑41 or Engine page 10‑10. page 10‑27.
Compartment Fuse Block F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
(CTS V Coupe and Sedan) on Oil on page 10‑10. Pressure Cap. See Engine
page 10‑45 or Engine Coolant on page 10‑19.
Compartment Fuse Block G. Passenger Compartment
(CTS Wagon) on page 10‑48 or Air Filter. See Passenger M. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Engine Compartment Fuse Compartment Air Filter on (Under Engine Cover). See
Block (CTS V Wagon) on page 8‑7. Power Steering Fluid on
page 10‑52. H. Intercooler System Pressure page 10‑25.
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. Cap. See Cooling System on N. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
See Jump Starting on page 10‑18. page 10‑16.
page 10‑106. I. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of
View). See Cooling System on
page 10‑18.
10-10 Vehicle Care
Engine Cover 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to 2. Pull the engine cover forward
reinstall engine cover. until it is clear of the smaller
Engine Cover (CTS) piece.
Engine Cover (CTS-V)
3. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
reinstall engine cover.
Engine Oil
To ensure proper engine
performance and long life, careful
attention must be paid to engine
oil. Following these simple, but
important steps will help protect
your investment:
To remove: . Always use engine oil approved
To remove:
1. Remove the oil fill cap (A). to the proper specification and of
The engine cover consists of the proper viscosity grade. See
2. Raise the right front corner of two pieces. Only the larger front “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
the engine cover (B) to release it piece needs to be removed to in this section.
from the ball stud. access the engine oil and power
steering fill caps.
. Check the engine oil level
3. Pull the engine cover (B) forward
regularly and maintain the
to slide the rear tabs (C) out from 1. Raise the front of the engine proper oil level. See “Checking
under the retainers. cover (A) to release it from the Engine Oil” and “When to Add
4. Lift and remove the engine ball studs (B). Engine Oil” in this section.
cover.
Vehicle Care 10-11

. Change the engine oil at the 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean Notice: Do not add too much oil.
appropriate time. See Engine Oil it with a paper towel or cloth, Oil levels above or below the
Life System on page 10‑14. then push it back in all the way. acceptable operating range
. Always dispose of engine oil Remove it again, keeping the tip shown on the dipstick are harmful
properly. See “What to Do with down, and check the level. to the engine. If you find that
Used Oil” in this section. you have an oil level above the
When to Add Engine Oil operating range, i.e., the engine
Checking Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched has so much oil that the oil level
It is a good idea to check the engine area at the tip of the dipstick, add gets above the cross-hatched
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil area that shows the proper
get an accurate reading, the vehicle and then recheck the level. See operating range, the engine could
must be on level ground. The “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” be damaged. You should drain
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow in this section for an explanation out the excess oil or limit driving
loop. See Engine Compartment of what kind of oil to use. For of the vehicle and seek a service
Overview on page 10‑6 for the engine oil crankcase capacity, see professional to remove the
location of the engine oil dipstick. Capacities and Specifications on excess amount of oil.
page 12‑2. See Engine Compartment Overview
1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and on page 10‑6 for the location of the
allow several minutes for the oil engine oil fill cap.
to drain back into the oil pan. Add enough oil to put the level
Checking the oil level too soon somewhere in the proper operating
after engine shutoff will not range. Push the dipstick all the way
provide an accurate oil level back in when through.
reading.
10-12 Vehicle Care
Selecting the Right Engine Oil Notice: Use only engine oil Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
that is approved to the dexos™ dexos™ is unavailable: In the event
Selecting the right engine oil
specification or an equivalent that dexos™ approved engine oil is
depends on both the proper oil
engine oil of the appropriate not available at an oil change or for
specification and viscosity grade:
viscosity grade. Engine oils maintaining proper oil level, you
Specification approved to the dexos™ may use substitute engine oil
specification will show the displaying the API Starburst symbol
Use and ask for engine oils with
dexos™ symbol on the container. and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
the dexos™ certification mark. Oils
Failure to use the recommended Use of oils that do not meet the
meeting the requirements of the
engine oil or equivalent can dexos™ specification, however, may
vehicle should have the dexos™
result in engine damage not result in reduced performance under
certification mark on the container.
covered by the vehicle warranty. certain circumstances.
This certification mark indicates that
If you are unsure whether the
the oil has been approved to the Viscosity Grade
oil is approved to the dexos™
dexos™ specification.
specification, ask your service SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
provider. grade for the vehicle. Do not
use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
This vehicle was filled at the factory

with dexos™ approved engine oil.
Vehicle Care 10-13
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should What to Do with Used Oil

be used. An oil of this viscosity
Used engine oil contains certain
grade will provide easier cold
elements that can be unhealthy for
starting for the engine at extremely
your skin and could even cause
low temperatures. When selecting
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
an oil of the appropriate viscosity
your skin for very long. Clean your
grade, be sure to always select
skin and nails with soap and water,
an oil that meets the required
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
specification, dexos™. See
properly dispose of clothing or rags
“Specification” earlier in this
containing used engine oil. See the
section for more information.
manufacturer's warnings about the
Engine Oil Additives/Engine use and disposal of oil products.
Oil Flushes Used oil can be a threat to the
Do not add anything to the oil. The environment. If you change your
recommended oils with the dexos™ own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
specification and displaying the from the filter before disposal. Never
dexos™ certification mark are all dispose of oil by putting it in the
that is needed for good performance trash or pouring it on the ground,
and engine protection. into sewers, or into streams or
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
Engine oil system flushes are not it to a place that collects used oil.
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
10-14 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Life System and, at this time, the system must The system is reset when the
be reset. Your dealer has trained CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
When to Change Engine Oil service people who will perform this message goes off.
This vehicle has a computer system work and reset the system. It is also If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
that indicates when to change the important to check the oil regularly message comes back on when the
engine oil and filter. This is based over the course of an oil drain vehicle is started, the engine oil life
on engine revolutions and engine interval and keep it at the proper system has not been reset. Repeat
temperature, and not on mileage. level. the procedure.
Based on driving conditions, the If the system is ever reset
mileage at which an oil change is accidentally, the oil must be Automatic Transmission
indicated can vary considerably. For changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)
the oil life system to work properly, since the last oil change.
Fluid
the system must be reset every time Remember to reset the oil life How to Check Automatic
the oil is changed. system whenever the oil is changed. Transmission Fluid
When the system has calculated How to Reset the Engine Oil It is not necessary to check
that oil life has been diminished, Life System the transmission fluid level.
it indicates that an oil change is A transmission fluid leak is the
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE Reset the system whenever the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
OIL SOON message comes on. See engine oil is changed so that the
occurs, take the vehicle to the
Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑35. system can calculate the next
dealer service department and have
Change the oil as soon as possible engine oil change. To reset the
it repaired as soon as possible.
within the next 1 000 km (600 miles). system:
It is possible that, if driving under The vehicle is not equipped with a
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the best conditions, the oil life transmission fluid level dipstick.
the engine off.
system might indicate that an oil There is a special procedure
change is not necessary for up to a 2. Fully press and release the for checking and changing the
year. The engine oil and filter must accelerator pedal three times transmission fluid. Because this
be changed at least once a year within five seconds. procedure is difficult, it should be
Vehicle Care 10-15
done at the dealer service See Recommended Fluids and Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
department. Contact your dealer Lubricants on page 11‑7 for the for the proper fluid to use. See
for additional information or refer proper fluid to use. Recommended Fluids and
to the procedure in the service Lubricants on page 11‑7. The fluid
manual. To purchase a service Hydraulic Clutch requires changing every two years.
manual, see Service Publications See Scheduled Maintenance on
Ordering Information on page 13‑14. It is not necessary to regularly page 11‑2.
check clutch fluid unless you
Change the fluid and filter at the suspect there is a leak in the How to Check and Add Fluid
intervals listed in Scheduled system. Adding fluid will not correct
Maintenance on page 11‑2, and be Visually check the clutch fluid
a leak. A fluid loss in this system
sure to use the fluid listed in reservoir to make sure the fluid level
could indicate a problem. Have the is at the MIN (minimum) line on the
Recommended Fluids and system inspected and repaired.
Lubricants on page 11‑7. side of the reservoir. The hydraulic
When to Check and What clutch fluid system should be closed
to Use and sealed.
Manual Transmission
Fluid Do not remove the cap to check
the fluid level or to top‐off the fluid
It is not necessary to check the level. Remove the cap only when
manual transmission fluid level. necessary to add the proper fluid
A transmission fluid leak is the until the level reaches the MIN line.
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to a dealer
for service. Have it repaired as The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoir
soon as possible. You may also cap has this symbol on it. See
have the fluid level checked by Engine Compartment Overview on
your dealer when the oil is changed. page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
10-16 Vehicle Care
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter How to Inspect the Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the
engine compartment on the driver To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
side of the vehicle, near the front. remove the filter from the vehicle
See Engine Compartment Overview and lightly shake the filter to release
on page 10‑6 for more information loose dust and dirt. If the filter
on location. remains covered with dirt, a new
filter is required.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
1. Turn the ignition off.
scheduled maintenance intervals
and replace it at the first oil change 3. Disconnect the electrical
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mile) connector from the air box.
interval. See Scheduled 4. Loosen the screw on the clamp
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more holding the air outlet duct in
information. If you are driving in place. Do not remove the clamp.
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the Move the duct aside.
filter at each engine oil change.
5. Remove the hose from the air
cleaner housing mounting arm.
Move the hose aside.
2. Remove the side cover by

pulling up on the front of the
cover.
Vehicle Care 10-17
6. Remove the three air cleaner 7. Move the air cleaner housing 8. Remove the air cleaner filter
housing cover screws. cover and remove the cover from the air cleaner housing.
from the air cleaner housing.
10-18 Vehicle Care
How to Reinstall Engine Air 8. Attach the electrical connector to Cooling System
Cleaner/Filter the air box.
The cooling system allows the
1. Install the air cleaner into the air 9. Reinstall the side cover. engine to maintain the correct
cleaner housing. The outer air working temperature.
cleaner filter seal must be fitted { WARNING When it is safe to lift the hood:
properly in the air cleaner
housing. Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
2. Align the air cleaner housing
cover tabs to the air cleaner others to be burned. The air
housing. cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
3. Install the air cleaner housing backfires. Use caution when
cover. working on the engine and do not
4. Install the air cleaner housing drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
cover screws.
5. Install the hose to the air cleaner Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
housing mounting arm. The hose off, dirt can easily get into the
must be routed correctly. engine, which could damage it.
6. Install the air cleaner outlet duct Always have the air cleaner/filter A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s)
to the air cleaner housing. in place when you are driving. (Out of View)
7. Tighten the air cleaner outlet B. Coolant Surge Tank and
duct screw clamp. Pressure Cap
Vehicle Care 10-19
Notice: Using coolant other than Engine Coolant

{ WARNING DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator The cooling system in the vehicle
An electric engine cooling fan corrosion. In addition, the engine for all engines and the intercooler
under the hood can start up even coolant could require changing is filled with DEX-COOL®. This
when the engine is not running sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi) coolant is designed to remain in the
and can cause injury. Keep or 24 months, whichever occurs vehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km
hands, clothing, and tools away first. Any repairs would not (150,000 mi), whichever occurs first.
from any underhood electric fan. be covered by the vehicle The following explains the cooling
warranty. Always use DEX-COOL system and how to check and add
(silicate-free) coolant in the coolant when it is low. If there is a
vehicle. problem with engine overheating,
{ WARNING see Engine Overheating on
Heater and radiator hoses, and page 10‑24.
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
10-20 Vehicle Care
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Never dispose of engine coolant
drinkable water and DEX-COOL by putting it in the trash, pouring
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
it on the ground, or into sewers,
streams, or bodies of water.
Adding only plain water or some This mixture: Have the coolant changed by an
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down authorized service center, familiar
can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside with legal requirements regarding
and other liquids, can boil before temperature. used coolant disposal. This will help
the proper coolant mixture will. protect the environment and your
. Gives boiling protection up health.
The coolant warning system is set to 129°C (265°F), engine
for the proper coolant mixture. temperature. Checking Coolant
With plain water or the wrong
. Protects against rust and The vehicle must be on a level
mixture, the engine could get too
corrosion. surface when checking the coolant
hot but you would not get the
level.
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts.
could catch fire and you or The engine coolant reservoir is
. Helps keep the proper engine located in the engine compartment
others could be burned. Use a temperature.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable on the driver side of the vehicle.
water and DEX-COOL coolant. Notice: If an improper coolant See Engine Compartment Overview
mixture is used, the engine could on page 10‑6.
overheat and be badly damaged. Check to see if coolant is visible in
The repair cost would not be the surge tank. If the coolant inside
covered by the vehicle warranty. the surge tank is boiling, do not do
Too much water in the mixture anything else until it cools down.
can freeze and crack the engine, If coolant is visible but the coolant
radiator, heater core, and other level is not at or above the FULL
parts. COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and
Vehicle Care 10-21
DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant Notice: This vehicle has a

surge tank, but be sure the cooling specific coolant fill procedure. WARNING (Continued)
system is cool before this is done. Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to turn the cap when the cooling
If the engine is warm or hot, the system, including the surge tank
coolant level should be at or above overheat and be severely
damaged. pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
the FROID/FULL COLD line on the cooling system and surge tank
side of the coolant surge tank. If the pressure cap to cool if you ever
engine is cold, the coolant level { WARNING have to turn the pressure cap.
should be near the FROID/FULL
COLD line on the side of the coolant An electric engine cooling fan
surge tank. If it is not, there could under the hood can start up even If coolant is needed, add the proper
be a leak in the cooling system. when the engine is not running DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
and can cause injury. Keep coolant surge tank.
How to Add Coolant to the hands, clothing, and tools away
Surge Tank If no coolant is visible in the surge
from any underhood electric fan. tank, add coolant as follows:
{ WARNING 1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
You can be burned if you spill { WARNING system, including the coolant
coolant on hot engine parts. surge tank pressure cap and
Coolant contains ethylene glycol Steam and scalding liquids from upper radiator hose, is no longer
a hot cooling system can blow hot. Turn the pressure cap
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill out and burn you badly. They slowly counterclockwise about
are under pressure, and if you one-quarter turn and then stop.
coolant on a hot engine.
turn the surge tank pressure
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
cap — even a little — they can stop. A hiss means there is still
come out at high speed. Never some pressure left.
(Continued)
10-22 Vehicle Care
By this time, the coolant level

inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge
tank until the level reaches the
FROID/FULL COLD line on the
side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Notice: If the pressure cap is
2. Then keep turning the pressure 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with not tightly installed, coolant loss
cap slowly and remove it. the proper mixture, to slightly and possible engine damage may
above the FROID/FULL COLD occur. Be sure the cap is properly
line on the side of the coolant and tightly secured.
surge tank.
Recheck the coolant level in the
4. With the coolant surge tank bottle next time you use your
pressure cap off, start the vehicle to ensure the system is full
engine and let it run until you when cold.
can feel the upper radiator hose
getting hot. The upper radiator
hose is the top hose coming out
of the radiator, on the passenger
side of the vehicle. Watch out for
the engine cooling fans.
Vehicle Care 10-23
Checking Coolant in the Adding Coolant to the 2. Then keep turning the pressure
Intercooler System (CTS-V) Intercooler System cap slowly and remove it.
The vehicle must be on a level Coolant (CTS-V) 3. Add the proper DEX-COOL
surface when checking the coolant coolant mixture to the fill neck
level. until the coolant is within the
cold fill region.
The super charged engine
intercooler coolant fill neck is With the intercooler system
located in the engine compartment pressure cap off, start the
on the passenger side of the engine and let it run for a couple
vehicle. See Engine Compartment of minutes. Then turn the engine
Overview on page 10‑6. off. By this time, the coolant
level inside the fill neck may be
On the coolant fill neck, there lower. If the level drops where
is a cold fill region between the coolant is no longer within the
two horizontal lines shown. cold fill region of the fill neck
Check to see if coolant is visible with the engine off, add more of
in the coolant fill neck. If the coolant 1. Remove the intercooler the DEX-COOL coolant mixture
is not visible or below the cold system pressure cap when the to the fill neck until the level is
fill region in the fill neck, add a intercooler system hoses are no again visible in the cold fill
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable longer hot. Turn the pressure region.
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the cap slowly counterclockwise
coolant fill bottle, but be sure the about one-quarter of a turn.
cooling system is cool before this If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
is done. stop. This allows any pressure
still left to be vented.
10-24 Vehicle Care
4. Then replace the pressure cap. If you do decide to lift the hood, If Steam Is Coming from the
Be sure the pressure cap is make sure the vehicle is parked on Engine Compartment
hand-tight and fully seated. a level surface.
Notice: If the pressure cap is Then check to see if the engine { WARNING
not tightly installed, coolant loss cooling fans are running. If the
and possible engine damage may engine is overheating, the fan(s) Steam from an overheated engine
occur. Be sure the cap is properly should be running. If they are not, can burn you badly, even if you
and tightly secured. do not continue to run the engine just open the hood. Stay away
If the coolant is not at the proper and have the vehicle serviced. from the engine if you see or hear
level when the system cools down Notice: Engine damage from steam coming from it. Just turn it
again, see your dealer. running the engine without off and get everyone away from
coolant is not covered by the the vehicle until it cools down.
Engine Overheating warranty. Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open
The vehicle has several indicators Notice: If the engine catches fire
the hood.
to warn of engine overheating. because of being driven with no
coolant, the vehicle can be badly If you keep driving when the
There are two engine hot messages damaged. The costly repairs engine is overheated, the liquids
that may be displayed in the Driver would not be covered by the in it can catch fire. You or others
Information Center (DIC). See vehicle warranty. could be badly burned. Stop the
Engine Cooling System Messages
engine if it overheats, and get out
on page 5‑35 for more information.
of the vehicle until the engine
You may decide not to lift the hood is cool.
when one of these warnings appear,
but get service help right away.
Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Vehicle Care 10-25
If No Steam Is Coming from If the temperature overheat gauge Overheated Engine

the Engine Compartment is no longer in the overheat zone
or an overheat warning no longer
Protection
If an engine overheat warning is displays, the vehicle can be driven. Operating Mode
displayed but no steam can be seen Continue to drive the vehicle slow
or heard, the problem may not be This operating mode allows the
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle to be driven to a safe place
too serious. Sometimes the engine vehicle distance from the car in front
can get a little too hot when the in an emergency. Should a hot
of you. If the warning does not come engine condition exist, an overheat
vehicle: back on, continue to drive normally.
.
protection mode which alternates
Climbs a long hill on a hot day. If the warning continues, pull firing groups of cylinders helps
. Stops after high-speed driving. over, stop, and park the vehicle prevent engine damage. In this
right away. mode, there is a loss in power
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
and engine performance. Driving
If there is no sign of steam, idle
. Tows a trailer. extended distances and/or towing a
the engine for three minutes while
If the overheat warning is displayed trailer in the overheat protection
parked. If the warning is still
with no sign of steam: mode should be avoided.
displayed, turn off the engine
1. Turn the air conditioning off. until it cools down. Also, see
“Overheated Engine Protection Power Steering Fluid
2. Turn the heater on to the highest Operating Mode” next in this
temperature and to the highest section.
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park) See Engine Compartment Overview
or N (Neutral) and let the on page 10‑6 for the location of the
engine idle. power steering fluid reservoir.
10-26 Vehicle Care
When to Check Power Steering The level should be between the Adding Washer Fluid
Fluid HOT and COLD marks. If necessary,
The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
add only enough fluid to bring the
It is not necessary to regularly FLUID message will appear on the
level between the marks.
check power steering fluid unless Driver Information Center (DIC)
you suspect there is a leak in the What to Use when the fluid level is low. See
system or you hear an unusual Washer Fluid Messages on
To determine what kind of fluid to page 5‑46 for more information.
noise. A fluid loss in this system
use, see Recommended Fluids and
could indicate a problem. Have the
Lubricants on page 11‑7. Always
system inspected and repaired.
use the proper fluid.
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid Washer Fluid
To check the power steering fluid: What to Use
1. Turn the key off and let the When adding windshield washer
engine compartment cool down. Open the cap with the washer
fluid to the vehicle, be sure to read
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the the manufacturer's instructions
until the tank is full. See Engine
reservoir clean. before use. If you will be operating
Compartment Overview on
your vehicle in an area where the
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
temperature may fall below freezing,
dipstick with a clean rag. use a fluid that has sufficient
4. Replace the cap and completely protection against freezing.
tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
Vehicle Care 10-27
Notice: Brakes Some driving conditions or climates

. When using concentrated can cause a brake squeal when
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc the brakes are first applied or
washer fluid, follow the brake pads have built-in wear
manufacturer's instructions lightly applied. This does not mean
indicators that make a high-pitched something is wrong with the brakes.
for adding water. warning sound when the brake pads
. Do not mix water with are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are
ready-to-use washer fluid. The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake
Water can cause the solution heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated,
to freeze and damage the moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear
washer fluid tank and other brake pedal firmly. and evenly tighten wheel nuts
parts of the washer system. in the proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
{ WARNING Specifications on page 12‑2.
. Fill the washer fluid tank The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be
only three-quarters full means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets.
when it is very cold. This not work well. That could lead to
a crash. When the brake wear
Brake Pedal Travel
allows for fluid expansion
if freezing occurs, which warning sound is heard, have the See your dealer if the brake pedal
could damage the tank if vehicle serviced. does not return to normal height,
it is completely full. or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign
. Do not use engine coolant Notice: Continuing to drive with that brake service might be
(antifreeze) in the windshield worn-out brake pads could result required.
washer. It can damage the in costly brake repair.
windshield washer system
and paint.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Brake Adjustment The braking performance expected There are only two reasons why
can change in many other ways if the brake fluid level in the reservoir
Every time the brakes are applied,
the wrong replacement brake parts might go down:
with or without the vehicle moving,
are installed. . The brake fluid level goes down
the brakes adjust for wear.
because of normal brake lining
Replacing Brake System Parts Brake Fluid wear. When new linings are
The braking system on a vehicle is installed, the fluid level goes
complex. Its many parts have to be back up.
of top quality and work well together . A fluid leak in the brake
if the vehicle is to have really good hydraulic system can also cause
braking. The vehicle was designed a low fluid level. Have the brake
and tested with top-quality brake hydraulic system fixed, since a
parts. When parts of the braking leak means that sooner or later
system are replaced, be sure to get The brake master cylinder reservoir the brakes will not work well.
new, approved replacement parts. is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
If this is not done, the brakes might indicated on the reservoir cap. See Do not top off the brake fluid.
not work properly. For example, Engine Compartment Overview on Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
installing disc brake pads that are page 10‑6 for the location of the If fluid is added when the linings
wrong for the vehicle, can change reservoir. are worn, there will be too much
the balance between the front fluid when new brake linings are
and rear brakes — for the worse. installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
Vehicle Care 10-29
What to Add Notice:

{ WARNING Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid . Using the wrong fluid
If too much brake fluid is added, it from a sealed container. See can badly damage brake
can spill on the engine and burn, Recommended Fluids and hydraulic system parts.
if the engine is hot enough. You Lubricants on page 11‑7. For example, just a few
or others could be burned, and Always clean the brake fluid drops of mineral-based oil,
the vehicle could be damaged. reservoir cap and the area around such as engine oil, in the
Add brake fluid only when work is the cap before removing it. This brake hydraulic system can
helps keep dirt from entering the damage brake hydraulic
done on the brake hydraulic
reservoir. system parts so badly that
system.
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
When the brake fluid falls to a low { WARNING the wrong kind of fluid.
level, the brake warning light comes . If brake fluid is spilled on the
With the wrong kind of fluid in
on. See Brake System Warning vehicle's painted surfaces,
the brake hydraulic system, the
Light on page 5‑22. the paint finish can be
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use damaged. Be careful not
the proper brake fluid. to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
10-30 Vehicle Care
Battery After a power loss, such as Vehicle Storage

disconnecting the battery or
The battery is in the trunk, behind
the trim panel, on the passenger
removing the maxi fuses in the
power distribution fuse block, the
{ WARNING
side of the vehicle. Refer to the following steps must be performed Batteries have acid that can burn
replacement number shown on the to calibrate the electronic throttle you and gas that can explode.
original battery label when a new control. If this is not done, the
battery is needed. You can be badly hurt if you are
engine will not run properly. not careful. See Jump Starting on
1. Turn the ignition on but do not page 10‑106 for tips on working
{ DANGER start the engine. around a battery without
Battery posts, terminals, and 2. Leave the ignition on for at getting hurt.
related accessories contain lead least three minutes so that the
and lead compounds, chemicals electronic throttle control will Infrequent Usage: Remove the
known to the State of California to cycle and re-learn its home black, negative (−) cable from the
cause cancer and reproductive position. battery to keep the battery from
harm. Wash hands after handling. 3. Turn the ignition off. running down.
4. Start and run the engine for at Extended Storage: Remove the
least 30 seconds. black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
Vehicle Care 10-31
All-Wheel Drive How to Check Lubricant What to Use

If your vehicle is equipped with Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
all-wheel-drive, this is an additional to determine what kind of lubricant
system that needs lubrication. to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant Starter Switch Check
It is not necessary to regularly
check the transfer case fluid unless { WARNING
you suspect there is a leak or you When you are doing this
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss inspection, the vehicle could
could indicate a problem. Have it
move suddenly. If the vehicle
inspected and repaired.
moves, you or others could be
A. Drain Plug
injured.
B. Fill Plug
To get an accurate reading, the 1. Before starting this check, be
vehicle should be on a level sure there is enough room
surface. around the vehicle.
If the level is below the bottom 2. Firmly apply both the parking
of the filler plug hole, located on brake and the regular brake.
the transfer case, you'll need to See Parking Brake (Manual) on
add some lubricant. Add enough page 9‑34 or Parking Brake
lubricant to raise the level to the (Electric) on page 9‑35.
bottom of the filler plug hole. Use
care not to overtighten the plug.
10-32 Vehicle Care
Do not use the accelerator Automatic Transmission 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
pedal, and be ready to turn off See Parking Brake (Manual) on
the engine immediately if it
Shift Lock Control page 9‑34 or Parking Brake
starts. Function Check (Electric) on page 9‑35.
3. For automatic transmission Be ready to apply the regular
vehicles, try to start the engine { WARNING brake immediately if the vehicle
in each gear. The vehicle should begins to move.
start only in P (Park) or When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could 3. With the engine off, turn the
N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts ignition on, but do not start the
in any other position, contact move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be engine. Without applying the
your dealer for service. regular brake, try to move the
injured.
For manual transmission shift lever out of P (Park) with
vehicles, put the shift lever in normal effort. If the shift lever
Neutral, push the clutch pedal 1. Before starting this check, be moves out of P (Park), contact
down halfway, and try to start sure there is enough room your dealer for service.
the engine. The vehicle should around the vehicle. It should be
start only when the clutch pedal parked on a level surface.
is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts
when the clutch pedal is not
pushed all the way down,
contact your dealer for service.
Vehicle Care 10-33
Ignition Transmission Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
Lock Check Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set
While parked, and with the parking the parking brake.
brake set, try to turn the ignition { WARNING . To check the parking brake's
to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever holding ability: With the engine
position. When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move. running and the transmission in
. The ignition should turn to You or others could be injured N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
LOCK/OFF only when the shift pressure from the regular brake
and property could be damaged.
lever is in P (Park). pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
Make sure there is room in front
held by the parking brake only.
. With the key access ignition of the vehicle in case it begins to
system, the ignition key should roll. Be ready to apply the regular . To check the P (Park)
come out only in LOCK/OFF. brake at once should the vehicle mechanism's holding ability:
See Ignition Positions (Key begin to move. With the engine running, shift
Access) on page 9‑17 or Ignition to P (Park). Then release the
Positions (Keyless Access) on parking brake followed by the
page 9‑18. regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is Contact your dealer if service is
required. required.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Wiper Blade Replacement 6. Replace the blade with a

new one.
Windshield wiper blades should
be inspected for wear or cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2.
It is a good idea to clean or replace
the wiper blade assembly on a
regular basis or when worn. For
proper windshield wiper blade
length and type, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11‑9.
To replace the wiper blade 4. Lift up the wiper blade
assembly: assembly cap.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with 5. Pull the wiper blade assembly
the engine off. down far enough to release it 7. Reinstall the wiper blade
from the J-hooked end of the assembly by sliding it over
2. Turn on the windshield wipers the wiper arm to engage the
and turn them off again when wiper arm. Slide the assembly
away from the arm. J-hooked end. Pull up on the
the wipers are in the out-wipe assembly to lock it into place.
position. The driver side blade Allowing the wiper blade arm to
will be straight up and down on touch the windshield when no 8. Repeat the steps for the other
the windshield. wiper blade is installed could wiper.
3. Pull the windshield wiper damage the windshield. Any

assembly away from the damage that occurs would not
windshield. be covered by your warranty. Do
not allow the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield.
Vehicle Care 10-35
Headlamp Aiming The vehicle should: Headlamp aiming is done with the
vehicle's low-beam headlamps.
. Be placed so the headlamps
The vehicle has a visual optical The high-beam headlamps will be
are 7.6 m (25 ft) from a light
headlamp aiming system. The aim correctly aimed if the low-beam
colored wall.
has been preset at the factory and headlamps are aimed properly.
. Have all four tires on a level
should need no further adjustment.
surface which is level all the way To adjust the vertical aim:
However, if the vehicle is damaged
to the wall. 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
in a crash, the headlamp aim may
. Be placed so it is perpendicular page 10‑5 for more information.
be affected and adjustment may be
necessary. to the wall.
If oncoming vehicles flash their . Not have any snow, ice, or mud
high beams at you, this may also on it.
mean the vertical aim needs to be . Be fully assembled and have
adjusted. all other work stopped while
It is recommended that the vehicle headlamp aiming is being
is taken to your dealer for service if performed.
the headlamps need to be re-aimed. . Be loaded with a full tank of
It is possible, however, to re-aim the fuel and one person or 75 kg
headlamps as described. (160 lbs) sitting on the
driver seat.
. Have all tires properly inflated. Halogen Headlamps
. Have the spare tire (if equipped)
in its original location in the
vehicle.
10-36 Vehicle Care
aimed. This should allow only

the beam of light from the
headlamp being aimed to be
seen on the flat surface.
4. At a wall, measure from the

ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps 5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
the width of the vehicle at the
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of wall where it was marked in
the low‐beam headlamp. Step 4. Driver Side Shown
3. Record the distance from the Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
ground to the aim dot on the 7. Locate the vertical headlamp
to improve beam cut-off when aiming screws, which are under
low‐beam headlamp. aiming. Covering a headlamp may the hood near each headlamp
cause excessive heat build-up assembly. They are covered by
which may cause damage to the rubber caps.
headlamp.
The adjustment screw can be
6. Turn on the low-beam turned with a 6 mm hex driver.
headlamps and place a piece
of cardboard or equivalent in 8. Turn the vertical aiming screw
front of the headlamp not being until the headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal tape line.
Vehicle Care 10-37
Turn it clockwise or Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge

counterclockwise to raise or
lower the angle of the beam. For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
The top edge of the cut-off
should be positioned at the
page 10‑39. { WARNING
bottom edge of the horizontal For any bulb‐changing procedure The low beam high intensity
tape line. not listed in this section, contact discharge lighting system
your dealer.
operates at a very high voltage.
If you try to service any of the
Halogen Bulbs system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your
{ WARNING dealer or a qualified technician
service them.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or After an HID headlamp bulb has
others could be injured. Be sure been replaced, the beam might be a
9. Make sure that the light from the slightly different shade than it was
to read and follow the instructions
headlamp is positioned at the originally. This is normal.
bottom edge of the horizontal on the bulb package.
tape line. The lamp on the
left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect
headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
the opposite headlamp.
10-38 Vehicle Care
Fog Lamps 3. Remove the electrical connector License Plate Lamp

from the bulb by lifting the
two plastic clips.
(Coupe and Sedan)
4. Remove the bulb socket from To replace one of these bulbs:
the lamp housing by turning the
bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
5. Pull the old bulb from the lamp
To replace a front fog lamp bulb: housing keeping the bulb
straight as you pull it out.
1. Pull out the push-pins located on
the underside of the protection 6. Install a new bulb. 1. Push the tab to remove the
shield to remove the shield. 7. Reinstall the electrical connector license plate lamp.
2. Reach up behind the front by pushing in the two plastic 2. Turn the license plate lamp
bumper area from under the clips. assembly down to remove it.
vehicle to access the lamp 8. Push the bulb socket into the 3. Turn the socket
housing. lamp housing and turn the counterclockwise and remove it.
socket one‐quarter turn
clockwise. 4. Pull the bulb straight out to
remove it.
5. Push the new bulb straight into
the socket.
reinstall the license plate lamp
assembly.
Vehicle Care 10-39
License Plate Lamp 7. Turn the lamp assembly into

the liftgate engaging the clip
(Wagon) side first.
To replace one of these bulbs: 8. Push on the lamp side opposite
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate the clip until the lamp assembly
(Wagon) on page 2‑21 for more snaps into place.
information.
Replacement Bulbs
Bulb
Exterior Lamp
Number
Fog Lamp (Up
A. Bulb Socket H11LL
Level Only)
B. Bulb
License Plate Lamp W5WLL
C. Lamp Assembly
4. Turn the bulb socket (A) For replacement bulbs not listed
counterclockwise to remove it here, contact your dealer.
from the lamp assembly (C).
Passenger Side Shown, Driver 5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of
Side Similar the bulb socket.
2. Push the left end of the lamp 6. Push the replacement bulb
assembly towards the right. straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to
3. Turn the lamp assembly down to install it into the lamp assembly.
remove it from the liftgate.
10-40 Vehicle Care
Electrical System Fuses and circuit breakers protect Windshield Wipers

the following in the vehicle:
If the wiper motor overheats due to
Electrical System . Headlamp Wiring heavy snow or ice, the windshield
Overload . Windshield Wiper Motor wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
. Power Windows and Other
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
Power Accessories Although the circuit is protected
breakers to protect against an
from electrical overload, overload
electrical system overload. Replace a bad fuse with a new one due to heavy snow or ice may
When the current electrical load is of the identical size and rating. cause wiper linkage damage.
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If there is a problem on the road Always clear ice and heavy snow
and closes, protecting the circuit and a fuse needs to be replaced, from the windshield before using the
until the current load returns to the same amperage fuse can be windshield wipers.
normal or the problem is fixed. borrowed. Choose some feature of If the overload is caused by an
This greatly reduces the chance of the vehicle that is not needed to use electrical problem and not snow or
circuit overload and fire caused by and replace it as soon as possible. ice, be sure to get it fixed.
electrical problems.
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have
the headlamp wiring checked right
away if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Vehicle Care 10-41
Fuses and Circuit To identify and check fuses, circuit

breakers, and relays, see Engine
Breakers Compartment Fuse Block (CTS
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are Coupe and Sedan) on page 10‑41
protected from short circuits by a or Engine Compartment Fuse Block
combination of fuses and circuit (CTS V Coupe and Sedan) on
breakers. This greatly reduces the page 10‑45 or Engine Compartment
chance of damage caused by Fuse Block (CTS Wagon) on
electrical problems. page 10‑48 or Engine Compartment
Fuse Block (CTS V Wagon) on
To check a fuse, look at the
page 10‑52 and Rear Compartment
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
Fuse Block (CTS Coupe and
If the band is broken or melted,
Sedan) on page 10‑55 or Rear
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace Lift the fuse block cover to access
Compartment Fuse Block (CTS-V
a bad fuse with a new one of the the fuses.
Coupe and Sedan) on page 10‑57
identical size and rating.
or Rear Compartment Fuse Block The vehicle may not be equipped
Fuses of the same amperage (CTS Wagon) on page 10‑59 or with all of the fuses and relays
can be temporarily borrowed from Rear Compartment Fuse Block shown.
another fuse location, if a fuse goes (CTS-V Wagon) on page 10‑61. Notice: Spilling liquid on any
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
electrical component on the
you can. Engine Compartment vehicle may damage it. Always
Fuse Block (CTS Coupe keep the covers on any electrical
and Sedan) component.
The underhood fuse block is located

on the passenger side of the engine
compartment.
10-42 Vehicle Care
Mini‐Fuses Usage
Body Control
26
Module 5
Body Control
27
Module 4
28 Navigation Motor
29 All-Wheel Drive
Transmission
30 Control Module
Battery
31 Horn
Left Low‐Beam
Headlamp
33
(Domestic
Non‐HID Only)
Mini‐Fuses Usage Mini‐Fuses Usage Pedestrian
11 Not Used 23 Not Used 34 Protection System
(Export Only)
Antilock Braking Body Control
19 24 Body Control
System (ABS) Module 1 35
Module 3
22 Display Automatic Forward
25 Lighting System Body Control
36
(HID Only) Module 2
Vehicle Care 10-43
Mini‐Fuses Usage Mini‐Fuses Usage Mini‐Fuses Usage

Headlamp Washer Right Daytime Daytime Running
38
(HID Only) Running Lamp, Lamps (non‐HID),
50 58
Windshield Left Low‐Beam
Right Low‐Beam
Washer Pump (HID Only)
Headlamp
40
(Domestic Airbag System Right Daytime
51
Non‐HID Only) Ignition Switch Running Lamp
59 (HID Only), Right
Air Conditioning Engine Control
41 Trailer Turn Signal
Compressor Clutch Module Ignition,
(Export Only)
52 Transmission
Low‐Beam Daytime
Control Module Instrument Panel
Running Lamps
Ignition 60 Auxiliary Power
(non‐HID), Left
Outlet
43 Daytime Running Power Moding
Lamps (HID), Left (Immobilizer Air Quality Sensor,
54
Trailer Turn Signal Module, Ignition Inside Rear View
61
(Export Only) Switch) Mirror, Rear
Camera
Left High‐Beam 55 Not Used
46
Headlamp 62 Ignition
56 Windshield Wipers
Right High‐Beam Steering Wheel
47 Right Low‐Beam 64
Headlamp 57 Illumination
(HID Only)
10-44 Vehicle Care
Mini‐Fuses Usage Mini‐Fuses Usage J-Case Usage

Fuses
Front Fog Lamps 79 Spare
65
(HID Only) 17 Blower Motor
80 Spare
Body Control Rear Window
81 Spare 18
69 Module 6, Body Defogger
Control Module 7
J-Case Usage 37 Not Used
70 Emissions 1 Fuses
71 Even Ignition Coils Relays Usage
6 Cooling Fan 2
Engine Control 1 Cooling Fan 2
72 7 Cooling Fan 1
Module 2 Cooling Fan 1
8 Starter
73 Emissions 2 3 Starter
Brake
74 Odd Ignition Coils 9
Vacuum Pump Rear Window
4
Transmission Defogger
Antilock Brake
Output Speed 10
75 System Motor Instrument Panel
Sensor, Brake 5 Auxiliary Power
Vacuum Relay 13 Not Used
Outlet
76 Spare Electric Parking
14 12 Horn
Brake
77 Spare Headlamp Washer
15 Not Used 20
78 Spare (HID Only)
16 Not Used
Vehicle Care 10-45
Relays Usage Relays Usage

Cooling Fan Daytime Running
21
(Series/Parallel) Lamps (Non‐HID),
49
Low‐Beam
Air Conditioning
32 Headlamps (HID)
Compressor Clutch
53 Not Used
Windshield
39
Washer Pump 63 Main Ignition
Right Daytime 66 Windshield Wipers
42 Running Lamp,
67 Powertrain
Trailer Turn Signal
Windshield Wipers Lift the fuse block cover to access
Low‐Beam 68
High Speed the fuses.
(non‐HID), Left
Daytime Running The vehicle may not be equipped
44 Engine Compartment
Lamps (HID), Left with all of the fuses and relays
Trailer Turn Signal Fuse Block (CTS V Coupe shown.
(Export Only) and Sedan) Notice: Spilling liquid on any
Front Fog Lamps This fuse block is on the left side of electrical component on the
45
(HID Only) the engine compartment. vehicle may damage it. Always
High‐Beam keep the covers on any electrical
48 component.
Headlamps
10-46 Vehicle Care
Mini‐Fuses Usage
Body Control
27
Module 4
28 Navigation Motor
29 Not Used
Transmission
30 Control Module
Battery
31 Horn
33 Not Used
Pedestrian
34 Protection System
(Export Only)
Body Control
35
Module 3
Mini‐Fuses Usage Mini‐Fuses Usage
Body Control
11 Not Used Body Control 36
24 Module 2
Module 1
Antilock Braking Headlamp Washer
19 Automatic Forward 38
System (ABS) (HID Only)
25 Lighting System
22 Display (HID Only) 40 Not Used
23 Sunroof Body Control Air Conditioning
26 41
Module 5 Compressor Clutch
Vehicle Care 10-47

Left Daytime 55 Intercooler Pump Body Control
43 Running 69 Module 6, Body
Lamps (HID) Control Module 7
Right Low‐Beam
Left High‐Beam 57 70 Emissions 1
46 (HID Only)
Headlamp
71 Even Ignition Coils
Left Low‐Beam
Right High‐Beam 58
47 (HID Only) 72 Odd Ignition Coils
Headlamp
Right Daytime 73 Emissions 2
Right Daytime
59 Running Lamp
Running Lamp, Engine Control
50 (HID Only) 74
Windshield Module
Washer Pump Instrument Panel
75 Not Used
60 Auxiliary Power
Airbag System
51 Outlet 76 Spare
Ignition Switch
Air Quality Sensor, 77 Spare
Engine Control
Inside Rear View 78 Spare
Module Ignition, 61
Mirror, Rear
52 Transmission 79 Spare
Camera
Control Module
Ignition 62 Ignition 80 Spare
Power Moding Steering Wheel 81 Spare
64
(Immobilizer Illumination
54
Module, Ignition
Front Fog Lamps
Switch) 65
(HID Only)
10-48 Vehicle Care
J-Case Usage Relays Usage Relays Usage

Fuses
1 Cooling Fan 2 Left Daytime
44
6 Cooling Fan 2 Running Lamp (HID)
2 Cooling Fan 1
7 Cooling Fan 1 Front Fog Lamps
3 Starter 45
(HID Only)
8 Starter
Rear Window
4 High‐Beam
9 Not Used Defogger 48
Headlamps
Antilock Brake Instrument Panel
10 Low‐Beam
System Motor 5 Auxiliary Power 49
Headlamps (HID)
Outlet
13 Not Used
53 Not Used
12 Horn
Electric Parking
14 63 Main Ignition
Brake Headlamp Washer
20
(HID Only) 66 Windshield Wipers
15 Not Used
Cooling Fan 67 Powertrain
16 Not Used 21
(Series/Parallel)
Windshield Wipers
17 Blower Motor 68
Air Conditioning High Speed
32
Rear Window Compressor Clutch
18
Defogger Engine Compartment
Windshield
39
37
Magnetic Ride/ Washer Pump Fuse Block (CTS Wagon)
Suspension Control
Right Daytime This fuse block is on the left side of
42
Running Lamp the engine compartment.
Vehicle Care 10-49
Lift the fuse block cover to access

the fuses.
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses and relays
shown.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always 11 Not Used Body Control
24
keep the covers on any electrical Module 1
component. Antilock Braking
19 Automatic Forward
System (ABS)
25 Lighting System
22 Display (HID Only)
23 Not Used Body Control
26
Module 5
10-50 Vehicle Care

Body Control Right Low‐Beam Engine Control
27
Module 4 Headlamp Module Ignition,
40
(Domestic 52 Transmission
28 Navigation Motor
Non‐HID Only) Control Module
29 All-Wheel Drive Ignition
Air Conditioning
41
Transmission Compressor Clutch Power Moding
30 Control Module (Immobilizer
Low‐Beam Daytime 54
Battery Module, Ignition
Running Lamps
Switch)
31 Horn (non‐HID), Left
Left Low‐Beam 43 Daytime Running 55 Not Used
Headlamp Lamps (HID), Left
33 Trailer Turn Signal
(Domestic
(Export Only) Right Low‐Beam
Non‐HID Only) 57
(HID Only)
Pedestrian Left High‐Beam
46
Headlamp Daytime Running
Lamps (non‐HID),
(Export Only) Right High‐Beam 58
47 Left Low‐Beam
Body Control Headlamp
(HID Only)
35
Module 3 Right Daytime
50 Right Daytime
Body Control Running Lamp
Running Lamp
36
Module 2 Airbag System 59 (HID Only), Right
51
Headlamp Washer Ignition Switch Trailer Turn Signal
38 (Export Only)
(HID Only)
Vehicle Care 10-51
Mini‐Fuses Usage Mini‐Fuses Usage J-Case Usage

Fuses
Instrument Panel 74 Odd Ignition Coils
60 Auxiliary Power Antilock Brake
Transmission 10
Outlet System Motor
Output Speed
75
Air Quality Sensor, Sensor, Brake 13 Not Used
Inside Rear View Vacuum Relay
61 Electric Parking
Mirror, Rear 14
76 Spare Brake
Camera
77 Spare 15 Not Used
62 Ignition
78 Spare 16 Not Used
Steering Wheel
64
Illumination 79 Spare 17 Blower Motor
Front Fog Lamps 80 Spare Transmission
65
(HID Only) 18 Control Module
81 Spare
Battery
Body Control
69 Module 6, Body J-Case Usage 37 Trailer (Export Only)
Control Module 7 Fuses
70 Emissions 1 Relays Usage
6 Cooling Fan 2
71 Even Ignition Coils 1 Cooling Fan 2
7 Cooling Fan 1
Engine Control 2 Cooling Fan 1
72 8 Starter
Module 3 Starter
Brake
73 Emissions 2 9
Vacuum Pump Rear Window
4
Defogger
10-52 Vehicle Care
Relays Usage Relays Usage

Instrument Panel Front Fog Lamps
45
5 Auxiliary Power (HID Only)
Outlet
High‐Beam
48
12 Horn Headlamps
Headlamp Washer Daytime Running
20
(HID Only) Lamps (Non‐HID),
49
Low‐Beam
Cooling Fan
21 Headlamps (HID)
(Series/Parallel)
53 Not Used
Air Conditioning
32 Lift the fuse block cover to access
Compressor Clutch 63 Main Ignition
the fuses.
39 Not Used 66 Windshield Wipers
The vehicle may not be equipped
Right Daytime 67 Powertrain with all of the fuses and relays
42 Running Lamp, shown.
Windshield Wipers
Trailer Turn Signal 68
High Speed Notice: Spilling liquid on any
Low‐Beam electrical component on the
(non‐HID), Left Engine Compartment vehicle may damage it. Always
Daytime Running keep the covers on any electrical
44
Lamps (HID), Left Fuse Block component.
Trailer Turn Signal (CTS V Wagon)
(Export Only) The underhood fuse block is located
on the passenger side of the engine
compartment.
Vehicle Care 10-53
Mini‐Fuses Usage
Body Control
27
Module 4
28 Navigation Motor
29 Not Used
Transmission
30 Control Module
Battery
31 Horn
33 Not Used
Pedestrian
(Export Only)
Body Control
35
Module 3
Body Control
11 Not Used Body Control 36
24 Module 2
Module 1
Antilock Braking Headlamp Washer
19 Automatic Forward 38
System (ABS) (HID Only)
25 Lighting System
22 Display (HID Only) 40 Not Used
23 Sunroof Body Control Air Conditioning
26 41
Module 5 Compressor Clutch
10-54 Vehicle Care

Left Daytime Right Low‐Beam 70 Emissions 1
57
43 Running (HID Only)
71 Even Ignition Coils
Lamp (HID)
Left Low‐Beam
58 72 Odd Ignition Coils
Left High‐Beam (HID Only)
46
Headlamp 73 Emissions 2
Right Daytime
Right High‐Beam 59 Running Lamp Engine Control
47 74
Headlamp (HID Only) Module
Right Daytime Instrument Panel 75 Not Used
50
Running Lamp 60 Auxiliary Power
76 Spare
Outlet
Airbag System
51 77 Spare
Ignition Switch Air Quality Sensor,
Inside Rear View 78 Spare
Engine Control 61
Mirror, Rear 79 Spare
Module Ignition,
Camera
52 Transmission 80 Spare
Control Module 62 Ignition
Ignition 81 Spare
Steering Wheel
64
Power Moding Illumination
(Immobilizer J-Case Usage
54 Front Fog Lamps Fuses
Module, Ignition 65
(HID Only)
Switch) 6 Cooling Fan 2
Body Control
55 Intercooler Pump 7 Cooling Fan 1
69 Module 6, Body
56 Windshield Wipers Control Module 7 8 Starter
Vehicle Care 10-55
J-Case Usage Relays Usage Relays Usage

Fuses
Rear Window Low‐Beam
4 49
9 Not Used Defogger Headlamps (HID)
Antilock Brake Instrument Panel 53 Not Used
10
System Motor 5 Auxiliary Power
63 Main Ignition
Outlet
13 Not Used
12 Horn
Electric Parking
14 67 Powertrain
Brake Headlamp Washer
20
(HID Only) Windshield Wipers
15 Not Used 68
High Speed
Cooling Fan
16 Not Used 21
(Series/Parallel)
17 Blower Motor Rear Compartment Fuse
Air Conditioning
Rear Window
32
Compressor Clutch Block (CTS Coupe and
18
Defogger
39 Not Used
Sedan)
Magnetic Ride/ The rear compartment fuse block is
37 Right Daytime
Suspension Control 42 located on top of the battery, on the
Running Lamp
right side of the trunk. The battery
Relays Usage Left Daytime access door must be removed to
44
Running Lamp (HID) access the fuse block.
1 Cooling Fan 2
Front Fog Lamps The vehicle may not be equipped
2 Cooling Fan 1 45 with all of the fuses, relays, and
(HID Only)
3 Starter features shown.
High‐Beam
48
Headlamps
10-56 Vehicle Care
Relays Usage
Sedan Trunk
Release/Coupe
11
Rear Fog
(Export Only)
12 Side Marker Lamps
13 Left Position Lamps
Mini‐Fuses Usage
14 Right Position Lamp
15 Left Position Lamp
16 Door Lock
Console/Auxiliary
17
Power Outlet
Relays Usage Relays Usage Rear Fog/Export

Body Control
Stop Lamps Fuel Door Unlock 18
5 8 Module
(Export Only) (Export Only) (Export Only)
6 Door Lock Right Position Lamp 19 Trunk Release
9
(Export Only)
7 Door Unlock Easy Entry Seats
Console/Auxiliary 20
10 (Coupe Only)
Power Outlet
21 Sunroof
Vehicle Care 10-57
Mini‐Fuses Usage Mini‐Fuses Usage Circuit Usage

Breakers
Right Position Lamp Stop Lamps
22 33
(Export Only) (Export Only) Power Steering
4
Column
Regulated Voltage Theft Deterrent
23
Control Sensor System/Universal Left Rear Window
34 32
Garage Door Switch
Audio System
24 Opener
(Radio) Right Rear Window
37
Memory Seat Switch
25 Airbag System 35
Module
Remote Keyless Rear Compartment Fuse
Passenger Door
Entry/PASS‐Key® 36
26
Theft Deterrent
Module Block (CTS-V Coupe and
Module 38 Not Used Sedan)
Audio Speakers/ 39 Amplifier The rear compartment fuse block is
27
Subwoofer located on top of the battery, on the
right side of the trunk. The battery
OnStar® System Circuit Usage
28 Breakers access door must be removed to
(If Equipped)
access the fuse block.
Engine Control Driver Power Seat
29 1 The vehicle may not be equipped
Module Switch
with all of the fuses, relays, and
30 Canister Vent Passenger Power features shown.
2
Seat Switch
31 Fuel Pump
3 Power Windows
10-58 Vehicle Care
Relays Usage
Sedan Trunk
Release/Coupe
11
Rear Fog
(Export Only)
Mini‐Fuses Usage
16 Door Lock
Console/Auxiliary
17
Power Outlet
Relays Usage Relays Usage Rear Fog/Export

Body Control
Stop Lamps Fuel Door Unlock 18
5 8 Module
(Export Only) (Export Only) (Export Only)
6 Door Lock Right Position Lamp 19 Trunk Release
9
(Export Only)
7 Door Unlock Easy Entry Seats
Console/Auxiliary 20
10 (Coupe Only)
Power Outlet
21 Fuel Pump
Vehicle Care 10-59

Breakers
22 33
(Export Only) (Export Only) Power Steering
4
Column
Regulated Voltage Theft Deterrent
23
Control Sensor System/Universal Left Rear Window
34 32
Garage Door Switch
Audio System
24 Opener
(Radio) Right Rear Window
37
Memory Seat Switch
25 Airbag System 35
Module
Remote Keyless Rear Compartment Fuse
Passenger Door
26
Theft Deterrent
Module Block (CTS Wagon)
Module 38 Not Used This fuse block is on the right side
Audio Speakers/ 39 Amplifier of the vehicle, behind the trim panel
27 in the rear compartment.
Subwoofer
OnStar® System Circuit Usage The vehicle may not be equipped
28 Breakers with all of the fuses, relays, and
(If Equipped)
features shown.
Engine Control Driver Power Seat
29 1
Module Switch
30 Canister Vent Passenger Power
2
Seat Switch
Rear Differential
31 3 Power Windows
Cooling Pump
10-60 Vehicle Care
Relays Usage
11 Not Used
Mini‐Fuses Usage
16 Door Lock
Console/Auxiliary
17
Power Outlet
Rear Fog/Export
Body Control
18
Module
Relays Usage Relays Usage (Export Only)
Stop Lamps Fuel Door Unlock Rear Windshield

5 8 19
(Export Only) (Export Only) Wiper/Washer
6 Door Lock Right Position Lamp Windshield

9 20
(Export Only) Washer Pump
7 Door Unlock
Console/Auxiliary 21 Sunroof
10
Power Outlet
Vehicle Care 10-61

Breakers
22 33
(Export Only) (Export Only) 3 Power Windows
Regulated Voltage Theft Deterrent Power Steering
23 4
Control Sensor System/Universal Column
34
Garage Door
Audio System Left Rear Window
24 Opener 32
(Radio) Switch
Memory Seat
25 Airbag System 35 Right Rear Window
Module 37
Switch
Remote Keyless
Passenger Door
26 Module Rear Compartment Fuse
Theft Deterrent
Module
38
Rear Auxiliary Block (CTS-V Wagon)
Power Outlet
Audio Speakers/ The rear compartment fuse block is
27
Subwoofer 39 Amplifier located on the passenger side of the
OnStar® System vehicle, behind the trim panel in the
28 Circuit Usage rear compartment.
(If Equipped)
Breakers The vehicle may not be equipped
Engine Control
29 Driver Power Seat with all of the fuses and relays
Module 1
Switch shown.
30 Canister Vent
Passenger Power
31 Fuel Pump 2
Seat Switch
10-62 Vehicle Care
Relays Usage
11 Not Used
Mini‐Fuses Usage
16 Door Lock
Console/Auxiliary
17
Power Outlet
Rear Fog/Export
Body Control
18
Module
Relays Usage Relays Usage (Export Only)
Stop Lamps Fuel Door Unlock Rear Windshield

5 8 19
(Export Only) (Export Only) Wiper/Washer
6 Door Lock Right Position Lamp Windshield

9 20
(Export Only) Washer Pump
7 Door Unlock
Console/Auxiliary 21 Fuel Pump
10
Power Outlet
Vehicle Care 10-63

Breakers
Right Position Lamp 30 Canister Vent
22
(Export Only) Driver Power Seat
Rear Differential 1
31 Switch
Regulated Voltage Cooling Pump
23
Control Sensor Passenger Power
Stop Lamps 2
33 Seat Switch
Audio System (Export Only)
24
(Radio) 3 Power Windows
Theft Deterrent
25 Airbag System System/Universal Power Steering
34 4
Garage Door Column
Remote Keyless
Opener
Entry/PASS‐Key® Left Rear Window
26 32
Theft Deterrent Memory Seat Switch
35
Module Module
Right Rear Window
37
Audio Speakers/ Passenger Door Switch
27 36
Subwoofer Module
28 OnStar® System Rear Auxiliary
38
Power Outlet
Engine Control
29
Module 39 Amplifier
10-64 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Under inflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires
same danger as overloaded can cause a crash. Only the
Your new vehicle comes with tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
leading tire manufacturer. If Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount
you ever have questions about maintain the recommended the tires.
your tire warranty and where to pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
obtain service, see your vehicle should be checked when the excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
Warranty booklet for details. For tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such
additional information refer to . Over inflated tires are more as snow, mud, ice, etc.
the tire manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode.
{ WARNING impact — such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
See Tire Pressure for High-Speed
. Poorly maintained and the recommended pressure.
Operation on page 10‑73 for
improperly used tires are . Worn or old tires can cause inflation pressure adjustment for
dangerous. a crash. If the tread is badly high-speed driving.
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them.
cause overheating as a result . Replace any tires that have
of too much flexing. There been damaged by impacts
could be a blowout and a with potholes, curbs, etc.
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑11. (Continued)
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-65
Winter Tires If you choose to use winter tires: You may also notice more
. Use tires of the same brand and road noise with low‐profile
If you expect to drive on snow or ice
covered roads often, you may want tread type on all four wheel performance tires and that they
to get winter tires for your vehicle. positions. tend to wear faster.
All season tires provide good overall . Use only radial ply tires of the Notice: If the vehicle has
performance on most surfaces but same size, load range, and low‐profile tires, they are more
they may not offer the traction you speed rating as the original susceptible to damage from
would like or the same level of equipment tires. road hazards or curb impact
performance as winter tires on snow
or ice covered roads.
Winter tires with the same speed than standard profile tires.
rating as your original equipment Tire and/or wheel assembly
Winter tires, in general, are tires may not be available for H, V, damage can occur when
designed for increased traction on W, and ZR speed rated tires. If you coming into contact with
snow and ice covered roads. With choose winter tires with a lower
winter tires, there may be decreased
road hazards like, potholes,
speed rating, never exceed the tire's
dry road traction, increased road maximum speed capability.
or sharp edged objects,
noise, and shorter tread life. After or when sliding into a curb.
switching to winter tires, be alert for Low-Profile Tires The vehicle warranty does not
changes in vehicle handling and cover this type of damage.
braking. If your vehicle has P235/50R18, Keep tires set to the correct
See your dealer for details
245/45ZR19, P245/45R19, inflation pressure and, when
regarding winter tire availability 255/40ZR19 or 285/35ZR19 size possible avoid contact with
and proper tire selection. Also, see tires, they are classified as curbs, potholes, and other
Buying New Tires on page 10‑81. low‐profile tires. These tires are road hazards.
designed for very responsive
driving on wet or dry pavement.
10-66 Vehicle Care
Summer Performance Tires (B) TPC Spec (Tire

Many General Motors high Performance Criteria
performance models come Specification): Original
factory‐equipped with tires that equipment tires designed to
are optimized for maximum dry GM's specific tire performance
and wet road performance while criteria have a TPC specification
still retaining satisfactory tread code molded onto the sidewall.
life, excellent durability, and low GM's TPC specifications meet
noise levels. In severe winter or exceed all federal safety
climates where snowfall may be guidelines.
significant, these tires may be (C) DOT (Department of
found to provide less traction. Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example Transportation): The
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is Department of Transportation
Tire Sidewall Labeling a combination of letters and (DOT) code indicates that
Useful information about a tire numbers used to define a the tire is in compliance
is molded into its sidewall. The particular tire's width, height, with the U.S. Department of
examples below show a typical aspect ratio, construction type, Transportation Motor Vehicle
passenger vehicle tire and a and service description. See the Safety Standards.
compact spare tire sidewall. “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
Vehicle Care 10-67
(D) Tire Identification Number (G) Maximum Cold Inflation driven at speeds over 105 km/h
(TIN): The letters and numbers Load Limit: Maximum load (65 mph). The compact spare
following the DOT (Department that can be carried and the tire is for emergency use when
of Transportation) code is the maximum pressure needed to a regular road tire has lost air
Tire Identification Number support that load. and gone flat. If the vehicle
(TIN). The TIN shows the has a compact spare tire,
manufacturer and plant code, see Compact Spare Tire on
tire size, and date the tire was page 10‑106 andIf a Tire Goes
manufactured. The TIN is Flat on page 10‑87.
molded onto both sides of the (C) Tire Identification Number
tire, although only one side may (TIN): The letters and numbers
have the date of manufacture. following the DOT (Department
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type of Transportation) code is the
of cord and number of plies in Tire Identification Number
the sidewall and under the tread. (TIN). The TIN shows the
(F) Uniform Tire Quality manufacturer and plant code,
Grading (UTQG): Tire Compact Spare Tire Example tire size, and date the tire was
manufacturers are required manufactured. The TIN is
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
to grade tires based on molded onto both sides of the
of cord and number of plies in
three performance factors: tire, although only one side may
the sidewall and under the tread.
treadwear, traction, and have the date of manufacture.
(B) Temporary Use Only:
temperature resistance. For
The compact spare tire or
more information see Uniform
temporary use tire has a tread
Tire Quality Grading on
life of approximately 5 000 km
page 10‑83.
(3,000 miles) and should not be
10-68 Vehicle Care
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation criteria have a TPC specification vehicle tire engineered to
Load Limit: Maximum load code molded onto the sidewall. standards set by the U.S. Tire
that can be carried and the GM's TPC specifications meet and Rim Association.
maximum pressure needed to or exceed all federal safety (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
support that load. guidelines. number indicates the tire section
(E) Tire Inflation: The width in millimeters from
temporary use tire or compact Tire Designations sidewall to sidewall.
spare tire should be inflated Tire Size (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more number that indicates the tire
The following is an example
information on tire pressure and height‐to‐width measurements.
of a typical passenger vehicle
inflation see Tire Pressure on For example, if the tire size
tire size.
page 10‑72. aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
(F) Tire Size: A combination of item C of the illustration, it would
letters and numbers define a mean that the tire's sidewall is
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, 60 percent as high as it is wide.
construction type, and service (D) Construction Code: A
description. The letter T as the letter code is used to indicate
first character in the tire size the type of ply construction in
means the tire is for temporary (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a the tire. The letter R means
use only. radial ply construction; the
metric tire sizing system. The
(G) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in letter D means diagonal or
Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger bias ply construction; and the
Specification): Original letter B means belted‐bias ply
equipment tires designed to construction.
GM's specific tire performance
Vehicle Care 10-69
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of Accessory Weight: This Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
the wheel in inches. means the combined weight in which the plies are laid at
(F) Service Description: These of optional accessories. alternate angles less than
characters represent the load Some examples of optional 90 degrees to the centerline of
index and speed rating of the accessories are, automatic the tread.
tire. The load index represents transmission, power steering, Cold Tire Pressure: The
the load carrying capacity a tire power brakes, power windows, amount of air pressure in a tire,
is certified to carry. The speed power seats, and air measured in kPa (kilopascal)
rating is the maximum speed a conditioning. or psi (pounds per square inch)
tire is certified to carry a load. Aspect Ratio: The relationship before a tire has built up heat
of a tire's height to its width. from driving. See Tire Pressure
Tire Terminology and Belt: A rubber coated layer of on page 10‑72.
Definitions cords that is located between Curb Weight: The weight of
Air Pressure: The amount the plies and the tread. Cords a motor vehicle with standard
of air inside the tire pressing may be made from steel or other and optional equipment
outward on each square inch reinforcing materials. including the maximum capacity
of the tire. Air pressure is Bead: The tire bead contains of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
expressed in psi (pounds per steel wires wrapped by steel without passengers and cargo.
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
10-70 Vehicle Care
DOT Markings: A code molded Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle
into the sidewall of a tire The side of an asymmetrical tire, Weight: The sum of curb
signifying that the tire is in that must always face outward weight, accessory weight,
compliance with the U.S. when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and
Department of Transportation Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production options weight.
(DOT) motor vehicle safety unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight: The
standards. The DOT code number of occupants a vehicle
includes the Tire Identification Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and is designed to seat multiplied by
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
designator which can also some multipurpose passenger
vehicles. Load Limits on page 9‑11.
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and Load Index: An assigned Occupant Distribution :
date of production. number ranging from 1 to 279 Designated seating positions.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight that corresponds to the load Outward Facing Sidewall: The
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits carrying capacity of a tire. side of an asymmetrical tire that
on page 9‑11. Maximum Inflation Pressure: has a particular side that faces
The maximum air pressure to outward when mounted on a
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight vehicle. The side of the tire
Rating for the front axle. See which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is that contains a whitewall,
Vehicle Load Limits on bears white lettering, or bears
page 9‑11. molded onto the sidewall.
manufacturer, brand, and/or
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is
Rating for the rear axle. See load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same
Vehicle Load Limits on maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall
page 9‑11. pressure for that tire. of the tire.
Vehicle Care 10-71
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A Sidewall: The portion of a tire UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
tire used on passenger cars between the tread and the bead. Grading Standards): A tire
and some light duty trucks and Speed Rating: An information system that provides
multipurpose vehicles. alphanumeric code assigned consumers with ratings for a
Recommended Inflation to a tire indicating the maximum tire's traction, temperature,
Pressure: Vehicle speed at which a tire can and treadwear. Ratings
manufacturer's recommended operate. are determined by tire
tire inflation pressure as shown manufacturers using
Traction: The friction between government testing procedures.
on the tire placard. See Tire the tire and the road surface.
Pressure on page 10‑72 The ratings are molded into the
The amount of grip provided. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
andVehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑11. Tread: The portion of a tire Tire Quality Grading on
that comes into contact with page 10‑83.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic the road.
tire in which the ply cords that Vehicle Capacity Weight:
extend to the beads are laid at Treadwear Indicators: Narrow The number of designated
90 degrees to the centerline of bands, sometimes called wear seating positions multiplied by
the tread. bars, that show across the tread 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
of a tire when only 1.6 mm cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Rim: A metal support for a tire (1/16 in) of tread remains. See Limits on page 9‑11.
and upon which the tire beads When It Is Time for New Tires
are seated. Vehicle Maximum Load on the
on page 10‑80. Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
10-72 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Placard: A label . Poor handling. For additional information

permanently attached to a . Reduced fuel economy. regarding how much weight
vehicle showing the vehicle the vehicle can carry, and an
capacity weight and the Overinflated tires, or tires example of the Tire and Loading
original equipment tire size that have too much air, can Information label, see Vehicle
and recommended inflation result in: Load Limits on page 9‑11. How
pressure. See “Tire and Loading . Unusual wear. you load the vehicle affects
Information Label” under Vehicle . Poor handling. vehicle handling and ride
Load Limits on page 9‑11. comfort. Never load the vehicle
. Rough ride. with more weight than it was
Tire Pressure . Needless damage from designed to carry.
Tires need the correct amount road hazards. When to Check
of air pressure to operate A vehicle-specific Tire and Check the tires once a month or
effectively. Loading Information label is more. Do not forget to check the
Notice: Neither tire attached to the vehicle. This compact spare tire, if the vehicle
underinflation or overinflation label shows the vehicle's has one. The compact spare
are good. Underinflated tires, original equipment tires and the should be at 420 kPa (60 psi).
or tires that do not have correct inflation pressures for For additional information
enough air, can result in: the tires when they are cold. regarding the compact spare
The recommended cold tire tire, see Compact Spare Tire on
. Tire overloading and inflation pressure, shown on the
over-heating which could page 10‑106.
label, is the minimum amount of
lead to a blowout. air pressure needed to support
. Premature or the vehicle's maximum load
irregular wear. carrying capacity.
Vehicle Care 10-73
How to Check If you overfill the tire, release

air by pushing on the metal stem WARNING (Continued)
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure. in the center of the tire valve. inflation pressure adjustment for
You cannot tell if the tires are Re‐check the tire pressure with high speed operation. When
properly inflated simply by the tire gauge. speed limits and road conditions
looking at them. Radial tires may Be sure to put the valve caps are such that a vehicle can be
look properly inflated even when back on the valve stems. They driven at high speeds, make sure
they are underinflated. Check help prevent leaks by keeping the tires are rated for high speed
the tire's inflation pressure when out dirt and moisture. operation, in excellent condition,
the tires are cold. Cold means and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the
the vehicle has been sitting for Tire Pressure for vehicle load.
at least three hours or driven no High-Speed Operation
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
If your vehicle has 255/40ZR19 or
Remove the valve cap from the { WARNING 285/35ZR19 size tires, they will
tire valve stem. Press the tire require inflation pressure adjustment
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
gauge firmly onto the valve to when driving your vehicle at speeds
(100 mph) or higher, puts an
get a pressure measurement. of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.
additional strain on tires.
If the cold tire inflation pressure Sustained high-speed driving
Set the cold inflation pressure
matches the recommended to the maximum inflation pressure
causes excessive heat build up shown on the tire sidewall,
pressure on the Tire and and can cause sudden tire failure.
Loading Information label, no or 300 kPa (44 psi), whichever is
You could have a crash and you lower. See the example following.
further adjustment is necessary. or others could be killed. Some When you end this high-speed
If the inflation pressure is low, high-speed rated tires require driving, return the tires to the cold
add air until you reach the (Continued) tire inflation pressure shown on the
recommended amount. Tire and Loading Information label.
10-74 Vehicle Care
See Vehicle Load Limits on Each tire, including the spare lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
page 9‑11 and Tire Pressure on (if provided), should be checked also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
page 10‑72. monthly when cold and inflated to tread life, and may affect the
Example: the inflation pressure recommended vehicle's handling and stopping
by the vehicle manufacturer on ability.
You will find the maximum load and the vehicle placard or tire inflation
inflation pressure molded on the Please note that the TPMS is
pressure label. (If your vehicle has not a substitute for proper tire
tire's sidewall, in small letters, tires of a different size than the size
near the rim flange. It will read maintenance, and it is the driver's
indicated on the vehicle placard or responsibility to maintain correct tire
something like this: Maximum load tire inflation pressure label, you
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) pressure, even if under‐inflation
should determine the proper tire has not reached the level to trigger
Max. Press. inflation pressure for those tires.) illumination of the TPMS low tire
For this example, you would set the As an added safety feature, your pressure telltale.
inflation pressure for high‐speed vehicle has been equipped with a
driving at 44 psi (300 kPa). Your vehicle has also been
tire pressure monitoring system equipped with a TPMS malfunction
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire indicator to indicate when the
Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or system is not operating properly.
System more of your tires is significantly The TPMS malfunction indicator is
under‐inflated. combined with the low tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor Accordingly, when the low tire telltale. When the system detects a
technology to check tire pressure pressure telltale illuminates, you malfunction, the telltale will flash for
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor should stop and check your tires as approximately one minute and then
the air pressure in your tires and soon as possible, and inflate them remain continuously illuminated.
transmit tire pressure readings to a to the proper pressure. Driving on This sequence will continue upon
receiver located in the vehicle. a significantly under‐inflated tire subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
causes the tire to overheat and can long as the malfunction exists.
Vehicle Care 10-75
When the malfunction indicator is Federal Communications

illuminated, the system may not be Commission (FCC) and
able to detect or signal low tire Industry Canada
pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety See Radio Frequency Statement on
of reasons, including the installation page 13‑18 for information
of replacement or alternate tires or regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission When a low tire pressure condition
wheels on the vehicle that prevent is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the TPMS from functioning properly. (FCC) rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310. the low tire pressure warning light
Always check the TPMS malfunction located on the instrument panel
telltale after replacing one or more cluster. If the warning light comes
tires or wheels on your vehicle to Tire Pressure Monitor on, stop as soon as possible and
ensure that the replacement or Operation inflate the tires to the recommended
alternate tires and wheels allow pressure shown on the tire loading
the TPMS to continue to function This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). information label. See Vehicle Load
properly. Limits on page 9‑11.
The TPMS is designed to warn the
See Tire Pressure Monitor driver when a low tire pressure Using the Driver Information Center
Operation on page 10‑75 for condition exists. TPMS sensors (DIC), the driver can also check tire
additional information. are mounted onto each tire and pressure levels using the DIC. For
wheel assembly, excluding the additional information and details
spare tire and wheel assembly, about the DIC operation and
if the vehicle has one. The TPMS displays see Driver Information
sensors monitor the air pressure in Center (DIC) on page 5‑27 and Tire
the vehicle's tires and transmits the Messages on page 5‑44.
tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
10-76 Vehicle Care
A DIC warning message to check Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you TPMS Malfunction Light and
the pressure in a specific tire is also about a low tire pressure condition Message
shown on the DIC display screen. but it does not replace normal tire
The low tire pressure warning light maintenance. See Tire Inspection The TPMS will not function properly
and the DIC warning message come on page 10‑78, Tire Rotation on if one or more of the TPMS sensors
at each ignition cycle until the tires page 10‑79 and Tires on are missing or inoperable. When the
are inflated to the correct inflation page 10‑64. system detects a malfunction, the
pressure. low tire warning light flashes for
Notice: Tire sealant materials are about one minute and then stays
The low tire pressure warning light not all the same. A non-approved on for the remainder of the ignition
may come on in cool weather when tire sealant could damage the Tire cycle. A DIC warning message is
the vehicle is first started, and then Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) also displayed. The malfunction light
turn off as you start to drive. This sensors. TPMS sensor damage and DIC warning message come
could be an early indicator that the caused by using an incorrect tire on at each ignition cycle until the
air pressure in the tire(s) are getting sealant is not covered by the problem is corrected. Some of
low and need to be inflated to the vehicle warranty. Always use the conditions that can cause the
proper pressure. only the GM-approved tire sealant malfunction light and DIC message
The Tire and Loading Information available through your dealer or to come on are:
label, attached to your vehicle, included in the vehicle. . One of the road tires has been
shows the size of your vehicle's Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits replaced with the spare tire,
original equipment tires and the use a GM approved liquid tire if the vehicle has one. The
correct inflation pressure for the sealant. Using non-approved tire spare tire does not have a
tires when they are cold. See sealants could damage the TPMS TPMS sensor. The malfunction
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑11, sensors. See Tire Sealant and light and the DIC message
for an example of the Tire and Compressor Kit on page 10‑89 for should go off once you re‐install
Loading Information label and its information regarding the inflator kit
location on your vehicle. Also see materials and instructions.
Tire Pressure on page 10‑72.
Vehicle Care 10-77
the road tire containing the

. Replacement tires or wheels do TPMS Sensor Matching
TPMS sensor and the sensor not match your vehicle's original Process
matching process is performed equipment tires or wheels. Tires
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor and wheels other than those Each TPMS sensor has a unique
Matching Process” later in this recommended for your vehicle identification code. The identification
section. could prevent the TPMS from code needs to be matched to a new
functioning properly. See Buying tire/wheel position after rotating the
. The TPMS sensor matching New Tires on page 10‑81. vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
process was not done or not more of the TPMS sensors. Also,
completed successfully after
. Operating electronic devices or the TPMS sensor matching process
rotating the vehicle's tires. The being near facilities using radio should be performed after replacing
malfunction light and the DIC wave frequencies similar to the a spare tire with a road tire
message should go off after TPMS could cause the TPMS containing the TPMS sensor in
successfully completing the sensors to malfunction. order for the malfunction light and
sensor matching process. See If the TPMS is not functioning it the DIC message to go off at the
“TPMS Sensor Matching cannot detect or signal a low tire next ignition cycle. The sensors are
Process” later in this section. condition. See your dealer for matched to the tire/wheel positions,
. One or more TPMS sensors service if the TPMS malfunction using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
are missing or damaged. The light and DIC message comes on following order: driver side front tire,
malfunction light and the DIC and stays on. passenger side front tire, passenger
message should go off when the side rear tire, and driver side rear.
TPMS sensors are installed and See your dealer for service.
the sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
10-78 Vehicle Care
There are two minutes to match A horn chirp confirms that the Tire Inspection
the first tire/wheel position, and sensor identification code has
five minutes overall to match been matched to this tire and We recommend that you
all four tire/wheel positions. If it wheel position. regularly inspect the vehicle's
takes longer, the matching process 6. Proceed to the passenger tires, including the spare tire,
stops and must be restarted. side front tire, and repeat the if the vehicle has one, for signs
The TPMS matching process is procedure in Step 5. of wear or damage at least
outlined below: once a month.
7. Proceed to the passenger
1. Set the parking brake. side rear tire, and repeat the Always remove the tires if any
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with procedure in Step 5. of the following statements
the engine off. 8. Proceed to the driver side rear are true:
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry tire, and repeat the procedure . You can see the indicators at
(RKE) transmitter's lock and in Step 5. After hearing the three or more places around
unlock buttons at the same time confirming horn chirp, for the
driver side rear tire, the horn
the tire.
for approximately five seconds.
The horn sounds twice to signal sounds two more times to signal . You can see cord or fabric
the receiver is in relearn mode the tire learning mode is no showing through the tire's
and Tire Learning Active longer active. rubber.
message displays on the DIC 9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. . The tread or sidewall is
screen. 10. Set all four tires to the cracked, cut, or snagged
4. Start with the driver side recommended air pressure deep enough to show cord or
front tire. level as indicated on the tire fabric.
5. Place the relearn tool against and loading information label.
. The tire has a bump, bulge,
the tire sidewall, near the valve
or split.
stem. Then press the button to
activate the TPMS sensor.
Vehicle Care 10-79

. The tire has a puncture, cut, Tire rotation is recommended if
or other damage that cannot the vehicle has the same size
be repaired well because of tires on all four wheel positions.
the size or location of the These tires should be rotated
damage. every 12 000 km (7,500 miles).
See Scheduled Maintenance on
Tire Rotation page 11‑2.
Tire rotation is not The purpose of a regular tire
recommended if the vehicle has rotation is to achieve a uniform
P235/50R18, 245/45ZR19 or wear for all tires on the vehicle.
255/40R19 size tires on the This will ensure that the vehicle
front wheels and P265/45R18, continues to perform most like it Use the rotation pattern shown
275/40ZR19 or 285/35R19 size did when the tires were new. here when rotating tires of the
tires on the rear wheels. same size installed on all
Any time you notice unusual
Different tire sizes should not wear, rotate the tires as soon four wheel positions.
be rotated front to rear. Each as possible and check wheel The compact spare tire, if the
tire and wheel should only be alignment. Also check for vehicle has one, is not included
used in its original front or rear damaged tires or wheels. See in the tire rotation.
position. When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 10‑80 and Wheel
Replacement on page 10‑85.
10-80 Vehicle Care
After the tires have been When It Is Time for New

rotated, adjust the front and rear { WARNING Tires
inflation pressures as shown on Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
the Tire and Loading Information Various factors, such as
parts to which it is fastened, can maintenance, temperatures,
label. See Tire Pressure on make wheel nuts become loose driving speeds, vehicle loading,
page 10‑72 and Vehicle Load after time. The wheel could come and road conditions influence when
Limits on page 9‑11. off and cause an accident. When you need new tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor changing a wheel, remove any
System. See Tire Pressure rust or dirt from places where the
Monitor Operation on wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
page 10‑75.
paper towel to do this; but be sure
Make certain that all wheel nuts to use a scraper or wire brush
are properly tightened. See later, if needed, to get all the rust
“Wheel Nut Torque” under or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
Capacities and Specifications on on page 10‑87.
page 12‑2.
Lightly coat the center of the
wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change or
One way to tell when it is time for
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
new tires is to check the treadwear
or rust build-up. Do not get indicators, which appear when the
grease on the flat wheel tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or
mounting surface or on the less of tread remaining. See Tire
wheel nuts or bolts.
Vehicle Care 10-81
Inspection on page 10‑79 and Parking for an extended period GM's exclusive TPC Spec system
Tire Rotation on page 10‑79 for can cause flat spots on the tires considers over a dozen critical
additional information. that may result in vibrations while specifications that impact the
The rubber in tires age over driving. When storing a vehicle for overall performance of your
time. This is also true for the at least a month, remove the tires vehicle, including brake system
spare tire, if the vehicle has one, or raise the vehicle to reduce the performance, ride and handling,
even if it is not being used. Multiple weight from the tires. traction control, and tire pressure
conditions affect how fast this monitoring performance. GM's TPC
aging takes place, including Buying New Tires Spec number is molded onto the
temperatures, loading conditions, tire's sidewall near the tire size.
GM has developed and matched If the tires have an all‐season tread
and inflation pressure maintenance. specific tires for your vehicle. The
Tires will typically need to be design, the TPC Spec number will
original equipment tires installed be followed by an MS for mud
replaced due to wear before they on your vehicle, when it was new,
may need to be replaced due to and snow. See Tire Sidewall
were designed to meet General Labeling on page 10‑66, for
age. Consult the tire manufacturer Motors Tire Performance Criteria
for more information on when tires additional information.
Specification (TPC Spec) system
should be replaced. rating. If you need replacement GM recommends replacing tires in
tires, GM strongly recommends that sets of four. This is because uniform
Vehicle Storage tread depth on all tires will help
you get tires with the same TPC
Tires age when stored normally Spec rating. This way, your vehicle keep your vehicle performing most
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park will continue to have tires that like it did when the tires were new.
a vehicle that will be stored for at are designed to give the same
least a month in a cool, dry, clean performance and vehicle safety,
area away from direct sunlight to during normal use, as the original
slow aging. This area should be tires.
free of grease, gasoline, or other
substances that can deteriorate
rubber.
10-82 Vehicle Care
Replacing less than a full set of tires

can affect the braking and handling { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
performance of your vehicle. See
Tire Inspection on page 10‑78 and Mixing tires could cause you to A tire and/or wheel could fail
Tire Rotation on page 10‑79. lose control while driving. If you suddenly and cause a crash.
mix tires of different sizes (other Use only radial-ply tires with
than those originally installed on
{ WARNING your vehicle), brands, or types
the wheels on the vehicle.
Tires could explode during (radial and bias-belted tires), the

vehicle may not handle properly, If you must replace your vehicle's
improper service. Attempting to tires with those that do not have
mount or dismount a tire could and you could have a crash.
a TPC Spec number, make sure
cause injury or death. Only your Using tires of different sizes
they are the same size, load range,
dealer or authorized tire service (other than those originally speed rating, and construction type
center should mount or dismount installed on your vehicle), brands (radial and bias‐belted tires) as your
the tires. or types, may also cause damage vehicle's original tires.
to your vehicle. Be sure to use
the correct size, brand, and type Vehicles that have a tire pressure
Winter tires with the same speed tires on all four wheels. monitoring system could give an
rating as your original equipment inaccurate low‐pressure warning
tires may not be available for H, V, if non‐TPC Spec rated tires are
W and ZR speed rated tires. If you installed on it. Non‐TPC Spec
choose snow tires with a lower
speed rating, never exceed the tire's
{ WARNING rated tires may give a low‐pressure
warning that is higher or lower than
maximum speed capability. Using bias-ply tires on the the proper warning level you would
vehicle may cause the wheel get with TPC Spec rated tires. See
rim flanges to develop cracks Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
after many miles of driving. page 10‑75.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-83
Your vehicle's original equipment Uniform Tire Quality (UTQG) system does not apply
tires are listed on the Tire and to deep tread, winter-type snow
Loading Information label. See
Grading
tires, space-saver, or temporary
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑11, Quality grades can be found use spare tires, tires with
for more information about the Tire where applicable on the tire nominal rim diameters of
and Loading Information label and sidewall between tread shoulder
its location on your vehicle. 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
and maximum section width. or to some limited-production
For example: tires.
Different Size Tires and
Wheels Treadwear 200 Traction AA While the tires available on
Temperature A General Motors passenger cars
If you add wheels or tires that are
a different size than your original The following information relates and light trucks may vary with
equipment wheels and tires, this to the system developed by the respect to these grades, they
could affect the way your vehicle United States National Highway must also conform to federal
performs, including its braking, Traffic Safety Administration safety requirements and
ride and handling characteristics, (NHTSA), which grades tires additional General Motors Tire
stability, and resistance to rollover. by treadwear, traction, and Performance Criteria (TPC)
Additionally, if your vehicle has standards.
temperature performance. This
electronic systems such as anti‐lock
brakes, traction control, and applies only to vehicles sold in All Passenger Car Tires Must
electronic stability control, the the United States. The grades Conform to Federal Safety
performance of these systems can are molded on the sidewalls Requirements In Addition To
be affected. of most passenger car tires. The These Grades.
See Buying New Tires on
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
page 10‑81 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑3 for
10-84 Vehicle Care
Treadwear Traction – AA, A, B, C Temperature – A, B, C

The treadwear grade is a The traction grades, from The temperature grades
comparative rating based on the highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, are A (the highest), B, and C,
wear rate of the tire when tested and C. Those grades represent representing the tire's resistance
under controlled conditions on the tire's ability to stop on wet to the generation of heat and
a specified government test pavement as measured under its ability to dissipate heat
course. For example, a tire controlled conditions on when tested under controlled
graded 150 would wear one and specified government test conditions on a specified indoor
a half (1½) times as well on the surfaces of asphalt and laboratory test wheel. Sustained
government course as a tire concrete. A tire marked C may high temperature can cause
graded 100. The relative have poor traction performance. the material of the tire to
performance of tires depends Warning: The traction grade degenerate and reduce tire life,
upon the actual conditions of assigned to this tire is based on and excessive temperature can
their use, however, and may straight-ahead braking traction lead to sudden tire failure.
depart significantly from the tests, and does not include
norm due to variations in acceleration, cornering,
driving habits, service practices hydroplaning, or peak traction
and differences in road characteristics.
characteristics and climate.
Vehicle Care 10-85
The grade C corresponds to a Wheel Alignment and Tire Wheel Replacement

level of performance which all Balance Replace any wheel that is bent,
passenger car tires must meet cracked, or badly rusted or
under the Federal Motor Safety The tires and wheels on your
vehicle were aligned and balanced corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
Standard No. 109. Grades B loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
carefully at the factory to give you
and A represent higher levels of the longest tire life and best overall wheel nuts should be replaced.
performance on the laboratory performance. Adjustments to wheel If the wheel leaks air, replace it,
test wheel than the minimum alignment and tire balancing will not except some aluminum wheels,
required by law. Warning: The be necessary on a regular basis. which can sometimes be repaired.
temperature grade for this tire However, if you notice unusual See your dealer if any of these
is established for a tire that tire wear or your vehicle pulling to conditions exist.
is properly inflated and not one side or the other, the alignment Your dealer will know the kind of
overloaded. Excessive speed, might need to be checked. If you wheel you need.
underinflation, or excessive notice your vehicle vibrating when
Each new wheel should have the
loading, either separately or in driving on a smooth road, the tires
same load-carrying capacity,
and wheels might need to be
combination, can cause heat rebalanced. See your dealer for
diameter, width, offset, and be
buildup and possible tire failure. mounted the same way as the one it
proper diagnosis.
replaces.
CTS-V models should only use
adhesive wheel weights to balance
the tires and wheels.
10-86 Vehicle Care
If you need to replace any of the Notice: The wrong wheel can Tire Chains
wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, also cause problems with
or Tire Pressure Monitor System bearing life, brake cooling,
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only speedometer or odometer { WARNING
with new GM original equipment calibration, headlamp aim, Do not use tire chains. There is
parts. This way, you will be sure to bumper height, vehicle ground
not enough clearance. Tire chains
have the right wheel, wheel bolts, clearance, and tire or tire chain
used on a vehicle without the
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for clearance to the body and
the vehicle. chassis. proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
See If a Tire Goes Flat on suspension, or other vehicle
{ WARNING page 10‑87 for more information. parts. The area damaged by the
Using the wrong replacement Used Replacement Wheels tire chains could cause you to
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel lose control of the vehicle and
you or others may be injured
nuts on the vehicle can be { WARNING in a crash. Use another type
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of the Replacing a wheel with a used of traction device only if its
vehicle, make the tires lose air one is dangerous. How it has manufacturer recommends it for
and make you lose control. You been used or how far it has been use on the vehicle and tire size
could have a collision in which driven may be unknown. It could combination and road conditions.
you or others could be injured. fail suddenly and cause a crash. (Continued)
Always use the correct wheel, When replacing wheels, use a
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for new GM original equipment
replacement. wheel.
Vehicle Care 10-87
WARNING (Continued)
If a Tire Goes Flat accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way
It is unusual for a tire to blowout you want the vehicle to go. It may
Follow that manufacturer's while you are driving, especially if be very bumpy and noisy, but you
instructions. To help avoid you maintain your vehicle's tires can still steer. Gently brake to a
damage to the vehicle, drive properly. If air goes out of a tire, stop, well off the road, if possible.
slowly, re‐adjust or remove the it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a
device if it is contacting the
blowout, here are a few tips about { WARNING
vehicle, and do not spin the
what to expect and what to do: Driving on a flat tire will cause
wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on If a front tire fails, the flat tire permanent damage to the tire.
the rear tires. creates a drag that pulls the vehicle Re-inflating a tire after it has
toward that side. Take your foot been driven on while severely
off the accelerator pedal and grip underinflated or flat may cause
the steering wheel firmly. Steer to a blowout and a serious crash.
maintain lane position, and then Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
gently brake to a stop, well off the that has been driven on while
road, if possible. severely underinflated or flat.
A rear blowout, particularly on a Have your dealer or an authorized
curve, acts much like a skid and tire service center repair or
may require the same correction replace the flat tire as soon as
you would use in a skid. In any rear possible.
blowout remove your foot from the
10-88 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING { WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Lifting a vehicle and getting Changing a tire can be To be certain the vehicle will not
under it to do maintenance or dangerous. The vehicle can move, put blocks at the front and
repairs is dangerous without the slip off the jack and roll over rear of the tire farthest away from
appropriate safety equipment and or fall on you or other people. the one being changed. That
training. If a jack is provided with You and they could be badly would be the tire on the other
the vehicle, it is designed only for injured or even killed. Find a side, at the opposite end of the
changing a flat tire. If it is used for level place to change the tire. vehicle.
anything else, you or others could To help prevent the vehicle from
be badly injured or killed if the moving: This vehicle may come with a jack
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack 1. Set the parking brake firmly. and spare tire or a tire sealant and
is provided with the vehicle, only compressor kit. To use the jacking
use it for changing a flat tire. 2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in equipment to change a spare
P (Park), or shift a manual tire safely, follow the instructions
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire transmission to 1 (First) or below. Then see Tire Changing on
and wheel damage by driving slowly R (Reverse). page 10‑98. To use the tire sealant
to a level place, well off the road, and compressor kit, see Tire
if possible. Turn on the hazard 3. Turn off the engine and do Sealant and Compressor Kit on
warning flashers. See Hazard not restart while the vehicle page 10‑89.
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4. is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-89
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), Tire Sealant and WARNING (Continued)
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
Compressor Kit
of wheel blocks (A). and compressor kit instructions
{ WARNING and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed exceed the recommended
area with poor ventilation is pressure.
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. { WARNING
It can cause unconsciousness Storing the tire sealant and
and even death. Never run the compressor kit or other
engine in an enclosed area that equipment in the passenger
has no fresh air ventilation. For compartment of the vehicle could
more information, see Engine cause injury. In a sudden stop or
A. Wheel Block Exhaust on page 9‑25. collision, loose equipment could
B. Flat Tire strike someone. Store the tire
The following information explains sealant and compressor kit in its
how to repair or change a tire. { WARNING original location.
Overinflating a tire could cause If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
the tire to rupture and you or compressor kit, there may not be a
others could be injured. Be sure spare tire, tire changing equipment,
to read and follow the tire sealant and on some vehicles there may not
(Continued) be a place to store a tire.
10-90 Vehicle Care
The tire sealant and compressor The kit includes: A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air
can be used to temporarily seal or Air Only)
punctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in the B. On/Off Button
tread area of the tire. It can also be
used to inflate an under inflated tire. C. Pressure Gauge
If the tire has been separated from D. Pressure Deflation Button
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, E. Tire Sealant Canister
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
sealant and compressor kit to be G. Air Only Hose (Black)
effective. See Roadside Service
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or H. Power Plug
Roadside Service (Mexico) on Tire Sealant
page 13‑9.
Read and follow the safe handling
Read and follow all of the tire instructions on the label adhered to
sealant and compressor kit the sealant canister.
instructions.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
Vehicle Care 10-91
There is only enough sealant to seal heated environment for five minutes.
one tire. After usage, the sealant This will help to inflate the tire
canister and sealant/air hose faster.
assembly must be replaced. See If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
“Removal and Installation of the and wheel damage by driving slowly
Sealant Canister” following. to a level place. Turn on the hazard
Using the Tire Sealant warning flashers. See Hazard
and Compressor Kit to Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
Temporarily Seal and See If a Tire Goes Flat on
Inflate a Punctured Tire page 10‑87 for other important
safety warnings.
Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage. Do not remove any objects that
have penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit
(Wagon) on page 10‑96 or
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (Coupe) on
page 10‑97 or Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit
(Sedan) on page 10‑97.
When using the tire sealant 2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)
and compressor kit during cold and the power plug (H).
temperatures, warm the kit in a
10-92 Vehicle Care
3. Place the kit on the ground. 8. Turn the selector switch (A) The pressure gauge (C) may
Make sure the tire valve stem is counterclockwise to the read higher than the actual tire
positioned close to the ground Sealant + Air position. pressure while the compressor
so the hose will reach it. 9. Press the on/off (B) button is on. Turn the compressor off
to turn the tire sealant and to get an accurate pressure
4. Remove the valve stem cap reading. The compressor
from the flat tire by turning it compressor kit on.
may be turned on/off until the
counterclockwise. The compressor will inject correct pressure is reached.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) sealant and air into the tire.
Notice: If the recommended
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it The pressure gauge (C) will pressure cannot be reached after
clockwise until it is tight. initially show a high pressure approximately 25 minutes, the
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the while the compressor pushes the vehicle should not be driven
accessory power outlet in the sealant into the tire. Once the farther. The tire is too severely
vehicle. Unplug all items from sealant is completely dispersed damaged and the tire sealant and
other accessory power outlets. into the tire, the pressure will compressor kit cannot inflate the
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9. quickly drop and start to rise tire. Remove the power plug from
again as the tire inflates with the accessory power outlet and
If the vehicle has an accessory air only. unscrew the inflating hose from
power outlet, do not use the the tire valve. See Roadside
cigarette lighter. 10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation Service (U.S. and Canada) on
If the vehicle only has a cigarette pressure using the pressure page 13‑7 or Roadside Service
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. gauge (C). The recommended (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Do not pinch the power plug inflation pressure can be 11. Press the on/off button (B) to
cord in the door or window. found on the Tire and Loading turn the tire sealant and
Information label. See Tire compressor kit off.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle Pressure on page 10‑72.
must be running while using the
air compressor.
Vehicle Care 10-93
The tire is not sealed and 19. Stop at a safe location and
will continue to leak air until check the tire pressure. Refer
the vehicle is driven and to Steps 1 through 11 under
the sealant is distributed in “Using the Tire Sealant and
the tire, therefore, Steps 12 Compressor Kit without
through 18 must be done Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
immediately after Step 11. 16. If the flat tire was able to Punctured).”
Be careful while handling the inflate to the recommended If the tire pressure has fallen
tire sealant and compressor kit inflation pressure, remove the more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
as it could be warm after maximum speed label from the below the recommended
usage. sealant canister (E) and place inflation pressure, stop driving
it in a highly visible location. Do the vehicle. The tire is too
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
not exceed the speed on this severely damaged and the tire
the accessory power outlet in
label until the damaged tire is sealant cannot seal the tire.
the vehicle.
repaired or replaced. See Roadside Service (U.S.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
17. Return the equipment to its
counterclockwise to remove it Roadside Service (Mexico) on
original storage location in the
from the tire valve stem. page 13‑9.
vehicle.
14. Replace the tire valve If the tire pressure has not
18. Immediately drive the vehicle
stem cap. dropped more than 68 kPa
8 km (5 miles) to distribute the
15. Replace the sealant/air sealant in the tire. (10 psi) from the recommended
hose (F), and the power inflation pressure, inflate the
plug (H) back in their original tire to the recommended
location. inflation pressure.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, and vehicle.
10-94 Vehicle Care
21. Dispose of the used sealant If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
canister (E) and sealant/air and wheel damage by driving slowly
hose (F) assembly at a local to a level place. Turn on the hazard
dealer or in accordance with warning flashers. See Hazard
local state codes and practices. Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
22. Replace it with a new canister See If a Tire Goes Flat on
available from your dealer. page 10‑87 for other important
23. After temporarily sealing the safety warnings.
tire using the tire sealant and 1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit, take the compressor kit from its storage
vehicle to an authorized dealer location. See Storing the Tire
within 161 km (100 miles) of Sealant and Compressor Kit
driving to have the tire repaired (Wagon) on page 10‑96 or
or replaced. Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (Coupe) on
Using the Tire Sealant and page 10‑97 or Storing the Tire
Compressor Kit without Sealant and Compressor Kit
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Sedan) on page 10‑97.
(Not Punctured) 2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)
To use the air compressor to inflate and the power plug (H).
a tire with air only and not sealant:
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
Vehicle Care 10-95
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap 8. Turn the selector switch (A) If you inflate the tire higher
from the flat tire by turning it clockwise to the Air Only than the recommended
counterclockwise. position. pressure you can adjust the
5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto 9. Press the on/off (B) button to excess pressure by pressing
the tire valve stem by turning it turn the compressor on. the pressure deflation
clockwise until it is tight. button (D) until the proper
The compressor will inflate the pressure reading is reached.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the tire with air only. This option is only functional
accessory power outlet in the 10. Inflate the tire to the when using the air only
vehicle. Unplug all items from recommended inflation hose (G).
other accessory power outlets. pressure using the pressure
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9. 11. Press the on/off button (B) to
gauge (C). The recommended turn the tire sealant and
If the vehicle has an accessory inflation pressure can be compressor kit off.
power outlet, do not use the found on the Tire and Loading
cigarette lighter. Information label. See Tire Be careful while handling the
Pressure on page 10‑72. tire sealant and compressor
If the vehicle only has a cigarette kit as it could be warm after
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. The pressure gauge (C) may usage.
Do not pinch the power plug read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
cord in the door or window. the accessory power outlet in
is on. Turn the compressor off
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle to get an accurate reading. the vehicle.
must be running while using the The compressor may be turned 13. Disconnect the air only
air compressor. on/off until the correct pressure hose (G) from the tire
is reached. valve stem, by turning it
counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
10-96 Vehicle Care
14. Replace the air only hose (G) Removal and Installation of the
and the power plug (H) and Sealant Canister
cord back in its original
location. To remove the sealant canister:
15. Place the equipment in the 1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

original storage location in the 2. Press the canister release
vehicle. button.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer.
5. Push the new canister into A. Tire Sealant and
place. Compressor Kit
B. Foam Container
Storing the Tire Sealant C. Subwoofer (Optional)
and Compressor Kit 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Wagon) (Wagon) on page 2‑21.
The tire sealant and compressor 2. Pull up on the tire sealant and
The tire sealant and compressor kit kit is located in the rear of the compressor kit (A) to remove it
has an accessory adapter located in vehicle. from the foam container (B).
a compartment on the bottom of its
housing that may be used to inflate
air mattresses, balls, etc.
Vehicle Care 10-97
It is not necessary to remove

the subwoofer (C) to access
the tire sealant and compressor
kit, however, if you want to
remove it see Tire Changing on
page 10‑98 for instructions.
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
Storing the Tire Sealant

and Compressor Kit
(Coupe) 2. Remove the retainer that holds A. Tire Sealant and
The tire sealant and compressor kit the tire sealant and compressor Compressor Kit
is located in the trunk. kit in place. B. Foam Container
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk 3. Remove the tire sealant and C. Wing Nut
(Sedan, Coupe) on page 2‑19. compressor kit from the foam
container. 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk
(Sedan, Coupe) on page 2‑19.
compressor kit, reverse the steps. 2. Locate the tire sealant and
compressor kit (A) in the center
of the cargo area.
Storing the Tire Sealant
3. Remove the wing nut (C) that
and Compressor Kit holds the tire sealant and
(Sedan) compressor kit (A) in place.
The tire sealant and compressor kit
is located in the trunk.
10-98 Vehicle Care
4. Remove the tire sealant and D. Wheel Wrench Removing the Spare Tire and
compressor kit (A) from the foam E. Extension Tools (Wagon)
container (B).
F. Strap
compressor kit, reverse the steps. To access the spare tire and jacking
equipment:
Tire Changing 1. Remove the spare tire cover.
Removing the Spare Tire and 2. Remove the stow rod cap by
Tools (Sedan) pulling it straight up off of
the rod.
3. Turn the wing nut (A) on the
compact spare tire (B)
counterclockwise to remove.
4. Remove the spare tire and place
it next to the flat tire.
5. The tools you will be using next
include the jack (C), wheel
wrench (D), and extension (E).
Sedan
A. Wing Nut
B. Spare Tire
C. Jack
Vehicle Care 10-99
A. Wing Nut 3. Remove the spare tire (B) and Removing the Flat Tire and
B. Spare Tire place it next to the flat tire. Installing the Spare Tire
C. Jack 4. Remove the jack (C), wheel 1. Do a safety check before
wrench (E), and extension (F). proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
D. Subwoofer Flat on page 10‑87
To remove the jack:
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Extension
G. Cable
To access the spare tire and jacking
equipment:
1. Remove the spare tire cover.
2. Remove the subwoofer (D),
if the vehicle has one.
To remove the subwoofer:
2.1. Turn the nut (A)
counterclockwise to
remove. 1. Remove the retainer nut (A). 2. Use the wrench to loosen all
the wheel nuts. Do not remove
2.2. Disconnect the 2. Remove the jack stowage them yet.
connector wire. bracket (B).
2.3. Pull the subwoofer (D) up to 3. Slide the jack (C) forward to
remove it from the stow rod. remove it from the floor storage
bracket.
10-100 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
3. Find the jacking location 4. Insert the hooked end of the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
using the diagram above and extension handle through the is provided with the vehicle, only
corresponding V-shaped locating jack and the flat end through the use it for changing a flat tire.
notches located in the plastic wheel wrench.
molding.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it Raising the vehicle with the
is jacked up is dangerous. If the jack improperly positioned can
vehicle slips off the jack, you damage the vehicle and even
could be badly injured or killed. make the vehicle fall. To help
Never get under a vehicle when it avoid personal injury and vehicle
is supported only by a jack. damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-101
Notice: If you position the jack 7. Put the compact spare tire
under the rocker molding and near you.
attempt to raise the vehicle, you 8. Raise the vehicle by turning the
could break the molding and/or wheel wrench clockwise. Raise
cause other damage to your the vehicle far enough off the
vehicle. Always position the jack ground for the compact spare
so that when the jack head is tire to fit under the vehicle.
raised, it will fit firmly in the notch
located inboard from the rocker
molding.
5. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
jack lift head until the jack fits 6. Raise the jack by turning the
under the vehicle. wheel wrench clockwise until the
slots in the jack head fit into the
metal flange located behind the
V‐shaped locating notches on
the plastic molding as shown.
9. Remove all the wheel nuts and

the flat tire.
10-102 Vehicle Care
14. Lower the vehicle by

{ WARNING turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the jack completely.
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come { WARNING
off and cause an accident. When Wheel nuts that are improperly or
changing a wheel, remove any incorrectly tightened can cause
rust or dirt from places where the the wheels to become loose or
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In come off. The wheel nuts should
an emergency, use a cloth or a be tightened with a torque wrench
paper towel to do this; but be sure to the proper torque specification
10. Remove any rust or dirt from
to use a scraper or wire brush after replacing. Follow the torque
the wheel bolts, mounting
later, if needed, to get all the rust surfaces, and spare wheel. specification supplied by the
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat aftermarket manufacturer when
on page 10‑87. 11. Install the spare tire.
using accessory locking wheel
12. Put the wheel nuts back on nuts. See Capacities and
with the rounded end of the Specifications on page 12‑2 for
nuts toward the wheel.
{ WARNING 13. Tighten each wheel nut by
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Never use oil or grease on bolts turning it clockwise with your
or nuts because the nuts might hand until the wheel is held
come loose. The vehicle's wheel against the hub.
could fall off, causing a crash.
Vehicle Care 10-103
Notice: Improperly tightened Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

wheel nuts can lead to brake and Tools
pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
{ WARNING
the proper sequence and to the Storing a jack, a tire, or other
proper torque specification. See equipment in the passenger
Capacities and Specifications on compartment of the vehicle could
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut cause injury. In a sudden stop or
torque specification.
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
4. Route the loop end of the
strap (C) through one of the
Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat cargo tie-downs (A) located in
Load Floor (Sedan) the rear of the vehicle.
1. Put back all tools as they were 5. Route the hook (B) through the
stored in the rear storage loop (C).
compartment and put the
compartment cover back on. 6. Pull the strap to tighten it around
the cargo tie-down (A).
2. Put the flat tire in the tire storage
bag, if there is one.
15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in 3. Place the tire, lying flat, in the
a crisscross sequence as rear storage compartment.
shown.
10-104 Vehicle Care
Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat 5. Slide both D-rings (E) on each
Load Floor (Wagon) side of the vehicle as far
rearward as they will go.
1. Return all tools as they were
stored in the rear storage 6. Route one hook (A) under the
compartment and put the wheel spoke (C) and place the
compartment cover on. hook into the slot in the cargo
rail on the driver side of the
2. Put the flat tire in the tire storage vehicle.
bag, if there is one.
7. Slide the D-ring (E) on that side
3. Place the tire, lying flat, in the forward to engage the hook.
rear storage compartment.
8. Route the other hook under the
7. Route the hook end of the strap wheel spoke (D) and place the
through the wheel. hook into the slot in the cargo
rail on the passenger side of the
8. Attach the hook to the cargo vehicle.
tie-down in the rear of the
vehicle. 9. Slide the D-ring (E) on that side
forward to engage the hook.
9. Slide the buckle to tighten the
cargo tie-down strap.
Use the following diagram as a
guide for storing the compact spare
tire in the trunk.
4. Route one of the hooks (A), at

the end of the cable provided,
through the liftgate striker (B).
Vehicle Care 10-105
Compact Spare Tire and Tools Reverse the instructions for

(Sedan) removing the spare tire and tools to
store the compact spare tire.
guide for storing the compact spare Compact Spare Tire and Tools
tire and tools in the trunk: (Wagon)
guide for storing the compact spare
tire and tools in the rear
compartment area:
A. Wing Nut
B. Spare Tire
C. Jack
D. Subwoofer
E. Wheel Wrench
A. Wing Nut
F. Extension
B. Compact Spare Tire or Flat Tire
G. Strap
C. Jack
Reverse the instructions for
D. Wheel Wrench removing the spare tire and tools to
E. Extension store the compact spare tire.
F. Strap
10-106 Vehicle Care
Compact Spare Tire tire repaired or replaced at your Jump Starting

convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size For more information about the
{ WARNING tire as soon as possible. The spare vehicle battery, see Battery on
tire will last longer and be in good page 10‑30.
Driving with more than one
shape in case it is needed again. If the vehicle battery has run down,
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and Notice: When the compact spare you may want to use another
handling. This could lead to a is installed, do not take the vehicle and some jumper cables to
crash and you or others could be vehicle through an automatic start your vehicle. Be sure to use
injured. Use only one compact car wash with guide rails. The the following steps to do it safely.
spare tire at a time. compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the
{ WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle. Batteries can hurt you. They can
compact spare tire it was fully be dangerous because:
inflated when the vehicle was new, it Do not use the compact spare on
can lose air after a time. Check the other vehicles. . They contain acid that can
inflation pressure regularly. It should And do not mix the compact spare burn you.
be 420 kPa (60 psi). tire or wheel with other wheels or . They contain gas that can
After installing the compact spare tires. They will not fit. Keep the explode or ignite.
on the vehicle, stop as soon as spare tire and its wheel together. . They contain enough
possible and make sure the spare Notice: Tire chains will not fit the electricity to burn you.
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare. Using them can
compact spare is made to perform damage the vehicle and can If you do not follow these steps
well at speeds up to 105 km/h damage the chains too. Do not exactly, some or all of these
(65 mph) for distances up to use tire chains on the compact things can hurt you.
5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you can spare.
finish your trip and have the full-size
Vehicle Care 10-107
Notice: Ignoring these steps You would not be able to start 3. Turn off the ignition on both
could result in costly damage to your vehicle and the bad vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
the vehicle that would not be grounding could damage the accessories plugged into the
covered by the warranty. electrical systems. cigarette lighter or the accessory
Trying to start the vehicle by To avoid the possibility of the power outlets. Turn off the
pushing or pulling it will not vehicles rolling, set the parking radio and all lamps that are not
work, and it could damage the brake firmly on both vehicles needed. This will avoid sparks
vehicle. involved in the jump start and help save both batteries.
procedure. Put an automatic And it could save the radio!
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a transmission in P (Park) or a 4. Open the hoods and locate the
negative ground system. manual transmission in Neutral positive (+) and negative (−)
before setting the parking brake. terminal locations or the
Notice: Only use a vehicle remote positive (+) and remote
that has a 12-volt system with Notice: If the radio or other
accessories are left on during the negative (−) terminals of the
a negative ground for jump other vehicle. Then locate the
starting. If the other vehicle does jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs remote positive (+) location on
not have a 12-volt system with a your vehicle. See Engine
negative ground, both vehicles would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the Compartment Overview on
can be damaged. page 10‑6 for more information
radio and other accessories when
2. Get the vehicles close enough jump starting the vehicle. on locations of the terminals.
so the jumper cables can reach,
but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they
are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want.
10-108 Vehicle Care
Notice: If you connect a negative

cable to the Engine Control { WARNING
Module (ECM), ECM mounting
bracket, or any cables that Using an open flame near a
attach to the ECM bracket, you battery can cause battery gas to
may damage the ECM. Always explode. People have been hurt
attach the negative cable to your doing this, and some have been
vehicle's remote negative ground blinded. Use a flashlight if you
location, instead of the ECM, ECM need more light.
bracket, or any cables attached to Be sure the battery has enough
the ECM bracket. water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
Your vehicle has a remote { WARNING your new vehicle. But if a battery
negative (−) ground location, as has filler caps, be sure the right
An electric fan can start up even
shown in the illustration. It is amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
located on the left side of the when the engine is not running
add water to take care of that
engine compartment. See and can injure you. Keep hands,
first. If you do not, explosive gas
Engine Compartment Overview clothing and tools away from any
could be present.
on page 10‑6. You should underhood electric fan.
always use this remote ground Battery fluid contains acid that
location, instead of the terminal can burn you. Do not get it on
on the battery. you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
Vehicle Care 10-109
Do not connect positive (+) to 7. Do not let the other end

{ WARNING negative (−) or you will get a touch metal. Connect it to the
short that would damage the positive (+) terminal of the
Fans or other moving engine battery and maybe other parts good battery. Use a remote
parts can injure you badly. Keep too. And do not connect the positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
your hands away from moving negative (−) cable to the has one.
parts once the engine is running. negative (−) terminal on the dead 8. Now connect the black
battery because this can cause negative (−) cable to the
5. Check that the jumper cables sparks. negative terminal of the
do not have loose or missing good battery. Use a remote
insulation. If they do, you could negative (−) terminal if the
get a shock. The vehicles could vehicle has one.
be damaged too.
Do not let the other end touch
Before you connect the cables, anything until the next step. The
here are some basic things you other end of the negative (−)
should know. Positive (+) will go cable does not go to the dead
to positive (+) or to a remote battery. It goes to a heavy,
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle unpainted metal engine part or
has one. Negative (−) will go to a to a remote negative (−) terminal
heavy, unpainted metal engine on the vehicle with the dead
part or to a remote negative (−) battery.
terminal if the vehicle has one.
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
10-110 Vehicle Care
9. Connect the other end of the Always connect and remove the To disconnect the jumper cables
negative (−) cable at least 45 cm jumper cables in the correct from both vehicles, do the following:
(18 in) away from the dead order, making sure that the 1. Disconnect the black
battery, but not near engine cables do not touch each other negative (−) cable from the
parts that move. The electrical or other metal. vehicle that had the dead
connection is just as good there, battery.
and the chance of sparks getting
back to the battery is much less. 2. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
Use a remote negative (−) vehicle with the good battery.
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Your vehicle's remote 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
negative (−) ground location cable from the vehicle with the
is for this purpose. good battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
good battery and run the cable from the other vehicle.
engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that Jumper Cable Removal
had the dead battery. If it will
not start after a few tries, it A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
probably needs service. Part or Remote Negative (−)
Terminal
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the B. Good Battery or Remote
wrong order, electrical shorting Positive (+) and Remote
may occur and damage the Negative (−) Terminals
vehicle. The repairs would not be C. Dead Battery or Remote
covered by the vehicle warranty. Positive (+) Terminal
Vehicle Care 10-111

. What is the distance that will be
Towing Recreational Vehicle travelled? Some vehicles have
Towing restrictions on how far and how
Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing long they can tow.
Notice: To avoid damage, the means towing the vehicle behind . Is the proper towing equipment
disabled vehicle should be another vehicle – such as behind a going to be used? See your
towed with all four wheels off motorhome. The two most common dealer or trailering professional
the ground. Care must be taken types of recreational vehicle towing for additional advice and
with vehicles that have low are known as dinghy towing and equipment recommendations.
ground clearance and/or special dolly towing. Dingy towing is towing
the vehicle with all four wheels on
. Is the vehicle ready to be
equipment. Always flatbed on a
the ground. Dolly towing is towing towed? Just as preparing the
car carrier.
the vehicle with two wheels on the vehicle for a long trip, make sure
Consult your dealer or a the vehicle is prepared to be
ground and two wheels up on a
professional towing service if the towed.
device known as a dolly.
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Service (U.S. and Here are some important things to
Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside consider before recreational vehicle
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑9. towing:
To tow the vehicle behind another . What is the towing capacity
vehicle for recreational purposes, of the towing vehicle? Be
such as behind a motor home, see sure to read the tow
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this vehicle manufacturer's
section. recommendations.
10-112 Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing Notice: If the vehicle is Dolly Towing

towed with all four wheels (Rear-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
on the ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
The vehicle was not designed to be
towed with all four wheels on the
ground. If a rear-wheel-drive vehicle
must be towed, a dolly or a trailer
should be used. If an all-wheel-drive
vehicle must be towed, a trailer
should be used. See “Dolly Towing”
following for more information. Use the following procedure to dolly
tow a rear-wheel-drive vehicle from
the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 9‑35.
Vehicle Care 10-113
4. Put the vehicle in P (Park) for Appearance Care

an automatic transmission
or in 1 (First) for a manual
transmission. Exterior Care
5. Securely attach the vehicle Cleaning Exterior
being towed to the dolly. Lamps/Lenses
6. Clamp the steering wheel in a Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
straight-ahead position with a soft cloth, and a car washing soap
clamping device designed for to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
towing. Follow instructions under “Washing
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. the Vehicle” later in this section.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive Finish Care
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the
Vehicles) ground, or even with only two of Occasional waxing or mild polishing
its wheels on the ground, will of the vehicle by hand may be
damage drivetrain components. necessary to remove residue from
Do not tow an all-wheel-drive the paint finish. Approved cleaning
vehicle with any of its wheels on products can be obtained from your
the ground. dealer.
All-wheel-drive vehicles can only
be towed with all four wheels on a
trailer.
10-114 Vehicle Care
If the vehicle has a basecoat/ Exterior painted surfaces are Washing the Vehicle
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat subject to aging, weather, and
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
gives more depth and gloss to the chemical fallout that can take their
keep it clean by washing it often.
colored basecoat. Always use toll over a period of years. To keep
waxes and polishes that are the paint finish looking new, keep Do not wash the vehicle in
non-abrasive and made for a the vehicle garaged or covered direct sunlight and use a car
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. whenever possible. washing soap.
Notice: Machine compounding Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Notice: Do not use cleaning
or aggressive polishing on Parts agents that are petroleum based
a basecoat/clearcoat paint or that contain acid or abrasives,
Bright metal parts should be as they can damage the paint,
finish may damage it. Use only
cleaned regularly to keep their metal, or plastic on the vehicle.
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
luster. Wash with water or use Approved cleaning products
that are made for a basecoat/
chrome polish on chrome or can be obtained from your
clearcoat paint finish on the
stainless steel trim, if necessary. dealer. Follow all manufacturer
vehicle.
Use special care with aluminum directions regarding correct
Foreign materials such as calcium
trim. To avoid damaging protective product usage, necessary safety
chloride and other salts, ice melting
trim, never use auto or chrome precautions, and appropriate
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
polish, steam, or caustic soap to disposal of any vehicle care
bird droppings, chemicals from
clean aluminum. A coating of product. Certain cleaners contain
industrial chimneys, etc., can
wax, rubbed to high polish, is chemicals that can damage the
damage the vehicle's finish if they
recommended for all bright metal emblems or nameplates on the
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
parts. vehicle. Check the cleaning
the vehicle as soon as possible.
product label. If it states that it
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Vehicle Care 10-115
should not be used on plastic Notice: Conveyor systems on Notice: Chrome wheels and other
parts, do not use it on the vehicle some automatic car washes could chrome trim may be damaged if
or damage may occur and it damage the vehicle. There may the vehicle is not washed after
would not be covered by the not be enough clearance for the driving on roads that have been
warranty. undercarriage. Check with the car sprayed with magnesium, calcium
Rinse the vehicle well, before wash manager before using the or sodium chloride. These
washing and after, to remove all automatic car wash. chlorides are used on roads for
cleaning agents completely. If they conditions such as ice and dust.
Weatherstrips Always wash the chrome with
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain. Silicone grease on weatherstrips will soap and water after exposure.
make them last longer, seal better, Notice: Do not use strong soaps,
Dry the finish with a soft, clean and not stick or squeak. Apply
chamois or an all-cotton towel to chemicals, abrasive polishes,
silicone grease with a clean cloth. cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
avoid surface scratches and water During very cold, damp weather
spotting. that contain acid on aluminum or
frequent application may be chrome-plated wheels, because
High pressure car washes could required. See Recommended Fluids the surface could be damaged.
cause water to enter the vehicle. and Lubricants on page 11‑7. The repairs would not be covered
Avoid using high pressure washes by the vehicle warranty. Use only
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the approved cleaners on aluminum
surface of the vehicle. Use of power or Chrome
or chrome-plated wheels.
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa The vehicle may have either
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Notice: Never drive a vehicle that
removal of paint and decals. has aluminum or chrome-plated
Keep the wheels clean using a wheels through an automatic car
soft, clean cloth with mild soap and wash that uses silicone carbide
water. Rinse with clean water. After tire cleaning brushes, as this
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft, could cause damage. The repairs
clean towel. A wax may then be would not be covered by the
applied. vehicle warranty.
10-116 Vehicle Care
Notice: Driving the vehicle Wipers can be damaged by: Original manufacturer replacement
through an automatic car wash . Extreme dusty conditions parts will provide the corrosion
that has silicone carbide tire protection while maintaining the
cleaning brushes, could damage . Sand and salt vehicle warranty.
the aluminum or chrome-plated . Heat and sun
wheels. The repairs would not be Finish Damage
. Snow and ice, without proper
covered by the vehicle warranty. Any stone chips, fractures, or deep
Never drive a vehicle that has removal scratches in the finish should be
aluminum or chrome-plated Tires repaired right away. Bare metal will
wheels through an automatic car corrode quickly and may develop
wash that uses silicone carbide Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to into major repair expense.
tire cleaning brushes. clean the tires.
Minor chips and scratches can be
Windshield and Wiper Blades Notice: Using petroleum-based repaired with touch-up materials
tire dressing products on the available from your dealer. Larger
Clean the outside of the windshield vehicle may damage the paint areas of finish damage can be
with glass cleaner. finish and/or tires. When applying corrected in your dealer's body and
Clean the rubber blades using a a tire dressing, always wipe off paint shop.
lint‐free cloth or paper towel soaked any overspray from all painted
with windshield washer fluid or a surfaces on the vehicle. Underbody Maintenance
mild detergent. Wash the windshield Sheet Metal Damage Chemicals used for ice and snow
thoroughly when cleaning the removal and dust control can collect
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, If the vehicle is damaged and on the underbody. If these are not
and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax requires sheet metal repair or removed, corrosion and rust can
treatments may cause wiper replacement, make sure the body develop on the underbody parts
streaking. Replace the wiper blades repair shop applies anti-corrosion such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
if they are worn or damaged. material to parts repaired or and exhaust system even though
replaced to restore corrosion they have corrosion protection.
protection.
Vehicle Care 10-117
At least every spring, flush these Interior Care Permanent damage can result
materials from the underbody with from using cleaners on surfaces for
plain water. Clean any areas where The interior will continue to look which they were not intended. Apply
mud and debris can collect. Dirt its best if it is cleaned often. Dust the cleaner directly to the cleaning
packed in close areas of the and dirt can accumulate on the cloth to prevent over-spray. Remove
frame should be loosened before upholstery and cause damage to any accidental over-spray from
being flushed. Your dealer or an the carpet, fabric, leather, and other surfaces immediately.
underbody car washing system can plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
do this. when cleaning glass surfaces on
could cause them to set rapidly.
Chemical Paint Spotting the vehicle, could scratch the
Lighter colored interiors may glass and/or cause damage to
Some weather and atmospheric require more frequent cleaning. the rear window defogger. When
conditions can create a chemical Newspapers and garments that can cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall transfer color to home furnishings use only a soft cloth and glass
upon and attack painted surfaces on can also transfer color to the cleaner.
the vehicle. This damage can take interior.
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped Cleaners can contain solvents that
Remove dust from small buttons can become concentrated in the
discolorations, and small, irregular
and knobs with a small brush with interior. Before using cleaners,
dark spots etched into the paint
soft bristles. read and adhere to all safety
surface.
Your dealer has products for instructions on the label. While
cleaning the interior. When cleaning the interior, maintain
cleaning the interior, only use adequate ventilation by opening the
cleaners specifically designed for doors and windows.
the surfaces that are being cleaned.
10-118 Vehicle Care
Do not clean the interior using the

. Do not use organic solvents To clean:
following cleaners or techniques: such as naptha, alcohol, etc.
Damage to the interior may 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
. Never use a knife or any other result cloth with water or club soda.
sharp object to remove a soil 2. Remove excess moisture.
from any interior surface. Fabric/Carpet/Suede
3. Start on the outside edge of the
. Never use a stiff brush. It can Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft soil and gently rub toward the
cause damage to the interior brush attachment to remove dust center. Continue cleaning, using
surfaces. and loose dirt. A canister vacuum a clean area of the cloth each
. Never apply heavy pressure or with a beater bar in the nozzle may time it becomes soiled.
rub aggressively with a cleaning only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, 4. Continue to gently rub the
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can soiled area.
damage the interior and does always try to remove them first with
not improve the effectiveness of plain water or club soda. Before 5. If the soil is not completely
soil removal. cleaning, gently remove as much of removed, use a mild soap
the soil as possible using one of the solution and repeat the cleaning
. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. following techniques: process with plain water.
Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
. For liquids: gently blot the If any of the soil remains, a
degreasers. Using too much remaining soil with a paper commercial fabric cleaner or spot
soap will leave a residue that towel. Allow the soil to absorb lifter may be necessary. Test a small
leaves streaks and attracts into the paper towel until no hidden area for colorfastness before
dirt. For liquid cleaners, about more can be removed. using a commercial upholstery
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of . For solid dry soils: remove as cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
water is a good guide. much as possible and then cleaned area gives any impression
vacuum. that a ring formation may result,
. Do not heavily saturate the clean the entire surface.
upholstery while cleaning.
Vehicle Care 10-119
A paper towel can be used to blot appearance and feel of the leather or those containing organic solvents
excess moisture from the fabric or and are not recommended. Do not to clean the interior because they
carpet after the cleaning process. use silicone or wax-based products, can alter the appearance by
or those containing organic solvents increasing the gloss in a
Leather to clean the interior because they non-uniform manner.
Leather, and lighter colored leather can alter the appearance by Some commercial products may
in particular, will need more frequent increasing the gloss in a increase gloss on the instrument
cleaning to prevent the buildup of non-uniform manner. panel. The increase in gloss may
dust, dirt, and colors transferred cause annoying reflections in the
from other items so that these do Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces windshield and even make it difficult
not become permanent stains. to see through the windshield under
To remove dust, a soft cloth To remove dust, a soft cloth certain conditions.
dampened with water can be dampened with water can be
used. If a more thorough cleaning is used. If a more thorough cleaning Care of Safety Belts
necessary, a soft cloth dampened is necessary, a clean soft cloth Keep belts clean and dry.
with a mild soap solution can be dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust
used. Your dealer has a GM
approved leather cleaner available and dirt. Never use spot lifters or { WARNING
that provides superior cleaning removers on plastic surfaces. Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
performance when used regularly Many commercial cleaners and
It may severely weaken them. In
on finished automotive leathers. coatings that are sold to preserve
a crash, they might not be able
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the to provide adequate protection.
not use heat, steam, spot lifters or Clean safety belts only with mild
spot removers, or shoe polish on appearance and feel of the interior
and are not recommended. Do not soap and lukewarm water.
leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold use silicone or wax-based products,
to preserve and protect leather
may permanently change the
10-120 Vehicle Care
Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for Removing and Replacing the
proper floor mat usage. Floor Mats
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
If a floor mat is the wrong size or vehicle. If the floor mats need
is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended
interfere with the accelerator that GM certified floor mats be
pedal and/or brake pedal. purchased. Non-GM floor mats
Interference with the pedals can may not fit properly and may
cause unintended acceleration interfere with the accelerator or
and/or increased stopping brake pedal. Always check that
distance which can cause a crash the floor mats do not interfere
and injury. Make sure the floor with the pedals.
mat does not interfere with the . Use the floor mat with the
accelerator or brake pedal. correct side up. Do not turn
it over. 1. Pull up on the rear of the floor
mat to unlock the retainer and
. Do not place anything on top of remove.
the driver side floor mat.
2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
. Use only a single floor mat on mat retainer opening over the
the driver's side. carpet retainer and snap into
. Do not place one floor mat on position.
top of another. 3. Make sure the floor mat is
Driver side floor mat is held in place properly secured in place.
by a button-type retainer.
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Because of all the different ways

people use vehicles, maintenance
Maintenance Notice: Maintenance
intervals, checks, inspections,
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
recommended fluids, and Please read the information under
General Information lubricants are necessary to keep Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 this vehicle in good working the vehicle in good condition, see
condition. Damage caused by your dealer.
Scheduled Maintenance failure to follow scheduled
The maintenance schedule is for
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 maintenance might not be
vehicles that:
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Recommended Fluids, . Carry passengers and cargo
Lubricants, and Parts As the vehicle owner, you are
within recommended limits on
Recommended Fluids and responsible for the scheduled
the Tire and Loading Information
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 maintenance in this section. We
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
Maintenance Replacement recommend having your dealer
on page 9‑11.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 perform these services. Proper
. Are driven on reasonable road
vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records keep the vehicle in good working surfaces within legal driving
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-11 condition, improves fuel economy, limits.
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
11-2 Service and Maintenance

. Use the recommended fuel. The proper replacement parts,
See Recommended Fuel on fluids, and lubricants to use are
Scheduled
page 9‑48. listed in Recommended Fluids and Maintenance
Lubricants on page 11‑7 and
{ WARNING Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Engine Oil
Soon Message Displays
page 11‑9. We recommend the use
Performing maintenance work can of genuine parts from your dealer. Change engine oil and filter.
be dangerous. Some jobs can See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.
cause serious injury. Perform Rotation of New Tires
An Emission Control Service.
maintenance work only if you Tire rotation is not recommended if
have the required know-how and the vehicle has different size tires When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
the proper tools and equipment. on the front and rear wheels. If tire SOON message displays, service
rotation is recommended for the is required for the vehicle as
If in doubt, see your dealer to
vehicle, to maintain ride, handling, soon as possible, within the
have a qualified technician do the
and performance of the vehicle, next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving
work. See Doing Your Own under the best conditions, the
Service Work on page 10‑4. it is important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed. engine oil life system might not
Tires should be rotated every indicate the need for vehicle service
At your dealer, you can be certain 12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire for more than a year. The engine oil
that you will receive the highest Rotation on page 10‑79. and filter must be changed at least
level of service available. Your once a year and the oil life system
dealer has specially trained must be reset. Your dealer has
service technicians, uses genuine trained service technicians who
replacement parts, as well as, will perform this work and reset the
up‐to‐date tools and equipment system. If the engine oil life system
to ensure fast and accurate is reset accidentally, service the
diagnostics. vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 miles
since the last service. Reset the oil
life system whenever the oil is

. Windshield wiper blade . Engine air cleaner filter
changed. See Engine Oil Life inspection for wear, cracking, inspection. See Engine Air
System on page 10‑14. or contamination and windshield Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.
and wiper blade cleaning, . Brake system inspection
Every Engine Oil Change if contaminated. See Exterior (or every 12 months, whichever
. Change engine oil and filter. Care on page 10‑113. Worn occurs first).
Reset oil life system. See or damaged wiper blade
replacement. See Wiper Blade . Steering and suspension
Engine Oil on page 10‑10 and
Replacement on page 10‑34. inspection. Visual inspection for
Engine Oil Life System on
damaged, loose, or missing
page 10‑14. An Emission . Tire inflation pressures parts or signs of wear.
Control Service. check. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑72. . Body hinges and latches,
. Engine coolant level check. See
key lock cylinders, folding
Engine Coolant on page 10‑19. . Tire wear inspection. See Tire seat hardware, and sunroof
. Engine cooling system Inspection on page 10‑78. (if equipped) lubrication. See
inspection. Visual inspection . If tire rotation is recommended Recommended Fluids and
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and for the vehicle, rotate tires if Lubricants on page 11‑7. More
clamps and replacement, necessary. See Tire Rotation on frequent lubrication may be
if needed. page 10‑79. required when the vehicle
. Windshield washer fluid level . Fluids visual leak check is exposed to a corrosive
check. See Washer Fluid on (or every 12 months, whichever environment. Applying silicone
page 10‑26. occurs first). A leak in any grease on weatherstrips with a
system must be repaired and clean cloth makes them last
the fluid level checked. longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.

. Restraint system component Once a Month
. Accelerator pedal check for
check. See Safety System damage, high effort, or binding.
Check on page 3‑28.
. Tire inflation check. See Tire Replace if needed.
Pressure on page 10‑72.
. Fuel system inspection for . If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant
damage or leaks.
. Tire wear inspection. See Tire and Compressor Kit, check the
Inspection on page 10‑78. sealant expiration date printed
. Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
. Sunroof track and seal on the instruction label of
damaged components. inspection, if equipped. See the kit. See Tire Sealant and
Sunroof (Sedan and Wagon) on Compressor Kit on page 10‑89.
Additional Required Services page 2‑33 or Sunroof (Coupe) . Underbody flushing service.
on page 2‑34.
Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles . Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass
. Rotate tires. Tires should be Once a Year Support Gas Strut Service:
rotated every 12 000 km/ . See Starter Switch Check on Visually inspect gas strut,
7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation page 10‑31. if equipped, for signs of wear,
on page 10‑79. cracks, or other damage. Check
. See Automatic Transmission the hold open ability of the gas
At Each Fuel Stop Shift Lock Control Function strut. Contact your dealer if
Check on page 10‑32. service is required.
. Engine oil level check. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑10. . See Ignition Transmission Lock
Once Every Two Years
.
Check on page 10‑33.
Engine coolant level check. See . CTS‐V only: Clutch hydraulic
. See Park Brake and P (Park)
Engine Coolant on page 10‑19. system drain, flush, and refill.
Mechanism Check on
. Windshield washer fluid level page 10‑33.
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑26.
First Engine Oil Change After First Engine Oil Change After An Emission Control Service.
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles The U.S. Environmental
. Passenger compartment air . Engine air cleaner filter Protection Agency or the
filter replacement (or every replacement. See Engine Air California Air Resources Board
24 months, whichever occurs Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑16. has determined that the failure
first). More frequent replacement to perform this maintenance
. Automatic transmission fluid item will not nullify the emission
may be needed if you drive change (severe service) for
in areas with heavy traffic, warranty or limit recall liability
vehicles mainly driven in prior to the completion of the
areas with poor air quality, heavy city traffic in hot weather,
or areas with high dust levels. vehicle's useful life. We,
in hilly or mountainous terrain, however, urge that all
Replacement may also be when frequently towing a
needed if you notice reduced recommended maintenance
trailer, or used for taxi, police, services be performed at the
air flow, windows fogging up, or delivery service. See
or odors. Your dealer can help indicated intervals and the
Automatic Transmission maintenance be recorded.
you determine when it is the Fluid on page 10‑14.
right time to replace the filter. . CTS‐V only: 6‐speed manual
. Evaporative control system transmission fluid change
. CTS‐V only: 6‐speed manual inspection. Check all fuel and
transmission fluid change (normal service).
vapor lines and hoses for proper
(severe service) for vehicles hook‐up, routing, and condition.
mainly driven in heavy city Check that the purge valve,
traffic in hot weather, in hilly or if the vehicle has one, works
mountainous terrain, when properly. Replace as needed.
frequently towing a trailer,
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service.

. All‐wheel‐drive vehicles only: driving, or used for taxi, police,
. CTS‐V only: Supercharger
Transfer case fluid change or delivery service. See your drive belt inspection for fraying,
(severe service) for vehicles dealer. excessive cracks, or obvious
mainly driven in heavy city damage and replacement,
traffic in hot weather, in hilly First Engine Oil Change After if needed.
or mountainous terrain, when Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
frequently towing a trailer, First Engine Oil Change After
. Automatic transmission fluid Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
or used for taxi, police, change (normal service). See
or delivery service. During Automatic Transmission Fluid on
. Engine cooling system
any maintenance, if a power page 10‑14. drain, flush, and refill (or
washer is used to clean mud every five years, whichever
and dirt from the underbody,
. All‐wheel‐drive vehicles only: occurs first). See Cooling
care should be taken to not Transfer case fluid change System on page 10‑18. An
directly spray the transfer case (normal service). During any Emission Control Service.
output seals. High pressure maintenance, if a power washer
is used to clean mud and dirt
. 6.2L supercharged V8 engine
water can overcome the seals only: Intercooler system
and contaminate the transfer from the underbody, care should
be taken to not directly spray drain, flush, and refill (or
case fluid. Contaminated fluid every five years, whichever
will decrease the life of the the transfer case output seals.
High pressure water can occurs first). See Cooling
transfer case and should be System on page 10‑18. An
replaced. overcome the seals and
contaminate the transfer case Emission Control Service.
. CTS‐V only: Rear axle fluid fluid. Contaminated fluid will . Engine drive belts inspection
change (severe service only) decrease the life of the transfer for fraying, excessive cracks,
for vehicles mainly driven in hilly case and should be replaced. or obvious damage (or
or mountainous terrain, when every 10 years, whichever
frequently towing a trailer, used
. Spark plug replacement and
spark plug wire inspection. An occurs first). Replace, if
for high speed or competitive needed.
Emission Control Service.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos™ specification. Oils
meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos™ certification
Engine Oil mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos™
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑10.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑19.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, in
Hydraulic Brake System
Canada 88862807).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
DOT 4 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. 88958860, in
Hydraulic Clutch System
Canada 88901244).
Manual Transmission (CTS) SAE 75W-90 GL5 Gear Oil (GM Part No. 88862475, in Canada 88862476).
Manual Transmission (CTS-V) Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88861800, in Canada 88861801).
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Rear Drive Module and Transfer Case
Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 88861950, in Canada 88861951).
(All‐Wheel Drive)
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Chassis Lubrication
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Key Lock Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
3.0L V6 Engine 15875795 A3096C
3.6L V6 Engine 15875795 A3096C
6.2L V8 Engine 25898499 A3105C
Engine Oil Filter
3.0L V6 Engine 25177917 PF2129
3.6L V6 Engine 25177917 PF2129
6.2L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 19130403 CF133
Spark Plugs
3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
6.2L V8 Engine 12571165 41-104
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Wiper Blades — Except CTS-V
Driver Side – 56.5 cm (22 in) 15890062 —
Passenger Side – 53.3 cm (21 in) 15890064 —
Wiper Blades — CTS-V
Driver Side – 56.5 cm (22 in) 20791461 —
Passenger Side – 53.3 cm (21 in) 20791462 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Date Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Odometer
Reading

Odometer
Reading

Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN
Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on This label, on the spare tire cover,
the left side of the vehicle. It can be has the following information:
seen through the windshield from . Vehicle Identification
outside. The VIN also appears on Number (VIN).
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
. Model designation.
and registration. . Paint information.
. Production options and special
equipment.
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System — Engine
3.0L V6 Engine 10.3 L 10.9 qt
3.6L V6 Engine 10.3 L 10.9 qt
6.2L V8 Engine 11.8 L 12.5 qt
Cooling System — Intercooler, 6.2L V8 Engine 2.3 L 2.4 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Fuel Tank 68.1 L 18.0 gal
Transfer Case — AWD 1.0 L 1.1 qt
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
3.0L V6 Engine, 6-Speed Automatic 6.3 L 6.7 qt
3.0L, 3.6L V6 Engines, 6-Speed Manual 1.8 L 1.9 qt
6.2L V8 Engine, 6-Speed Manual 3.8 L 4.0 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
3.0L V6 Engine Y 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
Manual
Automatic
3.6L V6 Engine D 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
Manual
Automatic
6.2L V8 Engine P 1.0 mm (0.040 in)
Manual
Engine Drive Belt Routing
CTS-V 6.2L V8 Engine

CTS V6 Engines
Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (U.S. and
Customer Information
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-11 Procedure (U.S. and
Customer Information Service Publications Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-14
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Procedure (U.S. and Reporting Safety Defects important to the dealer and to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Satisfaction Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
the United States with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Customer Assistance Offices operation of the vehicle will be
Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by the dealer's sales or
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-4 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices service departments. Sometimes,
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Assistance for Text of all concerned, misunderstandings
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 can occur. If your concern has not
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy
GM Mobility Reimbursement Vehicle Data Recording and STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Program (U.S. and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 with a member of dealership
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-16 management. Normally, concerns
Roadside Service (U.S. and OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 can be quickly resolved at that
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-18 level. If the matter has already been
Roadside Service Radio Frequency reviewed with the sales, service or
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18 parts manager, contact the owner
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency of the dealership or the general
Appointments (U.S. and Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 manager.
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Cadillac, within 40 days. If you do not agree
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will with the decision given in your case,
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's you may reject it and proceed with
resolved by the dealership without facility. That is why we suggest any other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Cadillac Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto
Center at 1‐800‐458‐8006. In Both General Motors and the dealer Line Program using the toll-free
Canada, call the Canadian Cadillac are committed to making sure you telephone number or write them at
Customer Communication Centre at are completely satisfied with the the following address:
1-888-446-2000. new vehicle. However, if you BBB Auto Line Program
We encourage you to call the continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
toll-free number in order to give your after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
inquiry prompt attention. Have the outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
following information available to can file with the Better Business Suite 800
give the Customer Assistance Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
representative: to enforce your rights.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
. Vehicle Identification The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
Number (VIN). This is available out-of-court program administered
from the vehicle registration or by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
title, or the plate at the top left of Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
the instrument panel and visible disputes regarding vehicle repairs Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
through the windshield. or the interpretation of the New vehicle age, mileage and other
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although factors. General Motors reserves
. Dealership name and location. the right to change eligibility
you may be required to resort to this
. Vehicle delivery date and informal dispute resolution program limitations and/or discontinue its
present mileage. prior to filing a court action, use of participation in this program.
the program is free of charge and
your case will generally be heard
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Satisfaction

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Procedure (Mexico)
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685,
procedure outlined in Steps One or call the General Motors
and Two, General Motors of Canada Customer Communication Centre,
Limited wants you to be aware 1-800-263-3777 (English),
of its participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French),
mediation/arbitration program. or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited Mediation/Arbitration Program
has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication Did you get the Warranty Extension
of owner disputes involving Centre Plan? This plan is recommended by
factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited General Motors to supplement the
claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 warranty included with the new
the review of the facts involved by 1908 Colonel Sam Drive vehicle purchase.
an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
may include an informal hearing See your dealer for details.
before the arbiter. The program is The inquiry should be accompanied
Customer Assistance
designed so that the entire dispute by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). Procedure
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final Owner satisfaction and goodwill are
decision, should be completed in very important to your dealer and
approximately 70 days. We believe General Motors.
our impartial program offers Normally, any problem with the
advantages over courts in most transaction, sale, or usage of the
jurisdictions because it is informal, vehicle must be handled by your
quick, and free of charge. dealer sales or service departments.
However, we recognize that STEP THREE See Customer Assistance Offices

despite the good intentions of all If your case is not resolved in a (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 or
parties involved, sometimes a reasonable amount of time by your Customer Assistance Offices
misunderstanding may occur. dealer, please call the General (Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more
If you have a problem that has not Motors Customer Assistance information.
been satisfactorily handled through Center (CAC) and provide the
the normal means, we suggest the following information: Customer Assistance
following steps: . Name Offices (U.S. and Canada)
STEP ONE . Address Cadillac encourages customers
Explain your case to the dealer to call the toll-free number for
. Phone number assistance. However, if a customer
service agent, service manager,
dealer sales agent, or sales
. Model year wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,
manager, depending on your case. the letter should be addressed to:
. Brand
Make sure that they have all . Vehicle Identification United States
necessary information. They are Number (VIN) Cadillac Customer
interested in your continual Assistance Center
satisfaction.
. Mileage
Cadillac Motor Car Division
. Delivery date P.O. Box 33169
STEP TWO
. Description of the problem Detroit, MI 48232-5169
If you are not satisfied, please www.Cadillac.com
. Dealership name
contact the general manager or the
dealership owner to ask for their 1-800-458-8006
. Dealership address 1-800-833-2622 (For Text
help. If they are not able to resolve
your case, ask them to contact the Telephone devices (TTYs))
right people at General Motors for Roadside Assistance:
support, if needed. 1-800-882-1112
From Puerto Rico: Mexico, Central America and Mexico

1-800-496-9992 (English) Caribbean Islands/Countries From Mexico City
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands) 5329-0816
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
General Motors de Mexico, S. de From Other Mexico Locations
1-800-496-9994
R.L. de C.V. 01-800-466-0816
Canada Customer Assistance Center
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843 United States and Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited Col. Granada
Canadian Cadillac Customer 1-866-466-8195
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
Communication Centre, Mail Code: Costa Rica
CA1-163-005 01-800-466-0805
1908 Colonel Sam Drive Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0805 00-800-052-1005
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gm.ca Customer Assistance Guatemala
1-888-446-2000 Offices (Mexico) 1-800-999-5252
1-800-263-3830 (For Text To contact the Customer Assistance Panama
Telephone devices (TTYs)) Center (CAC), use the phone
Roadside Assistance: 00-800-052-0001
numbers listed in this section.
1-800-882-1112 Customer assistance is available Dominican Republic
Overseas Monday through Friday, 08:00 to 1-888-751-5301
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
Please contact the local General 08:00 to 15:00 hours. El Salvador
Motors Business Unit.
All e-mail inquiries to the Customer 800-6273
Assistance Center (CAC) should be
sent to: cac.cadillac@gm.com. Honduras
800-0122-6101

. Cadillac dealer locator for
Customer Assistance for service nationwide.
Here are a few of the valuable
tools and services you will have
Text Telephone (TTY) . access to:
Exclusive privileges and offers.
Users (U.S. and Canada) . My Showroom: Find and save
. Recall notices for your specific
To assist customers who are deaf, vehicle. information on vehicles and
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired current offers in your area.
and who use Text Telephones
. OnStar and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries. . My Dealers: Save details such
(TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment
as address and phone number
available at its Customer Assistance Other Helpful Links: for each of your preferred GM
Center. Any TTY user can
Cadillac — www.cadillac.com dealers.
communicate with Cadillac by
dialing: 1-800-833-2622. TTY users Cadillac Merchandise — . My Driveway: Access quick
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. www.cadillaccollection.com links to parts and service
estimates, check trade-in
Help Center — www.cadillac.com/ values, or schedule a service
Online Owner Center pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do appointment by adding the
Cadillac Owner Center (U.S.) . FAQ (Frequently Asked vehicles you own to your
www.cadillacownercenter.com Questions) driveway profile.
Information and services . Contact Us . My Preferences: Manage your
customized for your specific profile and use tools and forms
vehicle — all in one convenient My GM Canada www.gm.ca with greater ease.
place. My GM Canada is a To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
. Digital owner manual, warranty password-protected section of section within www.gm.ca.
information, and more. www.gm.ca where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
. Storage for online service and personalized offers, and use handy
maintenance records. tools and forms with greater ease.

. Model, year, color, and license
GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also
plate number of the vehicle.
has a Mobility Program. Call
Reimbursement Program 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) . Odometer reading, Vehicle
(U.S. and Canada) for details. TTY users call Identification Number (VIN), and
1-800-263-3830. delivery date of the vehicle.
. Description of the problem.
Roadside Service (U.S.
and Canada) Coverage
In the United States or Canada, call Services are provided up to
1-800-882-1112. 5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi),
whichever comes first.
This program is available to Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only,
call 1-888-889-2438. In the U.S., anyone driving the
qualified applicants for cost
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
reimbursement of eligible Service is available 24 hours a day, person driving the vehicle without
aftermarket adaptive equipment 365 days a year. permission from the owner is not
required for the vehicle, such as
Calling for Service covered.
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift for the vehicle. When calling Roadside Service, Roadside Service is not a part of
have the following information the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
For more information on the limited
ready: Cadillac and General Motors of
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
Canada Limited reserve the right to
call the GM Mobility Assistance . Your name, home address, and make any changes or discontinue
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text home telephone number. the Roadside Service program at
Telephone (TTY) users, call
. Telephone number of your any time without notification.
1-800-833-9935.
location.
. Location of the vehicle.
Cadillac and General Motors of

. Flat Tire Change: Service to Cadillac Technician Roadside
Canada Limited reserve the right change a flat tire with spare tire. Service (U.S. only)
to limit services or payment to an The spare tire, if equipped,
owner or driver if they decide the must be in good condition and Cadillac's exceptional Roadside
claims are made too often, or the properly inflated. It is your Service is more than an auto club
same type of claim is made many responsibility for the repair or or towing service. It provides every
times. replacement of the tire if it is Cadillac owner in the United States
not covered by the warranty. with the advantage of contacting
Cadillac Owner Privileges™ a Cadillac advisor and, where
. Battery Jump Start: Service to available, a Cadillac trained dealer
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: jump start a dead battery. technician who can provide on-site
Delivery of enough fuel for the . Trip Routing Service: Detailed service.
vehicle to get to the nearest
maps of North America are A dealer technician will travel to
service station.
provided when requested either your location within a 30 mile
. Lock‐Out Service: Service to with the most direct route or the radius of a participating Cadillac
unlock the vehicle if you are most scenic route. Additional dealership. If beyond this radius, we
locked out. A remote unlock may travel information is also will arrange to have your car towed
be available if you have OnStar. available. Allow three weeks to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
For security reasons, the driver for delivery. Each technician travels with a
must present identification . Trip Interruption Benefits specially equipped service vehicle
before this service is given.
and Service: If your trip is complete with the necessary
. Emergency Tow From a Public interrupted due to a warranty Cadillac parts and tools required to
Road or Highway: Tow to the failure, incidental expenses handle most roadside repairs.
nearest Cadillac dealer for may be reimbursed during the
warranty service, or if the vehicle 5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi)
was in a crash and cannot be Powertrain warranty period.
driven. Assistance is also given Items considered are hotel,
when the vehicle is stuck in the meals, and rental car.
sand, mud, or snow.

. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Services Not Included in
Service: Pre-authorization,
Roadside Service
Roadside Service (Mexico)
original detailed receipts, and a
. Impound towing caused by copy of the repair orders are Roadside Service is available
violation of any laws. required. Once authorization has 24 hours a day, 365 days of
. Legal fines. been received, the Roadside the year.
Service advisor will help you
. Mounting, dismounting, make arrangements and explain For detailed information about
or changing of snow tires, how to receive payment. Roadside Service, please
chains, or other traction devices. see the brochure provided with
. Alternative Service: If your new vehicle or visit our
. Towing or services for vehicles assistance cannot be provided website at: www.cadillac.com.mx.
driven on a non-public road or right away, the Roadside
highway. Navigate the site and click on
Service advisor may give “Asistencia en el Camino.” E-mail
Services Specific to you permission to get local correspondence should be sent
emergency road service. You will to: asistencia.cadillac@gm.com.
Canadian‐Purchased Vehicles
receive payment, up to $100,
. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement after sending the original To contact Roadside Service by
is approximately $5 Canadian. receipt to Roadside Service. phone, use the following numbers:
Diesel fuel delivery may be Mechanical failures may be Mexico
restricted. Propane and other covered, however any cost for
fuels are not provided through parts and labor for repairs not 01-800-466-0805
this service. covered by the warranty are the United States
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle owner responsibility.
1-866-466-8906
registration is required.
Canada
. Trip Routing Service: Limit of
six requests per year. 1-800-268-6800
Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options

Appointments (U.S. and Program (U.S. and Warranty service can generally
Canada) Canada) be completed while you wait.
However, if you are unable
When the vehicle requires warranty To enhance your ownership to wait, GM helps to minimize
service, contact the dealer and experience, we and our participating inconvenience by providing several
request an appointment. By dealers are proud to offer Courtesy transportation options. Depending
scheduling a service appointment Transportation, a customer support on the circumstances, the dealer
and advising the service consultant program for vehicles with the can offer one of the following:
of your transportation needs, the Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
dealer can help minimize your Coverage period in Canada), Shuttle Service
inconvenience. extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle service is the preferred
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled hybrid‐specific warranties in both means of offering Courtesy
into the service department the U.S. and Canada. Transportation. Dealers may provide
immediately, keep driving it until Several Courtesy Transportation shuttle service to get you to your
it can be scheduled for service, options are available to assist in destination with minimal interruption
unless, of course, the problem is reducing inconvenience when of your daily schedule. This includes
safety related. If it is, please call the warranty repairs are required. one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service
dealership, let them know this, and within reasonable time and distance
Courtesy Transportation is not a parameters of the dealer's area.
ask for instructions. part of the New Vehicle Limited
If the dealer requests you to bring Warranty. A separate booklet Public Transportation or Fuel
the vehicle for service, you are entitled “Warranty and Owner Reimbursement
urged to do so as early in the work Assistance Information” furnished If the vehicle requires overnight
day as possible to allow for the with each new vehicle provides warranty repairs, and public
same day-repair. detailed warranty coverage transportation is used instead
information. of the dealer's shuttle service, the
expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only requirements, insurance coverage, Collision Damage Repair
be up to the maximum amount credit card, etc. You are responsible
allowed by GM for shuttle service. for fuel usage charges and may
(U.S. and Canada)
In addition, for U.S. customers, also be responsible for taxes, If the vehicle is involved in a
should you arrange transportation levies, usage fees, excessive collision and it is damaged, have
through a friend or relative, limited mileage, or rental usage beyond the damage repaired by a qualified
reimbursement for reasonable fuel the completion of the repair. technician using the proper
expenses may be available. Claim It may not be possible to provide a equipment and quality replacement
amounts should reflect actual like vehicle as a courtesy rental. parts. Poorly performed collision
costs and be supported by original repairs diminish the vehicle resale
receipts. See the dealer for Additional Program value, and safety performance can
information regarding the allowance Information be compromised in subsequent
amounts for reimbursement of fuel collisions.
or other transportation costs. All program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available Collision Parts
Courtesy Rental Vehicle at every dealer. Please contact
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
The dealer may arrange to provide the dealer for specific information
parts made with the same materials
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or about availability. All Courtesy
and construction methods as the
reimburse you for a rental vehicle Transportation arrangements will be
parts with which the vehicle was
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept administered by appropriate dealer
originally built. Genuine GM
for an overnight warranty repair. personnel.
Collision parts are the best choice to
Rental reimbursement will be limited General Motors reserves the ensure that the vehicle's designed
and must be supported by original right to unilaterally modify, appearance, durability, and safety
receipts. This requires that you sign change, or discontinue Courtesy are preserved. The use of Genuine
and complete a rental agreement Transportation at any time and to GM parts can help maintain the GM
and meet state/provincial, local, resolve all questions of claim New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
and rental vehicle provider eligibility pursuant to the terms and
requirements. Requirements vary conditions described herein at its
and may include minimum age sole discretion.
Recycled original equipment parts As a result, these parts may fit There are significant differences in
may also be used for repair. These poorly, exhibit premature durability/ the quality of coverage afforded by
parts are typically removed from corrosion problems, and may not various insurance policy terms.
vehicles that were total losses in perform properly in subsequent Many insurance policies provide
prior crashes. In most cases, the collisions. Aftermarket parts are not reduced protection to the GM
parts being recycled are from covered by the GM New Vehicle vehicle by limiting compensation
undamaged sections of the vehicle. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle for damage repairs by using
A recycled original equipment GM failure related to such parts is not aftermarket collision parts. Some
part may be an acceptable choice covered by that warranty. insurance companies will not
to maintain the vehicle's originally specify aftermarket collision parts.
designed appearance and safety Repair Facility When purchasing insurance, we
performance; however, the history of GM also recommends that you recommend that you ensure that the
these parts is not known. Such parts choose a collision repair facility that vehicle will be repaired with GM
are not covered by the GM New meets your needs before you ever original equipment collision parts.
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any need collision repairs. The dealer If such insurance coverage is
related failures are not covered by may have a collision repair center not available from your current
that warranty. with GM-trained technicians and insurance carrier, consider switching
Aftermarket collision parts are also state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be to another insurance carrier.
available. These are made by able to recommend a collision If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
companies other than GM and may repair center that has GM-trained company may require you to have
not have been tested for the vehicle. technicians and comparable insurance that ensures repairs with
equipment. Genuine GM Original Equipment
Insuring The Vehicle Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
Protect your investment in the GM parts. Read the lease carefully, as
vehicle with comprehensive and you may be charged at the end of
collision insurance coverage. the lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
. Vehicle Identification original GM parts. Remember,
Number (VIN). recycled parts will not be covered by
If there has been an injury, call . Insurance company and policy the GM vehicle warranty.
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all number. Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
matters have been taken care of. . General description of the but you must live with the repair.
Move the vehicle only if its position damage to the other vehicle. Depending on your policy limits,
puts you in danger, or you are your insurance company may
Choose a reputable repair facility initially value the repair using
instructed to move it by a police
that uses quality replacement parts. aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
officer.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this the repair professional, and insist
Give only the necessary information section. on Genuine GM parts. Remember,
to police and other parties involved
If the airbag has inflated, see What if the vehicle is leased, you may
in the crash.
Will You See After an Airbag be obligated to have the vehicle
For emergency towing see Inflates? on page 3‑35. repaired with Genuine GM parts,
Roadside Service (U.S. and even if your insurance coverage
Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside Managing the Vehicle Damage does not pay the full cost.
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑9. Repair Process
If another party's insurance
Gather the following information: In the event that the vehicle requires company is paying for the repairs,
.
damage repairs, GM recommends you are not obligated to accept a
Driver name, address, and that you take an active role in its
telephone number. repair valuation based on that
repair. If you have a pre-determined insurance company's collision
. Driver license number. repair facility of choice, take the policy repair limits, as you have no
. Owner name, address, and vehicle there, or have it towed contractual limits with that company.
telephone number. there. Specify to the facility that any In such cases, you can have control
required replacement collision parts of the repair and parts choices
. Vehicle license plate number. be original equipment parts, either as long as the cost stays within
. Vehicle make, model, and new Genuine GM parts or recycled reasonable limits.
model year.
Service Publications Owner Information Current and Past Models

Ordering Information Owner publications are written Technical Service Bulletins and
specifically for owners and intended Manuals are available for current
Service Manuals to provide basic operational and past model GM vehicles.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis information about the vehicle.
The Owner Manual includes the ORDER TOLL FREE:
and repair information on the 1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
engines, transmission, axle, Maintenance Schedule for all
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
suspension, brakes, electrical, models.
steering, body, etc. For Credit Card Orders Only
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Service Bulletins Owner Manual, and Warranty
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
Booklet.
Service Bulletins give additional Or write to:
technical service information RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Helm, Incorporated
needed to knowledgeably service
shipping fees. P.O. Box 07130
General Motors cars and trucks.
Detroit, MI 48207
Each bulletin contains instructions Without Portfolio: Owner
to assist in the diagnosis and Manual only. Prices are subject to change
service of the vehicle. without notice and without incurring
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
obligation. Allow ample time for
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
delivery.
shipping fees.
All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
funds.
Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian
Defects problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government
Reporting Safety Defects If you live in Canada, and you
To contact NHTSA, you may
to the United States call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 immediately, and notify General
If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go Motors of Canada Limited. Call
has a defect which could cause to http://www.safercar.gov; or them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
a crash or could cause injury or write to: Transport Canada
death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA Road Safety Branch
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. 2780 Sheffield Road
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590 Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors. You can also obtain other
information about motor
If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

to General Motors Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data
In addition to notifying NHTSA Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain
like this, notify General Motors. This GM vehicle has a number of crash or near crash-like situations,
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write: hitting a road obstacle, data that
information about the vehicle’s
Cadillac Customer performance and how it is driven. will assist in understanding how a
Assistance Center For example, the vehicle uses vehicle's systems performed. The
Cadillac Motor Car Division computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data
P.O. Box 33169 control engine and transmission related to vehicle dynamics and
Detroit, MI 48232-5169 performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
conditions for airbag deployment time, typically 30 seconds or less.
In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000, The EDR in this vehicle is designed
or write: and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock to record such data as:
Canadian Cadillac Customer braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in the
Communication Centre, vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating.
Mail Code: CA1-163-005 data to help the dealer technician
General Motors of Canada Limited service the vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and
1908 Colonel Sam Drive may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened.
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal.
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, . How fast the vehicle was
and temperature settings. traveling.
This data can help provide a better GM will not access this data or OnStar®
understanding of the circumstances share it with others except: with the
in which crashes and injuries occur. consent of the vehicle owner or, If the vehicle is equipped with an
if the vehicle is leased, with the active OnStar system, that system
Important: EDR data is recorded may also record data in crash or
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or near crash‐like situations. The
crash situation occurs; no data is OnStar Terms and Conditions
recorded by the EDR under normal similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through provides information on data
driving conditions and no personal collection and use and is available
data (e.g., name, gender, age, the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM in the OnStar glove box kit,
and crash location) is recorded. at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
However, other parties, such collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
as law enforcement, could combine
may be made available to others for pressing the Q button and
the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data research purposes, where a need is speaking to an advisor.
routinely acquired during a shown and the data is not tied to a
crash investigation. specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
To read data recorded by an EDR,

special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Navigation System Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

If the vehicle has a navigation Identification (RFID) Statement
system, use of the system may RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
result in the storage of destinations, vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
addresses, telephone numbers, and pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
other trip information. Refer to the system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
navigation system operating manual connection with conveniences rules and with Industry Canada
for information on stored data and such as key fobs for remote door Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
for deletion instructions. locking/unlocking and starting, and Operation is subject to the following
in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions:
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause
personal information or link with any interference.
other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any
personal information. interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont.) Antilock Brake

What Will You See After System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Accessories and
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
When Should an Airbag Appearance Care
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113
Adaptive Forward
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-32 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Airbags Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Add-On Electrical
Adding Equipment to the Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Adjustments
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-18 CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Audio System
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41 Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Air Filter, Passenger
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . . .7-29
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Alarm System Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Airbag System
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 9-33, 10-31 Automatic
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
How Does an Airbag
Antenna Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Multi-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-26
Passenger Sensing
Anti-Theft Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
What Makes an Airbag
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-43 Shift Lock Control
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Carbon Monoxide

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5, 10-38 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Exterior Lighting Battery
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
High Intensity Discharge Cargo
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
License Plate Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Voltage and Charging
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38, 10-39 Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 Cautions, Danger, and
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-34
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 C CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-22
California Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-48 Central Door Unlock System . . . 2-17
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Perchlorate Materials Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Charging
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34, 9-35
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Check
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iv Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Capacities and Ignition
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-33
INDEX i-3
Child Restraints Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 9-39 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Infants and Young Compressor Kit, Tire Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4, 13-5
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47 Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89 Text Telephone (TTY)
Lower Anchors and Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-53 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Customer Information
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Service Publications
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59, 3-61 Coolant Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-14
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Customer Satisfaction
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Engine Temperature Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Cleaning Engine Temperature D
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-11
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Danger, Warnings, and
Climate Control Systems Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Courtesy Transportation Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-16
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Daytime Running
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Covers Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-11 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . .10-106 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41 Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
i-4 INDEX
Door Driving for Better Fuel Engine

Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Central Door Unlocking Dual Automatic Climate Check and Service Engine
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-15 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 E Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Drive Systems Easy Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Coolant Temperature
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-33, 10-31 Electrical Equipment, Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Driver Information Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59 Coolant Temperature
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Electrical System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Driving Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Characteristics and Compartment Cooling System Messages . . .5-35
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53 Fuse Block . . . . . 10-41, 10-45, Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7, 9-39 10-48, 10-52 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Fuses and Circuit Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Overheated Protection
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8 Rear Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Compartment Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Fuse Block . . . . . 10-55, 10-57, Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 10-59, 10-61 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-26
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-19
INDEX i-5
Engine Oil Fluid Fuel Economy

Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-14 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Fuses
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Engine
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Compartment
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-16 Fog Lamps Fuse Block . . . . . 10-41, 10-45,
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 6-5, 10-38 10-48, 10-52
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Fuses and Circuit
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Front Fog Lamps Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Rear
Exterior Lighting Battery Front Seats Compartment
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Fuse Block . . . . . 10-55, 10-57,
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 10-59, 10-61
F Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .3-12
Features Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 G
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49 Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Filter Filling a Portable Fuel Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52 Gasoline
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-49 Gauges
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-48 Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Engine Coolant
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-120 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Requirements, California . . . . .9-48 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-15
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
i-6 INDEX
Gauges (cont.) Headlamps Heater

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Adaptive Forward Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-73
Warning Lights and Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8
General Information Daytime Running Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 How to Wear Safety Belts
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 High Intensity Discharge Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
GM Mobility Reimbursement High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 I
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-26 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-17, 9-18
H Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Ignition Transmission Lock
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Heated Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . . . . 7-29 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4 Heated and Ventilated Front Infants and Young Children,
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
INDEX i-7
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Lamps (cont.) Lights

Instrument Panel Exterior Lighting Battery Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Antilock Brake System
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii License Plate . . . . . . . . 10-38, 10-39 (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-19 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-22
J On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-106 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Engine Coolant
LATCH System Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-24
K Replacing Parts After a Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-37 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Keyless Entry Latch, Lower Anchors and Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Remote (RKE) System . . . 2-5, 2-7 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Liftgate High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16
L Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-66 Lighting Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Adaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Traction Control System
Lamps Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Exterior Lamps Off Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
i-8 INDEX
Locks Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-19 Messages (cont.)

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Central Door Unlocking Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Mirrors
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-15 Messages Automatic Dimming
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-43 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Battery Voltage and Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Lower Anchors and Tethers Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Monitor System, Tire
for Children (LATCH Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-35 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 N
M Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Navigation
Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Vehicle Data Recording
Maintenance Object Detection System . . . . .5-40 and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Net
Maintenance Schedule Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Recommended Fluids and Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44 Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
INDEX i-9
O Outlets Passenger Compartment Air

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Object Detection System
Overheated Engine Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-37
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Protection Perchlorate Materials
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Personalization
Off-Road
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Oil P Phone
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Park Power
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Engine Oil Pressure
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34, 9-35 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-22
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-44
Brake and P (Park) Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-33
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-25 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Operation, Infotainment
Passenger Airbag Status Pregnancy, Using Safety
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
i-10 INDEX
Privacy Rearview Mirrors Replacing Safety Belt

Radio Frequency Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-29 System Parts After a
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Program Recommended Fluids and Reporting Safety Defects
Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-10 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15
Proposition 65 Warning, Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Records U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Restraints
R Recreational Vehicle Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
Radio Frequency Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111 Retained Accessory
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-18 Reimbursement Program, Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Ride Control Systems
Radios Remote Keyless Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-40
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Entry (RKE) Magnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-5, 2-7 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Roads
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Replacement Parts Roadside Service . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9
Rear Axle Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44 Roof
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, 2-34
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-44 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-44 Replacing LATCH System Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
INDEX i-11
S Seats (cont.) Shift Lock Control Function

Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Check, Automatic
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-7 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-5 Shifting
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
How to Wear Safety Belts
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Securing Child Signals, Turn and
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59, 3-61 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Security Spare Tire
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-29
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-28
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 Specifications and
Safety Defects Reporting
Service Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15
Accessories and Speed Limiter, Engine . . . . . . . . . 5-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-11 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Maintenance, General Starting the Engine . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-19
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Publications Ordering Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Seats
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Easy Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Heated and Ventilated
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
i-12 INDEX
Storage Areas T Tires (cont.)

Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Cargo Management System . . . 4-3 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Theft-Deterrent
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-74
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26, 2-27
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Sealant and
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . 3-8
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Tires
Sealant and Compressor Kit,
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Compressor Kit . . . . . .10-96, 10-97 Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96, 10-97
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Terminology and
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, 2-34 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v Uniform Tire Quality
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
System Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-75
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-85
Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
INDEX i-13
Towing U Vehicle Care

Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-53 Storing the Tire
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-43
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58 Sealant and
Uniform Tire Quality
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-52 Compressor Kit . . . . 10-96, 10-97
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . 10-111 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-54
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57, 9-58 Vehicle Identification
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-57
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111 Service Parts Identification
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Traction Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-38 Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Control System (TCS)/ Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-40 V W
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57, 9-58 Vehicle
Warning
Transmission Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Warning Lights, Gauges,
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Identification
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Transportation Program, Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-46
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Washer, Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Turn and Lane-Change Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111
i-14 INDEX
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-51
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-34
Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

2011 CTS-V Owner Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

2011 CTS-V Owner Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

2011 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2011 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M

owner manual. Please refer to the

iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and Using this Manual

Symbols Vehicle Symbol Chart

Sensing System for

CTS Shown, CTS‐V Similar

V. Heated and Ventilated Front Initial Drive Starting the Engine

Remote Keyless Entry Press and hold V to open the

Keyless Access For keyless access vehicles, press

Liftgate Manual Operation of the Power Windows

To adjust the seat: See Lumbar Adjustment on

Safety Belts Sensing System for seat‐mounted side impact airbags

Refer to the following sections for

Mirror Adjustment 3. Adjust each outside mirror so Steering Wheel

Power Tilt Wheel Interior Lighting Exterior Lighting

; : Turns on the parking lamps, & : For a delayed wiping cycle.

wipers run for a few cycles to

C. Power I. Air Conditioning

Transmission Vehicle Features Storing a Favorite Station

Setting the Clock Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices

Cruise Control [ : Press to cancel cruise control Driver Information

Storage Compartments Power Outlets Universal Remote System

Sunroof Express Open/Express Close: Performance and

Roadside Service and OnStar OnStar® How OnStar Service Works

See Radio Frequency Statement on Your Responsibility

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors and Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks { WARNING

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

Key Access Keyless Access Keyless Access

2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

This vehicle may have the Key Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

3. Insert the new battery, positive Keyless Unlocking Keyless Locking

2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

Door Locks (Sedan) WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15

Door Locks (Coupe) WARNING (Continued)

2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

From the inside, use the power door

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17

Central Door Unlocking Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks

2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Lockout Protection Safety Locks (Sedan and To set the locks:

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19

Doors Trunk Lock Release

2-20 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-21

Emergency Trunk Release There is a glow-in-the-dark

2-22 Keys, Doors and Windows

into overhead obstructions such as

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-23